The CENTRE for EDUCATION

in MATHEMATICS and COMPUTING

cemc.uwaterloo.ca

2022 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Wednesday, February 23, 2022

(in North America and South America)

Thursday, February 24, 2022

(outside of North America and South America)

Solutions

©2021 University of Waterloo

2022 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2

1. Evaluating, 2 + (0 × 22 ) = 2 + 0 = 2.
Answer: (B)

2. The ones digit of 119 is not even, so 119 is not a multiple of 2.

The ones digit of 119 is not 0 or 5, so 119 is not a multiple of 5.
Since 120 = 3 × 40, then 119 is 1 less than a multiple of 3 so is not itself a multiple of 3.
Since 110 = 11 × 10 and 121 = 11 × 11, then 119 is between two consecutive multiples of 11,
so is not itself a multiple of 11.
Finally, 119 ÷ 7 = 17, so 119 is a multiple of 7.
Answer: (D)

3 5
3. The fractions 10 and 23 are each less than 12 (which is choice (E)) so cannot be the greatest
among the choices. (Note that 12 = 10 5
= 11.5
23
which we can use to compare the given fractions
1
to 2 .)
The fractions 47 and 32 are each greater than 21 , so 12 cannot be the greatest among the choices.
This means that the answer must be either 47 or 32 .
Using a common denominator of 3 × 7 = 21, we re-write these fractions as 47 = 21 12
and 23 = 14
21
which shows that 32 has the gretest value among the five choices.
(Alternatively, we could have converted the fractions into decimals and used their decimal
approximations to compare their sizes.)
Answer: (D)

4. The sequence consists of a pattern of 5 shapes that are repeated.

The first repetitions of this pattern end on the 5th, 10th, 15th, 20th, and 25th shapes.
This means that the 22nd shape is the 2nd shape after the 20th shape, and so is the 2nd shape
in the pattern.
Thus, the 22nd shape is .
Answer: (A)

5. The given sum includes 5 terms each equal to (5 × 5).

Thus, the given sum is equal to 5 × (5 × 5) which equals 5 × 25 or 125.
Answer: (E)

6. Yihana is walking uphill exactly when the graph is increasing (that is, when the slope of the
segment of the graph is positive).
This is between 0 and 3 minutes and between 8 and 10 minutes, which correspond to lengths
of time of 3 minutes and 2 minutes in these two cases, for a total of 5 minutes.
Answer: (A)

7. Solution 1
Since A, B, C, D, E, and F are equally spaced around the circle, moving from one point to
the next corresponds to moving 16 of the way around the circle.
Therefore, moving from A to C corresponds to moving 26 (or 31 ) of the way around the circle.
Since moving around the whole circle corresponds to moving through 360◦ , then moving 13 of
the way around the circle corresponds to moving through 13 × 360◦ = 120◦ .
Thus, ∠AOC = 120◦ .
2022 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

Solution 2
We join A, B, C, D, E, and F to O.

A B

O
F C

E D

Since A, B, C, D, E, and F are equally spaced around the circle, the angles made at the centre
by consecutive points are equal. That is,

∠AOB = ∠BOC = ∠COD = ∠DOE = ∠EOF = ∠F OA

Since these 6 angles form a complete circle, the sum of their measures is 360◦ .
Therefore,

∠AOB = ∠BOC = ∠COD = ∠DOE = ∠EOF = ∠F OA = 1

6
× 360◦ = 60◦

This means that ∠AOC = ∠AOB + ∠BOC = 60◦ + 60◦ = 120◦ .

Answer: (D)

8. Since the rectangle has positive integer side lengths and an area of 24, its length and width
must be a positive divisor pair of 24.
Therefore, the length and width must be 24 and 1, or 12 and 2, or 8 and 3, or 6 and 4.
Since the perimeter of a rectangle equals 2 times the sum of the length and width, the possible
perimeters are

2(24 + 1) = 50 2(12 + 2) = 28 2(8 + 3) = 22 2(6 + 4) = 20

These all appear as choices, which means that the perimeter of the rectangle cannot be 36,
which is (E).
Answer: (E)

3+b
9. Using the definition, 3∇b = .
3−b
Assuming b 6= 3, the following equations are equivalent:

3∇b = −4
3+b
= −4
3−b
3 + b = −4(3 − b)
3 + b = −12 + 4b
15 = 3b

and so b = 5.
Answer: (A)
2022 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

10. Solution 1
20
Since x is 20% of y, then x = 100
y = 15 y.
Since x is 50% of z, then x = 21 z.
Therefore, 15 y = 21 z which gives 25 y = z.
40
Thus, z = 100 y and so z is 40% of y.

Solution 2
Since x is 20% of y, then x = 0.2y.
Since x is 50% of z, then x = 0.5z.
Therefore, 0.2y = 0.5z which gives 0.4y = z.
Thus, z = 0.4y and so z is 40% of y.
Answer: (D)

11. The store sells 250 g of jellybeans for $7.50, which is 750 cents.
Therefore, 1 g of jellybeans costs 750 ÷ 250 = 3 cents.
This means that $1.80, which is 180 cents, will buy 180 ÷ 3 = 60 g of jellybeans.
Answer: (C)
Q Q
12. Starting with P and flipping across QR results in P .
R R
P
Now flipping across P R results in R , which is the resulting position that Paola sees.
Q
Answer: (E)
√
13. Since 2 × 2 × 2 = 8, a cube with edge length 2 has volume 8. (We note also that 3 8 = 2.)
Therefore, each of the cubes with volume 8 have a height of 2.
This means that the larger cube has a height of 2 + 2 = 4, which means that its volume is
43 = 4 × 4 × 4 = 64.
Answer: (E)

14. Since 100 000 does not include the block of digits 178, each integer between 10 000 and 100 000
that includes the block of digits 178 has five digits.
Such an integer can be of the form 17 8xy or of the form x1 78y or of the form xy 178 for some
digits x and y.
The leading digit of a five-digit integer has 9 possible values (any digit from 1 to 9, inclusive)
while a later digit in a five-digit integer has 10 possible vlaues (0 or any digit from 1 to 9,
inclusive).
This means that
• there are 100 integers of the form 17 8xy (10 choices for each of x and y, and 10×10 = 100),
• there are 90 integers of the form x1 78y (9 choices for x and 10 choices for y, and
9 × 10 = 90), and
• there are 90 integers of the form xy 178 (9 choices for x and 10 choices for y, and
9 × 10 = 90).
In total, there are thus 100 + 90 + 90 = 280 integers between 10 000 and 100 000 that include
the block of digits 178.
Answer: (A)
2022 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

15. Since a + 5 = b, then a = b − 5.

Since a = b − 5 and c = 5 + b and b + c = a, then

b + (5 + b) = b − 5
2b + 5 = b − 5
b = −10

(If b = −10, then a = b − 5 = −15 and c = 5 + b = −5 and b + c = (−10) + (−5) = (−15) = a,

as required.)
Answer: (C)

16. Extend P Q and T S to meet at point X.

X
Q 8 S
10 10
R
P T

Since quadrilateral QRSX has three right angles (at Q, R and S), it must have a fourth right
angle at X.
Thus, QRSX is a rectangle, which means that XS = QR and QX = RS.
The perimeter of P QRST U is

P Q + QR + RS + ST + T U + U P = P Q + XS + QX + ST + T U + U P
= (P Q + QX) + (XS + ST ) + T U + U P
= P X + XT + T U + U P

which is the perimeter of quadrilateral of P XT U .

But quadrilateral P XT U has four right angles, and so is a rectangle.
Also, P U = U T , so P XT U is a square, and so the perimeter of P XT U equals

4 × P X = 4 × (P Q + QX) = 4 × (10 + QX) = 40 + 4 × QX

Finally, QX = P X − P Q = P X − 10 = XT − 10 = XT − ST = XS, which means that 4QXS

is isosceles as well as being right-angled at X.
2 2
By the Pythagorean Theorem, √ QX√+ XS = √ QS 2 and
√ so 2 ×
2 2 2
√ QX = 8 or QX = 32.
Since QX > 0, then QX = 32 = 16 × 2 = √16 × 2 = 4√ 2.
Thus, the perimeter of P QRST U √ is 40 + 4 × 4 2 = 40 + 16 2 ≈ 62.6.
(We could have left this as 40 + 4 32 ≈ 62.6.)
Of the given choices, this is closest to 63.
Answer: (C)
2022 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

17. Zebadiah must remove at least 3 shirts.

If he removes 3 shirts, he might remove 2 red shirts and 1 blue shirt.
If he removes 4 shirts, he might remove 2 red shirts and 2 blue shirts.
Therefore, if he removes fewer than 5 shirts, it is not guaranteed that he removes either 3 of
the same colour or 3 of different colours.
Suppose that he removes 5 shirts.
If 3 are of the same colour, the requirements are satisfied.
If no 3 of the 5 shirts are of the same colour, then at most 2 are of each colour. This means
that he must remove shirts of 3 colours, since if he only removed shirts of 2 colours, he would
remove at most 2 + 2 = 4 shirts.
In other words, if he removes 5 shirts, it is guaranteed that there are either 3 of the same
colours or shirts of all 3 colours.
Thus, the minimum number is 5.
Answer: (D)
18. At the beginning of the first day, the box contains 1 black ball and 1 gold ball.
At the end of the first day, 2 black balls and 1 gold ball are added, so the box contains 3 black
balls and 2 gold balls.
At the end of the second day, 2 × 2 = 4 black balls and 2 × 1 = 2 gold balls are added, so the
box contains 7 black balls and 4 gold balls.
Continuing in this way, we find the following numbers of balls:
End of Day # Black Balls Gold Balls
2 7 4
3 7 + 4 × 2 = 15 4+4=8
4 15 + 8 × 2 = 31 8 + 8 = 16
5 31 + 16 × 2 = 63 16 + 16 = 32
6 63 + 32 × 2 = 127 32 + 32 = 64
7 127 + 64 × 2 = 255 64 + 64 = 128
At the end of the 7th day, there are thus 255 + 128 = 383 balls in the box.
Answer: (E)
19. The line with equation y = 2x − 6 has y-intercept −6.
Also, the x-intercept of y = 2x − 6 occurs when y = 0, which gives 0 = 2x − 6 or 2x = 6 which
gives x = 3.
Therefore, the triangle bounded by the x-axis, the y-axis, and the line with equation y = 2x − 6
has base of length 3 and height of length 6, and so has area 21 × 3 × 6 = 9.
We want the area of the triangle bounded by the x-axis, the vertical line with equation x = d,
and the line with equation y = 2x − 6 to be 4 times this area, or 36.
This means that x = d is to the right of the point (3, 0), because the new area is larger. In
other words, d > 3.
y

x
3
–6 x=d
2022 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

The base of this triangle has length d − 3, and its height is 2d − 6, since the height is measured
along the vertical line with equation x = d.
Thus, we want 21 (d − 3)(2d − 6) = 36 or (d − 3)(d − 3) = 36 which means (d − 3)2 = 36.
Since d − 3 > 0, then d − 3 = 6 which gives d = 9.
Alternatively, we could note that if similar
√ triangles have areas in the ratio 4 : 1 then their
corresponding lengths are in the ratio 4 : 1 or 2 : 1.
Since the two triangles in question are similar (both are right-angled and they have equal angles
at the point (3, 0)), the larger triangle has base of length 2 × 3 = 6 and so d = 3 + 6 = 9.
Answer: (A)

20. Since 3m3 is a multiple of 3, then 5n5 is a multiple of 3.

Since 5 is not a multiple of 3 and 3 is a prime number, then n5 is a multiple of 3.
Since n5 is a multiple of 3 and 3 is a prime number, then n is a multiple of 3, which means that
5n5 includes at least 5 factors of 3.
Since 5n5 includes at least 5 factors of 3, then 3m3 includes at least 5 factors of 3, which means
that m3 is a multiple of 3, which means that m is a multiple of 3.
Using a similar analysis, both m and n must be multiples of 5.
Therefore, we can write m = 3a 5b s for some positive integers a, b and s and we can write
n = 3c 5d t for some positive integers c, d and t, where neither s nor t is a multiple of 3 or 5. (In
other words, we have grouped all of the factors of 3 and 5 in each of m and n.)
From the given equation,

3m3 = 5n5
3(3a 5b s)3 = 5(3c 5d t)5
3 × 33a 53b s3 = 5 × 35c 55d t5
33a+1 53b s3 = 35c 55d+1 t5

Since s and t are not multiples of 3 or 5, we must have 33a+1 = 35c and 53b = 55d+1 and s3 = t5 .
Since s and t are positive and m and n are to be as small as possible, we can set s = t = 1,
which satisfy s3 = t5 .
Since 33a+1 = 35c and 53b = 55d+1 , then 3a + 1 = 5c and 3b = 5d + 1.
Since m and n are to be as small as possible, we want to find the smallest positive integers
a, b, c, d for which 3a + 1 = 5c and 3b = 5d + 1.
Neither a = 1 nor a = 2 gives a value for 3a + 1 that is a multiple of 5, but a = 3 gives c = 2.
Similarly, b = 1 does not give a value of 3b that equals 5d + 1 for any positive integer d, but
b = 2 gives d = 1.
Therefore, the smallest possible values of m and n are m = 33 52 = 675 and n = 32 51 = 45,
which gives m + n = 720.
(We can verify by substitution that m = 675 and n = 45 satisfy the equation 3m3 = 5n5 .)
Answer: (C)
2022 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

21. Since 20x + 11y = 881, then 20x = 881 − 11y and 11y = 881 − 20x.
Since x is an integer, then 20x is a multiple of 10 and so the units digit of 20x is 0 which means
that the units digit of 881 − 20x is 1, and so the units digit of 11y is 1.
Since the units digit of 11y is 1, then the units digit of y is 1.
Since 20x is positive, then 11y = 881 − 20x is smaller than 881, which means that 11y < 881
and so y < 881
11
≈ 80.1.
Thus, the possible values of y are 1, 11, 21, 31, 41, 51, 61, 71.
We check each of these:

y 11y = 881 − 20x 20x x

1 11 870 Not an integer
11 121 760 38
21 231 650 Not an integer
31 341 540 27
41 451 430 Not an integer
51 561 320 16
61 671 210 Not an integer
71 781 100 5

Therefore, the sum of the smallest and largest of the permissible values of y is 11 + 71 = 82.
Answer: 82

22. Since the shaded regions are equal, then when the unshaded sector in the small circle is shaded,
the area of the now fully shaded sector of the larger circle must be equal to the area of the
smaller circle.
P P

Q Q

O O

The smaller circle has radius 1 and so has area π × 12 = π.

The larger circle has radius 3 and so has area π × 32 = 9π.
This means that the area of the shaded sector in the larger circle has area π, which means that
it must be 19 of the larger circle.
This means that ∠P OQ must be 19 of a complete circle, and so ∠P OQ = 19 × 360◦ = 40◦ .
Thus, x = 40.
Answer: 40
2022 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

23. Suppose that Andreas, Boyu, Callista, and Diane choose the numbers a, b, c, and d, respectively.
There are 9 choices for each of a, b, c, and d, so the total number of quadruples (a, b, c, d) of
choices is 94 = 6561.
Among the 9 choices, 5 are odd (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) and 4 are even (2, 4, 6, 8).
If there are N quadruples (a, b, c, d) with a + b + c + d even (that is, with the sum of their
N
choices even), then the probability that the sum of their four integers is even is , which is
6561
in the desired form.
Therefore, we count the number of quadruples (a, b, c, d) with a + b + c + d even.
Among the four integer a, b, c, d, either 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 of these integers are even, with the
remaining integers odd.
If 0 of a, b, c, d are even and 4 are odd, their sum is even.
If 1 of a, b, c, d is even and 3 are odd, their sum is odd.
If 2 of a, b, c, d are even and 2 are odd, their sum is even.
If 3 of a, b, c, d are even and 1 is odd, their sum is odd.
If 4 of a, b, c, d are even and 0 are odd, their sum is even.
Therefore, we need to count the number of quadruples (a, b, c, d) with 0, 2 or 4 even parts.
If 0 are even and 4 are odd, there are 5 choices for each of the parts, and so there are 54 = 625
such quadruples.
If 4 are even and 0 are odd, there are 4 choices for each of the parts, and so there are 44 = 256
such quadruples.
If 2 are even and 2 are odd, there are 4 choices for each of the even parts and 5 choices for
each of the odd parts, and 6 pairs of locations for the even integers (ab, ac, ad, bc, bd, cd) with
the odd integers put in the remaining two locations after the locations of the even integers are
chosen. Thus, there are 42 · 52 · 6 = 2400 such quadruples.
In total, this means that there are 625 + 256 + 2400 = 3281 quadruples and so N = 3281.
The sum of the squares of the digits of N is equal to 32 + 22 + 82 + 12 = 9 + 4 + 64 + 1 = 78.
Answer: 78

24. Let O be the vertex of the cube farthest away from the table.
Let A, B and C be the vertices of the cube connected to O with edges.
Since the cube has edge length 8, then OA = OB = OC = 8.
Note that ∠AOB = ∠AOC = ∠BOC = 90◦ , which means that each of √ 4AOB, 4AOC
√ and
4BOC is a right-angled
√ isosceles triangle, which means that AB = 2AO = 8 2, and so
AB = AC = BC = 8 2.
Let P , Q and R be the vertices that complete the square faces P AOB, QAOC and RBOC.
From directly above, the cube looks like this:

Q P
O

C B

R
When the sun is directly overhead, the shadow of the cube will look exactly like the area of
the “flat” hexagon AP BRCQ. In mathematical terms, we are determining the area of what is
called a projection.
2022 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10

To find the area of this figure, we need to know some lengths, but we have to be careful because
not all of the edges in the edges in the diagram above are “flat”.
We do know that points √ A, B and C are in the same horizontal plane, and we also know that
AB = AC = BC = 8 2. This means that these are true lengths in that the points A, B and
C are this distance apart.
Note that flat quadrilateral P AOB is divided into two regions of equal area by AB. Similarly,
QAOC is divided into two regions of equal area by AC, and RBOC is divided into two regions
of equal area by BC.
In other words, the area of 4ABC is half of the area of hexagon AP BRCQ, so to find the area
of AP BRCQ, we double the area of 4ABC. √
So we need to calculate the area of equilateral 4ABC √which has side length 8 2.
Let M be the midpoint of BC. Thus, BM = CM = 4 2.

C M B

Since 4ABC is equilateral, then AM is perpendicular to BC.

By the Pythagorean Theorem in 4AM C,
√ q √ √ √ √
AM = AC − M C = (8 2)2 − (4 2)2 = 128 − 32 = 96
2 2

Therefore, the area of 4ABC is

1 1
√ √ √ √ √ √
2
· CB · AM = · 8 2 · 96 = 4 192 = 4 64 · 3 = 4 · 8 3 = 32 3
2
√
This means that the area of√ the hexagonal shadow is 64 3.
Since this is in the form a b where a and b are positive integers and b is not divisible by the
square of an integer larger than 1, then a = 64 and b = 3 and so a + b = 67.
Answer: 67

25. We begin by tracing what happens when T = 337.

We start with tokens labelled 1, 2, 3, . . . , 335, 336, 337 arranged around a circle.
We remove the first token (1), move 2 tokens along and remove that token (3), move 2 tokens
along and remove that token (5), and continue around the circle until we remove tokens 335
and 337.
This leaves tokens 2, 4, 6, . . . , 332, 334, 336. These tokens differ by 2.
On the second pass, we start with tokens labelled 2, 4, 6, . . . , 332, 334, 336, which differ by 2.
Because the last token was removed on the first pass (337), the first token is not removed on
the second pass, which means that we remove every other token starting with 4.
This means that the remaining tokens differ by 4, and are 2, 6, 10, . . . , 326, 330, 334.
On the third pass, we start with 2, 6, 10, . . . , 326, 330, 334, which differ by 4.
Because the last token (336) was removed on the previous pass, we remove every other token
starting with 6.
The remaining tokens differ by 8 and are 2, 10, 18, . . . , 314, 322, 330.
2022 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11

On the fourth pass, we start with 2, 10, 18, . . . , 314, 322, 330, which differ by 8.
Because the last token (334) was removed on the previous pass, we remove every other token
starting with 10.
The remaining tokens differ by 16 and are 2, 18, 34, . . . , 290, 306, 322.
On the fifth pass, we start with 2, 18, 34, . . . , 290, 306, 322, which differ by 16.
Because the last token (330) was removed on the previous pass, we remove every other token
starting with 18.
The remaining tokens differ by 32 and are 2, 34, 66, 98, 130, 162, 194, 226, 258, 290, 322.
On the sixth pass, we start with 2, 34, 66, 98, 130, 162, 194, 226, 258, 290, 322, which differ by 32.
Because the second last token (306) was removed on the previous pass, we remove ever other
token starting with 2.
This leaves 34, 98, 162, 226, 290, which differ by 64.
On the seventh pass, we remove starting with the second token, which leaves 34, 162, 290, which
differ by 128.
On the eighth pass, we remove starting with the first token, which leaves 162.
This tells us that the smallest possible value of T is at least 162 and at most 337.
Next, we will show that T = 209 also gives a final token of 162 by working through the various
passes. (This is a place where how we discover the answer is more than likely different than
how we justify the answer.)
Before first pass:
1, 2, 3, . . . , 207, 208, 209
After first pass (removing every other token starting with 1):

2, 4, 6, . . . , 204, 206, 208

After second pass (removing every other token starting with 4):

2, 6, 10, . . . , 198, 202, 206

After third pass (removing every other token starting with 6):

2, 10, 18, . . . , 186, 194, 202

After fourth pass (removing every other token starting with 10):

2, 18, 34, . . . , 162, 178, 194

After fifth pass (removing every other token starting with 18):

2, 34, 66, 98, 130, 162, 194

After sixth pass (removing every other token starting with 2):

34, 98, 162

After seventh pass (removing 98):

34, 162
This leaves 162 after the eighth pass, since 34 will be removed.
Therefore, when T = 209 and when T = 337, the final token is 162.
2022 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 12

Finally, we show that if the final token starting with T tokens is 162, then T ≥ 209, which will
tell us that the smallest value of T is 209.
Suppose that T ≤ 209 and that the token remaining after the final pass is 162.
Before each pass, the remaining tokens differ by a power of 2, since we start by removing every
other token from a list that differs by 1, then every other token from a list that differs by 2,
and so on.
The smallest powers of 2 are 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256.
Since 162 is left after the last pass (this will turn out to be the eighth pass), the remaining
tokens must have differed by 128 before the eighth pass, and thus were 34, 162. (Since T ≤ 209,
then there could not be a token numbered 162 + 128 = 290.) Also, if the tokens differed by
64 before the eighth pass, there would have been tokens labelled 34 and 98 that were both
removed.
Thus, before the eighth pass, the tokens were 34, 162 and 34 was removed.
Before the seventh pass, the tokens differed by 64.
Thus, these were 34, 98, 162. We note that the last token was not removed on this pass, and
so the first token is removed on the eighth pass, as expected.
Also, there cannot be a token numbered 162 + 64 = 226, since T ≤ 209.
Before the sixth pass, the tokens differed by 32.
Thus, these were 2, 34, 66, 98, 130, 162, 194. The last token cannot have been 162 since the last
token must be removed on this pass so that the second token (98) is removed on the seventh
pass. Thus, 162 + 32 = 194 must be the last token here. (Note that 226 was already rejected
earlier.)
Before the fifth pass, the tokens differed by 16.
Since the first token (2) is removed on the sixth pass, the last token is not removed on the fifth
pass.
This means that the tokens before this pass were

2, 18, 34, 50, 66, 82, 98, 114, 130, 146, 162, 178, 194

On this pass, 178 is the last token removed. (Note that 194 + 16 = 210 is too large.)
Before the fourth pass, the tokens differed by 8.
Since the second token (18) is removed on the fifth pass, the last token is removed on the fourth
pass.
This means that the tokens before this pass were

2, 10, 18, . . . , 162, 170, 178, 186, 194, 202

The token 202 must be included since 194 remains for the fifth pass. (Note that 202 + 8 = 210
is too large.)
Before the third pass, the tokens differed by 4.
Since the second token (10) is removed on the fourth pass, the last token is removed on the
third pass.
This means that the tokens before this pass were

2, 6, 10, 14, 18, . . . , 186, 190, 194, 198, 202, 206

The token 206 must be included since 202 remains for the fourth pass. (Note that 206+4 = 210
is too large.)
2022 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 13

Before the second pass, the tokens differed by 2.

Since the second token (6) is removed on the third pass, the last token is removed on the second
pass.
This means that the tokens before this pass were

2, 4, 6, 8, . . . , 198, 200, 202, 204, 206, 208

The token 208 must be included since 206 remains for the third pass. (Note that 208 + 2 = 210
is too large.)
Before the first pass, the tokens differed by 1.
Since the second token (4) is removed on the second pass, the last token is removed on the first
pass.
This means that the tokens before this pass were

1, 2, 3, 4, . . . , 204, 205, 206, 207, 208, 209

The token 209 must be included since 208 remains for the second pass. (Note that 209+1 = 210
is too large.)
Therefore, we must have at least 209 tokens for the final token to be 162, and so the smallest
possible value of T is 209, whose rightmost two digits are 09.
Answer: 09
 The CENTRE for EDUCATION
in MATHEMATICS and COMPUTING
cemc.uwaterloo.ca

2021 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Tuesday, February 23, 2021

(in North America and South America)

Wednesday, February 24, 2021

(outside of North America and South America)

Solutions

©2020 University of Waterloo

2021 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2
2+4 6
1. Evaluating, = = 2.
1+2 3
Answer: (C)

2. Since 542 × 3 = 1626, the ones digit of the result is 6.

Note that the ones digit of a product only depends on the ones digits of the numbers being
multiplied, so we could in fact multiply 2 × 3 and look at the ones digit of this product.
Answer: (E)

3. The top, left and bottom unit squares each contribute 3 sides of length 1 to the perimeter.
The remaining square contributes 1 side of length 1 to the perimeter.
Therefore, the perimeter is 3 × 3 + 1 × 1 = 10.
Alternatively, the perimeter includes 3 vertical right sides, 3 vertical left sides, 2 horizontal top
sides, and 2 horizontal bottom sides, which means that the perimeter is 3 + 3 + 2 + 2 = 10.
Answer: (A)

4. If 3x + 4 = x + 2, then 3x − x = 2 − 4 and so 2x = −2, which gives x = −1.

Answer: (D)

5. Solution 1
1
10% of 500 is 10 or 0.1 of 500, which equals 50.
100% of 500 is 500.
Thus, 110% of 500 equals 500 + 50, which equals 550.
Solution 2
110
110% of 500 is equal to × 500 = 110 × 5 = 550.
100
Answer: (E)

6. Since Eugene swam three times and had an average swim time of 34 minutes, he swam for
3 × 34 = 102 minutes in total.
Since he swam for 30 minutes and 45 minutes on Monday and Tuesday, then on Sunday, he
swam for 102 − 30 − 45 = 27 minutes.
Answer: (C)

7. If x = 1, then x2 = 1 and x3 = 1 and so x3 = x2 .

If x > 1, then x3 equals x times x2 ; since x > 1, then x times x2 is greater than x2 and so
x3 > x2 .
Therefore, if x is positive with x3 < x2 , we must have 0 < x < 1. We note that if 0 < x < 1,
then both x, x2 and x3 are all positive, and x3 = x2 × x < x2 × 1 = x2 .
Of the given choices, only x = 43 satisfies 0 < x < 1, and so the answer is (B).
We can verify by direct calculation that this is the only correct answer from the given choices.
Answer: (B)

8. We draw an unshaded dot to represent the location of the dot when it is on the other side of
the sheet of paper being shown. Therefore, the dot moves as follows:

Answer: (E)
2021 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

9. Suppose that Janice is x years old now.

Two years ago, Janice was x − 2 years old.
In 12 years, Janice will be x + 12 years old.
From the given information x + 12 = 8(x − 2) and so x + 12 = 8x − 16 which gives 7x = 28
and so x = 4.
Checking, if Janice is 4 years old now, then 2 years ago, she was 2 years old and in 12 years
she will be 16 years old; since 16 = 2 × 8, this is correct.
Answer: (A)

10. Join S to T and R to T .

P Q

S R

Since P QRS is a square, ∠SP Q = 90◦ .

Since 4P T Q is equilateral, ∠T P Q = 60◦ .
Therefore, ∠SP T = ∠SP Q + ∠T P Q = 90◦ + 60◦ .
Since P QRS is a square, SP = P Q.
Since 4P T Q is equilateral, T P = P Q.
Since SP = P Q and T P = P Q, then SP = T P which means that 4SP T is isosceles.
Thus, ∠P T S = 21 (180◦ − ∠SP T ) = 12 (180◦ − 150◦ ) = 15◦ .
Using a similar argument, we can show that ∠QT R = 15◦ .
This means that ∠ST R = ∠P T Q − ∠P T S − ∠QT R = 60◦ − 15◦ − 15◦ = 30◦ .
Answer: (D)

11. Solution 1
The points A, B, C, and E can each be reached from point P by moving 3 units in either the
x- or y-direction and 1 unit in the other direction. √ √
This means that the distance from P to each of these points is 32 + 12 = 10, using the
Pythagorean Theorem.
y
8

6
B C
D
4 A
2 E
P
x
2 4 6 8

Therefore, the distance from P to D must be the distance that is different.

2021 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

Solution 2
The coordinates of the 6 points are A(2, 3), B(4, 5), C(6, 5), D(7, 4), E(8, 1), P (5, 2).
Therefore, the distances from P to each of the five other points are
p p √
P A = (5 − 2)2 + (2 − 3)2 = 32 + (−1)2 = 10
p p √
P B = (5 − 4)2 + (2 − 5)2 = 12 + (−3)2 = 10
p p √
P C = (5 − 6)2 + (2 − 5)2 = (−1)2 + (−3)2 = 10
p p √
P D = (5 − 7)2 + (2 − 4)2 = (−2)2 + (−2)2 = 8
p p √
P E = (5 − 8)2 + (2 − 1)2 = (−3)2 + 12 = 10

This tells us that the distance from P to D is the one distance that is different.
Answer: (D)

12. Since x = 2 and y = x2 − 5, then y = 22 − 5 = 4 − 5 = −1.

Since y = −1 and z = y 2 − 5, then z = (−1)2 − 5 = 1 − 5 = −4.
Answer: (E)

13. Since P QR forms a straight angle, then

x◦ + y ◦ + x◦ + y ◦ + x◦ = 180◦

which gives 3x + 2y = 180.

Since x + y = 76 and 2x + 2y + x = 180, then 2(76) + x = 180 or x = 180 − 152 = 28.
Answer: (A)

14. Solution 1
To find the x-intercept of the original line, we set y = 0 to obtain 0 = 2x − 6 or 2x = 6 and so
x = 3.
When the line is reflected in the y-axis, its x-intercept is reflected in the y-axis to become
x = −3.

Solution 2
When a line is reflected in the y-axis, its slope changes signs (that is, is multiplied by −1).
When a line is reflected in the y-axis, its y-intercept (which is on the y-axis) does not change.
Thus, when the line with equation y = 2x − 6 is reflected in the y-axis, the equation of the
resulting line is y = −2x − 6.
To find the x-intercept of this line, we set y = 0 to obtain 0 = −2x − 6 or 2x = −6 and so
x = −3.
Answer: (D)

15. Amy bought and then sold 15n avocados.

15n
Since she bought the avocados in groups of 3, she bought = 5n groups of 3 avocados.
3
Since she paid $2 for every 3 avocados, she paid $2 × 5n = $10n.
15n
Since she sold the avocados in groups of 5, she sold = 3n groups of 5 avocados.
5
Since she sold every 5 avocados for $4, she received $4 × 3n = $12n.
In terms of n, Amy’s profit is $12n − $10n = $2n.
Since we know that Amy’s profit was $100, we get $2n = $100 and so 2n = 100 or n = 50.
Answer: (C)
2021 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

16. Using exponent laws, 3x+2 = 3x · 32 = 3x · 9.

Since 3x = 5, then 3x+2 = 3x · 9 = 5 · 9 = 45.
Answer: (E)

17. We work backwards through the given information.

At the end, there is 1 candy remaining.
Since 56 of the candies are removed on the fifth day, this 1 candy represents 16 of the candies
left at the end of the fourth day.
Thus, there were 6 × 1 = 6 candies left at the end of the fourth day.
Since 45 of the candies are removed on the fourth day, these 6 candies represent 15 of the candies
left at the end of the third day.
Thus, there were 5 × 6 = 30 candies left at the end of the third day.
Since 34 of the candies are removed on the third day, these 30 candies represent 14 of the candies
left at the end of the second day.
Thus, there were 4 × 30 = 120 candies left at the end of the second day.
Since 32 of the candies are removed on the second day, these 120 candies represent 13 of the
candies left at the end of the first day.
Thus, there were 3 × 120 = 360 candies left at the end of the first day.
Since 21 of the candies are removed on the first day, these 360 candies represent 12 of the candies
initially in the bag.
Thus, there were 2 × 360 = 720 in the bag at the beginning.
Answer: (B)

18. Elina and Gustavo start by running and walking for 12 minutes.
Since there are 60 minutes in 1 hour, 12 minutes equals 15 of an hour.
When Elina runs at 12 km/h for 15 of an hour, she runs 12 km/h × 51 h = 2.4 km to the north.
When Gustavo walks at 5 km/h for 51 of an hour, he walks 5 km/h × 15 h = 1 km to the east.
At this point, Elina and Gustavo start to travel directly towards each other.

E
North

2.4 km

G
1 km

As they change direction, we use p the Pythagorean Theorem to calculate their distance from
each other. Using this, we obtain (2.4 km)2 + (1 km)2 = 2.6 km.
Since Elina continues to travel at 12 km/h, Gustavo continues to travel at 5 km/h, and they
travel directly towards each other, they close the gap at a rate of 12 km/h+5 km/h = 17 km/h.
2.6 km
Thus, it takes ≈ 0.153 h for them to meet.
17 km/h
Since there are 60 minutes in an hour, 0.153 h is equivalent to roughly 9.18 minutes.
Since Elina and Gustavo leave at 3:00 p.m. and travel for 12 minutes and then for an additional
9 minutes, they meet again at approximately 3:21 p.m.
Answer: (E)
2021 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

19. Each of the four shaded circles has radius 1, and so has area π · 12 which equals π.
Next, we consider one of the three spaces. By symmetry, each of the three spaces has the same
area.
Consider the leftmost of the three spaces.
Join the centres of the circles that bound this space to form a quadrilateral. Also, join the
centres of these circles to the points where these circles touch the sides of the rectangle.

A B C

L M D

J E
N
H G F

This quadrilateral is a square with side length 2.

The side length of this quadrilateral is 2, because each of M D, DE, EN , and N M is equal to
the sum of lengths of two radii, or 2.
Next, we show that the angles of DM N E are each 90◦ .
Consider quadrilateral ABM L. The angle at A is 90◦ , since the larger shape is a rectangle.
The angles at B and L are both 90◦ since radii are perpendicular to tangents at their points of
tangency. Thus, ABM L has three 90◦ angles, which means that its fourth angle must also be
90◦ .
Now consider quadrilateral BCDM . The angles at B and C are both 90◦ , as above. Since
BM = CD = 1, this means that BCM D is actually a rectangle.
In a similar way, we can see that JN GH is a square and M LJN is a rectangle.
Finally, we can consider DM N E. At M , the three angles outside DM N E are each 90◦ , which
means that the angle at M inside DM N E is 90◦ .
Similarly, the angle at N inside DM N E is 90◦ .
Since these angles are both 90◦ and M D = N E = 2, then DM N E is a rectangle. Since its
four sides each have length 2, then this rectangle must be a square.
The area of the space between the four circles is thus equal to the area of the square minus the
area of the four circular sectors inside the square. In fact, each of these four circular sectors is
one-quarter of a circle of radius 1, since its angle at the centre of the circle is 90◦ .
Thus, the area of the space is equal to 22 − 4 · 41 · π · 12 which equals 4 − π.
This means that the total area of the shaded region equals 4π +3(4−π) = 4π +12−3π = 12+π
which is approximately equal to 15.14.
Of the given choices, this is closest to 15.
Answer: (D)
2021 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

20. An integer is divisible by both 12 and 20 exactly when it is divisible by the least common
multiple of 12 and 20.
The first few positive multiples of 20 are 20, 40, 60. Since 60 is divisible by 12 and neither 20
nor 40 is divisible by 12, then 60 is the least common multiple of 12 and 20.
Since 60 · 16 = 960 and 60 · 17 = 1020, the smallest four-digit multiple of 60 is 60 · 17.
Since 60 · 166 = 9960 and 60 · 167 = 10 020, the largest four-digit multiple of 60 is 60 · 166.
This means that there are 166 − 17 + 1 = 150 four-digit multiples of 60.
Now, we need to remove the multiples of 60 that are also multiples of 16.
Since the least common multiple of 60 and 16 is 240, we need to remove the four-digit multiples
of 240.
Since 240 · 4 = 960 and 240 · 5 = 1200, the smallest four-digit multiple of 240 is 240 · 5.
Since 240 · 41 = 9840 and 240 · 42 = 10 080, the largest four-digit multiple of 240 is 240 · 41.
This means that there are 41 − 5 + 1 = 37 four-digit multiples of 240.
Finally, this means that the number of four-digit integers that are multiples of 12 and 20 but
are not multiples of 16 is 150 − 37 = 113.
Answer: (B)

21. We systematically work through pairs of the given integers to see which pairs add up to a third
given integer. Starting with the smallest possible pairs, we have:

4 + 27 = 31 12 + 15 = 27 12 + 27 = 39

There are no other pairs that add up to a third given integer.

This means that each of the three sums in the problem must be one of the three sums above.
In the sums above, the only integer that appears three times is 27.
In the sums in the problem, the only variable that appears three times is c.
Therefore, c = 27.
This also means that the sum a + b = c must be the sum 12 + 15 = 27.
Since 12 appears in two sums and 15 does not, then a = 15 and b = 12.
Matching the values that we know already with the equations that we have, we obtain

a+b=c 15 + 12 = 27
b+c=d 12 + 27 = 39
c+e=f 27 + 4 = 31

Therefore, a + c + f = 15 + 27 + 31 = 73.
Answer: (C)

22. Suppose that the integer in the bottom left corner is n.

In this case, the sum of the integers in the first column is 64 + 70 + n or n + 134.
Thus, the sum of the integers in each row, in each column, and on each diagonal also equals
n + 134. (This means that this square is in fact a magic square, since the sum of the numbers
in each row, in each column, and on each diagonal is the same.)
Using the top row, the top right integer equals (n + 134) − 64 − 10 or n + 60.
Using the northeast diagonal, the centre integer equals (n + 134) − n − (n + 60) or 74 − n.
Using the second row, the middle integer in the right column equals (n + 134) − 70 − (74 − n)
or 2n − 10.
2021 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

Using the southeast diagonal, the bottom right integer equals (n + 134) − 64 − (74 − n) or
2n − 4.
Using the third row, the middle integer is x = (n + 134) − n − (2n − 4) = 138 − 2n.

64 10 n + 60
70 74 − n 2n − 10
n 138 − 2n 2n − 4

Using the third column,

(n + 60) + (2n − 10) + (2n − 4) = n + 134

5n + 46 = n + 134
4n = 88
n = 22

64 10 82
Therefore, x = 130 − 2n = 130 − 44 = 94 and the complete grid is 70 52 34 .
22 94 40
Answer: (E)

23. Robbie has a score of 8 and Francine has a score of 10 after two rolls each. Thus, in order for
Robbie to win (that is, to have a higher total score), his third roll must be at least 3 larger
than that of Francine.
If Robbie rolls 1, 2 or 3, his roll cannot be 3 larger than that of Francine.
If Robbie rolls a 4 and wins, then Francine rolls a 1.
If Robbie rolls a 5 and wins, then Francine rolls a 1 or a 2.
If Robbie rolls a 6 and wins, then Francine rolls a 1 or a 2 or a 3.
We now know the possible combinations of rolls that lead to Robbie winning, and so need to
calculate the probabilities.
We recall that Robbie and Francine are rolling a special six-sided dice.
Suppose that the probability of rolling a 1 is p.
From the given information, the probability of rolling a 2 is 2p, of rolling a 3 is 3p, and of
rolling a 4, 5 and 6 is 4p, 5p and 6p, respectively.
Since the combined probability of rolling a 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 equals 1, we get the equation
1
p + 2p + 3p + 4p + 5p + 6p = 1 which gives 21p = 1 or p = 21 .
Thus, the probability that Robbie rolls a 4 and Francine rolls a 1 equals the product of the
4 1
probabilities of each of these events, which equals 21 · 21 .
5 1 5 2
Also, the probability that Robbie rolls a 5 and Francine rolls a 1 or 2 equals 21 · 21 + 21 · 21 .
Lastly, the probability that Robbie rolls a 6 and Francine rolls a 1, a 2, or a 3 equals
6 1 6 2 6 3
21
· 21
+ 21
· 21
+ 21
· 21

Therefore, the probability that Robbie wins is

4 1 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 6 3 4+5+10+6+12+18 55
21
· 21
+ 21
· 21
+ 21
· 21
+ 21
· 21
+ 21
· 21
+ 21
· 21
= 21·21
= 441

which is in lowest terms since 55 = 5 · 11 and 441 = 32 · 72 .

Converting to the desired form, we see that r = 55 and s = 41 which gives r + s = 96.
Answer: (A)
2021 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

24. Let O be the centre of the top face of the cylinder and let r be the radius of the cylinder.
We need to determine the value of QT 2 .
Since RS is directly above P Q, then RP is perpendicular to P Q.
This means that 4T P Q is right-angled at P .
Since P Q is a diameter, then P Q = 2r.
By the Pythagorean Theorem, QT 2 = P T 2 + P Q2 = n2 + (2r)2 = n2 + 4r2 .
So we need to determine the values of n and r. We will use the information about QU and U T
to determine these values.
Join U to O.
Since U is halfway between R and S, then the arcs RU and U S are each one-quarter of the
circle that bounds the top face of the cylinder.
This means that ∠U OR = ∠U OS = 90◦ .
U

r
R r O r S

We can use the Pythagorean Theorem in 4U OR and 4U OS, which are both right-angled at
O, to obtain
U R2 = U O2 + OR2 = r2 + r2 = 2r2 and U S 2 = 2r2
Since RP and QS are both perpendicular to the top face of the cylinder, we can use the
Pythagorean Theorem in 4T RU and in 4QSU to obtain
QU 2 = QS 2 + U S 2 = m2 + 2r2
U T 2 = T R2 + U R2 = (P R − P T )2 + 2r2 = (QS − n)2 + 2r2 = (m − n)2 + 2r2
√
Since QU = 9 33, then QU 2 = 92 · 33 = 2673.
Since U T = 40, then U T 2 = 1600.
Therefore,
m2 + 2r2 = 2673
(m − n)2 + 2r2 = 1600
Subtracting the second equation from the first, we obtain the equivalent equations
m2 − (m − n)2 = 1073
m2 − (m2 − 2mn + n2 ) = 1073
2mn − n2 = 29 · 37
n(2m − n) = 29 · 37
Since m and n are integers, then 2m − n is an integer. Thus, n and 2m − n are a factor pair
of 29 · 37 = 1073.
Since 29 and 37 are prime numbers, the integer 1073 has only four positive divisors: 1, 29, 37,
1073.
This gives the following possibilities:
n 2m − n m = 12 ((2m − n) + n)
1 1073 537
29 37 33
37 29 33
1073 1 537
2021 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10

Since m > n, then n cannot be

√ 37 or 1073.
Since QU > QS, then m < 9 33 ≈ 51.7.
This means that n = 29 and m = 33.
Since (m − n)2 + 2r2 = 1600, we obtain 2r2 = 1600 − (m − n)2 = 1600 − 42 = 1584 and so
QT 2 = n2 + 4r2 = 292 + 2(2r2 ) = 841 + 3168 = 4009
The remainder when QT 2 is divided by 100 is 9.
Answer: (C)
p √
25. The distance between J(2, 7) and K(5, 3) is equal to (2 − 5)2 + (7 − 3)2 = 32 + 42 = 5.
1
Therefore, if we consider 4JKL as having base JK and height h, then we want · JK · h ≤ 10
2
2
which means that h ≤ 10 · = 4.
5
In other words, L(r, t) can be any point with 0 ≤ r ≤ 10 and 0 ≤ t ≤ 10 whose perpendicular
distance to the line through J and K is at most 4.
y

L
J
h

K
x

7−3 4
The slope of the line through J(2, 7) and K(5, 3) is equal to =− .
2−5 3
4
Therefore, this line has equation y − 7 = − (x − 2).
3
Muliplying through by 3, we obtain 3y − 21 = −4x + 8 or 4x + 3y = 29.
We determine the equation of the line above this line that is parallel to it and a perpendicular
distance of 4 from it.
The equation of this line will be of the form 4x + 3y = c for some real number c, since it is
parallel to the line with equation 4x + 3y = 29.
To determine the value of c, we determine the coordinates of one point on this line.
To determine such a point, we draw a perpendicular of length 4 from K to a point P above the
line.
4 3
Since JK has slope − and KP is perpendicular to JK, then KP has slope .
3 4
Draw a vertical line from P and a horizontal line from K, meeting at Q.
y

J
P

K Q
x
2021 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11
3
Since KP has slope , then P Q : QK = 3 : 4, which means that 4KQP is similar to a 3-4-5
4
triangle.
3 12 4 16
Since KP = 4, then P Q = KP = and QK = KP = .
5  5  3 5
16 12 41 27
Thus, the coordinates of P are 5 + , 3 + or , .
5 5 5 5
Since P lies on the line with equation 4x + 3y = c, then
41 27 164 81 245
c=4· +3· = + = = 49
5 5 5 5 5
and so the equation of the line parallel to JK and 4 units above it is 4x + 3y = 49.
In a similar way, we find that the line parallel to JK and 4 units below it has equation
4x + 3y = 9. (Note that 49 − 29 = 29 − 9.)
This gives us the following diagram:

y
(10, 10)
(19/4, 10)

(0, 3)
K (10, 3)

(9/4, 0)
x

The points L that satisfy the given conditions are exactly the points within the square, below
the line 4x + 3y = 49 and above the line 4x + 3y = 9. In other words, the region R is the region
inside the square and between these lines.
To find the area of R, we take the area of the square bounded by the lines x = 0, x = 10,
y = 0, and y = 10 (this area equals 10 · 10 or 100) and subtract the area of the two triangles
inside the square and not between the lines.
The line with equation
 4x + 3y = 9 intersects the y-axis at (0, 3) (we see this by setting x = 0)

9
and the x-axis at , 0 (we see this by setting y = 0).
4
The line with equation 4x + 3y  = 49 intersects
 the line x = 10 at (10, 3) (we see this by setting
19
x = 10) and the line y = 10 at , 10 (we see this by setting y = 10).
4
1 9 27
The bottom triangle that is inside the square and outside R has area · 3 · = .
2 4 8
19
The top triangle that is inside the square and outside R has horizontal base of length 10 −
4
21 1 21 147
or and vertical height of length 10 − 3 or 7, and thus has area · ·7= .
4 2 4 8
Finally, this means that the area of R is
27 147 174 87 313
100 − − = 100 − = 100 − =
8 8 8 4 4
which is in lowest terms since the only divisors of the denominator that are larger than 1 are
2 and 4, while the numerator is odd.
2021 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 12
300 + a
When we write this area in the form where a and b are positive integers, we obtain
40 − b
a = 13 and b = 36, giving a + b = 49.
Answer: (D)
 The CENTRE for EDUCATION
in MATHEMATICS and COMPUTING
cemc.uwaterloo.ca

2020 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Tuesday, February 25, 2020

(in North America and South America)

Wednesday, February 26, 2020

(outside of North America and South America)

Solutions

©2020 University of Waterloo

2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2
20 − 20 0
1. Simplifying, = = 0.
20 + 20 40
Answer: (A)

2. When x = 3 and y = 4, we get xy − x = 3 × 4 − 3 = 12 − 3 = 9.

Alternatively, xy − x = x(y − 1) = 3 × 3 = 9.
Answer: (D)

3. Since OP QR is a rectangle with two sides on the axes, then its sides are horizontal and vertical.
Since P Q is horizontal, the y-coordinate of Q is the same as the y-coordinate of P , which is 3.
Since QR is vertical, the x-coordinate of Q is the same as the x-coordinate of R, which is 5.
Therefore, the coordinates of Q are (5, 3).
Answer: (B)

1 1 1 1 1 1
4. If 0 < a < 20, then > . Therefore, > and > .
a 20 15 20 10 20
1
Also, = 0.05 which is less than both 0.5 and 0.055.
20
1 1
Lastly, > since 0 < 20 < 25.
20 25
1 1
Therefore, is the only one of the choices that is less than .
25 20
Answer: (B)

5. Since QST is a straight angle, then ∠QSP = 180◦ − ∠T SP = 180◦ − 50◦ = 130◦ .
Now ∠RQS is an exterior angle for 4QSP .
This means that ∠RQS = ∠QSP + ∠SP Q.
Using the information that we know, 150◦ = 130◦ + x◦ and so x = 150 − 130 = 20.
(Alternatively, we could have noted that ∠RQS and ∠SQP are supplementary and then used
the sum of the angles in 4QSP .)
Answer: (E)

6. From the bar graph, Matilda saw 6 goldfinches, 9 sparrows, and 5 grackles.
In total, she saw 6 + 9 + 5 = 20 birds.
6 3
This means that the percentage of birds that were goldfinches is ×100% = ×100% = 30%.
20 10
Answer: (C)
m+n
7. Since the average of m and n is 5, then = 5 which means that m + n = 10.
2
In order for n to be as large as possible, we need to make m as small as possible.
Since m and n are positive integers, then the smallest possible value of m is 1, which means
that the largest possible value of n is n = 10 − m = 10 − 1 = 9.
Answer: (C)

8. To determine 30% of Roman’s $200 prize, we calculate $200×30% = $200× 100

30
= $2×30 = $60.
After Roman gives $60 to Jackie, he has $200 − $60 = $140 remaining.
He splits 15% of this between Dale and Natalia.
The total that he splits is $140 × 15% = $140 × 0.15 = $21.
Since Roman splits $21 equally between Dale and Natalia, then Roman gives Dale a total of
$21 ÷ 2 = $10.50.
Answer: (A)
2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

9. The 1st row has 0 shaded squares and 1 unshaded square.

The 2nd row has 1 shaded square and 2 unshaded squares.
The 3rd row has 2 shaded squares and 3 unshaded squares.
The 4th row has 3 shaded squares and 4 unshaded squares.
Because each row has 2 more squares than the previous row and the squares in each row
alternate betweeen unshaded and shaded, then each row has exactly 1 more shaded square
than the previous row.
This means that, moving from the 4th row to the 2020th row, a total of 2020 − 4 = 2016
additional shaded squares are added.
Thus, the 2020th row has 3 + 2016 = 2019 shaded squares.
Answer: (D)

10. We extend RQ to the left until it meets P T at point U , as shown.

P
13
Q 18 R
U

T 30 S

Because quadrilateral U RST has three right angles, then it must have four right angles and so
is a rectangle.
Thus, U T = RS and U R = T S = 30.
Since U R = 30, then U Q = U R − QR = 30 − 18 = 12.
Now 4P QU is right-angled at U .
By the Pythagorean Theorem, since P U > 0, we have
p √ √ √
P U = P Q2 − U Q2 = 132 − 122 = 169 − 144 = 25 = 5

Since the perimeter of P QRST is 82, then 13 + 18 + RS + 30 + (U T + 5) = 82.

Since RS = U T , then 2 × RS = 82 − 13 − 18 − 30 − 5 = 16 and so RS = 8.
Finally, we can calculate the area of P QRST by splitting it into 4P QU and rectangle U RST .
The area of 4P QU is 21 × U Q × P U = 12 × 12 × 5 = 30.
The area of rectangle U RST is RS × T S = 8 × 30 = 240.
Therefore, the area of pentagon P QRST is 30 + 240 = 270.
Answer: (E)

11. Since
1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 8 + 9 = 45
then
5 + 10 + 15 + · · · + 40 + 45 = 5(1 + 2 + 3 + · · · + 8 + 9) = 5(45) = 225
Answer: (A)
2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

12. Suppose that the length, width and height of the prism are the positive integers a, b and c.
Since the volume of the prism is 21, then abc = 21.
We note that each of a, b and c is a positive divisor of 21.
The positive divisors of 21 are 1, 3, 7, and 21, and the only way to write 21 as a product of
three different integers is 1 × 3 × 7 = 21.
Therefore, the length, width and height of the prism must be 1, 3, and 7, in some order.
The sum of these is 1 + 3 + 7 = 11.
Answer: (A)

13. Since 8 = 2 × 2 × 2 = 23 , then 820 = (23 )20 = 23×20 = 260 .

Thus, if 2n = 820 , then n = 60.
Answer: (B)

14. Since 3 × 5 × 7 = 105, then the greatest possible value of n is at least 105.
In particular, the greatest possible value of n must be positive.
For the product of three numbers to be positive, either all three numbers are positive (that is,
none of the numbers is negative) or one number is positive and two numbers are negative. (If
there were an odd number of negative factors, the product would be negative.)
If all three numbers are positive, the product is as large as possible when the three numbers
are each as large as possible. In this case, the greatest possible value of n is 3 × 5 × 7 = 105.
If one number is positive and two numbers are negative, their product is as large as possible if
the positive number is as large as possible (7) and the product of the two negative numbers is
as large as possible.
The product of the two negative numbers will be as large as possible when the negative numbers
are each “as negative as possible” (that is, as far from 0 as possible). In this case, these numbers
are thus −4 and −6 with product (−4) × (−6) = 24. (We can check the other possible products
of two negative numbers and see that none is as large.)
So the greatest possible value of n in this case is 7 × (−4) × (−6) = 7 × 24 = 168.
Combining the two cases, we see that the greatest possible value of n is 168.
Answer: (A)

15. Since the ratio of green marbles to yellow marbles to red marbles is 3 : 4 : 2, then we can let
the numbers of green, yellow and red marbles be 3n, 4n and 2n for some positive integer n.
Since 63 of the marbles in the bag are not red, then the sum of the number of green marbles
and the number of yellow marbles in the bag is 63.
Thus, 3n + 4n = 63 and so 7n = 63 or n = 9, which means that the number of red marbles in
the bag is 2n = 2 × 9 = 18.
Answer: (B)

16. Let s be the side length of the square. Therefore, OR = RQ = s.

Let r be the radius of the circle. Therefore, OQ = r since O is the centre of the circle and Q
is on the circumference of the circle.
Since the square has a right-angle at each of its vertices, then 4ORQ is right-angled at R.

R s O
s r
Q P
2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

By the Pythagorean Theorem, OR2 + RQ2 = OQ2 and so s2 + s2 = r2 or 2s2 = r2 .

In terms of r, the area of the circle is πr2 .
Since we are given that the area of the circle is 72π, then πr2 = 72π or r2 = 72.
Since 2s2 = r2 = 72, then s2 = 36.
In terms of s, the area of the square is s2 , so the area of the square is 36.
Answer: (E)

17. Suppose that Carley buys x boxes of chocolates, y boxes of mints, and z boxes of caramels.
In total, Carley will then have 50x chocolates (since there are 50 chocolates in a box of choco-
lates), 40y mints (since there are 40 mints in a box of mints), and 25z caramels (since there
are 25 caramels in a box of caramels).
Since the contents of each bag was the same and Carley made no incomplete treat bags and
there were no left-over candies, then it must be the case that 50x = 40y = 25z.
We want to find the minimum possible positive value of x + y + z given this condition.
Dividing by the common factor of 5, the equation 50x = 40y = 25z becomes 10x = 8y = 5z.
Since 10x is a multiple of 10 and 8y is a multiple 8 and 10x = 8y, we look for the smallest
multiple of 10 which is also a multiple of 8.
Since 10, 20 and 30 are not multiples of 8, and 40 is a multiple of 8, then the smallest possible
value of 10x appears to be 40.
In this case, x = 4, y = 5 and z = 8 gives 10x = 8y = 5z = 40, and these are the smallest
positive integers that create this equality.
Since x, y and z are each the smallest possible, then their sum x + y + z is also the smallest
possible.
Thus, the minimum number of boxes that Carley could have bought is 4 + 5 + 8 = 17.
Answer: (B)

18. Solution 1
Suppose that when Nate arrives on time, his drive takes t hours.
When Nate arrives 1 hour early, he arrives in t − 1 hours.
When Nate arrives 1 hour late, he arrives in t + 1 hours.
Since the distance that he drives is the same in either case and distance equals speed multiplied
by time, then (60 km/h) × ((t − 1) h) = (40 km/h) × ((t + 1) h).
Expanding, we obtain 60t − 60 = 40t + 40 and so 20t = 100 or t = 5.
The total distance that Nate drives is thus (60 km/h) × (4 h) = 240 km.
240 km
When Nate drives this distance in 5 hours at a constant speed, he should drive at
5h
which equals 48 km/h.

Solution 2
Suppose that the distance that Nate drives is d km.
Since driving at 40 km/h causes Nate to arrive 1 hour late and driving at 60 km/h causes Nate
to arrive 1 hour early, then the difference between the lengths of time at these two speeds is 2
hours.
Since time equals distance divided by speed, then
d km d km
− =2h
40 km/h 60 km/h
Multiplying both sides of the equation by 120 km/h, we obtain

3d km − 2d km = 240 km
2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

which gives us d = 240.

Thus, the distance that Nate drives is 240 km.
At 40 km/h, the trip takes 6 hours and Nate arrives 1 hour late.
To arrive just in time, it should take 5 hours.
240 km
To drive 240 km in 5 hours, Nate should drive at a constant speed of = 48 km/h.
5h
Answer: (D)

19. For each of the 10 questions, each correct answer is worth 5 points, each unanswered question
is worth 1 point, and each incorrect answer is worth 0 points.
If 10 of 10 questions are answered correctly, the total score is 10 × 5 = 50 points.
If 9 of 10 questions are answered correctly, either 0 or 1 questions can be unanswered. This
means that the total score is either 9 × 5 = 45 points or 9 × 5 + 1 = 46 points.
If 8 of 10 questions are answered correctly, either 0 or 1 or 2 questions can be unanswered. This
means that the total score is either 8 × 5 = 40 points or 8 × 5 + 1 = 41 points or 8 × 5 + 2 = 42
points.
If 7 of 10 questions are answered correctly, either 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 questions can be unanswered.
This means that the total score is one of 35, 36, 37, or 38 points.
If 6 of 10 questions are answered correctly, either 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 questions can be
unanswered. This means that the total score is one of 30, 31, 32, 33, or 34 points.
So far, we have seen that the following point totals between 30 and 50, inclusive, are possible:

30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 40, 41, 42, 45, 46, 50

which means that

39, 43, 44, 47, 48, 49
are not possible.
If 5 or fewer questions are answered correctly, is it possible to obtain a total of at least 39
points?
The answer is no, because in this case, the number of correct answers is at most 5 and the
number of unanswered questions is at most 10 (these both can’t happen at the same time)
which together would give at most 5 × 5 + 10 = 35 points.
Therefore, there are exactly 6 integers between 30 and 50, inclusive, that are not possible total
scores.
Answer: (D)
2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

20. We determine when 3m + 7n is divisible by 10 by looking at the units (ones) digits of 3m + 7n .

To do this, we first look individually at the units digits of 3m and 7n .
The units digits of powers of 3 cycle 3, 9, 7, 1, 3, 9, 7, 1, . . ..
To see this, we note that the first few powers of 3 are

31 = 3 32 = 9 33 = 27 34 = 81 35 = 243 36 = 729

Since the units digit of a product of integers depends only on the units digits of the integers
being multiplied and we multiply by 3 to get from one power to the next, then once a units digit
recurs in the sequence of units digits, the following units digits will follow the same pattern.
This means that the units digits of powers of 3 cycle every four powers of 3.
Therefore, of the 100 powers of 3 of the form 3m with 1 ≤ m ≤ 100, exactly 25 will have a
units digit of 3, exactly 25 will have a units digit of 9, exactly 25 will have a units digit of 7,
and exactly 25 will have a units digit of 1.
The units digits of powers of 7 cycle 7, 9, 3, 1, 7, 9, 3, 1, . . ..
To see this, we note that the first few powers of 7 are

71 = 7 72 = 49 73 = 343 74 = 2401 75 = 16 807 76 = 117 649

Using the same argument as above, the units digits of powers of 7 cycle every four powers of 7.
Since 101 is 1 more than a multiple of 4, then the power 7101 is at the beginning of one of these
cycles, and so the units digit of 7101 is a 7.
Therefore, of the 105 powers of 7 of the form 7n with 101 ≤ n ≤ 205, exactly 27 will have a
units digit of 7, exactly 26 will have a units digit of 9, exactly 26 will have a units digit of 3,
and exactly 26 will have a units digit of 1. (Here, 105 powers include 26 complete cycles of 4
plus one additional term.)
For 3m + 7n to have a units digit of 0 (and thus be divisible by 10), one of the following must
be true:

• the units digit of 3m is 3 (25 possible values of m) and the units digit of 7n is 7 (27 possible
values of n), or
• the units digit of 3m is 9 (25 possible values of m) and the units digit of 7n is 1 (26 possible
values of n), or
• the units digit of 3m is 7 (25 possible values of m) and the units digit of 7n is 3 (26 possible
values of n), or
• the units digit of 3m is 1 (25 possible values of m) and the units digit of 7n is 9 (26 possible
values of n).

The number of possible pairs (m, n) is therefore

27 × 25 + 26 × 25 + 26 × 25 + 26 × 25 = 25 × (27 + 26 + 26 + 25) = 25 × 105 = 2625

Answer: (E)
2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

21. To determine the number of points (x, y) on the line with equation y = 4x + 3 that lie inside
this region, we determine the number of integers x with 25 ≤ x ≤ 75 that have the property
that y = 4x + 3 is an integer between 120 and 250.
In other words, we determine the number of integers x with 25 ≤ x ≤ 75 for which
120 ≤ 4x + 3 ≤ 250 and is an integer.
We note that, as x increases, the value of the expression 4x + 3 increases.
Also, when x = 29, we get 4x + 3 = 119, and when x = 30, we get 4x + 3 = 123.
Further, when x = 61, we get 4x + 3 = 247, and when x = 62, we get 4x + 3 = 251.
Therefore, 4x + 3 is between 120 and 250 exactly when 30 ≤ x ≤ 61.
There are 61 − 30 + 1 = 32 such values of x, and so there are 32 points that satisfy the given
conditions.
Answer: (D)

22. Since P T = 1 and T Q = 4, then P Q = P T + T Q = 1 + 4 = 5.

4P SQ is right-angled at S and has hypotenuse P Q.
We can thus apply the Pythagorean Theorem to obtain P S 2 = P Q2 − QS 2 = 52 − 32 = 16.
Since P S > 0, then P S = 4.
Consider 4P SQ and 4RT Q.
Each is right-angled and they share a common angle at Q. Thus, these two triangles are similar.
PQ QR
This tells us that = .
QS TQ
5 QR 4·5 20
Using the lengths that we know, = and so QR = = .
3 4 3 3
20 11
Finally, SR = QR − QS = −3= .
3 3
Answer: (B)
2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

23. Suppose that N is an integer that satisfies the given properties.

The first digit of N must be a 1, since there must be at least one 1 before the first 2, at least
one 2 before the first 3, and at least one 3 before the 4, which means that we cannot have a 2,
a 3, or a 4 before the first 1.
Since there are three 1s in N , then N can begin with 1, 11 or 111.
The first digit of N that is not a 1 must be a 2.
Thus, N begins 12, 112, or 1112.
Case 1: N begins 12
Since no two 2s can be next to each other, we next place the remaining two 2s.
Reading from the left, these 2s can go in positions 4 and 6, 4 and 7, 4 and 8, 4 and 9, 5 and 7,
5 and 8, 5 and 9, 6 and 8, 6 and 9, or 7 and 9.
In other words, there are 10 possible pairs of positions in which the 2s can be placed.
Once the 2s are placed, there are 5 positions left open.
Next, we place the remaining two 1s.
If we call these 5 positions A, B, C, D, E, we see that there are 10 pairs of positions in which
the 1s can be placed: A and B, A and C, A and D, A and E, B and C, B and D, B and E, C
and D, C and E, D and E.
This leaves 3 positions in which the two 3s and one 4 must be placed. Reading from the left,
a 3 must be placed in the first empty position, since there must be a 3 before the 4.
This leaves 2 positions, in which the remaining digits (3 and 4) can be placed in any order;
there are 2 such orders (3 and 4, or 4 and 3).
In this case, there are 10 × 10 × 2 = 200 possible integers N .
Case 2: N begins 112
Since no two 2s can be next to each other, we next place the remaining 2s.
Reading from the left, these 2s can go in positions 5 and 7, 5 and 8, 5 and 9, 6 and 8, 6 and 9,
or 7 and 9.
In other words, there are 6 possible pairs of positions in which the 2s can be placed.
Once the 2s are placed, there are 4 positions left open.
Next, we place the remaining 1. There are 4 possible positions in which the 1 can be placed.
This leaves 3 positions in which the two 3s and one 4 must be placed. Reading from the left,
a 3 must be placed in the first empty position, since there must be a 3 before the 4.
This leaves 2 positions, in which the remaining digits (3 and 4) can be placed in any order;
there are 2 such orders.
In this case, there are 6 × 4 × 2 = 48 possible integers N .
Case 3: N begins 1112
Since no two 2s can be next to each other, we next place the remaining 2s.
Reading from the left, these 2s can go in positions 6 and 8, 6 and 9, or 7 and 9.
In other words, there are 3 possible pairs of positions in which the 2s can be placed.
Once the 2s are placed, there are 3 positions left open with only the two 3s and the 4 remaining
to be placed.
Reading from the left, a 3 must be placed in the first empty position, since there must be a 3
before the 4.
This leaves 2 positions, in which the remaining digits (3 and 4) can be placed in any order;
there are 2 such orders.
In this case, there are 3 × 2 = 6 possible integers N .
Combining the three cases, we see that there are 200 + 48 + 6 = 254 possible integers N .
Answer: (C)
2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10

24. Suppose that GP = x.

Since the edge length of the cube is 200, then HP = 200 − x.
We consider tetrahedron (that is, triangle-based pyramid) F GM P and calculate its volume in
two different ways.
The volume of a tetrahedron is equal to one-third times the area of its triangular base times
the length of its perpendicular height.
First, we consider tetrahedron F GM P as having base 4F GM and height GP , which is per-
pendicuar to the base.
4F GM is right-angled at G and has F G = GM = 200, so its area is 12 × F G × GM which
equals 21 × 200 × 200 which equals 20 000.
Thus, the volume of F GM P is 31 × 20 000 × x.
Next, we consider tetrahedron F GM P as having base 4P F M .
From the given information, the shortest distance from G to a point inside this triangle is 100.
This means that the height of tetrahedron F GM P when considered to have base 4P F M
is 100.
We need to calcualte the area of 4P F M .
Since 4F GM is right-angled at G and F M > 0, then by the Pythagorean Theorem,
√ √ √ √
F M = F G2 + GM 2 = 2002 + 2002 = 2002 × 2 = 200 2

Since 4F GP is right-angled at G and F P > 0, then by the Pythagorean Theorem,

√ √ √
F P = F G2 + GP 2 = 2002 + x2 = x2 + 40 000
√
Similarly, M P = x2 + 40 000.
This means that 4P F M is isosceles with F P = M P .
Let T be the midpoint √of F M .
Then F T = T M = 100 2.
Since 4P F M is isosceles, then P T is perpendicular to F M .

F T M

By the Pythagorean Theorem,

r 2  √ 2 √
√ √ √
2
PT = FP − FT = 2 x2 + 40 000 − 100 2 = x2 + 40 000 − 20 000 = x2 + 20 000
√ √
Therefore, the area of 4P F M is 21 × F M × P T which equals 21 × 200 2 × x2 + 20 000.
This means that the volume of tetrahedron F GM P is equal to

1

1
√ √ 
× × 200 2 × x 2 + 20 000 × 100
3 2
2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11

We can now equate the two expressions for the volume of F GM P to solve for x:
1 1

1
√ √ 
× 20 000 × x = × × 200 2 × x 2 + 20 000 × 100
3 3 2
 √ √ 
20 000 × x = 12 × 200 2 × x2 + 20 000 × 100
√ √
x = 12 × 2 × x2 + 20 000
√ √
2x = 2 × x2 + 20 000
4x2 = 2(x2 + 20 000)
2x2 = 40 000
x2 = 20 000
√ √ √ √
Since x > 0, then x = 20 000 = 10 000 × √ 2 = 1002 × 2 = 100 2.
This means that HP = 200 − x = 200 − 100 2 ≈ 58.58.
Of the given answers, this is closest to 59, which is (D).
Answer: (D)

25. We will use the result that if a positive integer N has prime factorization N = pa11 pa22 · · · pakk
for some distinct prime numbers p1 , p2 , . . . , pk and positive integers a1 , a2 , . . . , ak , then N has
exactly (a1 + 1)(a2 + 1) · · · (ak + 1) positive divisors.
This result is based on the following facts:

F1. Every positive integer greater than 1 can be written as a product of prime numbers in a
unique way. (If the positive integer is itself prime, this product consists of only the prime
number.) This fact is called the “Fundamental Theorem of Arithmetic”. This fact is often
seen implicitly in finding a “factor tree” for a given integer. For example, 1500 is equal to
22 × 31 × 53 and there is no other way of writing 1500 as a product of prime numbers. Note
that rearranging the same prime factors in a different order does not count as a different
factorization.
F2. If n is a positive integer and d is a positive integer that is a divisor of n, then the only
possible prime factors of d are the prime factors of n. For example, if d is a positive divisor
of n = 1500, then the only possible prime factors of d are 2, 3 and 5. This means, for
example, that d cannot be divisible by 7 or by 11 or by any other prime number not equal
to 2, 3 or 5. d might or might not be divisible by each of 2, 3 or 5.
F3. If n is a positive integer, d is a positive integer that is a divisor of n, and p is a prime factor
of both n and d, then p cannot divide d “more times” than it divides n. For example, if
d is a positive divisor of n = 1500 = 22 × 31 × 53 that is divisible by 5, then d can be
divisible by 5 or by 52 or by 53 but cannot be divisible by 54 or by 55 or by any larger
power of 5.

From these facts, the positive divisors of N = pa11 pa22 · · · pakk are the integers of the form

d = pb11 pb22 · · · pbkk

where b1 , b2 , . . . , bk are non-negative integers with 0 ≤ b1 ≤ a1 , 0 ≤ b2 ≤ a2 , and so on.

This means that there are a1 + 1 possible values for b1 , namely 0, 1, 2, . . . , a1 .
Similarly, there are a2 + 1 possible values for b2 , a3 + 1 possible values for b3 , and so on.
Since every combination of these possible values gives a different divisor d, then there are
(a1 + 1)(a2 + 1) · · · (ak + 1) positive divisors.
2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 12

Suppose that n has prime factorization 2r 5s pa33 pa44 · · · pakk for some distinct prime numbers
p3 , p4 , . . . , pk none of which equal 2 or 5, for some positive integers a3 , a4 , . . . , ak , and some
non-negative integers r and s.
We have written n this way to allow us to pay special attention to the possible prime factors
of 2 and 5.
This means that

2n = 2r+1 5s pa33 pa44 · · · pakk

5n = 2r 5s+1 pa33 pa44 · · · pakk

Since 2n has 64 positive divisors and 5n has 60 positive divisors, then

(r + 2)(s + 1)(a3 + 1)(a4 + 1) · · · (ak + 1) = 64

(r + 1)(s + 2)(a3 + 1)(a4 + 1) · · · (ak + 1) = 60

Since every factor in the two expressions on the left is a positive integer, then

(a3 + 1)(a4 + 1) · · · (ak + 1)

is a positive common divisor of 64 and of 60.

The positive divisors of 64 are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64.
Of these, only 1, 2, 4 are divisors of 60.
Therefore, (a3 + 1)(a4 + 1) · · · (ak + 1) equals 1, 2 or 4.
Since each of a3 , a4 , . . . , ak is a positive integer, then each of a3 + 1, a4 + 1, . . . , ak + 1 is at
least 2.
Case 1: (a3 + 1)(a4 + 1) · · · (ak + 1) = 4
The only ways in which 4 can be written as a product of positive integers each at least 2 are
2 × 2 and 4 (a product of one integer is itself).
Thus, either k = 4 with a3 + 1 = a4 + 1 = 2 (giving a3 = a4 = 1), or k = 3 with a3 + 1 = 4
(giving a3 = 3).
Since

(r + 2)(s + 1)(a3 + 1)(a4 + 1) · · · (ak + 1) = 64

(r + 1)(s + 2)(a3 + 1)(a4 + 1) · · · (ak + 1) = 60

then, after simplification, we have

(r + 2)(s + 1) = 16
(r + 1)(s + 2) = 15

Expanding the left sides of the two equations, we obtain

rs + r + 2s + 2 = 16
rs + 2r + s + 2 = 15

Subtracting the second of these equations from the first, we obtain −r + s = 1 and so s = r + 1.
Substituting into the equation (r + 2)(s + 1) = 16, we obtain (r + 2)(r + 2) = 16.
Since r > 0, then (r + 2)2 = 16 gives r + 2 = 4 and so r = 2, which gives s = 3.
Therefore, we could have r = 2, s = 3.
2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 13

Combining with the possible values of a3 and a4 , this means that we could have n = 22 53 p3 p4
for some primes p3 and p4 not equal to 2 or 5, or n = 22 53 p33 for some prime p3 not equal to 2
or 5.
We can verify that 2n and 5n have the correct number of positive divisors in each case.
Case 2: (a3 + 1)(a4 + 1) · · · (ak + 1) = 2
The only way in which 2 can be written as a product of positive integers each at least 2 is 2.
Thus, k = 3 with a3 + 1 = 2 (giving a3 = 1).
Since
(r + 2)(s + 1)(a3 + 1)(a4 + 1) · · · (ak + 1) = 64
(r + 1)(s + 2)(a3 + 1)(a4 + 1) · · · (ak + 1) = 60
then
(r + 2)(s + 1) = 32
(r + 1)(s + 2) = 30
We could proceed as in Case 1.
Alternatively, knowing that r and s are non-negative integers, then the possibilities from the
first equation are
r+2 s+1 r s r + 1 s + 2 (r + 2)(s + 1)
32 1 30 0 31 2 62
16 2 14 1 15 3 45
8 4 6 3 7 5 35
4 8 2 7 3 9 27
2 16 0 15 1 17 17
1 32 −1 31 0 33 0
There are no values of r and s that work in this case.
Case 3: (a3 + 1)(a4 + 1) · · · (ak + 1) = 1
Since each factor on the left side is supposedly at least 2, what can this mean? This actually
means that there are no factors on the left side. In other words, k = 2 and n = 2r 5s .
(See if you can follow the argument before Case 1 through to verify that there are no contra-
dictions.)
Here,
(r + 2)(s + 1) = 64
(r + 1)(s + 2) = 60
Knowing that r and s are non-negative integers, then the possibilities from the first equation
are
r+2 s+1 r s r + 1 s + 2 (r + 2)(s + 1)
64 1 62 0 63 2 126
32 2 30 1 31 3 93
16 4 14 3 15 5 45
8 8 6 7 7 9 63
4 16 2 13 3 15 51
2 32 0 31 1 33 33
1 64 −1 63 0 65 0
There are no values of r and s that work in this case.
2020 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 14

Therefore, combining the results of the three cases, the positive integer n satisfies the given
conditions exactly when

• n = 22 53 p3 p4 = 500p3 p4 for some primes p3 and p4 not equal to 2 or 5, or

• n = 22 53 p33 = 500p33 for some prime p3 not equal to 2 or 5.

Since n ≤ 20 000, then either

• 500p3 p4 ≤ 20 000 which gives p3 p4 ≤ 40, or

• 500p33 ≤ 20 000 which gives p33 ≤ 40.

It remains to determine the number of pairs of primes p3 and p4 that are not equal to 2 or 5
with product less than 40, and the number of primes p3 that are not equal to 2 or 5 whose cube
is less than 40.
In the first case, the possibilities are:

3 × 7 = 21 3 × 11 = 33 3 × 13 = 39

The order of p3 and p4 does not matter as switching the order gives the same value for n. We
note as well that we cannot have both p3 and p4 at least 7 and have their product at most 40.
In the second case, the only possibility is p33 = 33 .
This means that there are 4 possible values of n that satisfy the given conditions.
Answer: (A)
 The CENTRE for EDUCATION
in MATHEMATICS and COMPUTING
cemc.uwaterloo.ca

2019 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Tuesday, February 26, 2019

(in North America and South America)

Wednesday, February 27, 2019

(outside of North America and South America)

Solutions

©2018 University of Waterloo

2019 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2
1. Evaluating, 2 × 0 + 1 − 9 = 0 + 1 − 9 = −8.
Answer: (A)

2. Kai was born 25 years before 2020 and so was born in the year 2020 − 25 = 1995.
Answer: (C)

3. Since 38% of students received a muffin, then 100% − 38% = 62% of students did not receive
a muffin.
Alternatively, using the percentages of students who received yogurt, fruit or a granola bar, we
see that 10% + 27% + 25% = 62% did not receive a muffin.
Answer: (D)

4. Re-arranging the order of the numbers being multiplied,

(2 × 13 ) × (3 × 21 ) = 2 × 12 × 3 × 1
3
= (2 × 12 ) × (3 × 13 ) = 1 × 1 = 1
Answer: (C)

10d 520
5. Since 10d + 8 = 528, then 10d = 520 and so = which gives 2d = 104.
5 5
Answer: (A)

6. The line with equation y = x + 4 has a y-intercept of 4.

When the line is translated 6 units downwards, all points on the line are translated 6 units
down.
This moves the y-intercept from 4 to 4 − 6 = −2.
Answer: (E)
2 + x + 10
7. Since the average of 2, x and 10 is x, then = x.
3
Multiplying by 3, we obtain 2 + x + 10 = 3x.
Re-arranging, we obtain x + 12 = 3x and then 2x = 12 which gives x = 6.
Answer: (E)

8. To get from P to A, Alain travels 5 units right and 4 units up, for a total distance of 5 + 4 = 9
units. (Any path from P to A that only moves right and up will have this same length.)
To get from P to B, Alain travels 6 units right and 2 units up, for a total distance of 8 units.
To get from P to C, Alain travels 3 units right and 3 units up, for a total distance of 6 units.
To get from P to D, Alain travels 5 units right and 1 unit up, for a total distance of 6 units.
To get from P to E, Alain travels 1 unit right and 4 units up, for a total distance of 5 units.
Therefore, the shortest path is from P to E.
Answer: (E)

9. Since (pq)(qr)(rp) = 16, then pqqrrp = 16 or ppqqrr = 16 which gives p2 q 2 r2 = 16.

Thus, (pqr)2 = 16 and so pqr = ±4.
Using the given answers, pqr is positive and so pqr = 4.
Answer: (C)

10. Matilda and Ellie each take 21 of the wall.

Matilda paints 12 of her half, or 12 × 12 = 14 of the entire wall.
Ellie paints 13 of her half, or 13 × 21 = 16 of the entire wall.
Therefore, 14 + 16 = 12
3
+ 122
= 12 5
of the wall is painted red.
Answer: (A)
2019 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

11. We let the values in the two unlabelled circles be y and z, as shown.

100 500

x y 600

z 1119

2019

From the given rules, y + 600 = 1119 and so y = 519.

Also, z + 1119 = 2019 and so z = 900.
Finally, x + y = z and so x = z − y = 900 − 519 = 381.
Answer: (B)

12. Join P to R.

T Q

S R

Since P QRST is a regular pentagon, then ∠P QR = ∠QRS = 108◦ .

Since P Q = QR, then 4P QR is isosceles with ∠QP R = ∠QRP .
Since ∠P QR = 108◦ , then

∠P QR + ∠QP R + ∠QRP = 180◦

108◦ + 2∠QRP = 180◦
2∠QRP = 72◦
∠QRP = 36◦

Since ∠QRS = 108◦ , then ∠P RS = ∠QRS − ∠QRP = 108◦ − 36◦ = 72◦ .

Answer: (A)

13. From the ones column, we see that 3 + 2 + q must have a ones digit of 2.
Since q is between 1 and 9, inclusive, then 3 + 2 + q is beween 6 and 14.
Since its ones digit is 2, then 3 + 2 + q = 12 and so q = 7.
This also means that there is a carry of 1 into the tens column.
From the tens column, we see that 1 + 6 + p + 8 must have a ones digit of 4.
Since p is between 1 and 9, inclusive, then 1 + 6 + p + 8 is beween 16 and 24.
Since its ones digit is 4, then 1 + 6 + p + 8 = 24 and so p = 9.
2019 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

This also means that there is a carry of 2 into the hundreds column.
From the hundreds column, we see that 2 + n + 7 + 5 must have a ones digit of 0.
Since n is between 1 and 9, inclusive, then 2 + n + 7 + 5 is beween 15 and 23.
Since its ones digit is 0, then 2 + n + 7 + 5 = 20 and so n = 6.
This also means that there is a carry of 2 into the thousands column.
This means that m = 2.
This gives
663
792
+ 587
2 042
Thus, we have m + n + p + q = 2 + 6 + 9 + 7 = 24.
Answer: (B)

14. Each letter A, B, C, D, E appears exactly once in each column and each row.
The entry in the first column, second row cannot be A or E or B (the entries already present
in that column) and cannot be C or A (the entries already present in that row).
Therefore, the entry in the first column, second row must be D.
This means that the entry in the first column, fourth row must be C.
The entry in the fifth column, second row cannot be D or C or A or E and so must be B.
This means that the entry in the second column, second row must be E.
Using similar arguments, the entries in the first row, third and fourth columns must be D and
B, respectively.
This means that the entry in the second column, first row must be C.
Using similar arguments, the entries in the fifth row, second column must be A.
Also, the entry in the third row, second column must be D.
This means that the letter that goes in the square marked with ∗ must be B.
We can complete the grid as follows:

A C D B E
D E C A B
E D B C A
C B A E D
B A E D C
Answer: (B)

2−1 1
15. The slope of line segment P R is which equals − .
0−4 4
◦
Since ∠QP R = 90 , then P Q and P R are perpendicular.
This means that the slopes of P Q and P R have a product of −1.
1
Since the slope of P R is − , then the slope of P Q is 4.
4
Since the “run” of P Q is 2 − 0 = 2, then the “rise” of P Q must be 4 × 2 = 8.
Thus, s − 2 = 8 and so s = 10.
Answer: (C)
2019 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

16. Suppose that there are p people behind Kaukab.

This means that there are 2p people ahead of her.
Including Kaukab, the total number of people in line is n = p + 2p + 1 = 3p + 1, which is one
more than a multiple of 3.
Of the given choices (23, 20, 24, 21, 25), the only one that is one more than a multiple of 3 is
25, which equals 3 × 8 + 1.
Therefore, a possible value for n is 25.
Answer: (E)

17. Consider the triangular-based prism on the front of the rectangular prism.
This prism has five faces: a rectangle on the front, a rectangle on the left, a triangle on the
bottom, a triangle on the top, and a rectangle on the back.

3 3
5

12

The rectangle on the front measures 3 × 12 and so has area 36.

The rectangle on the left measures 3 × 5 and so has area 15.
The triangles on the top and bottom each are right-angled and have legs of length 5 and 12.
This means that each has area 21 × 12 × 5 = 30.
The rectangle on the back has height 3. The length of this rectangle is the length of the
diagonal √ of the bottom√ face of the√rectangular prism. By the Pythagorean Theorem, this
length is 52 + 122 = 25 + 144 = 169 = 13. Thus, this rectangle is 3 × 13 and so has area
39.
In total, the surface area of the triangular prism is thus 36 + 15 + 2 × 30 + 39 = 150.
Answer: (D)

18. André runs for 10 seconds at a speed of y m/s.

Therefore, André runs 10y m.
Carl runs for 20 seconds before André starts to run and then 10 seconds while André is running.
Thus, Carl runs for 30 seconds.
Since Carl runs at a speed of x m/s, then Carl runs 30x m.
y
Since André and Carl run the same distance, then 30x m = 10y m, which means that = 3.
x
Thus, y : x = 3 : 1.
Answer: (D)

2x+y
19. Using exponent laws, the expression = 2(x+y)−(x−y) = 22y .
2x−y
Since x and y are positive integers with xy = 6, then the possible values of y are the positive
divisors of 6, namely 1, 2, 3, or 6. (These correspond to x = 6, 3, 2, 1.)
The corresponding values of 22y are 22 = 4, 24 = 16, 26 = 64, and 212 = 4096.
2x+y
Therefore, the sum of the possible values of x−y is 4 + 16 + 64 + 4096 = 4180.
2
Answer: (A)
2019 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

20. Let the radii of the circles with centres X, Y and Z be x, y and z, respectively.
The distance between the centres of two touching circles equals the sum of the radii of these
circles.
Therefore, XY = x + y which means that x + y = 30.
Also, XZ = x + z which gives x + z = 40 and Y Z = y + z which gives y + z = 20.
Adding these three equations, we obtain (x + y) + (x + z) + (y + z) = 30 + 40 + 20 and so
2x + 2y + 2z = 90 or x + y + z = 45.
Since x + y = 30 and x + y + z = 45, then 30 + z = 45 and so z = 15.
Since y + z = 20, then y = 20 − z = 5.
Since x + z = 40, then x = 40 − z = 25.
Knowing the radii of the circles will allow us to calculate the dimensions of the rectangle.
The height of rectangle P QRS equals the “height” of the circle with centre X, which is length
of the diameter of the circle, or 2x.
Thus, the height of rectangle P QRS equals 50.
To calculate the width of rectangle P QRS, we join X to the points of tangency (that is, the
points where the circle touches the rectangle) T and U on P S and SR, respectively, Z to the
points of tangency V and W on SR and QR, respectively, and draw a perpendicular from Z
to H on XU .
Since radii are perpendicular to tangents at points of tangency, then XT , XU , ZV , and ZW
are perpendicular to the sides of the rectangle.

P Q

Y
X
T
Z
H W

S U V R

Each of XT SU and ZW RV has three right angles, and so must have four right angles and so
are rectangles.
Thus, SU = T X = 25 (the radius of the circle with centre X) and V R = ZW = 15 (the radius
of the circle with centre Z).
By a similar argument, HU V Z is also a rectangle.
Thus, U V = HZ and HU = ZV = 15.
Since XH = XU − HU , then XH = 10. √ √ √ √
By the Pythagorean Theorem, HZ = XZ 2 − XH 2 = 402 − 102 = 1500 = 10 15 and so
√
U V = 10 15. √ √
This means that SR = SU + U V + V R = 25 + 10 15 +√15 = 40 + 10 15.√
Therefore, the area of rectangle P QRS is 50 × (40 + 10 15) = 2000 + 500 15 ≈ 3936.5.
Of the given choices, this answer is closest to (E) 3950.
Answer: (E)
2019 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

21. Solution 1
We start with the ones digits.
Since 4 × 4 = 16, then T = 6 and we carry 1 to the tens column.
Looking at the tens column, since 4 × 6 + 1 = 25, then S = 5 and we carry 2 to the hundreds
column.
Looking at the hundreds column, since 4 × 5 + 2 = 22, then R = 2 and we carry 2 to the
thousands column.
Looking at the thousands column, since 4 × 2 + 2 = 10, then Q = 0 and we carry 1 to the ten
thousands column.
Looking at the ten thousands column, since 4 × 0 + 1 = 1, then P = 1 and we carry 0 to the
hundred thousands column.
Looking at the hundred thousands column, 4 × 1 + 0 = 4, as expected.
This gives the following completed multiplication:
1 0 2 5 64
× 4
4 1 0 2 56
Finally, P + Q + R + S + T = 1 + 0 + 2 + 5 + 6 = 14.

Solution 2
Let x be the five-digit integer with digits P QRST .
This means that P QRST 0 = 10x and so P QRST 4 = 10x + 4.
Also, 4P QRST = 400 000 + P QRST = 400 0000 + x.
From the given multiplication, 4(10x + 4) = 400 000 + x which gives 40x + 16 = 400 000 + x or
39x = 399 984.
399 984
Thus, x = = 10 256.
39
Since P QRST = 10 256, then P + Q + R + S + T = 1 + 0 + 2 + 5 + 6 = 14.
Answer: (A)

22. Here is one way in which the seven friends can ride on four buses so that the seven restrictions
are satisfied:
Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 3 Bus 4
Abu Bai Don Gia
Cha Fan Eva

At least 3 buses are needed because of the groups of 3 friends who must all be on different
buses.
We will now show that it is impossible for the 7 friends to travel on only 3 buses.
Suppose that the seven friends could be put on 3 buses.
Since Abu, Bai and Don are on 3 different buses, then we assign them to three buses that we
can call Bus 1, Bus 2 and Bus 3, respectively. (See the table below.)
Since Abu, Bai and Eva are on 3 different buses, then Eva must be on Bus 3.
Since Cha and Bai are on 2 different buses and Cha and Eva are on 2 different buses, then Cha
cannot be on Bus 2 or Bus 3, so Cha is on Bus 1.
So far, this gives

Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 3

Abu Bai Don
Cha Eva
2019 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

The remaining two friends are Fan and Gia.

Since Fan, Cha and Gia are on 3 different buses, then neither Fan nor Gia is on Bus 1.
Since Don, Gia and Fan are on 3 different buses, then neither Fan nor Gia is on Bus 3.
Since Gia and Fan are on separate buses, they cannot both be on Bus 2, which means that the
seven friends cannot be on 3 buses only.
Therefore, the minimum number of buses needed is 4.
Answer: (B)

23. Since the wheel turns at a constant speed, then the percentage of time when a shaded part of
the wheel touches a shaded part of the path will equal the percentange of the total length of
the path where there is “shaded on shaded” contact.
Since the wheel has radius 2 m, then its circumference is 2π × 2 m which equals 4π m.
Since the wheel is divided into four quarters, then the portion of the circumference taken by
each quarter is π m.
We call the left-hand end of the path 0 m.
As the wheel rotates once, the first shaded section of the wheel touches the path between 0 m
and π ≈ 3.14 m.
As the wheel continues to rotate, the second shaded section of the wheel touches the path
between 2π ≈ 6.28 m and 3π ≈ 9.42 m.
While the wheel makes 3 complete rotations, a shaded quarter will be in contact with the path
over 6 intervals (2 intervals per rotation).
The path is shaded for 1 m starting at each odd multiple of 1 m, and unshaded for 1 m starting
at each even multiple of 1 m.
We make a chart of the sections where shaded quarters touch the path and the parts of these
intervals that are shaded:

Beginning of quarter (m) End of quarter (m) Shaded parts of path (m)
0 π ≈ 3.14 1 to 2; 3 to π
2π ≈ 6.28 3π ≈ 9.42 7 to 8; 9 to 3π
4π ≈ 12.57 5π ≈ 15.71 13 to 14; 15 to 5π
6π ≈ 18.85 7π ≈ 21.99 19 to 20; 21 to 7π
8π ≈ 25.13 9π ≈ 28.27 8π to 26; 27 to 28
10π ≈ 31.42 11π ≈ 34.56 10π to 32; 33 to 34

Therefore, the total length of “shaded on shaded”, in metres, is

1 + (π − 3) + 1 + (3π − 9) + 1 + (5π − 15) + 1 + (7π − 21) + (26 − 8π) + 1 + (32 − 10π) + 1

which equals (16 − 2π) m.

The total length of the path along which the wheel rolls is 3 × 4π m or 12π m.
(16 − 2π) m
This means that the required percentage of time equals × 100% ≈ 25.8%.
12π m
Of the given choices, this is closest to 26%, or choice (E).
Answer: (E)
2019 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

24. We let A be the set {2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9}.

First, we note that the integer s that Roberta chooses is of the form s = 11m for some integer m
from the set A, and the integer t that Roberta chooses is of the form t = 101n for some integer n
from the set A.
This means that the product rst is equal to r(11m)(101n) = 11 × 101 × rmn where each of
r, m, n comes from the set A.
This means that the number of possible values for rst is equal to the number of possible values
of rmn, and so we count the number of possible values of rst by counting the number of possible
values of rmn.
We note that A contains only one multiple of 5 and one multiple of 7. Furthermore, these
multiples include only one factor of 5 and 7 each, respectively.
We count the number of possible values for rmn by considering the different possibilities for
the number of factors of 5 and 7 in rmn.
Let y be the number of factors of 5 in rmn and let z be the number of factors of 7 in rmn.
Note that since each of r, m and n includes at most one factor of 5 and at most one factor of 7
and each of r, m and n cannot contain both a factor of 5 and a factor of 7, then y + z is at
most 3.
Case 1: y = 3
If rmn includes 3 factors of 5, then r = m = n = 5 and so rmn = 53 .
This means that there is only one possible value for rmn.
Case 2: z = 3
Here, it must be the case that rmn = 73 and so there is only one possible value for rmn.
Case 3: y = 2 and z = 1
Here, it must be the case that two of r, m, n are 5 and the other is 7.
In other words, rmn must equal 52 × 7.
This means that there is only one possible value for rmn.
Case 4: y = 1 and z = 2
Here, rmn must equal 5 × 72 .
This means that there is only one possible value for rmn.
Case 5: y = 2 and z = 0
Here, two of r, m, n must equal 5 and the third cannot be 5 or 7.
This means that the possible values for the third of these are 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9.
This means that there are 6 possible values for rmn in this case.
Case 6: y = 0 and z = 2
As in Case 5, there are 6 possible values for rmn.
Case 7: y = 1 and z = 1
Here, one of r, m, n equals 5, one equals 7, and the other must be one of 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9.
This means that there are 6 possible values for rmn in this case.
Case 8: y = 1 and z = 0
Here, one of r, m, n equals 5 and none of these equal 7. Suppose that r = 5.
Each of m and n equals one of 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9.
2019 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10

We make a multiplication table to determine the possible values of mn:

× 2 3 4 6 8 9
2 4 6 8 12 16 18
3 6 9 12 18 24 27
4 8 12 16 24 32 36
6 12 18 24 36 48 54
8 16 24 32 48 64 72
9 18 27 36 54 72 81

The different values in this table are

4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 16, 18, 24, 27, 32, 36, 48, 54, 64, 72, 81

of which there are 16.

Therefore, there are 16 possible values of rmn in this case.
Case 9: y = 0 and z = 1
As in Case 8, there are 16 possible values of rmn.
Case 10: y = 0 and z = 0
Here, none of r, m, n is 5 or 7.
This means that each of r, m, n equals one of 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9.
This means that the only possible prime factors of rmn are 2 and 3.
Each of 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9 includes at most 2 factors of 3 and only 9 includes 2 factors of 3.
This means that rmn contains at most 6 factors of 3.
Let w be the number of factors of 3 in rmn.

• If w = 6, then r = m = n = 9 and so rmn = 93 . There is one value of rmn here.

• If w = 5, then two of r, m, n equal 9 and the third is 3 or 6. This means that rmn = 92 × 3
or rmn = 92 × 6. There are two values of rmn here.
• If w = 4, then either two of r, m, n equal 9 and the third does not include a factor of 3, or
one of r, m, n equals 9 and the second and third are each 3 or 6.
Thus, rmn can equal 92 × 2, 92 × 4, 92 × 8, 9 × 3 × 3, 9 × 3 × 6, or 9 × 6 × 6.
There is duplication in this list and so the values of rmn are 92 , 92 × 2, 92 × 4, 92 × 8.
There are four values of rmn here.
• If w = 3, we can have one of r, m, n equal to 9, one equal to 3 or 6, and the last equal to
2, 4 or 8, or we can have each of r, m, n equal to 3 or 6.
In the first situation, rmn can be 9 × 3 × 2, 9 × 3 × 4, 9 × 3 × 8, 9 × 6 × 2, 9 × 6 × 4,
9 × 6 × 8.
These can be written as 27 × 21 , 27 × 22 , 27 × 23 , 27 × 24 .
In the second situation, rmn can be 3 × 3 × 3, 3 × 3 × 6, 3 × 6 × 6, 6 × 6 × 6.
These equal 27, 27 × 21 , 27 × 22 , 27 × 23 .
Combining lists, we get 27, 27 × 21 , 27 × 22 , 27 × 23 , 27 × 24 .
Therefore, in this case there are 5 possible values for rmn.
• If w = 2, then either one of r, m, n equals 9 or two of r, m, n equal 3 or 6.
In the first situation, the other two of r, m, n equal 2, 4 or 8.
Note that 2 = 21 and 4 = 22 and 8 = 23 .
Thus rmn contains at least 2 factors of 2 (for example, rmn = 9 × 2 × 2) and contains at
most 6 factors of 2 (rmn = 9 × 8 × 8).
2019 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11

If two of r, m, n equal 3 or 6, then the third equals 2, 4 or 8.

Thus, rmn contains at least 1 factor of 2 (rmn = 3 × 3 × 2) and at most 5 factors of 2
(rmn = 6 × 6 × 8).
Combining these possibilities, rmn can equal 9 × 2, 9 × 22 , . . . , 9 × 26 , and so there are 6
possible values of rmn in this case.
• If w = 1, then one of r, m, n equals 3 or 6, and the other two equal 2, 4 or 8.
Thus, rmn can contain at most 7 factors of 2 (rmn = 6 × 8 × 8) and must contain at least
2 factors of 2 (rmn = 3 × 2 × 2).
Each of the number of factors of 2 between 2 and 7, inclusive, is possible, so there are 6
possible values of rmn.
• If w = 0, then none of r, m, n can equal 3, 6 or 9.
Thus, each of r, m, n equals 21 , 22 or 23 .
Thus, rmn must be a power of 2 and includes at least 3 and no more than 9 factors of 2.
Each of these is possible, so there are 7 possible values of rmn.

In total, the number of possible values of rmn (and hence of rst) is

2 × 1 + 2 × 1 + 2 × 6 + 6 + 2 × 16 + (1 + 2 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 6 + 7)

which equals 85.

Answer: (A)
2019 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 12

25. Suppose that P Q = a, P S = b and P U = c.

Since P QRST U V W is a rectangular prism, then QR = P S = b and ST = QV = P U = c.
By the Pythagorean Theorem, P R2 = P Q2 + QR2 and so 18672 = a2 + b2 .
By the Pythagorean Theorem, P V 2 = P Q2 + QV 2 and so 20192 = a2 + c2 .
By the Pythagorean Theorem, P T 2 = P S 2 + ST 2 and so x2 = b2 + c2 .
Adding these three equations, we obtain

18672 + 20192 + x2 = (a2 + b2 ) + (a2 + c2 ) + (b2 + c2 )

18672 + 20192 + x2 = 2a2 + 2b2 + 2c2
18672 + 20192 + x2
a2 + b 2 + c 2 =
2
Since a2 + b2 = 18672 , then

2 2 2 2 2 18672 + 20192 + x2
2 2 −18672 + 20192 + x2
c = (a + b + c ) − (a + b ) = − 1867 =
2 2
Since a2 + c2 = 20192 , then

18672 + 20192 + x2 18672 − 20192 + x2

b2 = (a2 + b2 + c2 ) − (a2 + c2 ) = − 20192 =
2 2
Since b2 + c2 = x2 , then

18672 + 20192 + x2 18672 + 20192 − x2

a2 = (a2 + b2 + c2 ) − (b2 + c2 ) = − x2 =
2 2
Since a, b and c are edge lengths of the prism, then a, b, c > 0.
18672 + 20192 − x2
Since a2 > 0, then > 0 and so 18672 + 20192 − x2 > 0 or x2 < 20192 + 18672 .
2
18672 − 20192 + x2
Since b2 > 0, then > 0 and so 18672 − 20192 + x2 > 0 or x2 > 20192 − 18672 .
2
−18672 + 20192 + x2
Since c2 > 0, then > 0 and so −18672 + 20192 + x2 > 0 which means that
2
x2 > 18672 − 20192 .
Since the right side of this last inequality is negative and the left side is non-negative, then this
inequality is always true.
Therefore, it must be true that 20192 − 18672 < x2 < 20192 + 18672 .
√ √
Since all three parts of this inequality are positive, then 20192 − 18672 < x < 20192 + 18672 .
√ √
Since 20192 − 18672 ≈ 768.55 and 20192 + 18672 ≈ 2749.92 and x is an integer, then
769 ≤ x ≤ 2749.
The number of integers x in this range is 2749 − 769 + 1 = 1981.
Every such value of x gives positive values for a2 , b2 and c2 and so positive values for a, b and
c, and so a rectangular prism P QRST U V W with the correct lengths of face diagonals.
Therefore, there are 1981 such integers x.
Answer: (E)
 The CENTRE for EDUCATION
in MATHEMATICS and COMPUTING
cemc.uwaterloo.ca

2018 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Tuesday, February 27, 2018

(in North America and South America)

Wednesday, February 28, 2018

(outside of North America and South America)

Solutions

©2017 University of Waterloo

2018 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2
12
1. Since 3 × n = 6 × 2, then 3n = 12 or n = 3
= 4.
Answer: (E)

2. The 4 × 5 grid contains 20 squares that are 1 × 1.

For half of these to be shaded, 10 must be shaded.
Since 3 are already shaded, then 10 − 3 = 7 more need to be shaded.
Answer: (C)

3. Since the number line between 0 and 2 is divided into 8 equal parts, then the portions between
0 and 1 and between 1 and 2 are each divided into 4 equal parts.
In other words, the divisions on the number line mark off quarters, and so S = 1 + 0.25 = 1.25.
Answer: (D)

4. Since 9 = 3 × 3, then 94 = (3 × 3)4 = 34 × 34 = 38 .

Alternatively, we can note that

94 = 9 × 9 × 9 × 9 = (3 × 3) × (3 × 3) × (3 × 3) × (3 × 3) = 38
Answer: (D)

5. The entire central angle in a circle measures 360◦ .

◦
In the diagram, the central angle which measures 120◦ represents 120 360◦
= 13 of the entire central
angle.
Therefore, the area of the sector is 13 of the area of the entire circle, or 13 × 9π = 3π.
Answer: (B)

6. For any value of x, we have x2 + 2x − x(x + 1) = x2 + 2x − x2 − x = x.

When x = 2018, the value of this expression is thus 2018.
Answer: (B)

7. We want to calculate the percentage increase from 24 to 48.

48 − 24
The percentage increase from 24 to 48 is equal to × 100% = 1 × 100% = 100%.
24
Alternatively, since 48 is twice 24, then 48 represents an increase of 100% over 24.
Answer: (D)

8. A line segment joining two points is parallel to the x-axis exactly when the y-coordinates of
the two points are equal.
Here, this means that 2k + 1 = 4k − 5 and so 6 = 2k or k = 3.
(We can check that when k = 3, the coordinates of the points are (3, 7) and (8, 7).)
Answer: (B)

5+a+b
9. Since 5, a, b have an average of 33, then = 33.
3
Multiplying by 3, we obtain 5 + a + b = 3 × 33 = 99, which means that a + b = 94.
a+b 94
The average of a and b is thus equal to = = 47.
2 2
Answer: (E)
2018 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

10. Of the given uniform numbers,

• 11 and 13 are prime numbers

• 16 is a perfect square
• 12, 14 and 16 are even

Since Karl’s and Liu’s numbers were prime numbers, then their numbers were 11 and 13 in
some order.
Since Glenda’s number was a perfect square, then her number was 16.
Since Helga’s and Julia’s numbers were even, then their numbers were 12 and 14 in some order.
(The number 16 is already taken.)
Thus, Ioana’s number is the remaining number, which is 15.
Answer: (D)

11. Solution 1
The large square has side length 4, and so has area 42 = 16.
The small square has side length 1, and so has area 12 = 1.
The combined area of the four identical trapezoids is the difference in these areas, or 16−1 = 15.
Since the 4 trapezoids are identical, then they have equal areas, each equal to 15 4
.

Solution 2 4
Suppose that the height of each of the four trapezoids is h.
Since the side length of the outer square is 4, then h + 1 + h = 4 and h
1
so h = 23 .
1
Each of the four trapezoids has parallel bases of lengths 1 and 4, and
height 32 . h
Therefore, the area of each is 12 (1 + 4)( 32 ) = 25 32 = 15


4
.
Answer: (D)

12. We are told that 1 Zed is equal in value to 16 Exes.

We are also told that 2 Exes are equal in value to 29 Wyes.
Since 16 Exes is 8 groups of 2 Exes, then 16 Exes are equal in value to 8 × 29 = 232 Wyes.
Thus, 1 Zed is equal in value to 232 Wyes.
Answer: (C)

13. The problem is equivalent to determining all values of x for which x + 1 is a divisor of 3.
The divisors of 3 are 3, −3, 1, −1.
If x + 1 = 3, −3, 1, −1, then x = 2, −4, 0, −2, respectively. There are 4 such values.
Answer: (A)
2018 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

14. Solution 1 y
The line segment with endpoints (−9, −2) and (6, 8) has
8 − (−2) 10 2 (6, 8)
slope = = .
6 − (−9) 15 3 (3, 6)
This means that starting at (−9, −2) and moving “up 2 (–3, 2) (0, 4)
and right 3” (corresponding to the rise and run of 2 and x
3) repeatedly will give other points on the line that have (–6, 0) O
coordinates which are both integers. (–9, –2)
These points are (−9, −2), (−6, 0), (−3, 2), (0, 4), (3, 6), (6, 8).
So far, this gives 6 points on the line with integer coordi-
nates.
Are there any other such points?
If there were such a point between (−9, −2) and (6, 8), its y-coordinate would have to be equal
to one of −1, 1, 3, 5, 7, the other integer possibilities between −2 and 8.
Consider the point on this line segment with y-coordinate 7.
Since this point has y-coordinate halfway between 6 and 8, then this point must be the mid-
point of (3, 6) and (6, 8), which means that its x-coordinate is 12 (3 + 6) = 4.5, which is not an
integer.
In a similar way, the points on the line segment with y-coordinates −1, 1, 3, 5 do not have in-
teger x-coordinates.
Therefore, the 6 points listed before are the only points on this line segment with integer coor-
dinates.

Solution 2
8 − (−2) 10 2
The line segment with endpoints (−9, −2) and (6, 8) has slope = = .
6 − (−9) 15 3
Since the line passes through (6, 8), its equation can be written as y −8 = 32 (x−6) or y = 23 x+4.
Suppose that a point (x, y) lies along with line between (−9, −2) and (6, 8) and has both x and
y integers.
Since y is an integer and 23 x = y − 4, then 23 x is an integer.
This means that x must be a multiple of 3.
Since x is between −9 and 6, inclusive, then the possible values for x are −9, −6, −3, 0, 3, 6.
This leads to the points listed in Solution 1, and justifies why there are no additional points.
Therefore, there are 6 such points.
Answer: (E)

15. Since 4P QS is equilateral, then ∠QP S = 60◦ .

Since ∠RP Q, ∠RP S and ∠QP S completely surround point P , then the sum of their measures
is 360◦ .
Since ∠RP Q = ∠RP S, this means that 2∠RP Q + ∠QP S = 360◦ or 2∠RP Q = 360◦ − 60◦ ,
which means that ∠RP Q = ∠RP S = 150◦ .
Since P R = P Q, then in isosceles 4P QR, we have

∠P RQ = ∠P QR = 12 (180◦ − ∠RP Q) = 12 (180◦ − 150◦ ) = 15◦

Similarly, ∠P RS = ∠P SR = 15◦ .
This means that ∠QRS = ∠P RQ + ∠P RS = 15◦ + 15◦ = 30◦ .
Answer: (A)
2018 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

16. Elisabeth climbs a total of 5 rungs by climbing either 1 or 2 rungs at a time.

Since there are only 5 rungs, then she cannot climb 2 rungs at a time more than 2 times.
Therefore, she must climb 2 rungs either 0, 1 or 2 times.
If she climbs 2 rungs 0 times, then each step consists of 1 rung and so she climbs 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 to
get to the top.
If she climbs 2 rungs 1 time, then she climbs 2, 1, 1, 1, since the remaining 3 rungs must be
made up of steps of 1 rung.
But she can climb these numbers of rungs in several different orders.
Since she takes four steps, she can climb 2 rungs as any of her 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th step.
Putting this another way, she can climb 2, 1, 1, 1 or 1, 2, 1, 1 or 1, 1, 2, 1 or 1, 1, 1, 2.
There are 4 possibilities in this case.
If she climbs 2 rungs 2 times, then she climbs 2, 2, 1.
Again, she can climb these numbers of rungs in several different orders.
Since she takes three steps, she can climb 1 rung as any of her 1st, 2nd or 3rd step.
Putting this another way, she can climb 1, 2, 2 or 2, 1, 2 or 2, 2, 1.
There are 3 possibilities in this case.
In total, there are 1 + 4 + 3 = 8 ways in which she can climb.
Answer: (E)

x−y
17. Since = 5, then x − y = 5(x + y).
x+y
This means that x − y = 5x + 5y and so 0 = 4x + 6y or 2x + 3y = 0.
2x + 3y 0
Therefore, = = 0.
3x − 2y 3x − 2y
(A specific example of x and y that works is x = 3 and y = −2.
x−y 3 − (−2) 5 2x + 3y 2(3) + 3(−2) 0
This gives = = = 5 and = = = 0.)
x+y 3 + (−2) 1 3x − 2y 3(3) − 2(−2) 13
x−y
We should also note that if = 5, then 2x + 3y = 0 (from above) and x and y cannot both
x+y
x−y
be 0 (for to be well-defined).
x+y
Since 2x + 3y = 0, then x = − 32 y which means that it is not possible for only one of x and y
to be 0, which means that neither is 0.
2x + 3y
Also, the denominator of our desired expression is 3x − 2y = 3(− 23 y)) − 2y = − 13
2
y
3x − 2y
which is not 0, since y 6= 0.
x−y 2x + 3y
Therefore, if = 5, then = 0.
x+y 3x − 2y
Answer: (B)
2018 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

18. Solution 1
The lines with equations x = 0 and x = 4 are parallel
vertical lines. y y=x+3
The lines with equations y = x − 2 and y = x + 3 are parallel (4, 7)
lines with slope 1.
Since the quadrilateral has two sets of parallel sides, it is a (0, 3) y=x–2
parallelogram.
(4, 2)
Thus, its area equals the length of its base times its height. x
We consider the vertical side along the y-axis as its base. (0, –2)
Since the two sides of slope 1 have y-intercepts −2 and 3, x=4
then the length of the vertical base is 3 − (−2) = 5.
Since the parallel vertical sides lie along the lines with
equations x = 0 and x = 4, then these sides are a distance
of 4 apart, which means that the height of the parallelogram
is 4.
Therefore, the area of the quadrilateral is 5 × 4 = 20.
Solution 2
The lines with equations x = 0 and x = 4 are parallel vertical
lines. y y=x+3
The lines with equations y = x − 2 and y = x + 3 are parallel
(0, 7) (4, 7)
lines with slope 1.
The lines with equations y = x − 2 and y = x + 3 intersect (0, 3) y=x–2
the line with equation x = 0 at their y-intercepts, namely
(4, 2)
−2 and 3, respectivley. x
The lines with equations y = x − 2 and y = x + 3 intersect (0, –2) (4, –2)
the line with equation x = 4 at (4, 2) and (4, 7), respectively x=4
(the point on each line with x-coordinate 4).
We draw horizontal lines through (0, −2), intersecting x = 4
at (4, −2), and through (4, 7), intersecting x = 0 at (0, 7).
The area of the quadrilateral equals the area of the large rectangle with vertices (0, 7), (4, 7),
(4, −2), (0, −2) minus the combined area of the two triangles.
This rectangle has side lengths 4 − 0 = 4 and 7 − (−2) = 9 and so has area 4 × 9 = 36.
The two triangles are right-angled and have bases of length 4 − 0 = 4 and heights of length
7 − 3 = 4 and 2 − (−2) = 4. This means that they can be combined to form a square with side
length 4, and so have combined area 42 = 16.
Therefore, the area of the quadrilateral is 36 − 16 = 20.
Answer: (E)

19. Suppose that L is the area of the large circle, S is the area of the small circle, and A is the area
of the overlapped region.
Since the area of the overlapped region is 53 of the area of the small circle, then A = 53 S.
6 6
Since the area of the overlapped region is 25 of the area of the large circle, then A = 25 L.
3 6
Therefore, 5 S = 25 L.
Multiplying both sides by 25 to clear denominators, we obtain 15S = 6L.
5S S 2
Dividing both sides by 3, we obtain 5S = 2L. Therefore, = 2 or = .
L L 5
This means that the ratio of the area of the small circle to the area of the large circle is 2 : 5.
Answer: (D)
2018 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

20. When the product of the three integers is calculated, either the product is a power of 2 or it is
not a power of 2.
If p is the probability that the product is a power of 2 and q is the probability that the product
is not a power of 2, then p + q = 1.
Therefore, we can calculate q by calculating p and noting that q = 1 − p.
For the product of the three integers to be a power of 2, it can have no prime factors other
than 2. In particular, this means that each of the three integers must be a power of 2.
In each of the three sets, there are 3 powers of 2 (namely, 2, 4 and 8) and 2 integers that are
not a power of 2 (namely, 6 and 10).
This means that the probability of choosing a power of 2 at random from each of the sets is 35 .
Since Abigail, Bill and Charlie
choose their numbers independently, then the probability that
3
each chooses a power of 2 is 53 = 125 27
.
27 27 98
In other words, p = 125 and so q = 1 − p = 1 − 125 = 125 .
Answer: (C)

21. Since each of s, t, u, v is equal to one of 1, 2 or 3, and s and t are different and u and v are
different, then their sum cannot be any larger than 2 + 3 + 2 + 3 = 10.
This can only happen if s and t are 2 and 3 in some order, and if u and v are 2 and 3 in some
order.

q 3
p
r 2

But q, s, t are 1, 2, 3 in some order and r, u, v are 1, 2, 3 in some order.

So if s and t are 2 and 3, then q = 1. Similarly, if u and v are 2 and 3, then r = 1.
But p, q, r are 1, 2, 3 in some order, so we cannot have q = r = 1.
Therefore, we cannot have s + t + u + v = 10.
The next largest possible value of s + t + u + v would be 9.
We can construct the diagram with this value of s + t + u + v by letting s = 1, t = 3, u = 2,
v = 3, and proceeding as follows:

2 3
3
1 2

Therefore, the maximum possible value of s + t + u + v is 9.

Answer: (B)
2018 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

22. For the given expression to be equal to an integer, each prime factor of the denominator must
divide out of the product in the numerator.
In other words, each prime number that is a factor of the denominator must occur as a factor
at least as many times in the numerator as in the denominator.
We note that 25 = 52 and so 25y = 52y .
Also, 36 = 62 = 22 32 and so 36x = (22 32 )x = 22x 32x .
30!
Therefore, the given expression is equal to 2x 2x 2y .
2 3 5
We count the number of times that each of 5, 3 and 2 is a factor of the numerator.
The product equal to 30! includes six factors which are multiples of 5, namely 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30.
Each of these factors includes 1 factor of 5, except for 25 which includes 2 factors.
Therefore, the numerator includes 7 factors of 5.
For the numerator to include at least as many factors of 5 as the denominator, we must have
7 ≥ 2y.
Since y is an integer, then y ≤ 3.
The product equal to 30! includes 10 factors which are multiples of 3, namely 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21,
24, 27, 30.
Seven of these include exactly one factor of 3, namely 3, 6, 12, 15, 21, 24, 30.
Two of these include exactly two factors of 3, namely 9, 18.
One of these includes exactly three factors of 3, namely 27.
Therefore, the numerator includes 7(1) + 2(2) + 1(3) = 14 factors of 3.
For the numerator to include at least as many factors of 3 as the denominator, we must have
14 ≥ 2x.
Since x is an integer, then x ≤ 7.
If x ≤ 7, then the denominator includes at most 14 factors of 2. Since the product equal to 30!
includes 15 even numbers, then the numerator includes at least 15 factors of 2, and so includes
more factors of 2 than the denominator. This means that the number of 2s does not limit the
value of x.
Since x ≤ 7 and y ≤ 3, then x + y ≤ 7 + 3 = 10.
We note that if x = 7 and y = 3, then the given expression is an integer so this maximum can
be achieved.
Answer: (A)
2018 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

23. To determine the volume of the prism, we calculate the area of its base and the height of the
prism.
First, we calculate the area of its base.
Any cross-section of the prism parallel to its base has the same shape, so we take a cross-section
1 unit above the base.
Since each of the spheres has radius 1, this triangular cross-section will pass through the centre
of each of the spheres and the points of tangency between the spheres and the rectangular faces.
Let the vertices of the triangular cross-section be A, B and C, the centres of the spheres be X,
Y and Z, and the points of tangency of the spheres (circles) to the faces of the prism (sides of
the triangle) be M , N , P , Q, R, and S, as shown:

M S
X
N R
Y Z
B P Q C

Join X to M , S, Y , Z, A, join Y to N , P , Z, B, and Z to Q, R, C.

We determine the length of BC. A similar calculation will determine the lengths of AB and
AC. By symmetry, AB = AC = BC.
Note that Y P and ZQ are perpendicular to BC since radii are perpendicular to tangents.
Also, Y P = ZQ = 1 since the radius of each sphere (and hence of each circle) is 1.
Since ZY P Q has right angles at P and Q and has Y P = ZQ = 1, then ZY P Q is a rectangle.
Therefore, Y Z = P Q.
Since Y Z passes through the point at which the circles touch, then Y Z equals the sum of the
radii of the circles, or 2.
Thus, P Q = Y Z = 2.
Since AB = BC = CA, then 4ABC is equilateral and so ∠ABC = 60◦ .
Now YB bisects ∠ABC, by symmetry.
This means that ∠YBP = √ 30◦ , which means that 4BYP is a 30◦ -60◦ -90◦ triangle.
◦ ◦ ◦
Since YP = 1, then √ BP = 3, using the ratios of side lengths in a 30 -60 -90 triangle.
Similarly, QC = 3. √ √ √
Therefore, BC = BP + P Q + QC = 3 +√2 + 3 = 2 + 2 3.
This means that AB = BC = CA = 2 + 2 3.
To calculate the area of 4ABC, we drop a perpendicular from A to T on BC.

B T C

◦ ◦ ◦ ◦
Since ∠ABC = 60√ , then 4ABT is
√ a 30 -60
√ -90 triangle.
√
3 3
Since AB = 2 + 2 3, then AT = 2 AB = 2 (2 + 2 3). 
√ √ √  √ √
Therefore, the area of 4ABC is 12 (BC)(AT ) = 21 (2 + 2 3) 23 (2 + 2 3) = 4
3
(2 + 2 3)2 .
2018 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10
√ √
This means that the area of the base of the prism (which is 4ABC) is 43 (2 + 2 3)2 .
Now we calculate the height of the prism.
Let the centre of the top sphere be W .
The vertical distance from W to the top face of the prism equals the radius of the sphere, which
is 1.
Similarly, the vertical distance from the bottom face to the plane through X, Y and Z is 1.
To finish calculating the height of the prism, we need to determine the vertical distance between
the cross-section through X, Y , Z and the point W .
The total height of the prism equals 2 plus this height.
Since the four spheres touch, then the distance between any pair of centres is the sum of the
radii, which is 2.
Therefore, W X = XY = Y Z = W Z = W Y = XZ = 2. (This means that W XY Z is a
tetrahedron with equal edge lengths.)
We need to calculate the height of this tetrahedron.
Join W to the centre, V , of 4XY Z.
By symmetry, W is directly above V .

V
Y G Z

Let G be the midpoint of Y Z. This means that Y G = GZ = 1.

Join V to Y and G.
Since V is the centre of 4XY Z, then V G is perpendicular to Y Z at G.
Since 4XY Z is equilateral, then ∠V Y G = 12 ∠XY Z = 30◦ . This is because V , the centre of
equilateral 4XY Z, lies on the angle bisectors of each of the angles.
4Y V G is another 30◦ -60◦ -90◦ triangle, and so Y V = √23 Y G = √23 .
Finally, 4W Y V is right-angledq at V .
√ q
Thus, W V = W Y − Y V = 2 − 3 = 83 .
2 2 2 4
q
This means that the height of the prism is 1 + 1 + 83 .
The volume of the prism
q  is equal to the area of its base times its height, which is equal to
√
3
√ 2
4
(2 + 2 3) · 2 + 83 which is approximately 46.97.
Of the given answers, this is closest to 47.00.
Answer: (E)
2018 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11

24. Since there must be at least 2 gold socks (G) between any 2 black socks (B), then we start by
placing the n black socks with exactly 2 gold socks in between each pair:

BGGBGGBGGB · · · BGGB

Since there are n black socks, then there are n − 1 “gaps” between them and so 2(n − 1) or
2n − 2 gold socks have been used.
This means that there are 2 gold socks left to place. There are n + 1 locations in which these
socks can be placed: either before the first black sock, after the last black sock, or in one of the
n − 1 gaps.
These 2 socks can either be placed together in one location or separately in two locations.
If the 2 socks are placed together, they can be placed in any one of the n + 1 locations, and so
there are n + 1 ways to do this. (The placement of the gold socks within these locations does
not matter as the gold socks are all identical.)
The other possibility is that the 2 gold socks are placed separately in two of these n + 1 spots.
There are n + 1 possible locations for the first of these socks. For each of these, there are then
n possible locations for the second of these socks (any other than the location of the first sock).
Since these two socks are identical, we have double-counted the total number of possibilities,
and so there are 21 (n + 1)n ways for these two gold socks to be placed.
In total, there are (n + 1) + 12 (n + 1)n = (n + 1)(1 + 12 n) = 12 (n + 1)(n + 2) ways in which the
socks can be arranged.
We want to determine the smallest positive integer n for which this total is greater than
1 000 000.
This is equivalent to determining the smallest positive integer n for which (n + 1)(n + 2) is
greater than 2 000 000.
We note that (n + 1)(n + 2) increases as n increases, since each of n + 1 and n + 2 is positive
and increasing, and so their product is increasing.
When n = 1412, we have (n + 1)(n + 2) = 1 997 982.
When n = 1413, we have (n + 1)(n + 2) = 2 000 810.
Since (n + 1)(n + 2) is increasing, then n = 1413 is the smallest positive integer for which
(n + 1)(n + 2) is greater than 2 000 000, and so it is the smallest positive integer for which there
are more than 1 000 000 arrangements of the socks.
The sum of the digits of n = 1413 is 1 + 4 + 1 + 3 = 9.
Answer: (A)
2018 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 12

25. Since the terms in each such sequence can be grouped to get both positive and negative sums,
then there must be terms that are positive and there must be terms that are negative.
Since the 15 terms have at most two different values and there are terms that are positive and
terms that are negative, then the terms have exactly two different values, one positive and one
negative.
We will call these values x and y. We know that both are integers and we will add the condition
that x > 0 and y < 0.
Consider one of these sequences and label the terms

a1 , a2 , a3 , a4 , a5 , a6 , a7 , a8 , a9 , a10 , a11 , a12 , a13 , a14 , a15

Since the sum of six consecutive terms is always positive, then a1 + a2 + a3 + a4 + a5 + a6 > 0.
Since the sum of eleven consecutive terms is always negative, then a1 + a2 + a3 + a4 + a5 + a6 +
a7 + a8 + a9 + a10 + a11 < 0.
Since a1 +a2 +a3 +a4 +a5 +a6 > 0 and (a1 +a2 +a3 +a4 +a5 +a6 )+(a7 +a8 +a9 +a10 +a11 ) < 0,
then a7 + a8 + a9 + a10 + a11 < 0.
The six term condition also tells us that a6 + a7 + a8 + a9 + a10 + a11 > 0.
Since a7 + a8 + a9 + a10 + a11 < 0 and a6 + (a7 + a8 + a9 + a10 + a11 ) > 0, then a6 > 0 and so
a6 = x.
The six term condition also tells us that a7 + a8 + a9 + a10 + a11 + a12 > 0.
Since a7 + a8 + a9 + a10 + a11 < 0, then a12 > 0 which gives a12 = x.
We can repeat this argument by shifting all of the terms one further along in the sequence.
Starting with a2 +a3 +a4 +a5 +a6 +a7 > 0 and a2 +a3 +a4 +a5 +a6 +a7 +a8 +a9 +a10 +a11 +a12 < 0
and using the same arguments as above will give a7 = a13 = x.
By continuing to shift one more term further along twice more, we obtain a8 = a14 = x and
a9 = a15 = x.
So far this gives the sequence

a1 , a2 , a3 , a4 , a5 , x, x, x, x, a10 , a11 , x, x, x, x

We can continue to repeat this argument by starting at the right-hand end of the sequence.
Starting with a10 + a11 + a12 + a13 + a14 + a15 > 0 and a5 + a6 + a7 + a8 + a9 + a10 + a11 + a12 +
a13 + a14 + a15 < 0, will allow us to conclude that a10 = x and a4 = x.
Shifting back to the left and repeating this argument gives a1 = a2 = a3 = a4 = a10 = x.
This means that the sequence has the form

x, x, x, x, a5 , x, x, x, x, x, a11 , x, x, x, x

At least one of a5 and a11 must equal y, otherwise all of the terms in the sequence would be
positive.
In fact, it must be the case that both of these terms equal y.
To see this, suppose that a5 = y but a11 = x.
In this case, the sum of the first 6 terms in the sequence is 5x + y which is positive (that is,
5x + y > 0).
Also, the sum of the first 11 terms in the sequence is 10x + y which is negative (that is,
10x + y < 0).
But x > 0 and so 10x + y = 5x + (5x + y) > 0, which contradicts 10x + y < 0.
We would obtain the same result if we considered the possibility that a5 = x and a11 = y.
Therefore, a5 = a11 = y and so the sequence must be

x, x, x, x, y, x, x, x, x, x, y, x, x, x, x
2018 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 13

In this case, each group of 6 consecutive terms includes exactly 5 x’s and so the sum of each
group of 6 consecutive terms is 5x + y.
We are told that 5x + y > 0.
Also, the sum of each group of 11 consecutive terms is 9x + 2y.
We are told that 9x + 2y < 0.
We have now changed the original problem into an equivalent problem: count the number of
pairs (x, y) of integers with x > 0 and y < 0 and 5x + y > 0 and 9x + 2y < 0 and either x is
between 1 and 16, inclusive, or y is between −16 and −1, inclusive.
Suppose that 1 ≤ x ≤ 16.
From 5x + y > 0 and 9x + 2y < 0, we obtain −5x < y < −4.5x.
We can now make a chart that enumerates the values of x from 1 to 16, the corresponding
bounds on y, and the resulting possible values of y:

x −5x −4.5x Possible y

1 −5 −4.5 None
2 −10 −9 None
3 −15 −13.5 −14
4 −20 −18 −19
5 −25 −22.5 −24, −23
6 −30 −27 −29, −28
7 −35 −31.5 −34, −33, −32
8 −40 −36 −39, −38, −37
9 −45 −40.5 −44, −43, −42, −41
10 −50 −45 −49, −48, −47, −46
11 −55 −49.5 −54, −53, −52, −51, −50
12 −60 −54 −59, −58, −57, −56, −55
13 −65 −58.5 −64, −63, −62, −61, −60, −59
14 −70 −63 −69, −68, −67, −66, −65, −64
15 −75 −67.5 −74, −73, −72, −71, −70, −69, −68
16 −80 −72 −79, −78, −77, −76, −75, −74, −73

Therefore, when 1 ≤ x ≤ 16, there are 2(1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 7) = 56 pairs (x, y) and so

there are 56 sequences.
For example, if x = 5 and y = −24, we get the sequence

5, 5, 5, 5, −24, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, −24, 5, 5, 5, 5

which satisfies the five given conditions.

Are there any additional sequences with −16 ≤ y ≤ −1?
Since 5x + y > 0, then x > −0.2y. Since y ≥ −16, then x < 0.2(16) = 3.2.
Since 9x + 2y < 0, then x < − 92 y. Since y ≤ −1, then x > 92 (1) = 29 .
Since 92 < x < 3.2, then any sequence with −16 ≤ y ≤ −1 also has 1 ≤ x ≤ 16, and so we have
counted this already.
This means that N , the total number of such sequences, equals 56.
Answer: (E)
 The CENTRE for EDUCATION
in MATHEMATICS and COMPUTING
cemc.uwaterloo.ca

2017 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Tuesday, February 28, 2017

(in North America and South America)

Wednesday, March 1, 2017

(outside of North America and South America)

Solutions

©2016 University of Waterloo

2017 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2

1. Evaluating, 6 × 111 − 2 × 111 = 666 − 222 = 444.

Alternatively, we note that 6 × 111 − 2 × 111 = (6 − 2) × 111 = 111(4) = 444.
Answer: (C)

52 − 9 25 − 9 16
2. Evaluating, = = = 8.
5−3 2 2
Alternatively, we note that 52 − 9 = 52 − 32 = (5 − 3)(5 + 3) and so
52 − 9 (5 − 3)(5 + 3)
= =5+3=8
5−3 5−3
Answer: (D)

3. The height of the snowman equals the sum of the lengths of the diameters of the three spheres.
Since the radii of the spheres are 10 cm, 20 cm and 30 cm, then the lengths of their diameters
are 20 cm, 40 cm and 60 cm.
Thus, the height of the snowman is 20 cm + 40 cm + 60 cm = 120 cm.
Answer: (D)

4. We write each of the choices in lowest terms:

44444 4(11111) 4 5555 5(1111) 5 666 6(111) 6 77 7(11) 7 8
55555
= 5(11111)
= 5 6666
= 6(1111)
= 6 777
= 7(111)
= 7 88
= 8(11)
= 8 9

(The last choice was already in lowest terms.)

Next, we note that 45 = 1 − 51 and 56 = 1 − 16 and 76 = 1 − 17 and 78 = 1 − 18 and 89 = 1 − 19 .
The fraction with the greatest value will be the one that is equal to 1 minus the smallest
fraction.
Since 19 < 18 < 71 < 16 < 51 , then the fraction with the greatest value is 89 .
Answer: (E)

5. Since 300 litres drains in 25 hours, then the rate at which water is leaving the tank equals
300 L
or 12 L/h.
25 h
Answer: (A)

6. When Penelope folds the paper in half, the number of layers doubles.
Starting with 4 layers of paper, then after the next three folds, there are 8 and then 16 and
then 32 layers of paper. Additional folds create more layers.
Of the given choices (which are all less than 32), only 16 is a possible number of layers.
Answer: (D)

7. By definition, 2♦7 = 22 (7) − 2(72 ) = 4(7) − 2(49) = 28 − 98 = −70.

Answer: (B)

8. In option (A), the first and third cards have 0 numbers in common, so (A) is not correct.
In option (B), the second and third cards have 2 numbers in common, so (B) is not correct.
In option (C), the first and third cards have 2 numbers in common, so (C) is not correct.
In option (E), the first and third cards have 2 numbers in common, so (E) is not correct.
In option (D), the first and second cards share exactly 1 number (namely, 4), the first and third
cards share exactly one number (namely, 7), and the second and third cards share exactly one
number (namely, 2). Thus, (D) is correct.
Answer: (D)
2017 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

9. Since the bill including a 13% tip was $226, then $226 is 113% of the bill before tax.
Thus, the bill before tax was $226
1.13
= $200 before tax.
The amount of the tip is 15% of the bill before tax, or $200 × 0.15 = $30.
Answer: (C)

10. Since P QR is a straight angle, then ∠P QT + ∠RQT = 180◦ .

Therefore, x◦ + (x − 50)◦ = 180◦ and so 2x − 50 = 180 or 2x = 230, which gives x = 115.
Therefore, ∠T UR = (x + 25)◦ = 140◦ .
Since T U and P S are parallel, then ∠URS and ∠T UR are alternating angles, which means
that ∠URS = ∠T UR = 140◦ .
Answer: (B)

160 cm2
11. Since 10 identical squares have a total area of 160 cm2 , then the area of each square is
10
or 16 cm2 .
2
Since the area
√ of each of the 10 identical squares is 16 cm , then the side length of each of these
squares is 16 cm2 = 4 cm.
The perimeter of the given figure equals 22 square side lengths (4 on the left side, 4 on the
bottom, 4 on the right side, 2 separate ones on the top, and 8 in the “U” shape in the middle).
Therefore, the perimeter of the figure is 4 cm × 22 = 88 cm.
Answer: (C)

p+q+r
12. Since the mean of p, q and r is 9, then = 9 and so p + q + r = 27.
3
s+t
Since the mean of s and t is 14, then = 14 or s + t = 28.
2
p+q+r+s+t (p + q + r) + (s + t) 27 + 28
Therefore, the mean of the five integers is = = ,
5 5 5
which equals 11.
Answer: (A)

13. First, we consider the column of units (ones) digits.

From this column, we see that the units digit of Z + Z + Z (or 3Z) must be 5.
By trying the possible digits from 0 to 9, we find that Z must equal 5.
When Z = 5, we get 3Z = 15, and so there is a “carry” of 1 to the column of tens digits.
From this column, we see that the units digit of 1 + Y + Y + Y (or 3Y + 1) must be 7.
By trying the possible digits from 0 to 9, we find that Y must equal 2.
There is no carry created when Y = 2.
Looking at the remaining digits, we see that 2X = 16 and so X = 8.
Checking, if X = 8 and Y = 2 and Z = 5, we obtain 825 + 825 + 25 which equals 1675, as
required.
Therefore, X + Y + Z = 8 + 2 + 5 = 15.
Answer: (B)

14. Since Igor is shorter than Jie, then Igor cannot be the tallest.
Since Faye is taller than Goa, then Goa cannot be the tallest.
Since Jie is taller than Faye, then Faye cannot be the tallest.
Since Han is shorter than Goa, then Han cannot be the tallest.
The only person of the five who has not been eliminated is Jie, who must thus be the tallest.
Answer: (E)
2017 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

15. Since there are 32 red marbles in the bag and the ratio of red marbles to blue marbles is 4 : 7,
then there are 74 (32) = 56 blue marbles in the bag.
Since there are 56 blue marbles in the bag and the ratio of blue marbles to purple marbles is
2 : 3, then there are 32 (56) = 84 purple marbles in the bag.
Since the bag contains only red, blue and purple marbles, then there are 32 + 56 + 84 = 172
marbles in the bag.
Answer: (E)

16. Since x + 2y = 30, then

x 2y 2y x x 2y x 2y
+ + + = + + +
5 3 5 3 5 5 3 3
1 1 1 1
= x + (2y) + x + (2y)
5 5 3 3
1 1
= (x + 2y) + (x + 2y)
5 3
1 1
= (30) + (30)
5 3
= 6 + 10
= 16
Answer: (B)

17. First, we factor 1230 as a product of prime numbers:

1230 = 2 × 615 = 2 × 5 × 123 = 2 × 5 × 3 × 41

We are looking for three positive integers r, s, t with r × s × t = 1230 and whose sum is as small
as possible. We note that all of the possibilities given for the smallest possible value of r + s + t
are less than 60.
Since 41 is a prime factor of 1230, then one of r, s, t must be a multiple of 41.
Since all of the possibilities given for the minimum sum r + s + t are less than 60 and the second
smallest multiple of 41 is 82, then the multiple of 41 in the list r, s, t must be 41 itself.
Thus, we can let t = 41.
Now we are looking for positive integers r and s with r × s = 2 × 3 × 5 = 30 and whose sum
r + s is as small as possible. (Since t is now fixed, then minimizing r + s + t is equivalent to
minimizing r + s.)
The possible pairs of values for r and s in some order are 1, 30 and 2, 15 and 3, 10 and 5, 6.
The pair with the smallest sum is 5, 6.
Therefore, we set r = 5 and s = 6. This gives r + s + t = 5 + 6 + 41 = 52.
Answer: (B)

1 1 6 6
18. Since is positive and ≤ , then is positive and so n is positive.
7 7 n n
1 6 1 6 6 6 6
Since = and = , then the given inequality is equivalent to ≤ ≤ .
7 42 4 24 42 n 24
Since the fractions are all positive and n > 0, then this is true when 24 ≤ n ≤ 42. (If two
fractions have the same numerator, then the larger fraction has a smaller denominator.)
Since n is an integer, then there are 42 − 24 + 1 = 19 possible values for n. (We could count
the integers from 24 to 42, inclusive, to confirm this.)
Answer: (C)
2017 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

19. We start by drawing a graph that includes the point (1, 1), the lines with slopes 41 and 54 that
pass through this point, the vertical line with equation x = 5, and the horizontal line y = 1
(which passes through (1, 1) and is perpendicular to the vertical line with equation x = 5).
We label the various points of intersection (A, B, C) as shown.
y x=5
C

B
A
P (1, 1)
x
O

We want to determine the area of 4P BC.

Since P has coordinates (1, 1) and A has coordinates (5, 1), then P A = 4.
Since the slope of P B is 14 and P A = 4, then thinking about slope as “rise over run”, we see
that AB = 1.
Since the slope of P C is 45 and P A = 4, then AC = 5.
Since AC = 5 and AB = 1, then BC = AC − AB = 5 − 1 = 4.
We can view 4P BC as having base BC and perpendicular height P A. (This is because the
length of P A is the perpendicular distance from the line through B and C to the point P .)
Therefore, the area of this triangle is 21 (4)(4) which equals 8.
Alternatively, we could note that the area of 4P BC equals the area of 4P AC minus the area
of 4P AB.
4P AC has base P A = 4 and height AC = 5 and so has area 21 (4)(5) = 10.
4P AB has base P A = 4 and height AB = 1 and so has area 12 (4)(1) = 2.
Thus, the area of 4P BC is 10 − 2 = 8.
Answer: (C)
t
20. Since there are 60 seconds in 1 minute, then t seconds is equivalent to minutes.
60
t t
Since there are 60 minutes in 1 hour, then minutes is equivalent to hours or
60 60 × 60
t
hours.
3600
Consider the distances that Car X and Car Y travel between the instant when the front of
Car Y is lined up with the back of Car X and the instant when the back of Car Y is lined up
with the front of Car X.
Since the length of Car X is 5 m and the length of Car Y is 6 m, then during this interval of
time, Car Y travels 5 + 6 = 11 m farther than Car X. (The front of Car Y must, in some sense,
travel all of the way along the length of the Car X and be 6 m ahead of the front of Car X so
that the back of Car Y is lined up with the front of Car X.)
Since there are 1000 metres in 1 km, then 11 m is equivalent to 0.011 km.
t 90t
Since Car X travels at 90 km/h, then in hours, Car X travels km.
3600 3600
t 91t
Since Car Y travels at 91 km/h, then in hours, Car Y travels km.
3600 3600
91t 90t t
Therefore, − = 0.011, or = 0.011 and so t = 3600 × 0.011 = 36 × 1.1 = 39.6.
3600 3600 3600
Answer: (A)
2017 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

21. We label the remaining unknown entries as a, b, c, d, as shown.

Now a, b, c, d, x must equal 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 in some order, with the restriction that 1
no two integers that differ by 1 may be in squares that share an edge.
b a
In particular, we see first that a 6= 2. Therefore, a can equal 3, 4, 5, or 6.
If a = 3, then neither b nor d can equal 2 or 4. c d
Thus, b and d equal 5 and 6 in some order. x
In this case, c cannot be 4 (since one of b and d is 5) so c = 2 and so x = 4.
If a = 4, then neither b nor d can equal 3 or 5.
Thus, b and d equal 2 and 6 in some order.
In this case, c cannot equal 3 or 5, since it is adjacent to 2 and 6, so this case is not possible.
If a = 5, then neither b nor d can equal 4 or 6.
Thus, b and d equal 2 and 3 in some order.
In this case, c cannot be 4 (since one of b and d is 3) so c = 6 and so x = 4.
If a = 6, then neither b nor d can equal 5.
Thus, b and d equal two of 2, 3 or 4 in some order.
If b and d are 2 and 4, then c cannot be 3 or 5 (the remaining numbers), so there is no solution.
If b and d are 3 and 4, then c cannot be 2 or 5 (the remaining numbers), so there is no solution.
If b and d are 2 and 3, then we can have c = 5, in which case we must have x = 4, which is not
possible.
Having considered all possible cases, we see that there is only one possible value for x, namely
x = 4.
Answer: (A)

22. Suppose that the height of the top left rectangle is 2x.
Since square P QRS has side length 42, then the bottom rectangle has height 42 − 2x.
Since the width of the bottom rectangle is 42 (the side length of the square), then the perimeter
of the bottom rectangle is 2(42) + 2(42 − 2x) = 168 − 4x.
Suppose that the width of the top left rectangle is y.
Since each of the small rectangles has the same perimeter, then 2(2x) + 2y = 168 − 4x. (That
is, the perimeter of the top left rectangle equals the perimeter of the bottom rectangle.)
Thus, 2y = 168 − 8x or y = 84 − 4x.
Since the side length of the square is 42, then the width of the top
4x – 42
right rectangle is 42 − (84 − 4x) = 4x − 42. P 84 – 4x Q
Since the two rectangles on the top right have the same perimeter
x
and the same width, then they must have the same height, which
is equal to half of the height of the top left rectangle. 2x
Thus, the height of each of the two rectangles on the right is x. x
Finally, the perimeter of the top right rectangle must equal also
equal 168 − 4x.
42 – 2x
Thus, 2(4x − 42) + 2x = 168 − 4x or 8x − 84 + 2x = 168 − 4x and
S 42 R
so 14x = 252 or x = 18.
This tells us that the shaded rectangle has dimensions x = 18 by
4x − 42 = 4(18) − 42 = 30 and so its area is 18 × 30 = 540.
(We can check by substitution that the resulting rectangles in the original diagram are 6 × 42,
36 × 12 and 30 × 18, which all have the same perimeter.)
Answer: (E)
2017 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

23. To solve this problem, we need to use two facts about a triangle with positive area and side
lengths a ≤ b ≤ c:
• a + b > c. This is called the Triangle Inequality and is based on the fact that the shortest
distance between two points is a straight line. In this case, the shortest distance between
the two vertices of the triangle at opposite ends of the side with length c is this length c.
Any other path between these paths is longer. In particular, travelling between these two
points along the other two sides is longer. This path has length a + b and so a + b > c.
(This is where the condition of “positive area” is used.)
• If the triangle is obtuse, then a2 + b2 < c2 ; if the triangle is acute, a2 + b2 > c2 . This makes
sense from the given examples and the fact that if a2 + b2 = c2 , the triangle is right-angled.
We justify these facts further at the end.
Suppose that the unknown side length x of the obtuse triangle is the longest side length; that
is, suppose that 10 ≤ 17 ≤ x.
Here, we must have 10 + 17 > x and 102 + 172 < x2 .

2
√ then x ≤ 26.
From the first inequality, x < 27. Since x is an integer, √
From the second inequality, x > 389 and so x > 389. Since 389 ≈ 19.72 and x is an
integer, then x ≥ 20. This gives the possible values x = 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26
Suppose that the unknown side length x of the obtuse triangle is not the longest side length.
That is, x ≤ 17. (We know that 10 ≤ 17 as well. Note also that the relative size of 10 and x is
not important.)
Here, we must have x + 10 > 17 and 102 + x2 < 172 .
From the first inequality, x > 7. Since x is an integer,√then x ≥ 8. √
From the second inequality, x2 < 189 and so x < 189. Since 189 ≈ 13.75 and x is an
integer, then x ≤ 13. This gives the possible values x = 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13.
Therefore, the possible values of x are 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26.
The sum of these possible values is 224.
We still need to justify the second fact. We show that if the triangle is obtuse, then a2 +b2 < c2 .
The second half of the fact can be shown in a similar way. While we could use the cosine law
to justify this statement, we show this using angles and side lengths:
Consider 4ABC with ∠ACB obtuse and with AB = c, AC = b and BC = a.
At C, draw a perpendicular line segment CD with length b. Draw DB and DA.
D
A

B
C
√ √
Since 4BCD is right-angled at C, then BD = BC 2 + CD2 = a2 + b2 , by the
Pythagorean Theorem.
Now 4ACD is isosceles with CA = CD.
Thus, ∠CDA = ∠CAD.
But ∠BDA > ∠CDA = ∠CAD > ∠BAD.
Since ∠BDA > ∠BAD, then in 4BDA,
√ we have BA > BD.
This means that c = BA > BD = a2 + b2 and so c2 > a2 + b2 , as required.
Answer: (E)
2017 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

24. We think of each allowable sequence of moves as a string of X’s, Y’s and Z’s. For example,
the string ZZYXZ would represent moving Z one space to the right, then Z, then Y, then X,
then Z.
For each triple (x, y, z) of integers with 0 ≤ x ≤ 3 and 0 ≤ y ≤ 3 and 0 ≤ z ≤ 3, we define
S(x, y, z) to be the number of sequences of moves which result in X moving x spaces to the
right and Y moving y spaces to the right and Z moving z spaces to the right.
For example, S(1, 0, 0) = 0 and S(0, 1, 0) = 0 since X and Y are not allowable sequences, and
S(0, 0, 1) = 1 since Z is allowable and is only sequence of 1 move.
We want to find S(3, 3, 3).
Next, we note that if x > y or y > z or x > z, then S(x, y, z) = 0, since any allowable sequence
has to have at least as many Z’s as Y’s and at least as many Y’s as X’s, because no coin can
jump another coin. In other words, we need to have 0 ≤ x ≤ y ≤ z ≤ 3.
We now make the key observation that if 0 ≤ x ≤ y ≤ z ≤ 3, then

S(x, y, z) = S(x − 1, y, z) + S(x, y − 1, z) + S(x, y, z − 1)

where we use the convention that if x = 0, then S(x − 1, y, z) = 0, and if y = 0, then

S(x, y − 1, z) = 0, and if z = 0, then S(x, y, z − 1) = 0.
This rule is true because:

• Every allowable sequence counted by S(x, y, z) ends with X, Y or Z.

• If an allowable sequence counted by S(x, y, z) ends in X, then the sequence formed by
removing this X was allowable and is counted by S(x − 1, y, z).
• Furthermore, if x − 1 ≤ y ≤ z (that is, there are sequences consisting of x − 1 X’s, y Y’s
and z Z’s, making S(x − 1, y, z) > 0) and x ≤ y ≤ z, then every sequence counted by
S(x − 1, y, z) can have an X put on the end to make a sequence counted by S(x, y, z)
ending in an X.
• The last two bullets together tell us that the number of sequences counted by S(x, y, z)
and ending in X is exactly equal to S(x − 1, y, z).
• Similarly, the sequences counted by S(x, y, z) and ending in Y is S(x, y − 1, z) and the
number of sequences counted by S(x, y, z) and ending in Z is S(x, y, z − 1).
• Therefore, S(x, y, z) = S(x − 1, y, z) + S(x, y − 1, z) + S(x, y, z − 1).

Using this rule, we can create tables of values of S(x, y, z). We create one table for each of
z = 1, z = 2 and z = 3. In each table, values of y are marked along the left side and values of
x along the top. In each table, there are several 0s in spots where x > y or x > z or y > z.

H
HH x H
HH x H
HH x
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
y H HH y H
HH y H
HH
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 2 3 0 0 1 3 6 0 0
2 0 0 0 0 2 2 5 5 0 2 5 16 21 0
3 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3 5 21 42 42

z=1 z=2 z=3

The non-zero entries are filled from top to bottom and left to right, noting that each entry is
the sum of the entries (if applicable) to the left in the same table (this is S(x − 1, y, z)), above
2017 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

in the same table (this is S(x, y − 1, z)), and in the same position in the previous table (this is
S(x, y, z − 1)).
Also, S(0, 0, 1) = 1 (the sequence Z), S(0, 1, 1) = 1 (the sequence ZY), and S(1, 1, 1) = 1 (the
sequence ZYX.
From these tables, we see that S(3, 3, 3) = 42 and so the number of different sequences is 42.
Answer: (C)

25. We proceed using several steps.

Step 1: Least common multiples
For each positive integer n ≥ 3 and positive integer x < n, we define L(n, x) to be the least
common multiple of the n − 2 integers 1, 2, 3, . . . , x − 2, x − 1, x + 2, x + 3, . . . , n − 1, n.
One way to calculate the least common multiple of a list of integers is to determine the prime
factorization of each of the integers in the list and then to create the product of the largest of
each of the prime powers that occurs among the integers in the list.
For example, if n = 9 and x = 6, then L(9, 6) is the least common multiple of the five integers
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9.
The prime factorizations of the integers larger than 1 in this list are 2 = 21 , 3 = 31 , 4 = 22 ,
5 = 51 , 8 = 23 , 9 = 32 and so L(9, 6) = 23 32 51 = 360. In this case, L(9, 6) is not divisible by
x + 1 = 7 but is divisible by x = 6.
We note that, for any list of integers, a common multiple, m, of all of the integers in this list is
always itself a multiple of their least common multiple l. This is because if p is a prime number
and a is a positive integer for which pa is a factor of l, then there must be an integer in the list
that is a multiple of pa . For m to be a common multiple of every number in the list, pa must
also be a factor of m. Since this is true for every prime power pa that is a factor of l, then m
is a multiple of l.
Step 2: Connection between m and L(n, x)
We show that n is a Nella number with corresponding x exactly when L(n, x) is not divisible
by x or x + 1.
Suppose that n is a Nella number with corresponding x and m.
Then m must be divisible by each of 1, 2, 3, . . . , x − 2, x − 1, x + 2, x + 3, . . . , n − 1, n.
From Step 1, m is a multiple of L(n, x).
Since m is a multiple of L(n, x) and m is not divisible by x or x + 1, then L(n, x) is not either.
Since L(n, x) is divisible by every other positive integer from between 1 and n, inclusive, then
L(n, x) satisfies the required conditions for m in the definition of a Nella number.
Also, if n and x are positive integers with n ≥ 3 and x < n and L(n, x) has the two required
conditions in the definition of a Nella number, then n is indeed a Nella number.
Putting this together, n is a Nella number with corresponding x exactly when L(n, x) is not
divisible by x or x + 1.
Step 3: Re-statement of problem
Based on Step 2, we now want to find all positive integers n with 50 ≤ n ≤ 2017 for which
there exists a positive integer x with x < n with the property that L(n, x) is not divisible by x
and x + 1.
Step 4: If n is a Nella number with corresponding x, then x and x + 1 are both prime powers
Suppose that n is a Nella number with corresponding x.
Further, suppose that x is not a prime power.
Then x = pa b for some prime number p, positive integer a and positive integer b > 1 that is
not divisible by p.
2017 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10

In this case, pa < x and b < x and so pa and b are both in the list 1, 2, 3, . . . , x − 2, x − 1,
which means that L(n, x) is a multiple of both pa and b and so is a multiple of pa b = x. (It is
important here that pa and b have no common prime factors.) This is a contradiction.
This means that if n is a Nella number, then x is a prime power.
Similarly, x + 1 must also be a prime power. To see this, we use the same argument with the
additional observation that, because x+1 and x are consecutive, they cannot have any common
divisor larger than 1 and so if x + 1 = pc d, then x cannot equal pc or d and therefore both pc
and d are indeed in the list 1, 2, 3, . . . , x − 1.
Step 5: Further analysis of x and x + 1
Suppose that n is a Nella number with corresponding x.
From Step 4, both x and x + 1 are prime powers.
Since x and x + 1 are consecutive, then one is even and one is odd.
In other words, one of x and x + 1 is a power of 2 and the other is a power of an odd prime.
Furthermore, we know that L(n, x) is not divisible by x or x + 1.
This means that the list x + 2, x + 3, . . . , n − 1, n cannot contain a multiple of x or x + 1.
This means that x < n < 2x and x + 1 ≤ n < 2(x + 1), because the “next” multiple of x is 2x
and the next multiple of x + 1 is 2(x + 1).
Since one of x and x + 1 is a power of 2, then 2 times this power of 2 (that is, 2x or 2(x + 1))
is the next power of 2, and so the inequalities tell us that n is smaller than the next power
of 2, and so x or x + 1 has to be the largest power of 2 less than (or less than or equal to,
respectively) n.
Step 6: Second re-statement of problem
We want to find all positive integers n with 50 ≤ n ≤ 2017 for which there exists a positive
integer x with x < n with the property that L(n, x) is not divisible by x and x + 1.
From Step 5, we know that either x is the largest power of 2 less than n or x + 1 is the largest
power of 2 less than or equal to n.
This means that we want to find all positive integers n with 50 ≤ n ≤ 2017 for which at least
one of the following two statements is true for some positive integer x < n:

• If x is the largest power of 2 less than n, then x + 1 is also a prime power.

• If x + 1 is the largest power of 2 less than or equal to n, then x is also a prime power.

Step 7: Determining Nella numbers

We make two separate tables, one where x < n is a power of 2 and one where x + 1 ≤ n is a
power of 2. In each case, we determine whether x + 1 or x is also a prime power.

Largest power
Range of n of 2 less than n x x+1 Prime power? Nella?
50 ≤ n ≤ 64 32 32 33 No (33 = 3 · 11) No
65 ≤ n ≤ 128 64 64 65 No (65 = 5 · 13) No
129 ≤ n ≤ 256 128 128 129 No (129 = 3 · 43) No
257 ≤ n ≤ 512 256 256 257 Yes See below
513 ≤ n ≤ 1024 512 512 513 No (513 = 3 · 171) No
1025 ≤ n ≤ 2017 1024 1024 1025 No (1025 = 5 · 205) No

Note
√ that 257 is a prime number since it is not divisible by any prime number less than
257 ≈ 16.03. (These primes are 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13.)
For each n with 257 ≤ n ≤ 511, L(n, 256) is not divisible by 256 or 257, so each of these n
2017 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11

(there are 511 − 257 + 1 = 255 of them) is a Nella number.

For n = 512, L(n, 256) is divisible by 256 (since 512 is divisible by 256), so n = 512 is not a
Nella number as this is the only possible candidate for x in this case.

Largest power
Range of n of 2 at most n x + 1 x Prime power? Nella?
50 ≤ n ≤ 63 32 32 31 Yes See below
64 ≤ n ≤ 127 64 64 63 No (63 = 3 · 21) No
128 ≤ n ≤ 255 128 128 127 Yes See below
256 ≤ n ≤ 511 256 256 255 No (255 = 5 · 51) No
512 ≤ n ≤ 1023 512 512 511 No (511 = 7 · 73) No
1024 ≤ n ≤ 2017 1024 1024 1023 No (1023 = 3 · 341) No

Note that 31 and 127 are prime.

For each n with 50 ≤ n ≤ 61, L(n, 31) is not divisible by 31 or 32, so each of these n (there are
61 − 50 + 1 = 12 of them) is a Nella number.
For n = 62, 63, L(n, 31) is divisible by 31 (since 62 is divisible by 31), so neither is a Nella
number as this is the only possible candidate for x in this case.
For each n with 128 ≤ n ≤ 253, L(n, 127) is not divisible by 127 or 128, so each of these n
(there are 253 − 128 + 1 = 126 of them) is a Nella number.
For n = 254, 255, L(n, 127) is divisible by 127 (since 254 is divisible by 127), so neither is a
Nella number as this is the only possible candidate for x in this case.
Step 8: Final tally
From the work above, there are 255 + 12 + 126 = 393 Nella numbers n with 50 ≤ n ≤ 2017.
Answer: (A)
 The CENTRE for EDUCATION
in MATHEMATICS and COMPUTING
cemc.uwaterloo.ca

2016 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Wednesday, February 24, 2016

(in North America and South America)

Thursday, February 25, 2016

(outside of North America and South America)

Solutions

©2015 University of Waterloo

2016 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2

1. Evaluating, (3 + 2) − (2 + 1) = 5 − 3 = 2.
Answer: (E)

2. According to the graph, 7 of the 20 teachers picked “Square” as their favourite shape.
Thus, 20 − 7 = 13 teachers did not pick “Square” as their favourite shape.
(We can also note that the numbers of teachers who chose “Triangle”, “Circle” and “Hexagon”
were 3, 4 and 6. The sum of these totals is indeed 3 + 4 + 6 = 13.)
Answer: (E)
√ √ √
3. Evaluating, 52 − 42 = 25 − 16 = 9 = 3.
Answer: (C)

4. Since each of Bill’s steps is 12 metre long, then 2 of Bill’s steps measure 1 m.
To walk 12 m, Bill thus takes 12 × 2 = 24 steps.
Answer: (D)

5. Solution 1
Since ∠P QS is an exterior angle of 4QSR, then ∠P QS = ∠QSR + ∠SRQ.
Thus, 2x◦ = x◦ + 50◦ and so 2x = x + 50 or x = 50.

Solution 2
Since ∠P QS and ∠SQR form a straight angle, then ∠P QS and ∠SQR are supplementary.
Therefore, ∠SQR = 180◦ − ∠P QS = 180◦ − 2x◦ .
Since the sum of the angles in 4SQR is 180◦ , then

∠SQR + ∠QSR + ∠QRS = 180◦

(180◦ − 2x◦ ) + x◦ + 50◦ = 180◦
50◦ − x◦ = 0◦
x◦ = 50◦

Therefore, x = 50.
Answer: (A)

3a − 7
6. Since the slope of the line through points (2, 7) and (a, 3a) is 2, then = 2.
a−2
From this, 3a − 7 = 2(a − 2) and so 3a − 7 = 2a − 4 which gives a = 3.
Answer: (C)

7. When Team A played Team B, if Team B won, then Team B scored more goals than Team A,
and if the game ended in a tie, then Team A and Team B scored the same number of goals.
Therefore, if a team has 0 wins, 1 loss, and 2 ties, then it scored fewer goals than its opponent
once (the 1 loss) and the same number of goals as its oppponent twice (the 2 ties).
Combining this information, we see that the team must have scored fewer goals than were
scored against them.
In other words, it is not possible for a team to have 0 wins, 1 loss, and 2 ties, and to have
scored more goals than were scored against them.
We can also examine choices (A), (B), (D), (E) to see that, in each case, it is possible that the
team scored more goals than it allowed.
This will eliminate each of these choices, and allow us to conclude that (C) must be correct.
2016 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

(A): If the team won 2-0 and 3-0 and tied 1-1, then it scored 6 goals and allowed 1 goal.
(B): If the team won 4-0 and lost 1-2 and 2-3, then it scored 7 goals and allowed 5 goals.
(D): If the team won 4-0, lost 1-2, and tied 1-1, then it scored 6 goals and allowed 3 goals.
(E): If the team won 2-0, and tied 1-1 and 2-2, then it scored 5 goals and allowed 3 goals.
Therefore, it is only the case of 0 wins, 1 loss, and 2 ties where it is not possible for the team
to score more goals than it allows.
Answer: (C)

8. Solution 1
We calculate the value of each of the five words as follows:

– The value of BAD is 2 + 1 + 4 = 7

– The value of CAB is 3 + 1 + 2 = 6
– The value of DAD is 4 + 1 + 4 = 9
– The value of BEE is 2 + 5 + 5 = 12
– The value of BED is 2 + 5 + 4 = 11

Of these, the word with the largest value is BEE.

Solution 2
We determine the word with the largest value by comparing the given words.
Since BAD and CAB share the common letters A and B, then the value of BAD is larger
than the value of CAB because the value of D is larger than the value of C.
Similarly, the value of DAD is larger than the value of BAD (whose value is larger than the
value of CAB), and the value of BEE is larger than the value of BED.
Therefore, the two possibilities for the word with the largest value are DAD and BEE.
The value of DAD is 4 + 1 + 4 = 9 and the value of BEE is 2 + 5 + 5 = 12.
Thus, the word with the largest value is BEE.
(Alternatively, we could note that 2 E’s have a larger value than 2 D’s, and B has a larger
value than A, so BEE has a larger value than DAD.)
Answer: (D)

9. Solution 1
We write out the numbers in the sequence until we obtain a negative number:

43, 39, 35, 31, 27, 23, 19, 15, 11, 7, 3, −1

Since each number is 4 less than the number before it, then once a negative number is reached,
every following number will be negative.
Thus, Grace writes 11 positive numbers in the sequence.

Solution 2
The nth number in the sequence is 4(n − 1) smaller than the first number, since we will have
subtracted 4 a total of n − 1 times to obtain the nth number.
Therefore, the nth number is 43 − 4(n − 1) = 47 − 4n.
The first positive integer n for which this is expression negative is n = 12.
Therefore, Grace writes 11 positive numbers in the sequence.
Answer: (A)
2016 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

10. Solution 1
We label the players as A, B, C, D, and E.
The total number of matches played will be equal to the number of pairs of players that can
be formed times the number of matches that each pair plays.
The possible pairs of players are AB, AC, AD, AE, BC, BD, BE, CD, CE, and DE. There are
10 such pairs.
Thus, the total number of matches played is 10 × 3 = 30.

Solution 2
Each student plays each of the other 4 students 3 times and so plays in 4 × 3 = 12 matches.
Since there are 5 students, then the students play in a total of 5 × 12 = 60 matches.
But each match includes 2 students, so each match is counted twice in the number of matches
in which students play (60). Thus, the total number of matches player is 60 ÷ 2 = 30.
Answer: (C)
11. Extend P Q and ST to meet at U .
P Q U

R S

Since QU SR has three right angles, then it must have four right angles and so is a rectangle.
Thus, 4P U T is right-angled at U .
By the Pythagorean Theorem, P T 2 = P U 2 + U T 2 .
Now P U = P Q + QU and QU = RS so P U = 4 + 8 = 12.
Also, U T = U S − ST and U S = QR so U T = 8 − 3 = 5.
Therefore, P T 2 = 122 + 52 √
= 144 + 25 = 169.
Since P T > 0, then P T = 169 = 13.
Answer: (E)
12. Since Alejandro selects one ball out of a box that contains 30 balls, then the possibility that is
the most likely is the one that is satisfied by the largest number of balls in the box.
There are 3 balls in the box whose number is a multiple of 10. (These are 10, 20, 30.)
There are 15 balls in the box whose number is odd. (These are the numbers whose ones digits
are 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9.)
There are 4 balls in the box whose number includes the digit 3. (These are 3, 13, 23, and 30.)
There are 6 balls in the box whose number is a multiple of 5. (These are 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30.)
There are 12 balls in the box whose number includes the digit 2. (These are 2, 12, and the
then integers from 20 to 29, inclusive.)
The most likely of these outcomes is that he selects a ball whose number is odd.
Answer: (B)
13. We note that 16 = 30
5
and that 14 = 20 5
.
If we compare two fractions with equal positive numerators, the fraction with the smaller
positive denominator will be largest of the two fractions.
5 5 5 5
Therefore, 30 < 24 and 24 < 20 , or 16 < 24
5
< 14 .
(Alternatively, we could note that since 61 = 24 6
and that 14 = 24
6 5
, then 24 must be the one of
the given choices that is between these.)
Answer: (C)
2016 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

14. Since 100 = 102 , then 10010 = (102 )10 = 1020 .

Therefore, (10100 ) × (10010 ) = (10100 ) × (1020 ) = 10120 .
When written out, this integer consists of a 1 followed by 120 zeros.
Answer: (A)

15. We note that 20 = 22 · 5 and 16 = 24 and 2016 = 16 · 126 = 25 · 32 · 7.

For an integer to be divisible by each of 22 · 5 and 24 and 25 · 32 · 7, it must include at least 5
factors of 2, at least 2 factors of 3, at least 1 factor of 5, and at least 1 factor of 7.
The smallest such positive integer is 25 · 32 · 51 · 71 = 10 080. The tens digit of this integer is 8.
Answer: (E)

16. The three diagrams below show first the original position of the triangle, the position after it
is reflected in the x-axis, and then the position when this result is reflected in the y-axis:

y y y

x −→ x −→ x

The final position is seen in (D).

Answer: (D)

17. Since the perimeter of square P QRS is 120, then its side length is 14 (120) = 30.
Therefore, P Q = QR = RS = SP = 30.
Since the perimeter of 4P ZS is 2x, then P Z + ZS + SP = 2x.
Since P S = 30, then P Z + ZS = 2x − P S = 2x − 30.
Therefore, the perimeter of pentagon P QRSZ is

P Q + QR + RS + ZS + P Z = 30 + 30 + 30 + (P Z + ZS) = 30 + 30 + 30 + (2x − 30) = 2x + 60

which equals 60 + 2x.

Answer: (C)

18. Solution 1
Suppose that the three integers are x, y and z where x + y = 998 and x + z = 1050 and
y + z = 1234.
From the first two equations, (x + z) − (x + y) = 1050 − 998 or z − y = 52.
Since z + y = 1234 and z − y = 52, then (z + y) + (z − y) = 1234 + 52 or 2z = 1286 and so
z = 643.
Since z = 643 and z − y = 52, then y = z − 52 = 643 − 52 = 591.
Since x + y = 998 and y = 591, then x = 998 − y = 998 − 591 = 407.
The three original numbers are 407, 591 and 643.
The difference between the largest and smallest of these integers is 643 − 407 = 236.
2016 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

Solution 2
Suppose that the three numbers are x, y and z, and that x ≤ y ≤ z.
Since y ≤ z, then x + y ≤ x + z.
Since x ≤ y, then x + z ≤ y + z.
Therefore, x + y ≤ x + z ≤ y + z.
This tells us that x + y = 998, x + z = 1050, and y + z = 1234.
Since z is the largest and x is the smallest of the three original integers, we want to determine
the value of z − x.
But z − x = (y + z) − (x + y) = 1234 − 998 = 236.
Answer: (E)

19. The number of points on the circle equals the number of spaces between the points around the
circle.
Moving from the point labelled 7 to the point labelled 35 requires moving 35 − 7 = 28 points
and so 28 spaces around the circle.
Since the points labelled 7 and 35 are diametrically opposite, then moving along the circle from
7 to 35 results in travelling halfway around the circle.
Since 28 spaces makes half of the circle, then 2 · 28 = 56 spaces make the whole circle.
Thus, there are 56 points on the circle, and so n = 56.
Answer: (C)

20. Solution 1
Suppose that, when the n students are put in groups of 2, there are g complete groups and
1 incomplete group.
Since the students are being put in groups of 2, an incomplete group must have exactly 1 stu-
dent in it.
Therefore, n = 2g + 1.
Since the number of complete groups of 2 is 5 more than the number of complete groups of 3,
then there were g − 5 complete groups of 3.
Since there was still an incomplete group, this incomplete group must have had exactly 1 or 2
students in it.
Therefore, n = 3(g − 5) + 1 or n = 3(g − 5) + 2.
If n = 2g + 1 and n = 3(g − 5) + 1, then 2g + 1 = 3(g − 5) + 1 or 2g + 1 = 3g − 14 and so g = 15.
In this case, n = 2g + 1 = 31 and there were 15 complete groups of 2 and 10 complete groups
of 3.
If n = 2g + 1 and n = 3(g − 5) + 2, then 2g + 1 = 3(g − 5) + 2 or 2g + 1 = 3g − 13 and so g = 14.
In this case, n = 2g + 1 = 29 and there were 14 complete groups of 2 and 9 complete groups
of 3.
If n = 31, dividing the students into groups of 4 would give 7 complete groups of 4 and 1 in-
complete group.
If n = 29, dividing the students into groups of 4 would give 7 complete groups of 4 and 1 in-
complete group.
Since the difference between the number of complete groups of 3 and the number of complete
groups of 4 is given to be 3, then it must be the case that n = 31.
In this case, n2 − n = 312 − 31 = 930; the sum of the digits of n2 − n is 12.

Solution 2
Since the n students cannot be divided exactly into groups of 2, 3 or 4, then n is not a multiple
of 2, 3 or 4.
2016 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

The first few integers larger than 1 that are not divisible by 2, 3 or 4 are 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19,
23, 25, 29, 31, and 35.
In each case, we determine the number of complete groups of each size:
n 5 7 11 13 17 19 23 25 29 31 35
# of complete groups of 2 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 12 14 15 17
# of complete groups of 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
# of complete groups of 4 1 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8
Since the number of complete groups of 2 is 5 more than the number of complete groups of 3
which is 3 more than the number of complete groups of 4, then of these possibilities, n = 31
works.
In this case, n2 − n = 312 − 31 = 930; the sum of the digits of n2 − n is 12.
(Since the problem is a multiple choice problem and we have found a value of n that satisfies
the given conditions and for which an answer is present, then this answer must be correct.
Solution 1 shows why n = 31 is the only value of n that satisfies the given conditions.)
Answer: (B)
21. Suppose that Jackie had played n games before her last game.
Since she scored an average of 20 points per game over these n games, then she scored 20n points
over these n games.
In her last game, she scored 36 points and so she has now scored 20n + 36 points in total.
But, after her last game, she has now played n + 1 games and has an average of 21 points scored
per game.
Therefore, we can also say that her total number of points scored is 21(n + 1).
Thus, 21(n + 1) = 20n + 36 or 21n + 21 = 20n + 36 and so n = 15.
This tells us that after 16 games, Jackie has scored 20(15) + 36 = 336 points.
For her average to be 22 points per game after 17 games, she must have scored a total of
17 · 22 = 374 points.
This would mean that she must score 374 − 336 = 38 points in her next game.
Answer: (A)
22. Since the track is circular with radius 25 km, then its circumference is 2π(25) = 50π km.
In the 15 minutes that Alain drives at 80 km/h, he drives a distance of 41 (80) = 20 km (because
15 minutes is one-quarter of an hour).
When Louise starts driving, she drives in the opposite direction to Alain.
Suppose that Alain and Louise meet for the first time after Louise has been driving for t hours.
During this time, Louise drives at 100 km/h, and so drives 100t km.
During this time, Alain drives at 80 km/h, and so drives 80t km.
Since they start 50π − 20 km apart along the track (the entire circumference minus the 20 km
that Alain drove initially), then the sum of the distances that they travel is 50π − 20 km.
Therefore, 100t + 80t = 50π − 20 and so 180t = 50π − 20 or t = 5π−2 18
.
Suppose that Alain and Louise meet for the next time after an additional T hours.
During this time, Louise drives 100T km and Alain drives 80T km.
In this case, the sum of the distances that they drive is the complete circumference of the track,
or 50π km. Thus, 180T = 50π or T = 5π 18
.
The length of time between the first and second meetings will be the same as the amount of
time between the second and third, and between the third and fourth meetings.
Therefore, the total time that Louise has been driving when she and Alain meet for the fourth
time will be t + 3T = 5π−2
18
+ 3 · 5π
18
= 20π−2
18
= 10π−1
9
hours.
Answer: (C)
2016 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

23. If the four sides that are chosen are adjacent, then when these four sides are extended, they
will not form a quadrilateral that encloses the octagon. (See Figure 1.)
If the four sides are chosen so that there are exactly three adjacent sides that are not chosen
and one other side not chosen, then when these four sides are extended, they will not form a
quadrilateral that encloses the octagon. (See Figures 2 and 3.)

Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3

Any other set of four sides that are chosen will form a quadrilateral that encloses the octagon.
This is true based on the following argument:

Suppose that side s1 is chosen and that s2 is the next side chosen in a clockwise
direction.
These two sides will either be adjacent (Figure 4) or have one unchosen side between
them (Figure 5) or will have two unchosen sides between them (Figure 6). (They
cannot have three or four adjacent unchosen sides between them from the previous
argument. They cannot have more than four adjacent unchosen sides between them
since four sides have to be chosen.)

s2

s1 s1 s2
s2 s1

Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6

In each of these cases, sides s1 and s2 when extended meet on or outside the octagon
and “between” s1 and s2 .
Continue the process to choose s3 and s4 in such a way as there are not three or four
adjacent unchosen sides between any consecutive pair of chosen sides.
Since each consecutive pair of chosen sides meets between the two sides and on or
outside the octagon, then these four meeting points (between s1 and s2 , s2 and s3 , s3
2016 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

and s4 , and s4 and s1 ) and the line segments joining them will form a quadrilateral
that includes the octagon. (An example is shown in Figure 7.)

s2

s1 s3
s4

Figure 7

We are told that there is a total of 70 ways in which four sides can be chosen.
We will count the number of ways in which four sides can be chosen that do not result in the
desired quadrilateral, and subtract this from 70 to determine the number of ways in which the
desired quadrilateral does result.
There are 8 ways in which to choose four adjacent sides: choose one side to start (there are
8 ways to choose one side) and then choose the next three adjacent sides in clockwise order
(there is 1 way to do this).
There are 8 ways to choose adjacent sides to be not chosen (after picking one such set, there
are 7 additional positions into which these sides can be rotated). For each of these choices,
there are 3 possible choices for the remaining unchosen sides. (Figures 2 and 3 give two of these
choices; the third choice is the reflection of Figure 2 through a vertical line.) Therefore, there
are 8 × 3 = 24 ways to choose four sides so that there are 3 adjacent sides unchosen.
Therefore, of the 70 ways of choosing four sides, exactly 8 + 24 = 32 of them do not give the
desired quadrilateral, and so 70 − 32 = 38 ways do.
Thus, the probability that four sides are chosen so that the desired quadrilateral is formed is
38
70
= 19
35
.
Answer: (B)
√
24. Suppose that a number q has the property that there are exactly 19 integers n with q < n < q.
Suppose that these 19 integers are m, m + 1, m + 2, . . . , m + 17, m + 18.
√
Then q < m < m + 1 < m + 2 < · · · < m + 17 < m + 18 < q.
√ √
This tells us that q − q > (m + 18) − m = 18 because q − q is as small as possible when q
√
is as small as possible and q is as large as possible.
√
Also, since this is exactly the list of integers that is included strictly between q and q, then
√
we must have m − 1 ≤ q < m < m + 1 < m + 2 < · · · < m + 17 < m + 18 < q ≤ m + 19.
√
In other words, neither m − 1 nor m + 19 can satisfy q < n < q.
√
This tell us that q − q ≤ (m + 19) − (m − 1) = 20.
√
Therefore, we have that 18 < q − q ≤ 20.
√
Next, we use 18 < q − q ≤ 20 to get a restriction on q itself.
√
To have q − q > 18, we certainly need q > 18.
√ √
But if q > 18, then q > 18 > 4.
2016 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10
√ √ √
Furthermore, q − q > 18 and q > 4 give q − 4 > q − q > 18 and so q > 22.
√ √ √
Next, note that q − q = q( q − 1).
√ √
When q is larger than 1 and increases, each factor q and q − 1 increases, so the product
√
q − q increases.
√
When q = 25, q − q = 25 − 5 = 20.
√ √ √
Since we need q − q ≤ 20 and since q − q = 20 when q = 25 and since q − q is increasing,
√
then for q − q ≤ 20, we must have q ≤ 25.
√
Therefore, 18 < q − q ≤ 20 tells us that 22 < q ≤ 25.
So we limit our search for q to this range.
√ √
When q = 22, q ≈ 4.69, and so the integers n that satisfy q < n < q are 5, 6, 7, . . . , 20, 21,
of which there are 17.
√
When 22 < q ≤ 23, we have 4 < q < 5 and 22 < q ≤ 23, which means that the integers n
√
that satisfy q < n < q are 5, 6, 7, . . . , 20, 21, 22, of which there are 18.
√
When 23 < q ≤ 24, we have 4 < q < 5 and 23 < q ≤ 24, which means that the integers n
√
that satisfy q < n < q are 5, 6, 7, . . . , 20, 21, 22, 23, of which there are 19.
√
When 24 < q < 25, we have 4 < q < 5 and 24 < q < 25, which means that the integers n
√
that satisfy q < n < q are 5, 6, 7, . . . , 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, of which there are 20.
√ √
When q = 25, q = 5 and so the integers that satisfy q < n < q are 6, 7, . . . , 20, 21, 22, 23, 24,
of which there are 19.
√
Therefore, the numbers q for which there are exactly 19 integers n that satisfy q < n < q are
q = 25 and those q that satisfy 23 < q ≤ 24.
a
Finally, we must determine the sum of all such q that are of the form q = where a and b are
b
positive integers with b ≤ 10.
The integers q = 24 and q = 25 are of this form with a = 24 and a = 25, respectively, and
b = 1.
The q between 23 and 24 that are of this form with b ≤ 4 are

23 12 = 47
2
, 23 13 = 70
3
, 23 32 = 71
3
, 23 14 = 93
4
, 23 34 = 95
4

Notice that we don’t include 23 24 since this is the same as the number 23 12 .
We continue by including those satisfying 5 ≤ b ≤ 10 and not including equivalent numbers
that have already been included with smaller denominators, we obtain

23 12 , 23 31 , 23 23 , 23 14 , 23 43 , 23 15 , 23 52 , 23 53 , 23 45 , 23 16 , 23 56 , 23 17 , 23 27 , 23 37 , 23 47 , 23 75 , 23 67 ,

23 81 , 23 38 , 23 85 , 23 78 , 23 19 , 23 92 , 23 49 , 23 59 , 23 79 , 23 98 , 23 10
1 3
, 23 10 7
, 23 10 9
, 23 10
There are 31 numbers in this list.
Each of these 31 numbers equals 23 plus a fraction between 0 and 1.
With the exception of the one number with denominator 2, each of the fractions can be paired
with another fraction with the same denominator to obtain a sum of 1. (For example, 15 + 45 = 1
and 25 + 35 = 1.)
Therefore, the sum of all of these q between 23 and 24 is 31(23) + 12 + 15(1) = 728 12 , because
there are 31 contributions of 23 plus the fraction 12 plus 15 pairs of fractions with a sum of 1.
Finally, the sum of all q of the proper form for which there are exactly 19 integers that satisfy
√
q < n < q is 728 12 + 25 + 24 = 777 21 .
Answer: (C)
2016 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11

25. Using the given rules, the words that are 1 letter long are A, B, C, D, E.
Using the given rules, the words that are 2 letters long are AB, AC, AD, BA, BC, BD, BE,
CA, CB, CD, CE, DA, DB, DC, DE, EB, EC, ED.
Let vn be the number of words that are n letters long and that begin with a vowel. Note that
v1 = 2 and v2 = 6.
Let cn be the number of words that are n letters long and that begin with a consonant. Note
that c1 = 3 and c2 = 12.
Suppose n ≥ 2.
Consider a word of length n that begins with a vowel (that is, with A or E).
Since two vowels cannot occur in a row, the second letter of this word must be B, C or D.
This means that every word of length n that begins with a vowel can be transformed into a
word of length n − 1 that begins with a consonant by removing the first letter.
Also, each word of length n − 1 that begins with a consonant can form two different words of
length n that begin with a vowel.
Therefore, vn = 2cn−1 .
Consider a word of length n that begins with a consonant.
Since the same letter cannot occur twice in a row, then the second letter of this word is either
a vowel or a different consonant than the first letter of the word.
Each word of length n − 1 that begins with a vowel can form 3 words of length n that begin
with a consonant, obtained by adding B, C, D to the start of the word.
Each word of length n − 1 that begins with a consonant can form 2 words of length n that
begin with a consonant, obtained by adding each of the consonants other than the one with
which the word of length n − 1 starts.
Therefore, cn = 3vn−1 + 2cn−1 .
We note from above that v1 = 2 and c1 = 3.
The equations v2 = 2c1 and c2 = 3v1 + 2c1 are consistent with the information that v2 = 6 and
c2 = 12.
Since v2 = 6 and c2 = 12, then v3 = 2c2 = 24 and c3 = 3v2 + 2c2 = 3(6) + 2(12) = 42.
We want to determine v10 .
We continue these calculations and make a table:
n vn cn
1 2 3
2 6 12
3 24 42
4 84 156
5 312 564
6 1128 2064
7 4128 7512
8 15 024 27 408
9 54 816 99 888
10 199 776 364 224

Therefore, there are 199 776 words of length 10 that begin with a vowel.
Answer: (E)
 The CENTRE for EDUCATION
in MATHEMATICS and COMPUTING
cemc.uwaterloo.ca

2015 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Tuesday, February 24, 2015

(in North America and South America)

Wednesday, February 25, 2015

(outside of North America and South America)

Solutions

©2014 University of Waterloo

2015 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2

1. Evaluating, 2 × 2015 − 2015 = 4030 − 2015 = 2015.

Alternatively, 2 × 2015 − 2015 = 2 × 2015 − 1 × 2015 = 1 × 2015 = 2015.
Answer: (A)
√ √
2. Evaluating, 1+ 9 = 1 + 3 = 4.
Answer: (D)

3. The volume of a rectangular box equals the area of its base times its height.
Thus, the height equals the volume divided by the area of the base.
The area of the base of the given box is 2 · 5 = 10 cm2 .
30
Therefore, the height of the given box is = 3 cm.
10
Answer: (C)

4. Solution 1
∠SRQ is an exterior angle of 4P QR.
Thus, ∠SRQ = ∠RP Q + ∠P QR = 50◦ + 90◦ = 140◦ .
Therefore, x◦ = 140◦ and so x = 140.

Solution 2
The sum of the angles of 4P QR is 180◦ , and so

∠P RQ = 180◦ − ∠RP Q − ∠P QR = 180◦ − 50◦ − 90◦ = 40◦

Since ∠P RQ and ∠SRQ are supplementary, then x◦ + 40◦ = 180◦ , and so x = 180 − 40 = 140.
Answer: (D)

5. From the given graph, 3 provinces and territories joined Confederation between 1890 and 1929,
and 1 between 1930 and 1969.
Thus, between 1890 and 1969, a total of 4 provinces and territories joined Confederation.
Therefore, if one of the 13 provinces and territories is chosen at random, the probability that
4
it joined Confederation between 1890 and 1969 is 13 .
Answer: (B)

6. Since a2 = 9, then a4 = (a2 )2 = 92 = 81.

Alternatively, we note that since a2 = 9, then a = ±3. If a = 3, then a4 = 34 = 81 and if
a = −3, then a4 = (−3)4 = 34 = 81.
Answer: (B)

1 4 10 4 14 14
7. First, we note that 3 + 10 + 100 = 3 + 100 + 100 = 3 + 100 = 3 100 .
14
Since 100 = 0.14, then the given expression also equals 3.14.
14 7 7
Since 100 = 50 , then the given expression also equals 3 50 .
7 7 150 7 157
We also see that 3 50 = 3 + 50 = 50 + 50 = 50 .
5
Therefore, the only remaining expression is 3 110 .
5
We note further that 3 110 = 3.045, which is not equal to 3.14.
Answer: (C)
2015 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

8. Violet starts with one-half of the money that she needed to buy the necklace.
After her sister gives her money, she has three-quarters of the amount that she needs.
This means that her sister gave her 43 − 12 = 14 of the total amount that she needs.
Since she now has three-quarters of the amount that she needs, then she still needs one-quarter
of the total cost.
In other words, her father will give her the same amount that her sister gave her, or $30.
Answer: (D)

9. Since January 5 is a Monday and Mondays are 7 days apart, then January 12, 19 and 26 are
also Mondays.
Since John goes for a run every 3 days, the dates in January on which he runs are January 5,
8, 11, 14, 17, 20, 23, 26, and 29.
The first of the Mondays on which John goes for a run after January 5 is January 26.
Answer: (C)

10. Solution 1
Since P QRS is a square and T X and U Y are perpendicular to QR, then
T X and U Y are parallel to P Q and SR. P Q
Similarly, V Y and W X are parallel to P S and QR.
T
Therefore, if we extend W X and V Y to meet P Q and extend T X and X
U Y to meet P S, then square P QRS is divided into 9 rectangles. Y
U
Since QT = T U = U R = 1 and RV = V W = W S = 1, then in fact
P QRS is divided into 9 squares, each of which is 1 by 1. S W V R
Of these 9 squares, 6 are shaded and 3 are unshaded.
Therefore, the ratio of the shaded area to the unshaded area is 6 : 3, which equals 2 : 1.

Solution 2
Consider quadrilateral Y U RV .
Y U RV has three right angles: at U and V because U Y and V Y are P Q
perpendicular to QR and RS, respectively, and at R because P QRS is a
T
square. Since Y U RV has three right angles, then it has four right angles X
and so is a rectangle. Y U
Since RV = U R = 1, then Y U RV is actually a square and has side
length 1, and so has area 12 , or 1. S W V R
Similarly, XT RW is a square of side length 2, and so has area 22 , or 4.
Since square P QRS is 3 × 3, then its area is 32 , or 9.
The area of the unshaded region is equal to the difference between the areas of square XT RW
and square Y U RV , or 4 − 1 = 3.
Since square P QRS has area 9 and the area of the unshaded region is 3, then the area of the
shaded region is 9 − 3 = 6.
Finally, the ratio of the shaded area to the unshaded area is 6 : 3, which equals 2 : 1.
Answer: (A)

11. From the given definition,

4 8 1 1 5
4⊗8= + = +2=2 =
8 4 2 2 2
Answer: (E)
2015 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

12. The line with equation y = 23 x + 1 has slope 32 .

Since the line segment joining (−1, q) and (−3, r) is parallel to the line with equation y = 23 x+1,
then the slope of this line segment is 32 .
r−q 3 r−q 3
Therefore, = or = .
(−3) − (−1) 2 −2 2
3
Thus, r − q = (−2) · = −3.
2
Answer: (E)

13. Solution 1
The two teams include a total of 25 + 19 = 44 players.
There are exactly 36 students who are at least one team.
Thus, there are 44 − 36 = 8 students who are counted twice.
Therefore, there are 8 students who play both baseball and hockey.

Solution 2
Suppose that there are x students who play both baseball and hockey.
Since there are 25 students who play baseball, then 25−x of these play baseball and not hockey.
Since there are 19 students who play hockey, then 19 − x of these play hockey and not baseball.
Since 36 students play either baseball or hockey or both, then

(25 − x) + (19 − x) + x = 36

(The left side is the sum of the numbers of those who play baseball and not hockey, those who
play hockey and not baseball, and those who play both.)
Therefore, 44 − x = 36 and so x = 44 − 36 = 8.
Thus, 8 students play both baseball and hockey.
Answer: (B)

14. Since P S = SR = x and the perimeter of 4P RS is 22, then P R = 22 − P S − SR = 22 − 2x.

Since P Q = P R and P R = 22 − 2x, then P Q = 22 − 2x.
Since 4P QR has perimeter 22, then RQ = 22−P R−P Q = 22−(22−2x)−(22−2x) = 4x−22.

P
x
S
2x

22 – 2x
22 –

R 4x – 22 Q

Since the perimeter of P QRS is 24, then

P Q + RQ + SR + P S = 24
(22 − 2x) + (4x − 22) + x + x = 24
4x = 24
x = 6

Therefore, x = 6.
Answer: (D)
2015 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

15. We note that

1! = 1 2! = (1)(2) = 2 3! = (1)(2)(3) = 6
4! = (1)(2)(3)(4) = 24 5! = (1)(2)(3)(4)(5) = 120
Thus, 1! + 2! + 3! + 4! + 5! = 1 + 2 + 6 + 24 + 120 = 153.
Now for each positive integer n ≥ 5, the ones digit of n! is 0:

One way to see this is to note that we obtain each successive factorial by multiplying
the previous factorial by an integer. (For example, 6! = 6(5!).)
Thus, if one factorial ends in a 0, then all subsequent factorials will also end in a 0.
Since the ones digit of 5! is 0, then the ones digit of each n! with n > 5 will also be 0.
Alternatively, we note that for each positive integer n, the factorial n! is the product
of the positive integers from 1 to n. When n ≥ 5, the product represented by n!
includes factors of both 2 and 5, and so has a factor of 10, thus has a ones digit of 0.

Therefore, the ones digit of each of 6!, 7!, 8!, 9!, and 10! is 0, and so the ones digit of
6! + 7! + 8! + 9! + 10! is 0.
Since the ones digit of 1! + 2! + 3! + 4! + 5! is 3 and the ones digit of 6! + 7! + 8! + 9! + 10! is 0,
then the ones digit of 1! + 2! + 3! + 4! + 5! + 6! + 7! + 8! + 9! + 10! is 3 + 0 or 3.
(We can verify, using a calculator, that 1! + 2! + 3! + 4! + 5! + 6! + 7! + 8! + 9! + 10! = 4 037 913.)
Answer: (B)

16. In a magic square, the numbers in each row, the numbers in each column, and numbers on each
diagonal have the same sum.
Since the sum of the numbers in the first row equals the sum of the numbers in the first column,
then a + 13 + b = a + 19 + 12 or b = 19 + 12 − 13 = 18.
Therefore, the sum of the numbers in any row, in any column, or along either diagonal equals
the sum of the numbers in the third column, which is 18 + 11 + 16 = 45.
Using the first column, a + 19 + 12 = 45 or a = 14.
Using the second row, 19 + c + 11 = 45 or c = 15.
Thus, a + b + c = 14 + 18 + 15 = 47.
Answer: (C)

17. Suppose that Deanna drove at v km/h for the first 30 minutes.
Since 30 minutes equals one-half of an hour, then in these 30 minutes, she drove 12 v km.
In the second 30 minutes, she drove at (v + 20) km/h.
Thus, in these second 30 minutes, she drove 12 (v + 20) km.
Since she drove 100 km in total, then 12 v + 21 (v + 20) = 100 or 12 v + 12 v + 10 = 100.
Thus, v + 10 = 100 or v = 90.
Therefore, Deanna drove 90 km/h for the first 30 minutes.
Answer: (B)
2015 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

18. Let O be the centre of the circle. Join OS and OR.

S R

P O Q

Since the diameter of the semicircle is 20, then its radius is half of this, or 10.
Since OS and OR are radii, then OS = OR = 10.
Consider 4OP S and 4OQR.
Since P QRS is a rectangle, both triangles are right-angled (at P and Q).
Also, P S = QR (equal sides of the rectangle) and OS = OR (since they are radii of the circle).
Therefore, 4OP S is congruent to 4OQR. (Right-angled triangles with equal hypotenuses and
one other pair of equal corresponding sides are congruent.)
Since 4OP S and 4OQR are congruent, then OP = OQ.
Since P Q = 16, then OP = 21 P Q = 8.
Finally, since 4OP S√is right-angled √ at P , then we√ can apply the Pythagorean Theorem to
conclude that P S = OS 2 − OP 2 = 102 − 82 = 100 − 64 = 6.
Answer: (A)

19. Consider a stack of bills with a total value of $1000 that includes x $20 bills and y $50 bills.
The $20 bills are worth $20x and the $50 bills are worth $50y, and so 20x + 50y = 1000 or
2x + 5y = 100.
Determining the number of possible stacks that the teller could have is equivalent to determining
the numbers of pairs (x, y) of integers with x ≥ 1 and y ≥ 1 and 2x + 5y = 100.
(We must have x ≥ 1 and y ≥ 1 because each stack includes at least one $20 bill and at least
one $50 bill.)
Since x ≥ 1, then 2x ≥ 2, so 5y = 100 − 2x ≤ 98.
This means that y ≤ 98 5
= 19.6.
Since y is an integer, then y ≤ 19.
Also, since 5y = 100 − 2x, then the right side is the difference between two even integers, so 5y
is itself even, which means that y must be even.
Therefore, the possible values of y are 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18.
Each of these values gives a pair (x, y) that satisfies the equation 2x + 5y = 100:

(x, y) = (45, 2), (40, 4), (35, 6), (30, 8), (25, 10), (20, 12), (15, 14), (10, 16), (5, 18)

Translating back to the original context, we see that the maximum number of stacks that the
teller could have is 9.
Answer: (A)
2015 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7
3 n


20. First, we calculate the value of 72 2
for each integer from n = −3 to n = 4, inclusive:

3 −3 3 3 −2 2
= 72 · 323 = 72 · 278
= 64 = 72 · 232 = 72 · 49 = 32



72 2 3
72 2
3 −1 21 2

0
72 32 = 72 · 1 = 72


72 2
= 72 · 31 = 72 · 3 = 48
3 1 1
2 2
= 72 · 321 = 72 · 23 = 108 72 32 = 72 · 322 = 72 · 49 = 162


72 2
3 3 3
4 4
= 72 · 323 = 72 · 27 72 32 = 72 · 324 = 72 · 81 = 729


72 2 8
= 243 16 2

n
Therefore, there are at least 6 integer values of n for which 72 32 is an integer, namely
n = −2, −1, 0, 1, 2, 3.
Since 6 is the largest possible choice given, then it must be the correct answer (that is, it must
be the case that there are no more values of n that work).

4
We can justify this statement informally by noting that if we start with 72 23 = 729 2
, then
3
making n larger has the effect of continuing to multiply by 2 which keeps the numerator odd
3 n


and the denominator even, and so 72 2 is never an integer when n > 3. A similar argument
holds when n < −2.
We could justify the statement more formally by re-writing

n
72 23 = 32 · 23 · 3n · 2−n = 32 3n 23 2−n = 32+n 23−n

For this product to be an integer, it must be the case that each of 32+n and 23−n is an integer.
(Each of 32+n and 23−n is either an integer or a fraction with numerator 1 and denominator
equal to a power of 2 or 3. If each is such a fraction, then their product is less than 1 and so
is not an integer. If exactly one is an integer, then their product equals a power of 2 divided
by a power of 3 or vice versa. Such a fraction cannot be an integer since powers of 3 cannot be
“divided out” of powers of 2 and vice versa.)
This means that 2 + n ≥ 0 (and so n ≥ −2) and 3 − n ≥ 0 (and so n ≤ 3).
Therefore, −2 ≤ n ≤ 3. The integers in this range are the six integers listed above.
Answer: (E)

21. We are given that three consecutive odd integers have an average of 7.
These three integers must be 5, 7 and 9.
One way to see this is to let the three integers be a − 2, a, a + 2. (Consecutive odd integers
differ by 2.)
Since the average of these three integers is 7, then their sum is 3 · 7 = 21.
Thus, (a − 2) + a + (a + 2) = 21 or 3a = 21 and so a = 7.
21 + m
When m is included, the average of the four integers equals their sum divided by 4, or .
4
This average is an integer whenever 21 + m is divisible by 4.
Since 21 is 1 more than a multiple of 4, then m must be 1 less than a multiple of 4 for the sum
21 + m to be a multiple of 4.
The smallest positive integers m that are 1 less than a multiple of 4 are 3, 7, 11, 15, 19.
Since m cannot be equal to any of the original three integers 5, 7 and 9, then the three smallest
possible values of m are 3, 11 and 15.
The sum of these possible values is 3 + 11 + 15 = 29.
Answer: (D)
2015 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

22. We label the players P, Q, R, S, T, U.

Each player plays 2 games against each of the other 5 players, and so each player plays 10 games.
Thus, each player earns between 0 and 10 points, inclusive.
We show that a player must have at least 9 21 points to guarantee that he has more points than
every other player.
We do this by showing that it is possible to have two players with 9 points, and that if one
player has 9 12 or 10 points, then every other player has at most 9 points.
Suppose that P and Q each win both of their games against each of R, S, T, and U and tie
each of their games against each other.
Then P and Q each have a record of 8 wins, 2 ties, 0 losses, giving them each 8 · 1 + 2 · 12 + 0 · 0
or 9 points.
We note also that R, S, T, U each have 4 losses (2 against each of P and Q), so have at most
6 points.
Therefore, if a player has 9 points, it does not guarantee that he has more points than every
other player, since in the scenario above both P and Q have 9 points.
Suppose next that P has 9 12 or 10 points.
If P has 10 points, then P won every game that he played, which means that every other player
lost at least 2 games, and so can have at most 8 points.
If P has 9 12 points, then P must have 9 wins, 1 tie and 0 losses. (With 9 12 points, P has only
“lost” 21 point and so cannot have lost any games and can only have tied 1 game.)
Since P has 9 wins, then P must have beaten each of the other players at least once. (If there
was a player that P had not beaten, then P would have at most 4 · 2 = 8 wins.)
Since every other player has at least 1 loss, then every other player has at most 9 points.
Therefore, if P has 9 21 or 10 points, then P has more points than every other player.
In summary, if a player has 9 12 or 10 points, then he is guaranteed to have more points than
every other player, while if he has 9 points, it is possible to have the same number of points as
another player.
Thus, the minimum number of points necessary to guarantee having more points than every
other player is 9 12 .
Answer: (D)

23. Nylah’s lights come on randomly at one of the times 7:00 p.m., 7:30 p.m., 8:00 p.m., 8:30 p.m.,
or 9:00 p.m., each with probability 51 .
What is the probability that the lights come on at 7:00 p.m. and are on for t hours with
4 < t < 5?
If the lights come on at 7:00 p.m. and are on for between 4 and 5 hours, then they go off
between 11:00 p.m. and 12:00 a.m.
Since the length of this interval is 1 hour and the length of the total interval of time in which
the lights randomly go off is 2 hours (11:00 p.m. to 1:00 a.m.), then the probability that they
go off between 11:00 p.m. and 12:00 a.m. is 21 .
Therefore, the probability that the lights come on at 7:00 p.m. and are on for t hours with
4 < t < 5 is 51 · 12 = 10
1
.
Similarly, if the lights come on at 7:30 p.m., they can go off between 11:30 p.m. and 12:30 a.m.,
and the probability of this combination of events is also 51 · 12 = 10
1
.
Similarly again, the probability of the lights coming on at 8:00 p.m. and going off between
1
12:00 a.m. and 1:00 a.m. is also 10 .
If the lights come on at 8:30 p.m., then to be on for between 4 and 5 hours, they must go off
between 12:30 a.m. and 1:00 a.m. (They cannot stay on past 1:00 a.m.)
The probability of this combination is 51 · 1/2
2
= 15 · 14 = 20
1
.
2015 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

If the lights come on at 9:00 p.m., they cannot be on for more than 4 hours, since the latest
that they can go off is 1:00 a.m.
1 1 7
Therefore, the probability that the lights are on for between 4 and 5 hours is 3 · 10 + 20 = 20 .
(We note that we can safely ignore the question of whether the lights coming on at 7:30
p.m. and going off at exactly 11:30 p.m., for example, affects the probability calculation, because
11:30 p.m. is a single point in an interval containing an infinite number of points, and so does
not affect the probability.)
Answer: (E)

24. We call an arrangement of tiles of a specific region that satisfies any given conditions a tiling.
Since no tile can cross the line T U , we can consider tilings of the regions P T U S and T QRU
separately.
We proceed without including the units of metres on each dimension.
First, we determine the number of tilings of the 2 × 4 region P T U S.
To be able to discuss this effectively, we split P T U S into 8 squares measuring 1 × 1 and label
these squares as shown in Figure 1.
P T P T P T P T
M N M N M N M N
K L K L K L K L
H J H J H J H J
F G F G F G F G
S U S U S U S U
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4

Consider square F . It must be covered with either a horizontal tile (covering F G) or a vertical
tile (covering F H).
If F is covered with a vertical tile F H, then G must also be covered with a vertical tile GJ,
since G is covered and its tile cannot overlap T U .
This gives the configuration in Figure 2.
The remaining 2 × 2 square can be covered in the two ways shown in Figure 3 and Figure 4.
This gives 2 tilings of P T U S so far.
If F is covered with a horizontal tile F G, then we focus on H and J.
Either H and J are covered by one horizontal tile HJ (again leaving a 2 × 2 square that can
be covered in 2 ways as above (see Figures 5 and 6)) or H and J are each covered by vertical
tiles HK and JL, which means that M N is covered with 1 horizontal tile (see Figure 7).

P T P T P T
M N M N M N
K L K L K L
H J H J H J
F G F G F G
S U S U S U
Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7

So if F is covered with a horizontal tile, there are 2 + 1 = 3 tilings.

In total, there are 2 + 3 = 5 possible tilings of the 2 × 4 region P T U S.
2015 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10

Consider now region T QRU .

Suppose that the number of tilings of the 4 × 4 region T QRU is t.
Then for each of the 5 tilings of P T U S, there are t tilings of T QRU , so there will be 5t tilings
of the entire region P QRS.
Divide T QRU into 1 × 1 squares and label them as shown in Figure 8. We define V and W to
be the midpoints of T Q and U R, respectively.

T V Q T V Q T V Q T V Q
m n o p m n o p m n o p m n o p
i j k l i j k l i j k l i j k l
e f g h e f g h e f g h e f g h
a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d
U W R U W R U W R U W R
Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11

We consider two cases – either the line V W is overlapped by a tile, or it isn’t.

If V W is not overlapped by a tile, then each of T V W U and V QRW is a 2 × 4 region to be
tiled, and so can be tiled in 5 ways, as we saw with P T U S.
In this case, the number of tilings of T QRU is 5 × 5 = 25.
Suppose that V W is overlapped by at least one tile.
If bc is covered by a horizontal tile, then ae and dh are covered by vertical tiles.
In this case, either f g is covered by a horizontal tile (Figure 9), or each of f and g is covered
by a vertical tile (Figure 10).
In the first case (Figure 9), the upper 4 × 2 region needs to be tiled and there are 5 ways to do
this, as above.
In the second case (Figure 10), the remaining tiling is forced to be as shown in Figure 11. Can
you see why?
Therefore, if bc is covered by a horizontal tile, there are 5 + 1 = 6 tilings.
Suppose that bc is not covered by a horizontal tile, but f g is covered by a horizontal tile.
Then ab and cd are each covered by horizontal tiles and so ei and hl are each covered by vertical
tiles and so mn and op are each covered by horizontal tiles, and so jk must be covered by a
horizontal tile.

T V Q T V Q T V Q
m n o p m n o p m n o p
i j k l i j k l i j k l
e f g h e f g h
a b c d a b c d
U W R U W R U W R
Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14

In other words, there is only 1 tiling in this case, shown in Figure 12.
Suppose now that bc and f g are not covered by a horizontal tile, but jk is.
In this case, each of the bottom 2 × 2 squares is tiled in a self-contained way. There are 2 ways
to tile each, and so 4 ways to tile the pair of squares. (These tilings are each self-contained
because if either ei or hl is covered by a vertical tile, then the remaining three tiles in the
corresponding 2 × 2 square cannot be covered with 1 × 2 tiles.)
2015 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11

Furthermore, im and lp must be covered by vertical tiles, meaning that no is tiled with a
horizontal tile, as shown in Figure 13, and so there is only one tiling of the upper rectangle.
Thus, there are 2 × 2 × 1 = 4 tilings of T QRU in this case, since the rest of the tiling is
determined without choice.
Suppose finally that none of bc, f g, or jk is covered by a horizontal tile, but no is.
Then im and lp are covered with vertical tiles, which means that f j and gk are covered by
vertical tiles, giving the diagram in Figure 14.
There is no way to complete this tiling without using a horizontal tile bc.
Therefore, there are no tilings in this case.
Finally, we can now say that there are t = 25 + 6 + 4 + 1 tilings of T QRU .
This means that there are 5 × 36 = 180 ways of tiling the entire 6 × 4 region with the given
conditions.
Answer: (A)

25. Suppose that the square base P QRS of the prism has side length a, and that the prism has
height h.
We are asked to find the maximum possible area for rectangle P QU T .
The area of rectangle P QU T is equal to ah, since P Q = a and QU = h.
Let A be the point on P QRS directly below X (that is, XA is perpendicular to the plane of
P QRS). Note that AX = h.
Draw line segment BC through A with B on P S and C on QR so that BC is parallel to P Q.
Draw line segment DE through A with D on P Q and E on SR so that DE is parallel to QR.
Then segments BC and DE divide square P QRS into four rectangles.
Let P D = m and P B = n.
Then SE = m, QC = n, DQ = ER = a − m, and CR = BS = a − n.

W V
X
h
T S
U
E R
A a–n
B C
n
n
P m D a–m Q

4XAQ is right-angled at A so QX 2 = AX 2 + AQ2 .

But AQ is the hypotenuse of right-angled 4ADQ, so AQ2 = AD2 + DQ2 .
Thus, QX 2 = AX 2 + AD2 + DQ2 .
Since QX = 10, AX = h, AD = CQ = n, and DQ = a − m, then 102 = h2 + n2 + (a − m)2 .
Similarly, using P X = 12, we find that 122 = h2 + n2 + m2 and using RX = 8, we find that
82 = h2 + (a − n)2 + (a − m)2 .
Subtracting 102 = h2 +n2 +(a−m)2 from 122 = h2 +n2 +m2 , we obtain 144−100 = m2 −(a−m)2
2 2 2 2 44 + a2
or 44 = m − (a − 2am + m ) which gives 44 = 2am − a or m = .
2a
Similarly, subtracting 82 = h2 + (a − n)2 + (a − m)2 from 102 = h2 + n2 + (a − m)2 gives
36 + a2
100 − 64 = n2 − (a − n)2 or 36 = n2 − (a2 − 2an + n2 ) which gives 36 = 2an − a2 or n = .
2a
2015 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 12

Substituting these expressions for m and n into 122 = h2 + n2 + m2 gives

h2 = 144 − m2 − n2
2  2
44 + a2 36 + a2

2
h = 144 − −
2a 2a

Recall that we want to maximize ah.

Since ah > 0, then maximizing ah is equivalent to maximizing (ah)2 = a2 h2 , which is equivalent
to maximizing 4a2 h2 .
From above,
 2 2
  !
2 2
44 + a 36 + a
4a2 h2 = 4a2 144 − −
2a 2a
(44 + a2 )2 (36 + a2 )2
 
2
= 4a 144 − −
4a2 4a2
= 576a2 − (44 + a2 )2 − (36 + a2 )2
= 576a2 − (1936 + 88a2 + a4 ) − (1296 + 72a2 + a4 )
= −2a4 + 416a2 − 3232
= −2(a4 − 208a2 + 1616)
= −2((a2 − 104)2 + 1616 − 1042 ) (completing the square)
2 2 2
= −2(a − 104) − 2(1616 − 104 )
= −2(a2 − 104)2 + 18400
√
Since (a2 − 104)2 ≥ 0, then 4a2 h2 ≤ 18400
√ (with equality when a = 104).
Therefore, a2 h2 ≤ 4600 and so ah ≤ 4600. √ √
This means that maximum possible area of P QU T is 4600 = 10 46 ≈ 67.823.
Of the given answers, this is closest to 67.82.
Answer: (B)
 The CENTRE for EDUCATION
in MATHEMATICS and COMPUTING
cemc.uwaterloo.ca

2014 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Thursday, February 20, 2014

(in North America and South America)

Friday, February 21, 2014

(outside of North America and South America)

Solutions

©2013 University of Waterloo

2014 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2
1. We rearrange the given expression to obtain 2000 + 200 − 80 − 120.
Since 200 − 80 − 120 = 0, then 2000 + 200 − 80 − 120 = 2000.
Alternatively, we could have evaluated each operation in order to obtain
2000 − 80 + 200 − 120 = 1920 + 200 − 120 = 2120 − 120 = 2000
Answer: (A)

2. Since (2)(3)(4) = 6x, then 6(4) = 6x. Dividing both sides by 6, we obtain x = 4.
Answer: (E)

3. The unlabelled angle inside the triangle equals its vertically opposite angle, or 40◦ .
Since the sum of the angles in a triangle is 180◦ , then 40◦ + 60◦ + x◦ = 180◦ or 100 + x = 180.
Thus, x = 80.
Answer: (C)

4. The line representing a temperature of 3◦ is the horizontal line passing halfway between 2◦ and
4◦ on the vertical axis.
There are two data points on this line: one at 2 p.m. and one at 9 p.m.
The required time is 9 p.m.
Answer: (A)

5. Since 2n + 5 = 16, then 2n − 3 = (2n + 5) − 8 = 16 − 8 = 8.

Alternatively, we could solve the equation 2n + 5 = 16 to obtain 2n = 11 or n = 11
2
.
11
From this, we see that 2n − 3 = 2( 2 ) − 3 = 11 − 3 = 8.
Answer: (A)
6 5
6. Since 3 = 2
< 26 , then 52 < 3.
and 2
√ √ √ √
Since 3 = 9 and
√ 9 < 10, then 3 < 10.
Thus, 52 < 3 < 10, and so the list of the three numbers in order from smallest to largest is
5
√
2
, 3, 10.
Answer: (B)

7. 20% of the number 100 is 20, so when 100 is increased by 20%, it becomes 100 + 20 = 120.
50% of a number is half of that number, so 50% of 120 is 60.
Thus, when 120 is increased by 50%, it becomes 120 + 60 = 180.
Therefore, Meg’s final result is 180.
Answer: (E)

8. Since 4P QR is right-angled at P , we can use the Pythagorean Theorem.

We obtain P Q2 + P R2 = QR2 or 102 + P R2 = 262 . √
This gives P R2 = 262 − 102 = 676 − 100 = 576 and so P R = 576 = 24, since P R > 0.
Since 4P QR is right-angled at P , its area equals 21 (P R)(P Q) = 12 (24)(10) = 120.
Answer: (B)

9. We use A, B, C, D, E to represent Amy, Bob, Carla, Dan, and Eric, respectively.

We use the greater than symbol (>) to represent “is taller than” and the less than symbol (<)
to represent “is shorter than”.
From the first bullet, A > C.
From the second bullet, D < E and D > B so E > D > B.
From the third bullet, E < C or C > E.
Since A > C and C > E and E > D > B, then A > C > E > D > B, which means that Bob
is the shortest.
Answer: (B)
2014 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

10. Solution 1
We start from the OUTPUT and work back to the INPUT.
Since the OUTPUT 32 is obtained from adding 16 to the previous number, then the previous
number is 32 − 16 = 16.

INPUT → Subtract 8 → → Divide by 2 → 16 → Add 16 → 32

Since 16 is obtained by dividing the previous number by 2, then the previous number is 2 × 16
or 32.

INPUT → Subtract 8 → 32 → Divide by 2 → 16 → Add 16 → 32

Since 32 is obtained by subtracting 8 from the INPUT, then the INPUT must have been 32+8 = 40.

40 → Subtract 8 → 32 → Divide by 2 → 16 → Add 16 → 32

Solution 2
Suppose that the INPUT is x.
Subtracting 8 gives x − 8.
Dividing this result by 2 gives 12 (x − 8) or 12 x − 4.
Adding 16 to this result gives ( 12 x − 4) + 16 = 21 x + 12, which is the OUTPUT.

1 1
x → Subtract 8 → x − 8 → Divide by 2 → 2
x − 4 → Add 16 → 2
x + 12

If the OUTPUT is 32, then 12 x + 12 = 32 or 12 x = 20 and so x = 40.

Therefore, the INPUT must have been 40.
Answer: (D)

11. We consider the equation of the line shown in the form y = mx + b.

The slope, m, of the line shown is negative.
The y-intercept, b, of the line shown is positive.
Of the given choices only y = −2x + 3 has m < 0 and b > 0.
Therefore, a possible equation for the line is y = −2x + 3.
Answer: (E)

12. Since x = 2y, then (x − y)(2x + y) = (2y − y)(2(2y) + y) = (y)(5y) = 5y 2 .

Answer: (A)

13. Erika assembling 9 calculators is the same as assembling three groups of 3 calculators.
Since Erika assembles 3 calculators in the same amount of time that Nick assembles 2 calcula-
tors, then he assembles three groups of 2 calculators (that is, 6 calculators) in this time.
Since Nick assembles 1 calculator in the same amount of time that Sam assembles 3 calculators,
then Sam assembles 18 calculators while Nick assembles 6 calculators.
Thus, the three workers assemble 9+6+18 = 33 calculators while Erika assembles 9 calculators.
Answer: (E)

14. Since 1 GB = 1024 MB, then Julia’s 300 GB hard drive has 300×1024 = 307 200 MB of storage
space.
When Julia puts 300 000 MB of data on the empty hard drive, the amount of empty space
remaining is 307 200 − 300 000 = 7200 MB.
Answer: (C)
2014 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

15. From the second row, 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 = 24 or 44 = 24, and so 4 = 6.

From the first row, ♥ + 4 + 4 + ♥ = 26 or 2♥ + 24 = 26.
Since 4 = 6, then 2♥ = 26 − 12 = 14, and so ♥ = 7.
From the fourth row,  + ♥ +  + 4 = 33.
Since 4 = 6 and ♥ = 7, then 2 + 7 + 6 = 33, and so 2 = 20 or  = 10.
Finally, from the third row,  +  + ♥ +  = 27.
Since  = 10 and ♥ = 7, then 2 = 27 − 10 − 7 = 10.
Thus,  = 5.
Answer: (A)

16. The mean number of hamburgers eaten per student equals the total number of hamburgers
eaten divided by the total number of students.
12 students each eat 0 hamburgers. This is a total of 0 hamburgers eaten.
14 students each eat 1 hamburger. This is a total of 14 hamburgers eaten.
8 students each eat 2 hamburgers. This is a total of 16 hamburgers eaten.
4 students each eat 3 hamburgers. This is a total of 12 hamburgers eaten.
2 students each eat 4 hamburgers. This is a total of 8 hamburgers eaten.
Thus, a total of 0 + 14 + 16 + 12 + 8 = 50 hamburgers are eaten.
The total number of students is 12 + 14 + 8 + 4 + 2 = 40.
50
Therefore, the mean number of hamburgers eaten is 40 = 1.25.
Answer: (C)

17. A circle with area 36π has radius 6, since the the area of a circle with radius r equals πr2 and
π(62 ) = 36π.
The circumference of a circle with radius 6 equals 2π(6) = 12π.
Therefore, each quarter-circle contributes 41 (12π) = 3π to the circumference.
The perimeter of the given figure consists of three quarter-circle sections and two radii from
the circle.
Thus, its perimeter is 3(3π) + 2(6) = 9π + 12.
Answer: (B)

18. Suppose that the number of 2 ¢ stamps that Sonita buys is x.

Then the number of 1 ¢ stamps that she buys is 10x.
The total value of the 2 ¢ and 1 ¢ stamps that she buys is 2(x) + 1(10x) = 12x ¢.
Since she buys some 5 ¢ stamps as well and the total value of the stamps that she buys is 100 ¢,
then the value of the 5 ¢ stamps that she buys is (100 − 12x) ¢.
Thus, 100 − 12x must be a multiple of 5. Since 100 is a multiple of 5, then 12x must be a
multiple of 5, and so x is a multiple of 5 (since 12 has no divisors larger than 1 in common with
5).
Note that x > 0 (since she buys some 2 ¢ stamps) and x < 9 (since 12x is less than 100). The
only multiple of 5 between 0 and 9 is 5, so x = 5.
When x = 5, the value of 5 ¢ stamps is 100 − 12x = 100 − 12(5) = 40 ¢ and so she buys 40 5
=8
5 ¢ stamps.
Finally, she buys 5 2 ¢ stamps, 50 1 ¢ stamps, and 8 5 ¢ stamps, for a total of 5 + 50 + 8 = 63
stamps.
(Checking, these stamps are worth 5(2) + 50(1) + 8(5) = 10 + 50 + 40 = 100 ¢ in total, as
required.)
Answer: (D)
2014 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

19. There are ten possible pairs of numbers that can be chosen: −3 and −1; −3 and 0; −3 and 2;
−3 and 4; −1 and 0; −1 and 2; −1 and 4; 0 and 2; 0 and 4; 2 and 4. Each pair is equally likely
to be chosen.
Pairs that include 0 (4 pairs) have a product of 0; pairs that do not include 0 (6 of them) do
not have a product of 0.
4
Therefore, the probability that a randomly chosen pair has a product of 0 is 10 or 25 .
Answer: (D)

20. The layer sum of wxyz equals 2014.

This means that the sum of the integer with digits wxyz, the integer with digits xyz, the integer
with digits yz, and the integer z is 2014.
Note that the integer with digits wxyz equals 1000w + 100x + 10y + z, the integer with digits
xyz equals 100x + 10y + z, and the integer with digits yz equals 10y + z.
Therefore, we have

(1000w + 100x + 10y + z) + (100x + 10y + z) + (10y + z) + z = 2014

or
1000w + 200x + 30y + 4z = 2014 (∗)
Each of w, x, y, z is a single digit and w 6= 0.
Now w cannot be 3 or greater, or the left side of (∗) would be at least 3000, which is too large.
Thus, w = 1 or w = 2.
If w = 2, then 2000+200x+30y +4z = 2014 and so 200x+30y +4z = 14 or 100x+15y +2z = 7.
This would mean that x = y = 0 (since otherwise the terms 100x + 15y would contribute more
than 7), which gives 2z = 7 which has no integer solutions. Thus, w 6= 2.
Therefore, w = 1.
This gives 1000+200x+30y+4z = 2014 and so 200x+30y+4z = 1014 or 100x+15y+2z = 507.
Since 0 ≤ y ≤ 9 and 0 ≤ z ≤ 9, then 0 ≤ 15y + 2z ≤ 15(9) + 2(9) = 153.
Since 100x is a multiple of 100 and 0 ≤ 15y + 2z ≤ 153, then 100x = 400 or 100x = 500 so
15y + 2z = 507 − 400 = 107 or 15y + 2z = 507 − 500 = 7. From above, we saw that 15y + 2z
cannot equal 7, so 15y + 2z = 107, which means that 100x = 400 or x = 4.
Thus, 15y + 2z = 107.
Since 2z is even, then 15y must be odd to make 15y + 2z odd.
The odd multiples of 15 less than 107 are 15, 45, 75, 105.
Since 0 ≤ 2z ≤ 18, then we must have 15y = 105 or y = 7. This gives 2z = 2 or z = 1.
Therefore, the integer wxyz is 1471. (Checking, 1471 + 471 + 71 + 1 = 2014.)
Finally, w + x + y + z = 1 + 4 + 7 + 1 = 13.
Answer: (D)
2014 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

21. Suppose that R is the point at the bottom of the solid directly under Q and S is the back left
bottom corner of the solid (unseen in the problem’s diagram).
Since QR is perpendicular to the bottom surface of the solid, then 4P RQ is right-angled at R
and so P Q2 = P R2 + RQ2 .
We note also that 4P SR is right-angled at S, since the solid is made up of cubes.
Therefore, P R2 = P S 2 + SR2 .

S R

P
P

This tells us that P Q2 = P S 2 + SR2 + RQ2 .

Since the edge length of each cube in the diagram is 1, then P S = 1, SR = 4, and RQ = 3.
Therefore, P Q2 = 12 + 42 +√32 = 26.
Since P Q > 0, then P Q = 26.
Answer: (B)

22. We write such a five-digit positive integer with digits V W XY Z.

We want to count the number of ways of assigning 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 to the digits V, W, X, Y, Z in
such a way that the given properties are obeyed.
From the given conditions, W > X, W > V , Y > X, and Y > Z.
The digits 1 and 3 cannot be placed as W or Y , since W and Y are larger than both of their
neighbouring digits, while 1 is smaller than all of the other digits and 3 is only larger than one
of the other possible digits.
The digit 9 cannot be placed as V , X or Z since it is the largest possible digit and so cannot
be smaller than W or Y . Thus, 9 is placed as W or as Y .
Therefore, the digits W and Y are 9 and either 5 or 7.
Suppose that W = 9 and Y = 5. The number is thus V 9 X5Z.
Neither X or Z can equal 7 since 7 > 5, so V = 7. X and Z are then 1 and 3 or 3 and 1.
There are 2 possible integers in this case.
Similarly, if Y = 9 and W = 5, there are 2 possible integers.
Suppose that W = 9 and Y = 7. The number is thus V 9 X7Z.
The digits 1, 3, 5 can be placed in any of the remaining spots. There are 3 choices for the digit
V . For each of these choices, there are 2 choices for X and then 1 choice for Z.
There are thus 3 × 2 × 1 = 6 possible integers in this case.
Similarly, if Y = 9 and W = 7, there are 6 possible integers.
Overall, there are thus 2 + 2 + 6 + 6 = 16 possible integers.
Answer: (C)
2014 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

23. We call Clarise’s spot C and Abe’s spot A.

Consider a circle centred at C with radius 10 m. Since A is 10 m from C, then A is on this
circle.
Bob starts at C and picks a direction to walk, with every direction being equally likely to be
chosen. We model this by having Bob choose an angle θ between 0◦ and 360◦ and walk 10 m
along a segment that makes this angle when measured counterclockwise from CA.
Bob ends at point B, which is also on the circle.

θ
C A

We need to determine the probability that AB < AC.

Since the circle is symmetric above and below the diameter implied by CA, we can assume that
θ is between 0◦ and 180◦ as the probability will be the same below the diameter.
Consider 4CAB and note that CA = CB = 10 m.
It will be true that AB < AC whenever AB is the shortest side of 4ABC.
AB will be the shortest side of 4ABC whenever it is opposite the smallest angle of 4ABC.
(In any triangle, the shortest side is opposite the smallest angle and the longest side is opposite
the largest angle.)
Since 4ABC is isosceles with CA = CB, then ∠CAB = ∠CBA.
We know that θ = ∠ACB is opposite AB and ∠ACB + ∠CAB + ∠CBA = 180◦ .
Since ∠CAB = ∠CBA, then ∠ACB + 2∠CAB = 180◦ or ∠CAB = 90◦ − 21 ∠ACB.
If θ = ∠ACB is smaller than 60◦ , then ∠CAB = 90◦ − 12 θ will be greater than 60◦ .
Similarly, if ∠ACB is greater than 60◦ , then ∠CAB = 90◦ − 21 θ will be smaller than 60◦ .
Therefore, AB is the shortest side of 4ABC whenever θ is between 0◦ and 60◦ .
Since θ is uniformly chosen in the range 0◦ to 180◦ and 60◦ = 31 (180◦ ), then the probability
that θ is in the desired range is 13 .
Therefore, the probability that Bob is closer to Abe than Clarise is to Abe is 13 .
(Note that we can ignore the cases θ = 0◦ , θ = 60◦ and θ = 180◦ because these are only three
specific cases out of an infinite number of possible values for θ.)
Answer: (B)

24. For each positive integer n, S(n) is defined to be the smallest positive integer divisible by each
of 1, 2, 3, . . . , n. In other words, S(n) is the least common multiple (lcm) of 1, 2, 3, . . . , n.
To calculate the lcm of a set of numbers, we

– determine the prime factorization of each number in the set,

– determine the list of prime numbers that occur in these prime factorizations,
– determine the highest power of each prime number from this list that occurs in the prime
factorizations, and
– multiply these highest powers together.

For example, to calculate S(8), we determine the lcm of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.

The prime factorizations of the numbers 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 are 2, 3, 22 , 5, 2 · 3, 7, 23 .
2014 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

The primes used in this list are 2, 3, 5, 7, with highest powers 23 , 31 , 51 , 71 .

Therefore, S(8) = 23 · 31 · 51 · 71 .
Since S(n) is the lcm of 1, 2, 3, . . . , n and S(n+4) is the lcm of 1, 2, 3, . . . , n, n+1, n+2, n+3, n+4,
then S(n) 6= S(n + 4) if either (i) there are prime factors that occur in n + 1, n + 2, n + 3, n + 4
that don’t occur in 1, 2, 3, . . . , n or (ii) there is a higher power of a prime that occurs in the
factorizations of one of n + 1, n + 2, n + 3, n + 4 that doesn’t occur in any of 1, 2, 3, . . . , n.
For (i) to occur, consider a prime number p that is a divisor of one of n + 1, n + 2, n + 3, n + 4
and none of 1, 2, 3, . . . , n. This means that the smallest positive integer that has p as a divisor
is one of the integers n + 1, n + 2, n + 3, n + 4, which in fact means that this integer equals p.
(The smallest multiple of a prime p is 1 · p, or p itself.)
Thus, for (i) to occur, one of n + 1, n + 2, n + 3, n + 4 is a prime number.
For (ii) to occur, consider a prime power pk (with k > 1) that is a divisor of one of n + 1,
n + 2, n + 3, n + 4 and none of 1, 2, 3, . . . , n. Using a similar argument to condition (i), one of
n + 1, n + 2, n + 3, n + 4 must equal that prime power pk .
Therefore, S(n) 6= S(n + 4) whenever one of n + 1, n + 2, n + 3, n + 4 is a prime number or a
prime power.
In other words, S(n) = S(n + 4) whenever none of n + 1, n + 2, n + 3, n + 4 is a prime number
or a prime power.
Therefore, we want to determine the positive integers n with 1 ≤ n ≤ 100 for which none of
n + 1, n + 2, n + 3, n + 4 is a prime number or a prime power.
The prime numbers less than or equal to 104 are

2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23, 29, 31, 37, 41, 43, 47, 53, 59, 61, 67, 71, 73, 79, 83, 89, 97, 101, 103

(We go up to 104 since n can be as large as 100 so n + 4 can be as large as 104.)

The prime powers (with exponent at least 2) less than or equal to 100 are

4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 9, 27, 81, 25, 49

There are 5 powers of 2, 3 powers of 3, 1 power of 5, and 1 power of 7 in this list. No primes
larger than 7 have a power less than 100.
Therefore, we want to count the positive integers n with 1 ≤ n ≤ 100 for which none of
n + 1, n + 2, n + 3, n + 4 appear in the list

2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 16, 17, 19, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 32, 37, 41, 43, 47, 49, 53, 59, 61, 64,

67, 71, 73, 79, 81, 83, 89, 97, 101, 103
For four consecutive integers not to occur in this list, we need a difference between adjacent
numbers to be at least 5.
The values of n that satisfy this condition are n = 32, 53, 54, 73, 74, 83, 84, 89, 90, 91, 92.
(For example, 54 is a value of n that works since none of 55, 56, 57, 58 appears in the list.)
Therefore, there are 11 values of n with 1 ≤ n ≤ 100 for which S(n) = S(n + 4).
Answer: (C)

25. Suppose that P has coordinates P (0, 2a) for some real number a.
Since P has y-coordinate greater than 0 and less than 100, then 0 < 2a < 100 or 0 < a < 50.
We determine an expression for the radius of the circle in terms of a and then determine how
many values of a give an integer radius.
We determine the desired expression by first finding the coordinates of the centre, C, of the
2014 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

circle in terms of a, and then calculating the distance from C to one of the points O, P , Q.
If a circle passes through the three vertices O, P and Q of a triangle, then its centre is the point
of intersection of the perpendicular bisectors of the sides OP , OQ, and P Q of the triangle.
We determine the centre of the circle by finding the point of intersection of the perpendicular
bisectors of OP and OQ. (We could use P Q instead, but this would be more complicated
algebraically.)
Since O has coordinates (0, 0) and P has coordinates (0, 2a), then OP is vertical so its perpen-
dicular bisector is horizontal.
The midpoint of OP is ( 21 (0 + 0), 21 (0 + 2a)) = (0, a).
Therefore, the perpendicular bisector of OP is the horizontal line through (0, a), and so has
equation y = a.
4−0
Since O has coordinates (0, 0) and Q has coordinates (4, 4), then OQ has slope 4−0 = 1.
Therefore, a line perpendicular to OQ has slope −1.
The midpoint of OQ is ( 12 (0 + 4), 21 (0 + 4)) = (2, 2).
Therefore, the perpendicular bisector of OQ has slope −1 and passes through (2, 2), so has
equation y − 2 = (−1)(x − 2) or y = −x + 4.
The centre of the desired circle is thus the point of intersection of the lines with equations y = a
and y = −x + 4.
The y-coordinate of this point is a and the x-coordinate is obtained by solving a = −x + 4 and
obtaining x = 4 − a.
Therefore, the coordinates of C are (4 − a, a).
The radius, r, of the circle is the distance from C to any of the three points O, P and Q. It is
easiest to find the distance from O to C, which is
p √ √
r = (4 − a)2 + a2 = a2 − 8a + 16 + a2 = 2a2 − 8a + 16

We rewrite this as
p p p p
r = 2(a2 − 4a + 8) = 2(a2 − 4a + 4 + 4) = 2((a − 2)2 + 4) = 2(a − 2)2 + 8

Since (a − 2)2 ≥ 0 and (a − 2)2 = 0 only when 2

√ a = 2, then the minimum value of 2(a − 2) + 8
p when a = 2. Thus, r ≥ 8.
is 8 and this occurs
The expression 2(a − 2)2 + 8 is decreasing from a = 0 to a = 2 and then increasing from
a = 2 to a = 50. p p
When a = 0, r = p2(a − 2)2 + 8 = p2(−2)2 + 8 = √4.
When a = 2, r = p2(a − 2)2 + 8 = p2(0)2 + 8 = 8√≈ 2.83.
When a = 50, r = 2(a − 2)2 + 8 = √2(48)2 + 8 = 4616 ≈ 67.94. √
Therefore,
√ when 0 < a ≤ 2, we have 8 ≤ r < 4 and when 2 ≤ a < 50, we have 8 ≤ r <
4616. p
The expression r = 2(a − 2)2 + 8 will take every real number value in each of these ranges,
because b√ = 2(a − 2)2 + 8 represents the equation of a parabola which is a “smooth” curve.
Between 8 ≈ 2.83 and 4, there is one integer value (namely, 3) which is achieved by the
expression.
√ (We do not count
√ 4 since it is an endpoint that is not included.)
Between 8 ≈ 2.83 and 4616 ≈ 67.94, there are 65 integer values (namely, 3 to 67, inclusive)
which are achieved by the expression.
In total, there are 1 + 65 = 66 integer values achieved by the expression in the allowable range
for a, so there are 66 positions of P for which the radius is an integer.
Answer: (C)
 The CENTRE for EDUCATION
in MATHEMATICS and COMPUTING
cemc.uwaterloo.ca

2013 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Thursday, February 21, 2013

(in North America and South America)

Friday, February 22, 2013

(outside of North America and South America)

Solutions

©2012 University of Waterloo

2013 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2
8+4 12
1. Simplifying, = = 3.
8−4 4
Answer: (B)

2. Since 21 = 2 and 22 = 2 × 2 = 4 and 23 = 2 × 2 × 2 = 8, then 23 + 22 + 21 = 8 + 4 + 2 = 14.

Answer: (C)
√
3. If x + 81 = 25, then x + 9 = 25 or x = 16.
Answer: (A)

4. We could use a calculator to divide each of the four given numbers by 3 to see which calculations
give an integer answer.
Alternatively, we could use the fact that a positive integer is divisible by 3 if and only if the
sum of its digits is divisible by 3.
The sums of the digits of 222, 2222, 22 222, and 222 222 are 6, 8, 10, and 12, respectively.
Two of these sums are divisible by 3 (namely, 6 and 12) so two of the four integers (namely,
222 and 222 222) are divisible by 3.
Answer: (C)

5. Since the field originally has length 20 m and width 5 m, then its area is 20 × 5 = 100 m2 .
The new length of the field is 20 + 10 = 30 m, so the new area is 30 × 5 = 150 m2 .
The increase in area is 150 − 100 = 50 m2 .
(Alternatively, we could note that since the length increases by 10 m and the width stays
constant at 5 m, then the increase in area is 10 × 5 = 50 m2 .)
Answer: (C)

6. Since the tick marks divide the cylinder into four parts of equal volume, then the level of the
milk shown is a bit less than 34 of the total volume of the cylinder.
Three-quarters of the total volume of the cylinder is 43 × 50 = 37.5 L.
Of the five given choices, the one that is slightly less than 37.5 L is 36 L, or (D).
Answer: (D)

7. Since 4P QR is equilateral, then P Q = QR = RP .

Therefore, 4x = x + 12 or 3x = 12 and so x = 4.
Answer: (C)
3+6 9 1
8. Using the definition of the symbol, 3  6 = = = .
3×6 18 2
Answer: (E)

9. One way to phrase the Pythagorean Theorem is that the area of the square formed on the
hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle equals the sum of the areas of the squares formed on the
other two sides.
Therefore, the area of the square on P Q equals the area of the square on P R minus the area
of the square on QR, which equals 169 − 144 or 25.
Answer: (E)

10. Since the average age of the three sisters is 27, then the sum of their ages is 3 × 27 = 81.
When Barry is included the average age of the four people is 28, so the sum of the ages of the
four people is 4 × 28 = 112.
Barry’s age is the difference between the sum of the ages of all four people and the sum of the
ages of the three sisters, which equals 112 − 81 or 31.
Answer: (E)
2013 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

11. Let O be the origin (where the line with equation y = 3x intersects the x-axis).
Let P be the point where the line with equation x = 4 intersects the x-axis, and let Q be the
point where the lines with equations x = 4 and y = 3x intersect.

y
Q

O P
x
4

y = 3x x=4

The line x = 4 is perpendicular to the x-axis, so the given triangle is right-angled at P .

Therefore, the area of the triangle equals 21 (OP )(P Q).
Now P lies on the x-axis and on the line x = 4, so has coordinates (4, 0).
Thus, OP = 4.
Point Q also has x-coordinate 4. Since Q lies on y = 3x, then its y-coordinate is y = 3(4) = 12.
Since P has coordinates (4, 0) and Q has coordinates (4, 12), then P Q = 12.
Therefore, the area of the triangle is 21 (4)(12) = 24.
Answer: (B)

12. Solution 1
Since a(x + b) = 3x + 12 for all x, then ax + ab = 3x + 12 for all x.
Since the equation is true for all x, then the coefficients on the left side must match the coeffi-
cients on the right side.
Therefore, a = 3 and ab = 12, which gives 3b = 12 or b = 4.
Finally, a + b = 3 + 4 = 7.

Solution 2
Since a(x + b) = 3x + 12 for all x, then the equation is true for x = 0 and x = 1.
When x = 0, we obtain a(0 + b) = 3(0) + 12 or ab = 12.
When x = 1, we obtain a(1 + b) = 3(1) + 12 or a + ab = 15.
Since ab = 12, then a + 12 = 15 or a = 3.
Since ab = 12 and a = 3, then b = 4.
Finally, a + b = 3 + 4 = 7.
Answer: (D)

13. Solution 1
If x = 1, then 3x + 1 = 4, which is an even integer.
In this case, the four given choices are

(A) x + 3 = 4 (B) x − 3 = −2 (C) 2x = 2 (D) 7x + 4 = 11 (E) 5x + 3 = 8

Of these, the only odd integer is (D). Therefore, (D) must be the correct answer as the result
must be true no matter what integer value of x is chosen that makes 3x + 1 even.
2013 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

Solution 2
If x is an integer for which 3x + 1 is even, then 3x is odd, since it is 1 less than an even integer.
If 3x is odd, then x must be odd (since if x is even, then 3x would be even).
If x is odd, then x + 3 is even (odd plus odd equals even), so (A) cannot be correct.
If x is odd, then x − 3 is even (odd minus odd equals even), so (B) cannot be correct.
If x is odd, then 2x is even (even times odd equals even), so (C) cannot be correct.
If x is odd, then 7x is odd (odd times odd equals odd) and so 7x + 4 is odd (odd plus even
equals odd).
If x is odd, then 5x is odd (odd times odd equals odd) and so 5x + 3 is even (odd plus odd
equals even), so (E) cannot be correct.
Therefore, the one expression which must be odd is 7x + 4.
Answer: (D)

14. With a given set of four digits, the largest possible integer that can be formed puts the largest
digit in the thousands place, the second largest digit in the hundreds place, the third largest
digit in the tens place, and the smallest digit in the units place. This is because the largest
digit can make the largest contribution in the place with the most value.
Thus, the largest integer that can be formed with the digits 2, 0, 1, 3 is 3210.
With a given set of digits, the smallest possible integer comes from listing the numbers in
increasing order from the thousands place to the units place.
Here, there is an added wrinkle that the integer must be at least 1000. Therefore, the thousands
digit is at least 1. The smallest integer of this type that can be made uses a thousands digit of
1, and then lists the remaining digits in increasing order; this integer is 1023.
The difference between these integers is 3210 − 1023 = 2187.
Answer: (A)

15. Since 40% of the songs on the updated playlist are Country, then the remaining 100% − 40%
or 60% must be Hip Hop and Pop songs.
Since the ratio of Hip Hop song to Pop songs does not change, then 65% of this remaining 60%
must be Hip Hop songs.
Overall, this is 65% × 60% = 0.65 × 0.6 = 0.39 = 39% of the total number of songs on the
playlist.
Answer: (E)

16. First, we note that 535 − 621 is a positive integer, since

535 − 621 = (55 )7 − (63 )7 = 31257 − 2167

and 3125 > 216.

Second, we note that any positive integer power of 5 has a units digit of 5. Since 5 × 5 = 25
and this product has a units digit of 5, then the units digit of 53 is obtained by multiplying 5
by the units digit 5 of 25. Thus, the units digit of 53 is 5. Similarly, each successive power of 5
has a units digit of 5.
Similarly, each power of 6 has a units digit of 6.
Therefore, 535 has a units digit of 5 and 621 has a units digit of 6. When a positive integer with
units digit 6 is subtracted from a larger positive integer whose units digit is 5, the difference
has a units digit of 9.
Therefore, 535 − 621 has a units digit of 9.
Answer: (B)
2013 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

17. We have

Perimeter of 4P ST = P S + ST + P T
= P S + (SU + U T ) + P T
= P S + SQ + T R + P T (since SU = SQ and U T = T R)
= (P S + SQ) + (P T + T R)
= PQ + PR
= 19 + 17
= 36

Therefore, the perimeter of 4P QR is 36.

Answer: (A)

18. Suppose that the quotient of the division of 109 by x is q.

Since the remainder is 4, this is equivalent to 109 = qx + 4 or qx = 105.
Put another way, x must be a positive integer divisor of 105.
Since 105 = 5 × 21 = 5 × 3 × 7, its positive integer divisors are

1, 3, 5, 7, 15, 21, 35, 105

Of these, 15, 21 and 35 are two-digit positive integers so are the possible values of x.
The sum of these values is 15 + 21 + 35 = 71.
Answer: (D)

19. Solution 1
Draw a line segment T Y through Y parallel to P Q and RS, as shown, and delete line segment
ZX.

Z
P Q

T Y
R S
X

Since T Y is parallel to RS, then ∠T Y X = ∠Y XS = 20◦ .

Thus, ∠ZY T = ∠ZY X − ∠T Y X = 50◦ − 20◦ = 30◦ .
Since P Q is parallel to T Y , then ∠QZY = ∠ZY T = 30◦ .

Solution 2
Since QZ and XS are parallel, then ∠QZX + ∠ZXS = 180◦ .

Z
P Q

Y
R S
X
2013 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

Now ∠QZX = ∠QZY + ∠Y ZX and ∠ZXS = ∠ZXY + ∠Y XS.

We know that ∠Y XS = 20◦ .
Also, the sum of the angles in 4XY Z is 180◦ , so ∠Y ZX + ∠ZXY + ∠ZY X = 180◦ , or
∠Y ZX + ∠ZXY = 180◦ − ∠ZY X = 180◦ − 50◦ = 130◦ .
Combining all of these facts, we obtain ∠QZY + ∠Y ZX + ∠ZXY + ∠Y XS = 180◦
or ∠QZY + 130◦ + 20◦ = 180◦ .
From this, we obtain ∠QZY = 180◦ − 130◦ − 20◦ = 30◦ .
Answer: (A)

20. Suppose that the length of the route is d km.

d d
Then Jill jogs km at 6 km/h and runs km at 12 km/h.
2 2
Note that time equals distance divided by speed.
d/2 d/2 d d 2d d 3d d
Since her total time was x hours, then x = + = + = + = = .
6 12 12 24 24 24 24 8
d 2d
Also, Jack walks km at 5 km/h and runs km at 15 km/h.
3 3
d/3 2d/3 d 2d 3d 2d 5d d
Since his total time is y hours, then y = + = + = + = = .
5 15 15 45 45 45 45 9
x d/8 9
Finally, = = .
y d/9 8
Answer: (A)

21. We start by analyzing the given sum as if we were performing the addition
by hand. Doing this, we would start with the units column. 1

Here, we see that the units digit of the sum X + Y + Z is X. X X X

Thus, the units digit of Y + Z must be 0. Y Y Y
Because none of the digits is zero, then there must be a carry to the tens + Z Z Z
column. Z Y Y X
Because Y + Z are different digits between 1 and 9, then Y + Z is at
most 17. Since the units digit of Y + Z is 0, then Y + Z = 10 and there
is a carry of 1 to the tens column.
Comparing the sums and digits in the tens and units columns, we see
that Y = X + 1 (since Y cannot be 0).
Here are two ways that we could finish the solution.
Method 1
Since Y + Z = 10, then Y Y Y + ZZZ = 1110.
In other words, each column gives a carry of 1 that is added to the next column to the left.
Alternatively, we could notice that Y Y Y = Y × 111 and ZZZ = Z × 111.
Thus, Y Y Y + ZZZ = (Y + Z) × 111 = 10 × 111 = 1110.
Therefore, the given sum simplifies to 1110 + XXX = ZY Y X.
If X = 9, then the sum would be 1110 + 999 = 2009, which has Y = 0, which can’t be the case.
Therefore, X ≤ 8.
This tells us that 1110 + XXX is at most 1110 + 888 = 1998, and so Z must equal 1, regardless
of the value of X.
Since Y + Z = 10, then Y = 9.
This means that we have 1110 + XXX = 199X.
Since X is a digit, then X + 1 = 9, and so X = 8, which is consistent with the above.
(Checking, if X = 8, Y = 9, Z = 1, we have 888 + 999 + 111 = 1998.)
2013 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

Method 2
Consider the tens column.
The sum in this column is 1 + X + Y + Z (we add 1 as the “carry” from 1 1

the units column). X X X

Since Y + Z = 10, then 1 + X + Y + Z = 11 + X. Y Y Y
Since X is between 1 and 9, then 11 + X is at least 12 and at most 20. + Z Z Z
In fact, 11 + X cannot equal 20, since this would mean entering a 0 in 1 Y Y X
the sum, and we know that none of the digits is 0.

Thus, 11 + X is less than 20, and so must equal 10 + Y (giving a digit of Y in the tens column
of the sum and a carry of 1 to the hundreds column).
Further, since the tens column and the hundreds column are the same, then the carry to the
thousands column is also 1. In other words, Z = 1.
Since Y + Z = 10 and Z = 1, then Y = 9.
Since Y = X + 1 and Y = 9, then X = 8.
As in Method 1, we can check that these values satisfy the given sum.
Answer: (D)

22. Solution 1
Let X be the point on QP so that T X is perpendicular to QP .

Q R

T X

P S

Since 4QT P is isosceles, then X is the midpoint of QP .

Since QP = 4, then QX = XP = 2.
Since ∠T QP = 45◦ and ∠QXT = 90◦ , then 4QXT is also isosceles and right-angled.
Therefore, T X = QX = 2.
We calculate the area of 4P T R by adding the areas of 4QRP and 4QT P and subtracting
the area of 4QRT .
Since QR = 3, P Q = 4 and ∠P QR = 90◦ , then the area of 4QRP is 21 (3)(4) = 6.
Since QP = 4, T X = 2 and T X is perpendicular to QP , then the area of 4QT P is 12 (4)(2) = 4.
We can view 4QRT as having base QR with its height being the perpendicular distance from
QR to T , which equals the length of QX. Thus, the area of 4QRT is 12 (3)(2) = 3.
Therefore, the area of 4P T R is 6 + 4 − 3 = 7.

Solution 2
Let X be the point on QP so that T X is perpendicular to QP .
Since 4QT P is isosceles, then X is the midpoint of QP .
Since QP = 4, then QX = XP = 2.
Since ∠T QP = 45◦ and ∠QXT = 90◦ , then 4QXT is also isosceles and right-angled.
Therefore, T X = QX = 2.
Extend RQ to Y and SP to Z so that Y Z is perpendicular to each of Y R and ZS and so that
Y Z passes through T .
2013 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

Each of Y QXT and T XP Z has three right angles (at Y , Q and X, and X, P and Z, respec-
tively), so each of these is a rectangle.
Since QX = T X = XP = 2, then each of Y QXT and T XP Z is a square with side length 2.
Now Y RSZ is a rectangle with Y R = Y Q + QR = 2 + 3 = 5 and RS = 4.

2 Q 3 R
Y
2
T X 4

Z 2 P 3 S

The area of 4P T R equals the area of rectangle Y RSZ minus the areas of 4T Y R, 4RSP and
4P ZT .
Rectangle Y RSZ is 5 by 4 and so has area 5 × 4 = 20.
Since T Y = 2 and Y R = 5 and T Y is perpendicular to Y R, then the area of 4T Y R is
1
2
(T Y )(Y R) = 5.
Since RS = 4 and SP = 3 and RS is perpendicular to SP , then the area of 4RSP is
1
2
(RS)(SP ) = 6.
Since P Z = ZT = 2 and P Z is perpendicular to ZT , then the area of 4P ZT is 21 (P Z)(ZT ) =
2.
Therefore, the area of 4P T R is 20 − 5 − 6 − 2 = 7.
Answer: (C)

23. First, we consider the first bag, which contains a total of 2 + 2 = 4 marbles.
There are 4 possible marbles that can be drawn first, leaving 3 possible marbles that can be
drawn second. This gives a total of 4 × 3 = 12 ways of drawing two marbles.
For both marbles to be red, there are 2 possible marbles (either red marble) that can be drawn
first, and 1 marble that must be drawn second (the remaining red marble). This gives a total
of 2 × 1 = 2 ways of drawing two red marbles.
For both marbles to be blue, there are 2 possible marbles that can be drawn first, and 1 marble
that must be drawn second. This gives a total of 2 × 1 = 2 ways of drawing two blue marbles.
Therefore, the probability of drawing two marbles of the same colour from the first bag is the
total number of ways of drawing two marbles of the same colour (2 + 2 = 4) divided by the
4 1
total number of ways of drawing two marbles (12), or = .
12 3
Second, we consider the second bag, which contains a total of 2 + 2 + g = g + 4 marbles.
There are g + 4 possible marbles that can be drawn first, leaving g + 3 possible marbles that
can be drawn second. This gives a total of (g + 4)(g + 3) ways of drawing two marbles.
As with the first bag, there are 2 × 1 = 2 ways of drawing two red marbles.
As with the first bag, there are 2 × 1 = 2 ways of drawing two blue marbles.
For both marbles to be green, there are g possible marbles that can be drawn first, and g − 1
marbles that must be drawn second. This gives a total of g(g − 1) ways of drawing two green
marbles.
Therefore, the probability of drawing two marbles of the same colour from the second bag is the
total number of ways of drawing two marbles of the same colour (2 + 2 + g(g − 1) = g 2 − g + 4)
g2 − g + 4
divided by the total number of ways of drawing two marbles ((g + 4)(g + 3)), or .
(g + 4)(g + 3)
2013 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

Since the two probabilities that we have calculated are to be equal and g 6= 0, then

1 g2 − g + 4
=
3 (g + 4)(g + 3)
(g + 4)(g + 3) = 3g 2 − 3g + 12
g 2 + 7g + 12 = 3g 2 − 3g + 12
10g = 2g 2
g = 5 (since g 6= 0)

Therefore, g = 5.
Answer: (B)

24. Let the radius of the smaller sphere be r.

Thus, the radius of the larger sphere is 2r. A C B
We determine expressions for the height and radius of the cone in
terms of r and use these to help solve the problem.
O
By symmetry, the centres of the two spheres (Q of the smaller
sphere and O of the larger sphere) lie on the line joining the centre T
of the circular top of the cone (C) to the tip of the cone (P ).
Draw a vertical cross-section of the cone through the centre of the Q
circular top of the cone and through the tip of the cone. U
Each such cross-section will be an identical triangle.
Because the centres of the spheres lie on a line which is in the
plane of this cross-section, the cross-section of each sphere will be
P
a “great” circle (that is, the largest possible circular cross-section
of the sphere).
Because the top of the larger sphere is just level with the top of
the cone, then the sphere “touches” the circular top of the cone at
its centre C.
Finally, because the spheres touch the cone all the way around,
then the circles will be tangent to the triangle in the cross-section.
We label the triangular cross section as ABP .
Note that CP is perpendicular to AB at C.
Draw radii from O and Q to the points T and U , respectively, on AP where the circles with
centre O and Q are tangent to AP .
Note that OT and QU are perpendicular to AP , with OT = 2r and QU = r.
Also, since the two circles are just touching, then the line segment joining their centres, OQ,
passes through this point of tangency, and so OQ = 2r + r = 3r.
Now 4OT P is similar to 4QU P , since each is right-angled and they share a common angle
at P .
OT 2r OP
Since = = 2, then = 2 or OP = 2QP .
QU r QP
Since OP = OQ + QP = 3r + QP , then 3r + QP = 2QP or QP = 3r.
Thus, the height of the cone is CP = CO + OQ + QP = 2r + 3r + 3r = 8r.
(Note that CO is a radius of the larger circle, so CO = 2r.)
We also see that 4ACP is similar to 4QU P , since 4ACP is also right-angled (at C) and
shares the angle at P .
AC QU
Thus, = .
CP UP
2013 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10

We know that CP = 8r and QU = r.

To calculate U P , we use the Pythagorean Theorem to get
p p √ √
U P = QP 2 − QU 2 = (3r)2 − r2 = 8r2 = 8r

since r > 0.
CP · QU 8r · r √
Therefore, AC = = √ = 8r.
UP 8r
Finally, we can use the given information. We are told that the volume of water remaining
after the full cone has the two spheres added is 2016π. This is equivalent to saying that the
difference between the volume of the cone and the combined volumes of the spheres is 2016π.
Using the given volume formulae, we obtain
1
3
π(AC)2 (CP ) − 43 π(QU )3 − 34 π(OT )3 = 2016π
√ 2
1
3
π( 8r) (8r) − 34 πr3 − 43 π(2r)3
= 2016π
3 3 3
64πr − 4πr − 32πr = 6048π
28r3 = 6048
r3 = 216
r = 6

Therefore, the radius of the smaller sphere is 6.

Answer: (B)

25. We define L(n) = n − Z(n!) to be the nth number in Lloyd’s list.

We note that the number of trailing zeros in any positive integer m (which is Z(m)) equals
the number of factors of 10 that m has. For example, 2400 has two trailing zeros since
2400 = 24 × 10 × 10. Further, since 10 = 2 × 5, the number of factors of 10 in any posi-
tive integer m is determined by the number of factors of 2 and 5.
Consider n! = n(n − 1)(n − 2) · · · (3)(2)(1).
Since 5 > 2, then n! will always contain more factors of 2 than factors of 5. This is because
if we make a list of the multiples of 2 and a list of the multiples of 5, then there will be more
numbers in the first list than in the second list that are less than or equal to a given positive
integer n (and so numbers in the first list that contribute more than one factor of 2 will occur
before numbers in the second list that contribute more than one factor of 5, and so on).
In other words, the value of Z(n!) will equal the number of factors of 5 that n! has.
We use the notation V (m) to represent the number of factors of 5 in the integer m.
Thus, Z(n!) = V (n!) and so L(n) = n − V (n!).
Since (n + 1)! = (n + 1) × n!, then V ((n + 1)!) = V (n + 1) + V (n!). (This is because any
additional factors of 5 in (n + 1)! that are not in n! come from n + 1.)
Therefore, if n + 1 is not a multiple of 5, then V (n + 1) = 0 and so V ((n + 1)!) = V (n!).
If n + 1 is a multiple of 5, then V (n + 1) > 0 and so V ((n + 1)!) > V (n!).
Note that

L(n + 1) − L(n) = ((n + 1) − V ((n + 1)!)) − (n − V (n!))

= ((n + 1) − n) − (V ((n + 1)!) − V (n!))
= 1 − V (n + 1)

If n + 1 is not a multiple of 5, then V (n + 1) = 0 and so L(n + 1) − L(n) = 1.

This tells us that when n + 1 is not a multiple of 5, the corresponding term in the list is one
 2013 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11

larger than the previous term; thus, the terms in the list increase by 1 for four terms in a row
whenever there is not a multiple of 5 in this list (since multiples of 5 occur every fifth integer).
When n + 1 is a multiple of 5, the corresponding term will be the same as the previous one (if
n + 1 includes only one factor of 5) or will be smaller if n + 1 includes more than one factor
of 5.
After a bit of experimentation, it begins to appear that, in order to get an integer to appear
three times in the list, there needs to be an integer n that contains at least five factors of 5.
We explicitly show that there are six integers that appear three times in the list L(100) to
L(10 000). Since 6 is the largest of the answer choices, then 6 must be the correct answer.
Let N = 55 k = 3125k for some positive integer k. If N ≤ 10 000, then k can equal 1, 2 or 3.
Also, define a = L(N ).
We make a table of the values of L(N − 6) to L(N + 6). We note that since N contains
five factors of 5, then N − 5 and N + 5 are each divisible by 5 (containing only one factor
of 5 each), and none of the other integers in the list is divisible by 5. Also, we note that
L(m + 1) − L(m) = 1 − V (m + 1) as seen above.

m N −6 N −5 N −4 N −3 N −2 N −1 N N +1 N +2 N +3 N +4 N +5 N +6
V (m) 0 1 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 0
L(m) a a a+1 a+2 a+3 a+4 a a+1 a+2 a+3 a+4 a+4 a+5

Therefore, if N = 55 k, then the integers L(N ) = a and L(N ) + 4 = a + 4 each appear in the
list three times.
Since there are three values of k that place N in the range 100 ≤ N ≤ 10 000, then there are
six integers in Lloyd’s list that appear at least three times.
In order to prove that there are no other integers that appear at least three times in the list
(rather than relying on the multiple choice nature of the problem), we would need to prove
some additional facts. One way to do this would be to prove:

If n and k are positive integers with k ≥ 7 and n ≤ 10 000 and n + k ≤ 10 000, then
L(n + k) 6= L(n).

This allows us to say that if two integers in the list are equal, then they must come from L(n)
to L(n + 6) inclusive, for some n. This then would allow us to say that if three integers in the
list are equal, then they must come from L(n − 6) to L(n + 6), inclusive, for some n. Finally,
we could then prove:

If n is a positive integer with n ≤ 10 000 with three of the integers from L(n − 6) to
L(n + 6), inclusive, equal, then one of the integers in the list n − 6 to n + 6 must be
divisible by 3125.

These facts together allow us to reach the desired conclusion.

Answer: (E)
 The CENTRE for EDUCATION
in MATHEMATICS and COMPUTING
www.cemc.uwaterloo.ca

2012 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Thursday, February 23, 2012

(in North America and South America)

Friday, February 24, 2012

(outside of North America and South America)

Solutions

©2011 University of Waterloo

2012 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2
5−2 3
1. Simplifying, = = 1.
2+1 3
Answer: (B)

2. Since the average of three numbers equals 3, then their sum is 3 × 3 = 9.

Therefore, 1 + 3 + x = 9 and so x = 9 − 4 = 5.
Answer: (B)

3. When the given figure is rotated 90◦ clockwise, the top edge becomes the right edge, so the two
outer shaded triangles are along the right edge of the resulting figure.
Also, the bottom left shaded triangle moves to the top left.
Therefore, the resulting figure is the one in (A).
Answer: (A)

4. Since −1 raised to an even exponent equals 1 and −1 raised to an odd exponent equals −1,
then (−1)3 + (−1)2 + (−1) = −1 + 1 − 1 = −1.
Alternatively, we write

(−1)3 + (−1)2 + (−1) = (−1)(−1)(−1) + (−1)(−1) + (−1) = 1(−1) + 1 − 1 = −1 + 1 − 1 = −1

Answer: (D)
√
5. Since 100 − x = 9, then 100 − x = 92 = 81, and so x = 100 − 81 = 19.
Answer: (E)

6. When 3 bananas are added to the basket, there are 12 apples and 18 bananas in the basket.
18
Therefore, the fraction of the fruit in the basket that is bananas is 12+18 = 18
30
= 35 .
Answer: (C)

7. Since 20% of the students chose pizza and 38% of the students chose Thai food, then the
percentage of students that chose Greek food is 100% − 20% − 38% = 42%.
42
Since there were 150 students surveyed, then 42% × 150 = 100 × 150 = 63 chose Greek food.
Answer: (E)
       
1 1 1 2 3 4
8. Simplifying, 1 − 1− 1− = .
3 4 5 3 4 5
We can simplify further by dividing equal numerators and denominators to obtain a final value
2
of .
5
Answer: (A)

9. Since 20 students went skating and 5 students went both skating and skiing, then 20 − 5 = 15
students went skating only.
Since 9 students went skiing and 5 students went both skating and skiing, then 9 − 5 = 4
students went skiing only.
The number of students who went skating or skiing or both equals the sum of the number who
went skating only, the number who went skiing only, and the number who went both skating
and skiing, or 15 + 4 + 5 = 24.
Therefore, 30 − 24 = 6 students did not go skating or skiing.
Answer: (B)
2012 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

10. The original prism has four faces that are 4 by 2 rectangles, and two faces that are 2 by 2
rectangles. Thus, the surface area of the original prism is 4(4 · 2) + 2(2 · 2) = 32 + 8 = 40.
When a 1 by 1 by 1 cube is cut out, a 1 by 1 square is removed from each of three faces of the
prism, but three new 1 by 1 squares become part of the surface area.
In other words, there is no change to the total surface area.
Therefore, the surface area of the new solid is also 40.
Answer: (C)

11. During a 3 hour shift, Matilda will deliver 3 × 30 = 90 newspapers.

Therefore, she earns a total of 3 × $6.00 + 90 × $0.25 = $18.00 + $22.50 = $40.50 during her
3 hour shift.
Answer: (A)

12. Since (p, q) lies on the line y = 52 x, then q = 25 p.

The given rectangle has two sides on the axes, so has width p and height q.
Therefore, the area of the rectangle equals pq = p · 25 p = 25 p2 .
Since we are told that the area of the rectangle is 90, then 52 p2 = 90 or p2 = 52 (90) = 225.
√
Since p > 0, then p = 225 = 15.
Answer: (D)

13. If N is divisible by both 5 and 11, then N is divisible by 5 × 11 = 55.

This is because 5 and 11 have no common divisor larger than 1.
Therefore, we are looking for a multiple of 55 between 400 and 600 that is odd.
One way to find such a multiple is to start with a known multiple of 55, such as 550, which is
even.
We can add or subtract 55 from this multiple and still obtain multiples of 55.
Note that 550 + 55 = 605, which is too large.
Now 550 − 55 = 495 which is in the correct range and is odd.
Since we are told that there is only such such integer, then it must be the case that N = 495.
The sum of the digits of N is 4 + 9 + 5 = 18.
Answer: (E)

14. We label the point of intersection of RP and SU as W .

S
P
W
50

30 x
R T Q U

Now ∠SW R is an exterior angle for 4RW U .

Therefore, ∠SW R = ∠W RU + ∠W U R, and so 50◦ = 30◦ + x◦ or x = 50 − 30 = 20.
Alternatively, we could see that ∠RW U = 180◦ − ∠SW R = 180◦ − 50◦ = 130◦ .
Since the angles in 4RW U add to 180◦ , then 30◦ +130◦ +x◦ = 180◦ , or x = 180−130−30 = 20.
Answer: (B)
2012 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

15. Since the radius of the larger circle is 9, then OQ = 9 and the area of the larger circle is
π92 = 81π.
Since OP : P Q = 1 : 2 and OQ = 9, then OP = 13 OQ = 3.
Thus, the radius of the smaller circle is 3 and so the area of the smaller circle is π32 = 9π.
The area of the shaded region equals the area of the large circle minus the area of the small
circle, or 81π − 9π = 72π.
Answer: (D)

16. From the table of values, when x = 0, y = 8, and so 8 = a · 02 + b · 0 + c or c = 8.

From the table of values, when x = 1, y = 9, and so 9 = a · 12 + b · 1 + c or a + b + c = 9.
Since a + b + c = 9 and c = 8, then a + b + 8 = 9 or a + b = 1.
Answer: (B)

17. Let L be the length of the string.

If x is the length of the shortest piece, then since each of the other pieces is twice the length of
the next smaller piece, then the lengths of the remaining pieces are 2x, 4x, and 8x.
Since these four pieces make up the full length of the string, then x + 2x + 4x + 8x = L or
1
15x = L and so x = 15 L.
8 8
Thus, the longest piece has length 8x = 15 L, which is 15 of the length of the string.
Answer: (A)

18. Solution 1
After one of the six integers is erased, there are five integers remaining which add to 2012.
Since the original six integers are consecutive, then we can treat them as roughly equal.
Since there are five roughly equal integers that add to 2012, then each is roughly equal to 20125
,
which is roughly 400.
We finish our solution by trial and error.
Suppose that the original six integers were 400, 401, 402, 403, 404, 405.
The sum of these integers is 2415. If one of the integers is to be removed to obtain a total of
2012, then the integer removed must be 2415 − 2012 = 403.
Is there another possible answer?
Suppose that the original six integers were larger, say 401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406. In this case,
the smallest that the sum of five of these could be is 401 + 402 + 403 + 404 + 405 = 2015, which
is too large for the given sum. Any larger set of integers only makes the smallest possible sum
of five integers larger.
Suppose that the original six integers were smaller, say 399, 400, 401, 402, 403, 404. In this
case, the largest that the sum of five of these could be is 400 + 401 + 402 + 403 + 404 = 2010,
which is too small for the given sum. Any smaller set of integers only makes the largest possible
sum of five integers smaller.
Therefore, the possibility found above is the only possibility, and so the sum of the digits of
the integer that was erased is 4 + 0 + 3 = 7.
(Note that, since this is a multiple choice problem, once we had found an answer that works,
it must be the correct answer.)

Solution 2
Suppose that the original six integers are x, x + 1, x + 2, x + 3, x + 4, and x + 5.
Suppose also that the integer that was erased is x + a, where a is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
2012 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

The sum of the integers left is (x + (x + 1) + (x + 2) + (x + 3) + (x + 4) + (x + 5)) − (x + a).

Therefore,

(x + (x + 1) + (x + 2) + (x + 3) + (x + 4) + (x + 5)) − (x + a) = 2012
(6x + 15) − (x + a) = 2012
5x + 15 = 2012 + a
5(x + 3) = 2012 + a

Since the left side is an integer that is divisible by 5, then the right side is an integer that is
divisible by 5.
Since a is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 and 2012 + a is divisible by 5, then a must equal 3.
Thus, 5(x + 3) = 2015 or x + 3 = 403 and so x = 400.
Finally, the integer that was erased is x+a = 400+3 = 403. The sum of its digits is 4+0+3 = 7.
Answer: (C)

19. Suppose that the sum of the four integers along each straight line equals S.
Then S = 9 + p + q + 7 = 3 + p + u + 15 = 3 + q + r + 11 = 9 + u + s + 11 = 15 + s + r + 7.
Thus,

5S = (9 + p + q + 7) + (3 + p + u + 15) + (3 + q + r + 11) + (9 + u + s + 11) + (15 + s + r + 7)

= 2p + 2q + 2r + 2s + 2u + 90

Since p, q, r, s, and u are the numbers 19, 21, 23, 25, and 27 in some order, then

p + q + r + s + u = 19 + 21 + 23 + 25 + 27 = 115

and so 5S = 2(115) + 90 = 320 or S = 64.

Since S = 64, then 3 + p + u + 15 = 64 or p + u = 46.
Since S = 64, then 15 + s + r + 7 = 64 or s + r = 42.
Therefore, q = (p + q + r + s + u) − (p + u) − (s + r) = 115 − 46 − 42 = 27.
Answer: (D)

20. In order to find N , which is the smallest possible integer whose digits have a fixed product, we
must first find the minimum possible number of digits with this product. (This is because if
the integer a has more digits than the integer b, then a > b.)
Once we have determined the digits that form N , then the integer N itself is formed by writing
the digits in increasing order. (Given a fixed set of digits, the leading digit of N will contribute
to the largest place value, and so should be the smallest digit. The next largest place value
should get the next smallest digit, and so on.)
Note that the digits of N cannot include 0, or else the product of its digits would be 0.
Also, the digits of N cannot include 1, otherwise we could remove the 1s and obtain an integer
with fewer digits (thus, a smaller integer) with the same product of digits.
Since the product of the digits of N is 2700, we find the prime factorization of 2700 to help us
determine what the digits are:

2700 = 27 × 100 = 33 × 102 = 33 × 22 × 52

In order for a non-zero digit to have a factor of 5, then the digit must equal 5.
Since 2700 has two factors of 5, then the digits of N includes two 5s.
2012 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

The remaining digits have a product of 33 × 22 = 108.

Therefore, we must try to find a combination of the smallest number of possible digits whose
product is 108.
We cannot have 1 digit with a product of 108. We also cannot have a 2 digits with a product
of 108, as the product of 2 digits is at most 9 × 9 = 81.
We can have a product of 3 digits with a product of 108 (for example, 2 × 6 × 9 or 3 × 6 × 6).
Therefore, the number N has 5 digits (two 5s and three other digits with a product of 108).
In order for N to be as small as possible, its leading digit (that is, its ten thousands digit) must
be as small as possible. Recall that N cannot include the digit 1.
The next smallest possible leading digit is 2. In this case, 2 must be one of the three digits whose
product is 108. Thus, the remaining two of these three digits have a product of 108 ÷ 2 = 54,
and so must be 6 and 9.
Therefore, the digits of N must be 2, 6, 9, 5, 5. The smallest possible number formed by these
digits is when the digits are placed in increasing order, and so N = 25 569.
The sum of the digits of N is 2 + 5 + 5 + 6 + 9 = 27.
Answer: (E)

21. Since x + xy = 391, then x(1 + y) = 391.

We note that 391 = 17 · 23.
Since 17 and 23 are both prime, then if 391 is written as the product of two positive integers,
it must be 1 × 391 or 17 × 23 or 23 × 17 or 391 × 1.
Matching x and 1 + y to these possible factors, we obtain (x, y) = (1, 390) or (17, 22) or (23, 16)
or (391, 0).
Since y is a positive integer, the fourth pair is not possible.
Since x > y, the first two pairs are not possible.
Therefore, (x, y) = (23, 16) and so x + y = 39.
Answer: (B)

22. Since the five monkeys are randomly numbered, then the probability that any given monkey is
numbered Monkey 1 is 51 . There are five possibilities to consider.

– Case 1: If the monkey in seat P is numbered Monkey 1, then it stays in its seat, so the
monkey in seat R cannot move to seat P .
– Case 2: If the monkey in seat Q is numbered Monkey 1, then after the monkeys have
moved, Monkey 2 will be in seat R, Monkey 3 in seat S, Monkey 4 in seat T , and Monkey
5 in seat P . Thus, if Monkey 1 is in seat Q, then the monkey in seat R moves to seat P
if it was numbered Monkey 5.
– Case 3: If the monkey in seat R is numbered Monkey 1, then it stays in its seat and so
cannot move to seat P .
– Case 4: If the monkey in seat S is numbered Monkey 1, then after the monkeys have
moved, Monkey 2 will be in seat T , Monkey 3 in seat P , Monkey 4 in seat Q, and Monkey
5 in seat R. Thus, if Monkey 1 is in seat S, then the monkey in seat R moves to seat P
if it was numbered Monkey 3.
– Case 5: If the monkey in seat T is numbered Monkey 1, then after the monkeys have
moved, Monkey 2 will be in seat P , Monkey 3 in seat Q, Monkey 4 in seat R, and Monkey
5 in seat S. Thus, if Monkey 1 is in seat T , then the monkey in seat R moves to seat P if
it was numbered Monkey 2.
2012 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

The possible cases that we have to consider are Cases 2, 4 and 5.

– From Case 2, what is the probability that the monkey in seat Q is numbered Monkey 1
and the monkey in seat R is numbered Monkey 5? We know that the probability that the
monkey in seat Q is numbered Monkey 1 is 15 . Given this and the fact that the remaining
four monkeys are numbered randomly, the probability is 41 that the monkey in seat R
is numbered Monkey 5. Therefore, the probability of this combined event happening is
1 1 1
· = 20
5 4
.
– Similarly, from Case 4 the probability that the monkey in seat S is numbered Monkey 1
1
and the monkey in seat R is numbered Monkey 3 is also 20 .
– Also, from Case 5 the probability that the monkey in seat T is numbered Monkey 1 and
1
the monkey in seat R is numbered Monkey 2 is 20 .
1 3
Therefore, the probability that the monkey who was in seat R moves to seat P is 3 · 20 = 20 .
Answer: (C)

23. Join O to Q and draw a perpendicular from O to T on P Q.

Since the radius of the circle is 12, then OP = OQ = 12. P T Q
Consider 4OT P and 4OT Q. Each is right-angled, they
share side OT , and they have hypotenuses (OP and OQ) of
equal length. Therefore, these triangles are congruent. 12 12
Consider quadrilateral T QSO. Since the quadrilateral has
O S R
three right angles, then it must be a rectangle so its fourth
angle, ∠T OS, is 90◦ .
Thus, ∠T OP = 135◦ − 90◦ = 45◦ .
Since the angles in 4OT P add to 180◦ , then ∠OP T = 180◦ − 90◦ − 45◦ = 45◦ .
Therefore, 4OT P is isosceles and right-angled with hypotenuse 12.
Since 4OT Q is congruent to 4OT P , it is also isosceles and right-angled with hypotenuse 12.
Since ∠T OP = ∠T OQ = 45◦ , then ∠QOS = 135◦ − 45◦ − 45◦ = 45◦ , which tells us that
4OQS, which is right-angled, has one 45◦ angle and so must have a second. Therefore, 4OQS
is also isosceles and right-angled, and also has hypotenuse OQ = 12.
So 4OQS is congruent to 4OT Q.
Therefore, the area of trapezoid OP QS equals three times the area of an isosceles right-angled
triangle with hypotenuse 12.
We calculate the area of 4OT P , which is one of these triangles.
Suppose that OT = T P = a. √
Since 4OT P is right-angled and isosceles, then OP = 2a.
(We can see this by using the Pythagorean Theorem to obtain
√ √ √ √
OP = OT 2 + T P 2 = a2 + a2 = 2a2 = 2a

since a > 0.)

√ 12
Since OP = 12, then 2a = 12 or a = √ .
2  2  
1 1 2 1 12 1 144
The area of 4OT P is (OT )(T P ) = a = √ = = 36.
2 2 2 2 2 2
Thus, the area of trapezoid OP QS is 3 × 36 = 108.
Answer: (C)
2012 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

24. We solve this problem by first determining the possible structures of the exchange within the
book club. Then, we count the number of ways the friends can be fit into the structures.
Suppose that the six friends exchange books as described.
Consider one person, who we call A.
A must give a book to a second person, who we call B (A → B).
B cannot give a book back to A, so must give a book to a third person, who we call C
(A → B → C).
C cannot give a book to B since B already receives a book from A. Therefore, C can give
a book to A (A → B → C → A) or C can give a book to a fourth person, who we call D
(A → B → C → D).

– In the first case (A → B → C → A), each of A, B and C already both give and receive
a book. Therefore, the fourth person, who we call D, must give a book to a fifth person,
who we call E (A → B → C → A; D → E).
E cannot give a book back to D and cannot give to any of A, B or C, so must give a book
to the sixth (and final) person, who we call F (A → B → C → A; D → E → F ).
The only person that F can give a book to is D, since everyone else already is receiving
a book. This completes this case as (A → B → C → A; D → E → F → D).
– The other option from above is A → B → C → D.
Here, D cannot give a book to B or C who each already receive a book. Thus, D gives a
book to A or to one of the two remaining people.
If D gives a book to A, then each of A, B, C and D both gives and receives, so the final
two people are left to exchange books with each other, which is not possible.
Therefore, D gives a book to one of the remaining people, who we call E (giving
A → B → C → D → E).
Only two people have not received a book now: A and the sixth person, who we call F .
E must give a book to F , otherwise F does not give or receive a book at all. Thus, F
must give a book to A.
This gives the structure A → B → C → D → E → F → A.

Therefore, there are two possible structures for the exchanges: A → B → C → A with
D → E → F → D, and A → B → C → D → E → F → A.
(We can think of the first structure as two cycles of three people, and the second as one cycle
of six people.)
Suppose the six friends are P , Q, R, S, T , and U . (We could call them Peter, Quinn, Rad,
Steve, Troy, and Ursula, but will use abbreviations to save space.) We must count the number
of ways that these six friends can be assigned to the positions A through F in the two structures
above. We have to be careful because assigning

A → B → C → A D → E → F → D
P Q R P S T U S

in the first structure is the same as assigning

A → B → C → A D → E → F → D
U S T U Q P R Q

but is different from assigning

2012 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9
A → B → C → A D → E → F → D
P R Q P S T U S

– Case 1: A → B → C → A with D → E → F → D
Because this case consists of two cycles of three people each, each person serves exactly
the same function, so we can assign P to position A.
There are then 5 possible friends for position B (all but P ).
For each of these, there are 4 possible friends for position C (all put P and the friend in
position B). This completes the first cycle.
Now, the remaining three friends must complete the second cycle.
Suppose without loss of generality that these three friends are S, T and U .
Since each of the three positions in the second cycle serves exactly the same function, we
can assign S to position D.
There are then 2 possible friends for position E (either T or U ).
For each of these, there is 1 possible friend left to go in position F .
This gives 5 × 4 × 2 × 1 = 40 ways of assigning the friends to this structure.
– Case 2: A → B → C → D → E → F → A
Because this case is a single cycle of six people, each person serves exactly the same
function, so we can assign P to position A.
There are then 5 possible friends for position B (all but P ).
For each of these, there are 4 possible friends for position C (all put P and the friend in
position B).
Similarly, there are 3 possibilities for position D, 2 for position E, and 1 for position F .
This gives 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 = 120 ways of assigning the friends to this structure.

Therefore, there are 40 + 120 = 160 ways in total in which the books can be exchanged.
Answer: (E)

25. Let S(n) represent the sum of the digits of n and let S(2n) represent the sum of the digits
of 2n. In the table below, we make a claim about how each digit of n contributes to S(2n).
We use the data in the table to answer the question, following which we justify the data in the
table:

Digit in n 2×Digit Contribution to S(2n)

0 0 0
1 2 2
2 4 4
3 6 6
4 8 8
5 10 1+0=1
6 12 1+2=3
7 14 1+4=5
8 16 1+6=7

We know that the digits of n include no 9s, exactly four 8s, exactly three 7s, and exactly two
6s. These digits contribute 4 · 8 + 3 · 7 + 2 · 6 = 65 to S(n), leaving a sum of 104 − 65 = 39 for
the remaining digits.
Suppose that n includes m 5s. These 5s contribute 5m to S(n), so the remaining 39 − 5m come
from the digits 0 to 4.
2012 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10

Consider now the digits of 2n.

The table above shows that the 9s, 8s, 7s and 6s each contribute 9, 7, 5 and 3, respectively,
to S(2n). Since the digits of n include no 9s, four 8s, three 7s, and two 6s, then these digits
contribute 4 · 7 + 3 · 5 + 2 · 3 = 49 to S(2n).
Each 5 in n contributes 1 to S(2n), so the m 5s in n contribute m · 1 = m to S(2n).
The digits 0 to 4 each contribute twice as much to S(2n) as they do to S(n), so the sum of the
their contributions to S(2n) is twice the sum of their contributions to S(n).
Since the sum of their contributions to S(n) is 39 − 5m, then the sum of their contributions to
S(2n) is 2(39 − 5m).
Since S(2n) = 100, then 49 + m + 2(39 − 5m) = 100.
Therefore, 127 − 9m = 100 and so 9m = 27 or m = 3.
That is, the digits of n include three 5s.
We must still justify the data in the table above.
Suppose that n ends with the digits dcba. That is, n = · · · dcba.
Then we can write n = · · · + 1000d + 100c + 10b + a.
Then 2n = · · · + 1000(2d) + 100(2c) + 10(2b) + (2a). The difficulty in determining the digits of
2n is that each of 2d, 2c, 2b and 2a may not be a single digit.
We use the notation u(2a) and t(2a) to represent the units digit and tens digit of 2a, respectively.
Note that u(2a) is one of 0, 2, 4, 6, or 8, and t(2a) is 0 or 1.
We define u(2b), t(2b), u(2c), t(2c), u(2d), t(2d) similarly.
Note that 2a = 10 · t(2a) + u(2a) and 2b = 10 · t(2b) + u(2b) and 2c = 10 · t(2c) + u(2c) and
2d = 10 · t(2d) + u(2d).
Thus,

2n = · · · + 1000(10 · t(2d) + u(2d)) + 100(10 · t(2c) + u(2c))

+10(10 · t(2b) + u(2b)) + (10 · t(2a) + u(2a))
= · · · + 1000(u(2d) + t(2c)) + 100(u(2c) + t(2b)) + 10(u(2b) + t(2a)) + u(2a)

Since u(2a), u(2b), u(2c), u(2d) ≤ 8 and t(2a), t(2b), t(2c), t(2d) ≤ 1, then each of u(2d) + t(2c)
and u(2c) + t(2b) and u(2b) + t(2a) and u(2a) is a single digit, so these are the thousands,
hundreds, tens and units digits, respectively, of 2n.
Thus, the sum of the digits of 2n is

u(2a) + (u(2b) + t(2a)) + (u(2c) + t(2b)) + (u(2d) + t(2c)) + · · · =

(t(2a) + u(2a)) + (t(2b) + u(2b)) + (t(2c) + u(2c)) + · · ·

The above argument extends to the remaining digits of n.

In other words, if r is a digit in n, then its contribution to the sum of the digits of 2n is the
sum of the tens and units digits of 2r.
Therefore, the digits of n contribute to the sum of the digits of 2n as outlined in the table
above.
Answer: (D)
The CENTRE for EDUCATION in
MATHEMATICS and COMPUTING

2011 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Thursday, February 24, 2011

Solutions

©2010 Centre for Education in Mathematics and Computing

2011 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2

1. We regroup (5 + 2) + (8 + 6) + (4 + 7) + (3 + 2) as 5 + (2 + 8) + (6 + 4) + (7 + 3) + 2, which
equals 5 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 2 or 37.
We could add the numbers directly instead.
Answer: (B)

24
2. Since (−1)(2)(x)(4) = 24, then −8x = 24 or x = = −3.
−8
Answer: (B)

3. Solution 1
Since ∠P RS is an exterior angle to 4P QR, then ∠P QR +∠QP R = ∠P RS or x◦ +75◦ = 125◦ .
Thus, x + 75 = 125 or x = 50.

Solution 2
Since QRS is a straight line, then ∠P RQ = 180◦ − ∠P RS = 180◦ − 125◦ = 55◦ .
Since the sum of the angles in a triangle is 180◦ , then x◦ + 75◦ + 55◦ = 180◦ or x + 130 = 180
or x = 50.
Answer: (A)

4. Solution 1
To get back to the original number, we undo the given operations.
We add 5 to 16 to obtain 21 and then divide by 3 to obtain 7.
These are the “inverse” operations of decreasing by 5 and multiplying by 3.

Solution 2
Suppose that the original number is x.
After tripling and decreasing by 5, the result is 3x − 5.
Therefore, 3x − 5 = 16 or 3x = 21 or x = 7.
Answer: (C)

5. We evaluate from the inside towards the outside:

r
√ √ √ √ √
q q q
13 + 7 + 4 = 13 + 7 + 2 = 13 + 9 = 13 + 3 = 16 = 4
Answer: (D)

6. A graph that is linear with a slope of 0 is a horizontal straight line. This is Graph Q.
Answer: (B)

7. With a fair die that has faces numbered from 1 to 6, the probability of rolling each of 1 to 6
is 61 .
We calculate the probability for each of the five choices.
There are 4 values of x that satisfy x > 2, so the probability is 64 = 23 .
There are 2 values of x that satisfy x = 4 or x = 5, so the probability is 26 = 13 .
There are 3 values of x that are even, so the probability is 36 = 12 .
There are 2 values of x that satisfy x < 3, so the probability is 62 = 13 .
There is 1 value of x that satisfies x = 3, so the probability is 16 .
Therefore, the most likely of the five choices is that x is greater than 2.
Answer: (A)
2011 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

8. When 2.4 × 108 is doubled, the result is 2 × 2.4 × 108 = 4.8 × 108 .
Answer: (C)

9. Since the face of a foonie has area 5 cm2 and its thickness is 0.5 cm, then the volume of one
foonie is 5 × 0.5 = 2.5 cm3 .
If a stack of foonies has a volume of 50 cm3 and each foonie has a volume of 2.5 cm3 , then there
are 50 ÷ 2.5 = 20 foonies in the stack.
Answer: (D)

10. In order to make the playoffs, the Athenas must win at least 60% of their 44 games. That is,
they must win at least 0.6 × 44 = 26.4 games.
Since they must win an integer number of games, then the smallest number of games that they
can win to make the playoffs is the smallest integer larger than 26.4, or 27.
Since they have won 20 games so far, then they must win 27 − 20 = 7 of their remaining games
to make the playoffs.
Answer: (E)

11. From the definition, (3, 1)∇(4, 2) = (3)(4) + (1)(2) = 12 + 2 = 14.

Answer: (D)

12. Since the angle in the sector representing cookies is 90◦ , then this sector represents 41 of the
total circle.
Therefore, 25% of the students chose cookies as their favourite food.
Thus, the percentage of students who chose sandwiches was 100% − 30% − 25% − 35% = 10%.
10
Since there are 200 students in total, then 200 × 100 = 20 students said that their favourite
food was sandwiches.
Answer: (B)

13. Solution 1
We work from right to left as we would if doing this calculation by hand.
In the units column, we have L − 1 giving 1. Thus, L = 2. (There is no borrowing required.)
In the tens column, we have 3 − N giving 5.
Since 5 is larger than 3, we must borrow from the hundreds column. Thus, 13 − N gives 5,
which means N = 8. This gives

K−1 13
5 K

 3
2
− M 4 8 1
4 4 5 1
In the hundreds column, we have (K − 1) − 4 giving 4, which means K = 9. This gives

5 9 3 2
− M 4 8 1
4 4 5 1
In the thousands column, we have 5 (with nothing borrowed) minus M giving 4.
Thus, 5 − M = 4 or M = 1.
This gives 5932 − 1481 = 4451, which is correct.
Finally, K + L + M + N = 9 + 2 + 1 + 8 = 20.
2011 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

Solution 2
Since 5K3L − M 4N 1 = 4451, then

M 4 N 1
+ 4 4 5 1
5 K 3 L
We start from the units column and work towards the left.
Considering the units column, the sum 1 + 1 has a units digit of L. Thus, L = 2. (There is no
carry to the tens column.)
Considering the tens column, the sum N + 5 has a units digit of 3. Thus, N = 8. (There is a
carry of 1 to the hundreds column.) This gives

1
M 4 8 1
+ 4 4 5 1
5 K 3 2
Considering the hundreds column, the sum 4 + 4 plus the carry of 1 from the tens column has
a units digit of K. Therefore, K = 4 + 4 + 1 = 9. There is no carry from the hundreds column
to the thousands column.
Considering the thousands column, the sum M + 4 equals 5. Therefore, M = 1. This gives

1 4 8 1
+ 4 4 5 1
5 9 3 2
which is equivalent to 5932 − 4451 = 1481, which is correct.
Finally, K + L + M + N = 9 + 2 + 1 + 8 = 20.
Answer: (A)

14. The difference between 16 and 12 1

is 16 − 12
1 2
= 12 1
− 12 1
= 12 1
, so LP = 12 .
Since LP is divided into three equal parts, then this distance is divided into three equal parts,
1 1
each equal to 12 ÷ 3 = 12 × 31 = 36
1
.
1
Therefore, M is located 36 to the right of L.
1 1 3 1 4
Thus, the value at M is 12 + 36 = 36 + 36 = 36 = 91 .
Answer: (C)

15. We plot the first three vertices on a graph.

We see that one possible location for the fourth vertex, V , is in the second quadrant:

V
S (0, 1)

x
R ( 1, 0)
Q (1, 1)
2011 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

If V SQR is a parallelogram, then SV is parallel and equal to QR.

To get from Q to R, we go left 2 units and up 1 unit.
Therefore, to get from S to V , we also go left 2 units and up 1 unit.
Since the coordinates of S are (0, 1), then the coordinates of V are (0 − 2, 1 + 1) = (−2, 2).
This is choice (A).
There are two other possible locations for the fourth vertex, which we can find in a similar way.
These are U (0, −2) and W (2, 0).
Using these points, we can see that SQU R and SW QR are parallelograms. But (0, −2) and
(2, 0) are not among the possible answers.
Therefore, of the given choices, the only one that completes a parallelogram is (−2, 2).
Answer: (A)

16. It is possible that after buying 7 gumballs, Wally has received 2 red, 2 blue, 1 white, and 2
green gumballs.
This is the largest number of each colour that he could receive without having three gumballs
of any one colour.
If Wally buys another gumball, he will receive a blue or a green or a red gumball.
In each of these cases, he will have at least 3 gumballs of one colour.
In summary, if Wally buys 7 gumballs, he is not guaranteed to have 3 of any one colour; if
Wally buys 8 gumballs, he is guaranteed to have 3 of at least one colour.
Therefore, the least number that he must buy to guarantee receiving 3 of the same colour is 8.
Answer: (E)

17. Suppose that each of the smaller rectangles has a longer side of length x cm and a shorter side
of length y cm.

y x
y

x
x

y
x y

Since the perimeter of each of the rectangles is 40 cm, then 2x + 2y = 40 or x + y = 20.

But the side length of the large square is x + y cm.
Therefore, the area of the large square is (x + y)2 = 202 = 400 cm2 .
Answer: (C)

18. Solution 1
When a number n is divided by x, the remainder is the difference between n and the largest
multiple of x less than n. When 100 is divided by a positive integer x, the remainder is 10.
This means that 100 − 10 = 90 is exactly divisible by x. It also means that x is larger than 10,
otherwise the remainder would be smaller than 10.
Since 90 is exactly divisible by x, then 11 × 90 = 990 is also exactly divisible by x.
Since x > 10, then the next multiple of x is 990 + x, which is larger than 1000.
Thus, 990 is the largest multiple of x less than 1000, and so the remainder when 1000 is divided
by x is 1000 − 990 = 10.
2011 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

Solution 2
When 100 is divided by a positive integer x, the remainder is 10. The remainder is the difference
between 100 and the largest multiple of x less than 100.
Therefore, the largest multiple of x less than 100 is 100 − 10 = 90.
It also means that x is larger than 10, otherwise the remainder would be smaller than 10.
We can choose x = 15, since 6 × 15 = 90 and 15 is larger than 10.
What is the remainder when 1000 is divided by 15? Using a calculator, 1000 ÷ 15 = 66.666 . . .
and 66 × 15 = 990.
Thus, the difference between 1000 and the largest multiple of 15 less than 1000 (that is, 990)
equals 10 and so the remainder is equal to 10.
Answer: (A)

19. Let ∠XY W = θ.

Since 4XY W is isosceles with W X = W Y , then ∠Y XW = ∠XY W = θ.
Since the sum of the angles in 4XY W is 180◦ , then ∠XW Y = 180◦ − 2θ.
Since ∠XW Y + ∠ZW Y = 180◦ , then ∠ZW Y = 180◦ − (180◦ − 2θ) = 2θ.
Since 4Y W Z is isosceles with Y W = Y Z, then ∠Y ZW = ∠ZW Y = 2θ.
Since 4XY Z is isosceles, with XY = XZ, then ∠XY Z = ∠XZY = 2θ.
Since the sum of the angles in 4XY Z is 180◦ , then ∠XY Z + ∠XZY + ∠Y XZ = 180◦ or
2θ + 2θ + θ = 180◦ , or 5θ = 180◦ , or θ = 36◦ .
Answer: (D)
√
20. For n3 + 5n2 to√be the square pof an 3 2
√ n√+ 5n must
integer, √ be an integer.
We know that n 3 + 5n 2 = n 2 (n + 5) = n2 n + 5 = n n + 5.
√ √
For n n + 5 to be an integer, n + 5 must be an integer. In other words, n + 5 must be a
perfect square.
Since n is between 1 and 100, then n + 5 is between 6 and 105.
The perfect squares in this range are 32 = 9, 42 = 16, . . ., 102 = 100.
Thus, there are 8 perfect squares in this range.√
Therefore, there are 8 values of n for which n + 5 is an integer, and thus for which n3 + 5n2
is the square of an integer.
Answer: (B)

21. Solution 1
7 5
If we multiply the second and third equations together, we obtain x(y + 1)y(y + 1) = 9
· 18
or
35
xy(x + 1)(x + 1) = 162 .
From the first equation, xy = 91 .
Therefore, 19 (x + 1)(y + 1) = 162
35 35
or (x + 1)(y + 1) = 9( 162 35
) = 18 .

Solution 2
If we expand the left side of the second equation, we obtain xy + x = 79 .
Since xy = 91 (from the first equation), then x = 79 − xy = 79 − 91 = 23 .
5
If we expand the left side of the third equation, we obtain xy + y = 18 .
Since xy = 9 (from the first equation), then y = 18 − xy = 18 − 9 = 18 = 61 .
1 5 5 1 3

Therefore, (x + 1)(y + 1) = ( 23 + 1)( 61 + 1) = 53 · 76 = 35

18
.
Answer: (E)

22. Suppose that the crease intersects P S at X, QR at Y , and the line P R at Z. We want to
determine the length of XY .
2011 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7
P Q

S R

Since P folds on top of R, then line segment P Z folds on top of line segment RZ, since after
the fold Z corresponds with itself and P corresponds with R. This means that P Z = RZ and
P R must be perpendicular to XY at point Z.
Since P S = RQ and SR = QP , then right-angled triangles 4P SR and 4RQP are congruent
(side-angle-side).
Therefore, ∠XP Z = ∠Y RZ.
Since P Z = RZ, then right-angled triangles 4P ZX and 4RZY are congruent too (angle-side-
angle).
Thus, XZ = ZY and so XY = 2XZ.
Since 4P SR is right-angled at S, then by the Pythagorean Theorem,
√ √ √
P R = P S 2 + SR2 = 82 + 62 = 100 = 10
since P R > 0.
Since P Z = RZ, then P Z = 21 P R = 5.
XZ RS
Now 4P ZX is similar to 4P SR (common angle at P and right angle), so = or
PZ PS
XZ = 5·6
8
= 30
8
= 15
4
.
15 15
Therefore, XY = 2XZ = 2
, so the length of the fold is 2
or 7.5.
Answer: (C)

23. First, we calculate the number of pairs that can be formed from the integers from 1 to n.
One way to form a pair is to choose one number to be the first item of the pair (n choices) and
then a different number to be the second item of the pair (n − 1 choices).
There are n(n − 1) ways to choose these two items in this way.
But this counts each pair twice; for example, we could choose 1 then 3 and we could also choose
3 then 1.
So we have double-counted the pairs, meaning that there are 21 n(n−1) pairs that can be formed.
Next, we examine the number of rows in the table.
Since each row has three entries, then each row includes three pairs (first and second numbers,
first and third numbers, second and third numbers).
Suppose that the completed table has r rows.
Then the total number of pairs in the table is 3r.
Since each pair of the numbers from 1 to n appears exactly once in the table and the total
number of pairs from these numbers is 21 n(n − 1), then 3r = 21 n(n − 1), which tells us that
1
2
n(n − 1) must be divisible by 3, since 3r is divisible by 3.
We make a table listing the possible values of n and the corresponding values of 21 n(n − 1):
n 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1
2
n(n − 1) 3 6 10 15 21 28 36 45 55 66
2011 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

Since 12 n(n − 1) must be divisible by 3, then the possible values of n are 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, and
12.
Next, consider a fixed number m from the list 1 to n.
In each row that m appears, it will belong to 2 pairs (one with each of the other two numbers
in its row).
If the number m appears in s rows, then it will belong to 2s pairs.
Therefore, each number m must belong to an even number of pairs.
But each number m from the list of integers from 1 to n must appear in n − 1 pairs (one with
each other number in the list), so n − 1 must be even, and so n is odd.
Therefore, the possible values of n are 3, 7, 9.
Finally, we must verify that we can create a Fano table for each of these values of n. We are
given the Fano table for n = 7.
Since the total number of pairs when n = 3 is 3 and when n = 9 is 36, then a Fano table for
n = 3 will have 3 ÷ 3 = 1 row and a Fano table for n = 9 will have 36 ÷ 3 = 12 rows.
For n = 3 and n = 9, possible tables are shown below:

1 2 3
1 4 5
1 6 7
1 8 9
2 4 7
2 5 8
1 2 3
2 6 9
3 4 9
3 5 6
3 7 8
4 6 8
5 7 9

In total, there are 3 values of n in this range for which a Fano table can be created.
Answer: (B)

24. First, we note that the three people are interchangeable in this problem, so it does not matter
who rides and who walks at any given moment. We abbreviate the three people as D, M and
P.
We call their starting point A and their ending point B.
Here is a strategy where all three people are moving at all times and all three arrive at B at
the same time:

D and M get on the motorcycle while P walks.

D and M ride the motorcycle to a point Y before B.
D drops off M and rides back while P and M walk toward B.
D meets P at point X.
D picks up P and they drive back to B meeting M at B.
Point Y is chosen so that D, M and P arrive at B at the same time.

Suppose that the distance from A to X is a km, from X to Y is d km, and the distance from
Y to B is b km.
2011 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9
A X Y B
a d b

In the time that it takes P to walk from A to X at 6 km/h, D rides from A to Y and back to
X at 90 km/h.
The distance from A to X is a km.
The distance from A to Y and back to X is a + d + d = a + 2d km.
a a + 2d
Since the time taken by P and by D is equal, then = or 15a = a + 2d or 7a = d.
6 90
In the time that it takes M to walk from Y to B at 6 km/h, D rides from Y to X and back to
B at 90 km/h.
The distance from Y to B is b km, and the distance from Y to X and back to B is d+d+b = b+2d
km.
b b + 2d
Since the time taken by M and by D is equal, then = or 15b = b + 2d or 7b = d.
6 90
Therefore, d = 7a = 7b, and so we can write d = 7a and b = a.
Thus, the total distance from A to B is a + d + b = a + 7a + a = 9a km.
However, we know that this total distance is 135 km, so 9a = 135 or a = 15.
Finally, D rides from A to Y to X to B, a total distance of (a + 7a) + 7a + (7a + a) = 23a km.
Since a = 15 km and D rides at 90 km/h, then the total time taken for this strategy is
23×15
90
= 23
6
≈ 3.83 h.
Since we have a strategy that takes 3.83 h, then the smallest possible time is no more than
3.83 h. Can you explain why this is actually the smallest possible time?

If we didn’t think of this strategy, another strategy that we might try would be:

D and M get on the motorcycle while P walks.

D and M ride the motorcycle to B.
D drops off M at B and rides back to meet P, who is still walking.
D picks up P and they drive back to B. (M rests at B.)

This strategy actually takes 4.125 h, which is longer than the strategy shown above, since M is
actually sitting still for some of the time.
Answer: (A)

25. By definition, if 0 ≤ a < 21 , then A = 0 and if 12 ≤ a ≤ 1, then A = 1.

Similarly, if 0 ≤ b < 12 , then B = 0 and if 21 ≤ b ≤ 1, then B = 1.
We keep track of our information on a set of axes, labelled a and b.

b
1
A=0 A=1
B=1 B=1
1
2
A=0 A=1
B=0 B=0

a
1
2
1
2011 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10

The area of the region of possible pairs (a, b) is 1, since the region is a square with side length 1.
Next, we determine the sets of points where C = 2A + 2B and calculate the combined area of
these regions.
We consider the four sub-regions case by case. In each case, we will encounter lines of the form
a + b = Z for some number Z. We can rewrite these equations as b = −a + Z which shows
that this equation is the equation of the line with slope −1 and b-intercept Z. Since the slope
is −1, the a-intercept is also Z.
Case 1: A = 0 and B = 0
For C to equal 2A + 2B, we need C = 0.
Since C is obtained by rounding c, then we need 0 ≤ c < 12 .
Since c = 2a + 2b by definition, this is true when 0 ≤ 2a + 2b < 12 or 0 ≤ a + b < 14 .
This is the set of points in this subregion above the line a + b = 0 and below the line a + b = 14 .
Case 2: A = 0 and B = 1
For C to equal 2A + 2B, we need C = 2.
Since C is obtained by rounding c, then we need 32 ≤ c < 52 .
Since c = 2a + 2b by definition, this is true when 32 ≤ 2a + 2b < 52 or 34 ≤ a + b < 54 .
This is the set of points in this subregion above the line a + b = 43 and below the line a + b = 54 .
Case 3: A = 1 and B = 0
For C to equal 2A + 2B, we need C = 2.
Since C is obtained by rounding c, then we need 32 ≤ c < 52 .
Since c = 2a + 2b by definition, this is true when 32 ≤ 2a + 2b < 52 or 34 ≤ a + b < 54 .
This is the set of points in this subregion above the line a + b = 43 and below the line a + b = 54 .
Case 4: A = 1 and B = 1
For C to equal 2A + 2B, we need C = 4.
Since C is obtained by rounding c, then we need 72 ≤ c < 92 .
Since c = 2a + 2b by definition, this is true when 72 ≤ 2a + 2b < 92 or 74 ≤ a + b < 94 .
This is the set of points in this subregion above the line a + b = 47 and below the line a + b = 94 .
We shade the appropriate set of points in each of the subregions:
2011 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11
b

9
4

7
4

5
4

Ca
se
4
3 Case 2
4

1
4
Case 3
Ca
se1

1
a
2 1
C=0 C=1 C=2 C=3 C=4

The shaded regions are the regions of points (a, b) where 2A + 2B = C. To determine the
required probability, we calculate the combined area of these regions and divide by the total
area of the set of all possible points (a, b). This total area is 1, so the probability will actually
be equal to the combined area of the shaded regions.
The region from Case 1 is a triangle with height 41 and base 14 , so has area 12 × 14 × 14 = 32
1
.
1 1
The region from Case 4 is also a triangle with height 4 and base 4 . This is because the line
a + b = 47 intersects the top side of the square (the line b = 1) when a = 34 and the right side
of the square (the line a = 1) when b = 43 .
The regions from Case 2 and Case 3 have identical shapes and so have the same area. We
calculate the area of the region from Case 2 by subtracting the unshaded area from the area of
the entire subregion (which is 41 ).
Each unshaded portion of this subregion is a triangle with height 14 and base 14 . We can confirm
this by calculating points of intersection as in Case 4.
Therefore, the area of the shaded region in Case 2 is 41 − 2 × 12 × 41 × 14 = 14 − 16
1 3
= 16 .
1 1 3 3 14 7
Therefore, the combined area of the shaded regions is 32
+ 32
+ 16
+ 16
= 32
= 16
.
7
Thus, the required probability is 16 .
(Note that because calculating the probability is equivalent to calculating areas in this problem,
we do not have to pay special attention as to whether points on the boundaries of the various
regions are included or excluded.)
Answer: (D)
Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of the Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

2010 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Thursday, February 25, 2010

Solutions

©2009 Centre for Education in Mathematics and Computing

2010 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2

1. Calculating, 6 + 4 ÷ 2 = 6 + 2 = 8.
Answer: (D)

2. Since there are 12 equally spaced numbers and the total angle in a complete circle is 360◦ , then
the angle between two consecutive numbers is 360◦ ÷ 12 = 30◦ .
To rotate 120◦ , the minute hand must move by 120◦ ÷ 30◦ = 4 numbers clockwise from the 12.
Therefore, the hand will be pointing at the 4.
Answer: (C)
√ √
3. Since x + 25 = 36, then x + 5 = 6 or x = 1.
Answer: (A)

1 1 3
4. Evaluating, 2 = 8 = .
2+ 3 3
8
Answer: (E)

5. In a rectangle, length times width equals area, so width equals area divided by length.
Therefore, the width is 13 ÷ 53 = 31 × 53 = 59 .
Answer: (B)

6. Since the sum of the angles in a triangle is 180◦ , then 3x◦ + x◦ + 6x◦ = 180◦ or 10x = 180 or
x = 18.
The largest angle in the triangle is 6x◦ = 6(18◦ ) = 108◦ .
Answer: (E)

7. Solution 1
Since the mean of five consecutive integers is 9, then the middle of these five integers is 9.
Therefore, the integers are 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and so the smallest of the five integers is 7.

Solution 2
Suppose that x is the smallest of the five consecutive integers.
Then the integers are x, x + 1, x + 2, x + 3, and x + 4.
x + (x + 1) + (x + 2) + (x + 3) + (x + 4) 5x + 10
The mean of these integers is = = x + 2.
5 5
Since the mean is 9, then x + 2 = 9 or x = 7.
Thus, the smallest of the five integers is 7.
Answer: (D)
√
8. Since square P QRS has an area of 900, then its side length is 900 = 30.
Thus, P Q = P S = 30.
Since M and N are the midpoints of P Q and P S, respectively, then P N = P M = 12 (30) = 15.
Since P QRS is a square, then the angle at P is 90◦ , so 4P M N is right-angled.
Therefore, the area of 4P M N is 12 (P M )(P N ) = 12 (15)(15) = 225
2
= 112.5.
An alternate approach would be to divide the square into 8 triangles, each congruent to 4P M N .
(Can you see how to do this?) This would tell us that the area of 4P M N is 18 of the area of
the square, or 81 (302 ) = 112.5.
Answer: (B)
2010 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

9. Solution 1
Since the triangle will include the two axes, then the triangle will have a right angle.
For the triangle to be isosceles, the other two angles must be 45◦ .
For a line to make an angle of 45◦ with both axes, it must have slope 1 or −1.
Of the given possibilities, the only such line is y = −x + 4.

Solution 2
The vertices of a triangle formed in this way will be the points of intersection of the pairs of
lines forming the triangle.
The point of intersection of the x- and y-axes is (0, 0).
The line y = −x + 4 crosses the y-axis at (0, 4).
The line y = −x + 4 crosses the x-axis where y = 0, or −x + 4 = 0 and so at the point (4, 0).
Therefore, if the third line is y = −x + 4, the vertices of the triangle are (0, 0), (0, 4) and (4, 0).
This triangle is isosceles since two of its sides have length 4.
Therefore, the third side is y = −x + 4, since we know that only one possibility can be correct.
Answer: (C)

3
10. Since the ratio of boys to girls at Pascal H.S. is 3 : 2, then 3+2 = 35 of the students at
Pascal H.S. are boys.
Thus, there are 35 (400) = 1200
5
= 240 boys at Pascal H.S.
2
Since the ratio of boys to girls at Fermat C.I. is 2 : 3, then 2+3 = 25 of the students at
Fermat C.I. are boys.
Thus, there are 25 (600) = 1200
5
= 240 boys at Fermat C.I.
There are 400 + 600 = 1000 students in total at the two schools.
Of these, 240 + 240 = 480 are boys, and so the remaining 1000 − 480 = 520 students are girls.
Therefore, the overall ratio of boys to girls is 480 : 520 = 48 : 52 = 12 : 13.
Answer: (B)

11. First, we note that the values of x and y cannot be equal since they are integers and x + y is
odd.
Next, we look at the case when x > y.
We list the fifteen possible pairs of values for x and y and the corresponding values of xy:

x y xy x y xy x y xy
30 1 30 25 6 150 20 11 220
29 2 58 24 7 168 19 12 228
28 3 84 23 8 184 18 13 234
27 4 108 22 9 198 17 14 238
26 5 130 21 10 210 16 15 240

Therefore, the largest possible value for xy is 240.

Note that the largest value occurs when x and y are as close together as possible.
The case of x < y will give us exactly the same result. We can see this by switching the
headings of x and y in the table above.
Answer: (A)

12. Solution 1
Since the sale price has been reduced by 20%, then the sale price of $112 is 80% or 4
5
of the
regular price.
2010 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

Therefore, 15 of the regular price is $112 ÷ 4 = $28.

Thus, the regular price is $28 × 5 = $140.
If the regular price is reduced by 30%, the new sale price would be 70% of the regular price, or
7
10
($140) = $98.

Solution 2
Suppose that the original price was $x.
Since the price has been reduced by 20%, then the sale price is 80% of the original price, or
80 8
100
x = 10 x.
8
Therefore, 10 x = 112.
7
If it were on sale for 30% off, then the price would be 70% of the original price, or 10 x.
7 7 8 7


Now, 10 x = 8 10 x = 8 (112) = 98.
Thus, the price would be $98.
Answer: (E)

13. Label the centre of the larger circle O and the points of contact between the larger circle and
the smaller circles A and B. Draw the radius OA of the larger circle.

A O B

Since the smaller circle and the larger circle touch at A, then the diameter through A of the
smaller circle lies along the diameter through A of the larger circle. (This is because each
diameter is perpendicular to the common tangent at the point of contact.)
Since AO is a radius of the larger circle, then it is a diameter of the smaller circle.
Since the radius of the larger circle is 6, then the diameter of the smaller circle is 6, so the
radius of the smaller circle on the left is 3.
Similarly, we can draw a radius through O and B and deduce that the radius of the smaller
circle on the right is also 3.
The area of the shaded region equals the area of the larger circle minus the combined area of
the two smaller circles.
Thus, the area of the shaded region is 62 π − 32 π − 32 π = 36π − 9π − 9π = 18π.
Answer: (D)

14. Since b is a positive integer, then b2 ≥ 1, and so a2 ≤ 49, which gives 1 ≤ a ≤ 7, since a is a
positive integer.
If a = 7, then b2 = 50 − 72 = 1, so b = 1.
If a = 6, then b2 = 50 − 62 = 14, which is not possible since b is an integer.
If a = 5, then b2 = 50 − 52 = 25, so b = 5.
If a = 4, then b2 = 50 − 42 = 34, which is not possible.
If a = 3, then b2 = 50 − 32 = 41, which is not possible.
If a = 2, then b2 = 50 − 22 = 46, which is not possible.
If a = 1, then b2 = 50 − 12 = 49, so b = 7.
Therefore, there are 3 pairs (a, b) that satisfy the equation, namely (7, 1), (5, 5), (1, 7).
Answer: (C)
2010 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

15. Since the coins in the bag of loonies are worth $400, then there are 400 coins in the bag.
Since 1 loonie has the same mass as 4 dimes, then 400 loonies have the same mass as 4(400) or
1600 dimes.
Therefore, the bag of dimes contains 1600 dimes, and so the coins in this bag are worth $160.
Answer: (C)

16. The sum of the odd numbers from 5 to 21 is

5 + 7 + 9 + 11 + 13 + 15 + 17 + 19 + 21 = 117

Therefore, the sum of the numbers in any row is one-third of this total, or 39.
This means as well that the sum of the numbers in any column or diagonal is also 39.
Since the numbers in the middle row add to 39, then the number in the centre square is
39 − 9 − 17 = 13.
Since the numbers in the middle column add to 39, then the number in the middle square in
the bottom row is 39 − 5 − 13 = 21.

9 13 17

x 21

Since the numbers in the bottom row add to 39, then the number in the bottom right square
is 39 − 21 − x = 18 − x.
Since the numbers in the bottom left to top right diagonal add to 39, then the number in the
top right square is 39 − 13 − x = 26 − x.
Since the numbers in the rightmost column add to 39, then (26 − x) + 17 + (18 − x) = 39 or
61 − 2x = 39 or 2x = 22, and so x = 11.
We can complete the magic square as follows:

19 5 15

9 13 17

11 21 7
Answer: (B)

17. We label the points corresponding to the four larger dots as W , X, Y , and Z.

A B C D E
W X Y Z

Two of these four points must be multiples of 5.

These multiples of 5 must differ from each other by a multiple of 5.
We look at the possible differences between the four numbers W , X, Y , and Z:

X − W = 1, Y − W = 9, Y − X = 8, Z − W = 11, Z − X = 10, Z − Y = 2
2010 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

Only X and Z differ by a multiple of 5. Thus, X and Z must be the two multiples of 5.
We know that one of A, B, C, D, E is a multiple of 5, and so it must differ from X by a multiple
of 5.
Since D − X = 5, then D is the only multiple of 5 among A, B, C, D, E (the others differ from
X by 2, 3, 4, and 6).
Since D is the only possibility that is a multiple of 5, then D must be the multiple of 15.
(We can check that X and Z are multiples of 5 and W and Y are multiples of 3, which means
that D is also a multiple of 3.)
Answer: (D)

18. Since 4P QR is isosceles, then ∠P RQ = ∠P QR = 2x◦ .

Since ∠P RQ and ∠SRT are opposite angles, then ∠SRT = ∠P RQ = 2x◦ .
Since 4RST is isosceles with RS = RT , then

∠RST = 12 (180◦ − ∠SRT ) = 21 (180◦ − 2x◦ ) = 90◦ − x◦ = (90 − x)◦

Answer: (E)

19. We write a general three-digit positive integer in terms of its digits as ABC.
There are 9 possible values for the digit A (the digits 1 to 9) and 10 possible values for each of
B and C (the digits 0 to 9).
We want to count the number of such integers with exactly one even digit. We consider the
three cases separately.
Suppose that A is even. In this case, B and C are odd.
There are 4 possible values of A (2, 4, 6, 8) and 5 possible values for each of B and C (1, 3, 5,
7, 9). This means that there are 4 × 5 × 5 = 100 integers in this case.
Suppose that B is even. In this case, A and C are odd.
There are 5 possible values of B (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) and 5 possible values for each of A and C (1, 3,
5, 7, 9). This means that there are 5 × 5 × 5 = 125 integers in this case.
Suppose that C is even. In this case, A and B are odd.
There are 5 possible values of C (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) and 5 possible values for each of A and B (1,
3, 5, 7, 9). This means that there are 5 × 5 × 5 = 125 integers in this case. (This case is very
similar to the second case.)
Therefore, there are 100 + 125 + 125 = 350 such integers in total.
Answer: (A)

20. Solution 1
Note that n200 = (n2 )100 and 3500 = (35 )100 .
Since n is a positive integer, then n200 < 3500 is equivalent to n2 < 35 = 243.
Note that 152 = 225, 162 = 256 and if n ≥ 16, then n2 ≥ 256.
Therefore, the largest possible value of n is 15.

Solution 2
200 500 200 2.5 200
Since n is a positive integer and 500 = 200(2.5),
√ then n < 3 is equivalent to n < (3 ) ,
2.5 2 0.5
which is√equivalent to n < 3 = 3 3 = 9 3.
Since 9 3 ≈ 15.59 and n is an integer, the largest possible value of n is 15.

Answer: (C)

21. Solution 1
The area of the original piece of paper is 17(8) = 136 cm2 .
2010 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7
F E
A D
G

B C

When the paper is folded in this way, the portion of the original bottom face of the paper that
is visible has the same area as the original portion of the top side of the paper to the right of
the fold. (This is quadrilateral CDEF .)
Of the portion of the original sheet to the left of the fold, the part that is hidden (and thus not
included in the area of the new figure) is the triangular portion under the folded part. (This is
the section under 4CDG.) The hidden triangle is congruent to 4CDG.
Thus, the area of the portion of the original top face of the paper that is visible is the area to
the left of the fold, minus the area of the hidden triangle.
Therefore, the area of the new figure equals the area of the original rectangle minus the area
of 4CDG.
4CDG has height GC = 8 cm (the height of the rectangle), is right-angled (since the folded
portion of the original bottom edge is perpendicular to the top and bottom edges), and has
base GD = 8 cm.
Therefore, 4CDG has area 21 (8)(8) = 32 cm2 .
In summary, the area of the new figure is 136 − 32 = 104 cm2 .

Solution 2
We show the hidden portion of the original top edge and label the vertices of the new figure:
F 8 E
x
A D
G
8

B C

We want to determine the area of figure ABCDEF G.

Suppose that F G = x.
Since quadrilateral AGCB has three right angles (at A, B and C), then it is a rectangle, and
F C is perpendicular to AD.
Since quadrilateral DEF G has three right angles (at E, F and G), then it is a rectangle.
We know that F E = AB = 8 since both are heights of the original rectangle.
Since AGCB and DEF G are rectangles, then GC = AB = 8 and GD = F E = 8.
Note that BC, CG and GF made up the original bottom edge of the rectangle.
Thus, BC + CG + GF = 17, and so BC = 17 − 8 − x = 9 − x.
The area of rectangle AGCB is 8(9 − x) = 72 − 8x.
The area of rectangle DEF G is 8x.
The area of 4CGD (which is right-angled at G) is 12 (8)(8) = 32.
Therefore, the total area of figure ABCDEF G is (72 − 8x) + 8x + 32 = 104 cm2 .
Answer: (A)

22. Solution 1
We label the terms x1 , x2 , x3 , . . . , x2009 , x2010 .
Suppose that S is the sum of the odd-numbered terms in the sequence; that is,
S = x1 + x3 + x5 + · · · + x2007 + x2009
2010 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

We know that the sum of all of the terms is 5307; that is,

x1 + x2 + x3 + · · · + x2009 + x2010 = 5307

Next, we pair up the terms: each odd-numbered term with the following even-numbered term.
That is, we pair the first term with the second, the third term with the fourth, and so on, until
we pair the 2009th term with the 2010th term. There are 1005 such pairs.
In each pair, the even-numbered term is one bigger than the odd-numbered term. That is,
x2 − x1 = 1, x4 − x3 = 1, and so on.
Therefore, the sum of the even-numbered terms is 1005 greater than the sum of the odd-
numbered terms. Thus, the sum of the even-numbered terms is S + 1005.
Since the sum of all of the terms equals the sum of the odd-numbered terms plus the sum of
the even-numbered terms, then S + (S + 1005) = 5307 or 2S = 4302 or S = 2151.
Thus, the required sum is 2151.

Solution 2
Suppose that the first term is x.
Since each term after the first is 1 larger than the previous term, we can label the terms in the
sequence as x, x + 1, x + 2, . . . , x + 2008, x + 2009.
Since the sum of all 2010 terms is 5307, then

x + (x + 1) + (x + 2) + · · · + (x + 2008) + (x + 2009) = 5307

2010x + (1 + 2 + · · · + 2008 + 2009) = 5307
2010x + 21 (2009)(2010) = 5307
2010x = −2013738

When we add up every second term beginning with the first term, we obtain

x + (x + 2) + (x + 4) + · · · + (x + 2006) + (x + 2008)
= 1005x + (2 + 4 + · · · + 2006 + 2008)
= 1005x + 2(1 + 2 + · · · + 1003 + 1004)
= 1005x + 2 21 (1004)(1005)

= 12 (2010x) + (1004)(1005)
= 21 (−2013738) + (1004)(1005)
= 2151

Therefore, the required sum is 2151.

Answer: (C)

23. Solution 1
Connie gives 24 bars that account for 45% of the total weight to Brennan. Thus, each of these
24 bars accounts for an average of 4524
% = 15
8
% = 1.875% of the total weight.
Connie gives 13 bars that account for 26% of the total weight to Maya. Thus, each of these 13
bars accounts for an average of 26
13
% = 2% of the total weight.
Since each of the bars that she gives to Blair is heavier than each of the bars given to Brennan
(which were the 24 lightest bars) and is lighter than each of the bars given to Maya (which
were the 13 heaviest bars), then the average weight of the bars given to Blair must be larger
than 1.875% and smaller than 2%.
2010 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

Note that the bars given to Blair account for 100% − 45% − 26% = 29% of the total weight.
If there were 14 bars accounting for 29% of the total weight, the average weight would be
29
14
% ≈ 2.07%, which is too large. Thus, there must be more than 14 bars accounting for 29%
of the total weight.
If there were 15 bars accounting for 29% of the total weight, the average weight would be
29
15
% ≈ 1.93%, which is in the correct range.
If there were 16 bars accounting for 29% of the total weight, the average weight would be
29
16
% ≈ 1.81%, which is too small. The same would be true if there were 17 or 18 bars.
Therefore, Blair must have received 15 bars.

Solution 2
We may assume without loss of generality that the total weight of all of the bars is 100.
Therefore, the bars given to Brennan weigh 45 and the bars given to Maya weigh 26.
Suppose that Connie gives n bars to Blair.
These bars weigh 100 − 45 − 26 = 29.
Let b1 , b2 , . . . , b24 be the weights of the 24 bars given to Brennan.
We may assume that b1 < b2 < · · · < b23 < b24 , since the weights are all different.
Let m1 , m2 , . . . , m13 be the weights of the 13 bars given to Maya.
We may assume that m1 < m2 < · · · < m12 < m13 , since the weights are all different.
Let x1 , x2 , . . . , xn be the weights of the n bars given to Blair.
We may assume that x1 < x2 < · · · < xn−1 < xn , since the weights are all different.
Note that

b1 < b2 < · · · < b23 < b24 < x1 < x2 < · · · < xn−1 < xn < m1 < m2 < · · · < m12 < m13

since the lightest bars are given to Brennan and the heaviest to Maya.
Also,

b1 + b2 + · · · + b23 + b24 = 45
x1 + x2 + · · · + xn−1 + xn = 29
m1 + m2 + · · · + m12 + m13 = 26

Now b24 is the heaviest of the bars given to Brennan, so

45 = b1 + b2 + · · · + b23 + b24 < b24 + b24 + · · · + b24 + b24 = 24b24

45
and so b24 > 24 = 158
.
Also, m1 is the lightest of the bars given to Maya, so

26 = m1 + m2 + · · · + m12 + m13 > m1 + m1 + · · · + m1 + m1 = 13m1

26
and so m1 < 13 = 2.
But each of the n bars given to Blair is heavier than b24 and each is lighter than m1 .
Thus, nb24 < x1 + x2 + · · · + xn−1 + xn < nm1 or nb24
< 29 < nm1 .
Thus, 15
8
n < nb24 < 29 < nm1 < 2n and so n < 29 15 8
= 232
15
7
= 15 15 and n > 292
= 14 12 .
Since n is an integer, then n = 15, so Blair receives 15 bars.
Answer: (B)

24. Since the grid is a 5 by 5 grid of squares and each square has side length 10 cm, then the whole
grid is 50 cm by 50 cm.
2010 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10

Since the diameter of the coin is 8 cm, then the radius of the coin is 4 cm.
We consider where the centre of the coin lands when the coin is tossed, since the location of
the centre determines the position of the coin.
Since the coin lands so that no part of it is off of the grid, then the centre of the coin must land
at least 4 cm (1 radius) away from each of the outer edges of the grid.
This means that the centre of the coin lands anywhere in the region extending from 4 cm from
the left edge to 4 cm from the right edge (a width of 50 − 4 − 4 = 42 cm) and from 4 cm from
the top edge to 4 cm to the bottom edge (a height of 50 − 4 − 4 = 42 cm).
Thus, the centre of the coin must land in a square that is 42 cm by 42 cm in order to land so
that no part of the coin is off the grid.
Therefore, the total admissible area in which the centre can land is 42 × 42 = 1764 cm2 .
Consider one of the 25 squares. For the coin to lie completely inside the square, its centre must
land at least 4 cm from each edge of the square.
As above, it must land in a region of width 10 − 4 − 4 = 2 cm and of height 10 − 4 − 4 = 2 cm.
There are 25 possible such regions (one for each square) so the area in which the centre of the
coin can land to create a winning position is 25 × 2 × 2 = 100 cm2 .
Thus, the probability that the coin lands in a winning position is equal to the area of the region
in which the centre lands giving a winning position, divided by the area of the region in which
100 25
the coin may land, or 1764 = 441 .
Answer: (A)

25. First, we define u(n) to be the units digit of the positive integer n (for example, u(25) = 5).
Next, we make three important notes:

• It is the final position on the circle that we are seeking, not the total number of times
travelled around the circle. Therefore, moving 25 steps, for example, around the circle is
equivalent to moving 5 steps around the circle because in both cases the counter ends up
in the same position. Since 10 steps gives one complete trip around the circle, then we
only care about the units digit of the number of steps (that is, u(nn )).
• To determine the final position, we want to determine the sum of the number of steps for
each of the 1234 moves; that is, we want to determine

S = 11 + 22 + · · · + 12331233 + 12341234

since to calculate the position after a move we add the number of steps to the previous
position. In fact, as above in the first note, we only care about the units digit of the sum
of the numbers of steps u(S), which is equal to
 
u u(11 ) + u(22 ) + · · · + u(12331233 ) + u(12341234 )

• To calculate u(nn ), we only need to worry about the units digit of the base n, u(n), and
not the other digits of the base. In other words, we need to determine
 the units digit

of the product of n factors u(n) × u(n) × · · · × u(n) – namely, u (u(n))n . (As we will
see below, we cannot necessarily truncate the exponent n to its units digit.) To actually
perform this calculation, we can always truncate to the units digit at each step because
only the units digits affect the units digits.  
13 13
For example, to calculate u(13 ), we can calculate u (u(13)) which equals u(313 ). In
2010 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11

other words, we need to calculate 3 × 3 × · · · × 3, which we can do by multiplying and

truncating at each step if necessary:

3, 9, 27 → 7, 21 → 1, 3, 9, 27 → 7, 21 → 1, 3, 9, 27 → 7, 21 → 1, 3

Thus, u(1313 ) = 3.

Next, we consider the different possible values of u(n) and determine a pattern of the units
digits of powers of n:

• If u(n) is 0, 1, 5, or 6, then u(nk ) is 0, 1, 5, or 6, respectively, for any positive integer

k, because u(n2 ) = u(n) in each case, and so raising to higher powers does not affect the
units digit.
• If u(n) = 4, then the units digits of powers of n alternate 4, 6, 4, 6, and so on. (We can see
by multiplying and truncating as above.)
• If u(n) = 9, then the units digits of powers of n alternate 9, 1, 9, 1, and so on.
• If u(n) = 2, then the units digits of powers of n cycle as 2, 4, 8, 6, 2, 4, 8, 6 and so on.
• If u(n) = 8, then the units digits of powers of n cycle as 8, 4, 2, 6, 8, 4, 2, 6 and so on.
• If u(n) = 3, then the units digits of powers of n cycle as 3, 9, 7, 1, 3, 9, 7, 1 and so on.
• If u(n) = 7, then the units digits of powers of n cycle as 7, 9, 3, 1, 7, 9, 3, 1 and so on.

Next, we determine u(nn ), based on u(n):

• If u(n) is 0, 1, 5, or 6, then u(nn ) is 0, 1, 5, or 6, respectively.

• If u(n) = 4, then u(nn ) = 6, since the exponent is even so the units digit will be that
occurring in even positions in the pattern.
• If u(n) = 9, then u(nn ) = 9, since the exponent is odd so the units digit will be that
occurring in odd positions in the pattern.
• If u(n) = 2, then u(nn ) will be either 4 or 6, depending on the exponent n, because
the exponent is certainly even, but the pattern of units digits cycles with length 4. In
particular, u(22 ) = 4 and u(1212 ) = 6 (the exponent 12 is a multiple of 4, so the units
digit appears at the end of a cycle).
• If u(n) = 8, then u(nn ) will be either 4 or 6, depending on the exponent n, because
the exponent is certainly even, but the pattern of units digits cycles with length 4. In
particular, u(88 ) = 6 and u(1818 ) = 4, using a similar argument to above.
• Similarly, u(33 ) = 7, u(1313 ) = 3, u(77 ) = 3, and u(1717 ) = 7.
• Since the units digits of the base n repeat in a cycle of length 10 and the units digits of
the powers of n for a fixed n repeat every 1, 2 or 4 powers, then u(nn ) repeats in a cycle
of length 20 (the least common multiple of 10, 1, 2, and 4).

We can now determine u(1) + u(2) + · · · + u(19) + u(20) to be

u(1 + 4 + 7 + 6 + 5 + 6 + 3 + 6 + 9 + 0 + 1 + 6 + 3 + 6 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 4 + 9 + 0) = u(94) = 4

To calculate the total for 1234 steps, we note that 61 cycles of 20 bring us to 1220 steps.
After 1220 steps, the units digit of the sum is u(61 · 4) = u(244) = 4.
2010 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 12

We then add the units digit of the sum of 14 more steps, starting at the beginning of the cycle,
to obtain a final position equal to the units digit of

u(4 + (1 + 4 + 7 + 6 + 5 + 6 + 3 + 6 + 9 + 0 + 1 + 6 + 3 + 6)) = u(67) = 7

Therefore, the final position is 7.

Answer: (D)
Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of the Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

2009 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Wednesday, February 18, 2009

Solutions

2008
c Centre for Education in Mathematics and Computing
2009 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2
102 − 10 100 − 10 90
1. Calculating, = = = 10.
9 9 9 Answer: (A)
2. On Saturday, Deepit worked 6 hours. On Sunday, he worked 4 hours.
Therefore, he worked 6 + 4 = 10 hours in total on Saturday and Sunday.
Answer: (E)
3. Since 3(−2) = ∇ + 2, then −6 = ∇ + 2 so ∇ = −6 − 2 = −8.
Answer: (C)
√ √
4. Since 5 + n = 7 and 7 = 49, then 5 + n = 49, so n = 44.
Answer: (D)
5. Solution 1
Calculating, 32 + 42 + 122 = 9 + 16 + 144 = 25 + 144 = 169 = 132 .

Solution 2
From our work with the Pythagorean Theorem, we might remember that 32 + 42 = 52 .
(This comes from the “3-4-5” right-angled triangle.)
Thus, 32 + 42 + 122 = 52 + 122 .
We might also remember, from the “5-12-13” triangle that 52 + 122 = 132 .
Therefore, 32 + 42 + 122 = 52 + 122 = 132 .
Answer: (A)
6. Since the shaded area is 20% of the area of the circle, then the central angle should be 20% of
the total possible central angle.
Thus, x◦ = 100
20
(360◦ ) or x = 51 (360) = 72.
Answer: (D)
7. Since the sum of the angles in any triangle is 180◦ , then looking at 4QSR, we have
∠SQR = 180◦ − ∠QSR − ∠SRQ = 180◦ − 90◦ − 65◦ = 25◦
Since P Q = P R, then ∠P QR = ∠P RQ.
Thus, x◦ + 25◦ = 65◦ or x + 25 = 65, and so x = 40.
Answer: (E)
8. According to the problem, we want to find the choice that works no matter what three consec-
utive positive integers we choose.
Thus, we try 1(2)(3) to see if we can eliminate any of the given choices.
Now, 1(2)(3) = 6. 6 is not a multiple of 4, 5 or 12, and is not odd.
Therefore, only “a multiple of 6” is possible.
(In fact, the product of three consecutive positive integers will always be a multiple of 6, be-
cause at least one of the three integers is even and one of the three must be a multiple of 3.)
Answer: (B)
9. Solution 1
Since there are 24 hours in a day, Francis spends 31 × 24 = 8 hours sleeping.
Also, he spends 14 × 24 = 6 hours studying, and 18 × 24 = 3 hours eating.
The number of hours that he has left is 24 − 8 − 6 − 3 = 7 hours.

Solution 2
Francis spends 13 + 14 + 18 = 8+6+3
24
17
= 24 either sleeping, studying or eating.
17 7
This leaves him 1 − 24 = 24 of his day.
Since there are 24 hours in a full day, then he has 7 hours left.
Answer: (D)
2009 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

10. Solution 1
Suppose that the height is h cm, the width is w cm, and the depth is d cm.
Using the given areas of the faces, wh = 12, dw = 8 and dh = 6.
Multiplying these together, we √get whdwdh = 12(8)(6) or d2 h2 w2 = 576.
Thus, (dhw)2 = 576, so dhw = 576 = 24, since dhw > 0.
The volume is dhw cm3 , so the volume is 24 cm3 .

Solution 2
We try to find dimensions that work to give the three face areas that we know.
After some trial and error, we see that if the width is 4 cm, the height is 3 cm, and the depth
is 2 cm, then the given face areas are correct.
Thus, the volume is 4 cm × 3 cm × 2 cm = 24 cm3 .

Solution 3
Suppose that the height is h cm, the width is w cm, and the depth is d cm.
Using the given areas of the faces, wh = 12, dw = 8 and dh = 6.
12
From the first equation, w = .
h
12d
Substituting into the second equation, we obtain = 8.
h
Multiplying this equation by the equation dh = 6, we obtain 12d2 = 48 which gives d2 = 4 and
so d = 2, since d > 0.
Since dh = 6, then 2h = 6 so h = 3.
Since dw = 8, then 2w = 8 so w = 4.
Thus, the volume is 4 cm × 3 cm × 2 cm = 24 cm3 .
Answer: (A)

11. To maximize the number of songs used, Gillian should use as many of the shortest length songs
as possible. (This is because she can always trade a longer song for a shorter song and shorten
the total time used.)
If Gillian uses all 50 songs of 3 minutes in length, this takes 150 minutes.
There are 180 − 150 = 30 minutes left, so she can play an additional 30 ÷ 5 = 6 songs that are
5 minutes in length.
In total, she plays 50 + 6 = 56 songs.
Answer: (C)

12. Since there are 6 columns and each term in the sequence is 3 greater than the previous term,
then the number in each box in the final column is 18 more than the number above it. (Each
number in the final column is 6 terms further along in the sequence than the number above it.)
Thus, the number in the bottom right box should be 17 + 5(18) = 17 + 90 = 107, since it is 5
rows below the 17.
Answer: (C)

13. The coin starts on square number 8, counting from left to right.
After the first roll, it moves 1 square to the left, since 1 is odd.
After the second roll, it moves 2 squares to the right, since 2 is even.
The coin continues to move, ending on square 8 − 1 + 2 − 3 + 4 − 5 + 6 = 11, and so is 3 squares
to the right of where it started.
Answer: (E)
2009 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

14. Of the integers from 3 to 20, the numbers 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, and 19 are prime.
Thus, the integers 4, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, and 20 are composite.
The sum of three different composite numbers has to be at least 4 + 6 + 8 = 18.
Thus, the smallest prime number that could be the sum of three different composite numbers
is 19.
Can we write 19 as the sum of three different composite numbers? Yes, because 19 = 4 + 6 + 9.
Answer: (D)

15. We write the list of five numbers in increasing order.

We know that the number 8 occurs at least twice in the list.
Since the median of the list is 9, then the middle number (that is, the third number) in the list
is 9.
Thus, the list can be written as a, b, 9, d, e.
Since 8 occurs more than once and the middle number is 9, then 8 must occur twice only with
a = b = 8.
Thus, the list can be written as 8, 8, 9, d, e.
Since the average is 10 and there are 5 numbers in the list, then the sum of the numbers in the
list is 5(10) = 50.
Therefore, 8 + 8 + 9 + d + e = 50 or 25 + d + e = 50 or d + e = 25.
Since 8 is the only integer that occurs more than once in the list, then d > 9.
Thus, 10 ≤ d < e and d + e = 25.
To make e as large as possible, we make d as small as possible, so we make d = 10, and so
e = 15.
The list 8, 8, 9, 10, 15 has the desired properties, so the largest possible integer that could
appear in the list is 15.
Answer: (A)

16. Suppose that the side length of each of the small squares is x. (Since the 4 small squares have
the same height, they must have the same side length.)
Then the side length of the largest square is 4x.
Since the side length of each of the shaded squares is 10, then QR = 3(10) = 30 = P S.
Thus, P S = 30 = 4x + x or 5x = 30 or x = 6.
Therefore, the side length of the largest square is 4x = 24.
Answer: (B)

17. Label the six dice as shown:

Q R

S T U

The maximum overall exposed sum occurs when the sum of the exposed faces on each die is
maximized.
Die P has 5 exposed faces. The sum of these faces is a maximum when the 1 is hidden, so the
2009 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

maximum exposed sum on die P is 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 = 20.

Dice Q and S each have 3 exposed faces. Two of these are opposite to each other, so have a
sum of 7. Thus, to maximize the exposed sum on these dice, we position them with the 6 as
the unpaired exposed face. (This is on the left face of the stack.) Each of these dice has a
maximum exposed sum of 6 + 7 = 13.
Dice R and U each have 4 exposed faces. Two of these are opposite to each other, so have a
sum of 7. Thus, to maximize the exposed sum on these dice, we position them with the 6 and
the 5 as the unpaired exposed faces (on the top and right of the stack). Each of these dice have
a maximum exposed sum of 5 + 6 + 7 = 18.
Die T has 2 exposed faces, which are opposite each other, so have a sum of 7.
Therefore, the maximum possible sum of the exposed faces is 20 + 13 + 13 + 18 + 18 + 7 = 89.
Answer: (C)
18. The slope of line segment QP is 1. Since the “rise” of QP is 6 units, then the “run” of
QP should also be 6 units. Therefore, Q is 6 units horizontally to the left of P , and so has
coordinates (−5, 0).
The slope of line segment RP is 2. Since the rise of RP is 6 units, then the run of RP is
1
2
(6) = 3 units. Therefore, R is 3 units horizontally to the left of P , and so has coordinates
(−2, 0).
(We could have used the coordinates of P and the slopes of the lines to find that the equations
of the lines are y = x + 5 and y = 2x + 4 and used them to find the coordinates of Q and R.)
Therefore, QR = −2 − (−5) = 3 and P is 6 units above the x-axis.
Thus, treating QR as the base of 4P QR, we find that its area is 21 (3)(6) = 9.
Answer: (B)
19. Solution 1
The product of the digits of n is 0 if at least one of the digits of n equals 0.
Consider the integers from 5000 to 5999, inclusive, which are each of the form 5xyz.
How many of these do not include a 0?
If 5xyz does not include a 0, there are 9 possibilities for each of x, y and z (namely 1 to 9),
and so there are 93 = 729 such integers.
Therefore, 1000 − 729 = 271 of the integers from 5000 to 5999 actually do include a 0.
We must also consider 6000, which includes a 0.
Therefore, there are 271 + 1 = 272 integers n with 5000 ≤ n ≤ 6000 with the property that the
product of the digits of n is 0.

Solution 2
The product of the digits of n is 0 if at least one of the digits of n equals 0.
We carefully count the number of integers with 0 in each position, being careful not to “double
count” any integers.
The integer n = 6000 includes a 0, so contributes 1 integer to the total.
There are 100 integers of the form 50xy (namely, 5000 to 5099).
There are 10 integers of the form 510y (namely, 5100 to 5109). Similarly, there are 10 integers of
each of the forms 520y, 530y, and so on to 590y. This gives 9 sets of 10 integers, or 90 integers
more.
There are 9 integers of the form 51x0 where x is not 0 (namely, 5110, 5120 and so on up to
5190). Similarly, there are 9 integers of each of the forms 52x0, 53x0, and so on. This gives 9
sets of 9 integers, or 81 integers more.
In total, there are thus 1 + 100 + 90 + 81 = 272 such integers.
Answer: (D)
2009 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

20. Let the length of his route be d km.

Since he arrives 1 minute early when travelling at 75 km/h and 1 minute late when travelling
1
at 70 km/h, then the difference between these times is 2 minutes, or 30 of an hour.
d d
The time that his trip takes while travelling at 75 km/h is hours, and at 70 km/h is hours.
75 70
Therefore,
d d 1
− =
70 75 30
75(70)
75d − 70d =
30
5d = 25(7)
d = 35

Therefore, the route is 35 km long.

Answer: (B)

21. We count the lattice points by starting with the point closest to P S and proceeding to just
below QR.
For a lattice point (a, b) on the line y = 3x − 5 to be above P S, we need b ≥ 0 or 3a − 5 ≥ 0
or 3a ≥ 5 or a ≥ 35 .
Since a is an integer, then a ≥ 2. (a = 2 gives the point (2, 1).)
For a lattice point (a, b) on the line y = 3x−5 to be below QR, we need b ≤ 2009 or 3a−5 ≤ 2009
or 3a ≤ 2014 or a ≤ 2014 3
.
Since a is an integer, then a ≤ 671. (a = 671 gives the point (671, 2008).)
Thus, for a lattice point (a, b) to be on the line and inside the square, it must have 2 ≤ a ≤ 671.
In fact, every such integer a gives a lattice point, because it gives an integer value of b = 2a − 5.
The number of such integers a is 671 − 1 = 670, so there are 670 such lattice points.
Answer: (E)

22. Solution 1
If we add the second and third equations, we obtain

ac + b + bc + a = 18 + 6
c(a + b) + (a + b) = 24
(c + 1)(a + b) = 24

From the first given equation, a + b = 3 and so we get (c + 1)(3) = 24 or c + 1 = 8.

Thus, c = 7.

Solution 2
From the first equation, b = 3 − a. (We could solve for a in terms of b instead.)
The second equation becomes ac + (3 − a) = 18 or ac − a = 15.
The third equation becomes (3 − a)c + a = 6 or −ac + 3c + a = 6.
Adding these two equations, we obtain 3c = 15 + 6 = 21 and so c = 7.
Answer: (E)

23. Solution 1
Suppose that Angela and Barry share 100 hectares of land. (We may assume any convenient
total area, since this is a multiple choice problem.)
2009 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

Since the ratio of the area of Angela’s land to the area of Barry’s land is 3 : 2, then Angela has
3
5
of the 100 hectares, or 60 hectares. Barry has the remaining 40 hectares.
7
Since the land is covered by corn and peas in the ratio 7 : 3, then 10 of the 100 hectares (that
is, 70 hectares) is covered with corn and the remaining 30 hectares with peas.
On Angela’s land, the ratio is 4 : 1 so 54 of her 60 hectares, or 48 hectares, is covered with corn
and the remaining 12 hectares with peas.
Since there are 70 hectares of corn in total, then Barry has 70 − 48 = 22 hectares of corn.
Since there are 30 hectares of peas in total, then Barry has 30 − 12 = 18 hectares of peas.
Therefore, the ratio of corn to peas on Barry’s land is 22 : 18 = 11 : 9.

Solution 2
Suppose that the total combined area of land is x.
Since the ratio of the area of Angela’s land to the area of Barry’s land is 3 : 2, then Angela has
3
5
of the land, or 35 x, while Barry has the remaining 25 x.
7
Since the land is covered by corn and peas in the ratio 7 : 3, then 10 x is covered with corn and
3
the remaining 10 x with peas.
On Angela’s land, the ratio is 4 : 1 so 45 of her 35 x, or 45 ( 35 x) = 12
25
x, is covered with corn and
3 12 3
the remaining 5 x − 25 x = 25 x with peas.
7 7
Since the area of corn is 10 x in total, then Barry’s area of corn is 10 x − 12
25
x = 35
50
x − 24
50
x = 11
50
x.
3 3 3 15 6 9
Since the area of peas is 10 x in total, then Barry’s area of peas is 10 x − 25 x = 50 x − 50 x = 50 x.
Therefore, the ratio of corn to peas on Barry’s land is 11 50
x : 50 9
x = 11 : 9.
Answer: (A)

24. We first note that the given quadrilateral is a trapezoid, because 60◦ + 120◦ = 180◦ , and so the
top and bottom sides are parallel.
We need to determine the total area of the trapezoid and then what fraction of that area is
closest to the longest side.

Area of trapezoid
Label the trapezoid as ABCD and drop perpendiculars from B and C to P and Q on AD.

B C

A Q D
P

Since 4ABP is right-angled at√P and ∠BAP = 60◦ , then AP = 100 cos(60◦ ) = 100( 21 ) = 50 m
√
and BP = 100 sin(60◦ ) = 100( 23 ) = 50 3 m. (We could have used the ratios in a 30◦ -60◦ -90◦
triangle to do these calculations.)
By symmetry, QD = 50 m as well.
Also, since BC is parallel to P Q, and BP and CQ are perpendicular to P Q, then BP QC is a
rectangle, so P Q = BC = 100 m. √
Thus, the area of trapezoid ABCD is 21 (BC + AD)(BP ) = 12 (100 + (50 + 100 + 50))(50 3) or
√
7500 3 square metres.

Determination of region closest to AD

Next, we need to determine what region of the trapezoid is closest to side AD.
2009 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

To be closest to side AD, a point inside the trapezoid must be closer to AD than to each of
BC, AB, and DC.
For a point in the trapezoid to be closer to AD than to BC, it must be below the “half-way
mark”, which is the midsegment M N . √ √
Thus, such a point must be below the parallel line that is 21 (50 3) = 25 3 m above AD.
For a point in the trapezoid to be closer to AD than to AB, it must be below the angle bisector
of ∠BAD. (See the end of this solution for a justification of this.)
Similarly, for a point in the trapezoid to be closer to AD than to DC, it must be below the
angle bisector of ∠CDA.
Define points X and Y to be the points of intersection between the angle bisectors of ∠BAD
and ∠CDA, respectively, with the midsegment M N . We will confirm later in the solution that
the angle bisectors intersect above M N , not below M N .

B C

M X Y N

A D

Area of trapezoid AXY D

Lastly, we need to determine the area of trapezoid AXY D.
Note that ∠XAD = ∠Y DA = 12 (60◦ ) = 30◦ .
Drop perpendiculars from X and Y to G and H, respectively, on AD.

B C

X Y

A G H D

√
We know that AD = 200 m and XG = Y H = 25 3 m.
Since each of 4AXG and 4DY H is a 30◦ -60◦ -90◦ triangle, then
√ √ √
AG = DH = 3XG = 3(25 3) = 75

This tells us that the angle bisectors must intersect above M N , since AG + HD = 150 and
AD = 200, so AG + HD < AD.
Since XGHY is a rectangle (by similar reasoning as for BP QC), then

XY = GH = AD − AG − DH = 200 − 75 − 75 = 50
√
Therefore, the area of trapezoid AXY D is 12 (AD + XY )(XG) = 21 (50 + 200)(25 3) or
√
3125 3 square metres. √
This tells us that the fraction of the crop that is brought to AD is 3125 √3 = 25 = 5 .
7500 3 60 12

Property of angle bisectors

We must still justify the fact about angle bisectors above.
Consider ∠ST U and point V on its angle bisector.
Drop perpendiculars from V to E and F on ST and U T , respectively.
2009 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9
S

E
V

T F U

Now 4V ET is congruent to 4V F T since each is right-angled, the two have equal angles at T ,
and the two share a common hypotenuse T V .
This tells us that EV = F V ; that is, V is the same distance from ST and from U T .
This also tells us that any point on the angle bisector will be equidistant from ST and U T .
We can also deduce from this that any point below the angle bisector will be closer to U T ,
as moving from a point on the angle bisector to such a point moves closer to U T and further
from ST .
Answer: (B)

25. We add coordinates to the diagram, with the bottom left corner at (0, 0), the bottom right at
(m, 0), the top right at (m, n), and the top left at (0, n).
n
Thus, the slope of the diagonal is .
m
n
This tells us that the equation of the diagonal is y = x.
m
1 n 1
Since 2n < m < 3n, then < < ; that is, the slope is between 13 and 12 .
3 m 2
There are three possible configurations of shading in these partially shaded squares:

– A small triangle is shaded, while the rest is unshaded:

Here, the maximum possible length of the base is 1 and so the maximum possible height
is when the slope is as large as possible, so is 12 .
Thus, in this case, the maximum shaded area is 12 (1)( 12 ) = 14 .
Since we want a shaded area of more than 0.999, then this is not the case we need.

– A trapezoid is shaded and a trapezoid is unshaded:

(Note that since the slope is less than 1, then the case is not possible.)

Consider the unshaded area. For the shaded area to be more than 0.999, the unshaded
area is less than 0.001.
But the unshaded trapezoid is at least as big as the triangle that is cut off when the

diagonal passes through a vertex:

Such a triangle has base 1 and height at least 13 (since the slope is at least 13 ).
Thus, the area of such a trapezoid is at least 12 (1)( 13 ) = 16 and so cannot be less than 0.001.

– A triangle is unshaded:
2009 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10

It is this last case upon which we need to focus.

Suppose that the coordinates of the top left corner of such a unit square are (p, q).
n
The point where the diagonal (y = x) crosses the top edge of the square (y = q) has
m  m
n m
coordinates q, q , since if y = q, then q = x gives x = q.
n m n
Similarly,
 n  the point where the diagonal crosses the left edge (x = p) of the square has coordinates
p, p .
m
m n
Thus, the triangle has (horizontal) base of length q −p and (vertical) height of length q − p.
n m
We also know that neither the base nor the height is 0, since there is some unshaded area.
Since the area of the unshaded triangle is less than 0.001, then
1 m n 
 
0 < 2 q − p q − p < 0.001
 mn  m
n 
0 < q−p q− p < 0.002
n m
0 < (mq − pn)(mq − pn) < 0.002mn (multiplying by mn)
2
0 < 500(mq − pn) < mn
m 
Now m, n, p and q are integers and mq − pn is not zero. In fact, mq − pn = n q − p > 0.
n
Thus, (mq − pn)2 ≥ 1 because m, q, p, n are all integers and (mq − pn)2 > 0.
Thus, mn > 500(1) = 500.
Note that if (mq − pn)2 > 1, then mn would be much bigger.
So, since we want the smallest value of mn, we try to see if we can find a solution with
(mq − pn)2 = 1.

So we need to try to find m and n with 2n < m < 3n, with the product mn as close to
500 as possible, and so that we can also find p and q with mq − pn = 1.
We consider the restriction that 2n < m < 3n first and look at the integers from 501 to 510 to
see if we can find m and n with a product equal to one of these numbers and with 2n < m < 3n.

• 501 = 3(167) and 167 is prime, so this is not possible

• 502 = 2(251) and 251 is prime, so this is not possible
• 503 is prime, so this is not possible
• 504 = 8(7)(9) so we can choose n = 14 and m = 36 (this is the only such way)
• 505 = 5(101) and 101 is prime, so this is not possible
• 506 = 11(2)(23) which cannot be written in this way
• 507 = 3(13)(13) which cannot be written in this way
• 508 = 4(127) and 127 is prime, so this is not possible
• 509 which is prime, so this is not possible
• 510 = 2(3)(5)(17), so we can choose n = 15 and m = 34 (this is only such way)

This gives two possible pairs m and n to consider so far. If one of them works, then this pair
will give the smallest possible value of mn.
In order to verify if one of these works, we do need to determine if we can find an appropriate
p and q.
Consider n = 14 and m = 36. In this case, we want to find integers p and q with 36q − 14p = 1.
2009 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11

This is not possible since the left side is even and the right side is odd.
Consider n = 15 and m = 34. In this case, we want to find integers p and q with 34q − 15p = 1.
The integers q = 4 and p = 9 satisfy this equation.
Therefore, (m, n) = (34, 15) is a pair with the smallest possible value of mn that satisfies the
given conditions, and so mn = 510.
Answer: (C)
Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of the Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

2008 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Tuesday, February 19, 2008

Solutions

2007
c Waterloo Mathematics Foundation
2008 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2

1. Calculating, 32 − 22 + 12 = 9 − 4 + 1 = 6.
Answer: (E)
√ √
25 − 16 9 3
2. Calculating, √ √ = = = 3.
25 − 16 5−4 1
Answer: (B)

3. In decimal form, the five possible answers are

0.75, 1.2, 0.81, 1.333 . . . , 0.7
The differences between 1 and these possiblities are
1−0.75 = 0.25 1.2−1 = 0.2 1−0.81 = 0.19 1.333 . . .−1 = 0.333 . . . 1−0.7 = 0.3
The possibility with the smallest difference with 1 is 0.81, so 0.81 is closest to 1.
Answer: (C)

4. In total, there are 5 + 6 + 7 + 8 = 26 jelly beans in the bag.

8 4
Since there are 8 blue jelly beans, the probability of selecting a blue jelly bean is 26 = 13 .
Answer: (D)

5. Since 52 28 is a multiple of 6, then it must be a multiple of 2 and a multiple of 3.

Since it is a multiple of 2, the digit represented by  must be even.
Since it is a multiple of 3, the sum of its digits is divisible by 3.
The sum of its digits is 5 + 2 + 2 + 8 +  = 17 + .
Since  is even, the possible sums of digits are 17, 19, 21, 23, 25 (for the possible values 0, 2,
4, 6, 8 for ).
Of these possibilities, only 21 is divisible by 3, so  must equal 4.
We can check that 52 284 is divisible by 6.
(An alternate approach would have been to use a calculator and test each of the five possible
values for  by dividing the resulting values of 52 28 by 6.)
Answer: (C)
40 40
6. Since − 1 = 19, then = 20.
x x
Thus, x = 2, since the number that we must divide 40 by to get 20 is 2.
Answer: (D)

7. We extend QR to meet T S at X.
Since P Q = QR, then QR = 3.
Since P QXT has three right angles, it must be a rectangle, so T X = P Q = 3.
Also, QX = P T = 6.
Since T S = 7 and T X = 3, then XS = T S − T X = 7 − 3 = 4.
Since QX = 6 and QR = 3, then RX = QX − QR = 6 − 3 = 3.

P 3 Q
3
R
6
3

T 3 X 4 S
2008 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

Since P QXT is a rectangle, then ∠RXS = 90◦ .

By the Pythagorean Theorem in 4RXS,

RS 2 = RX 2 + XS 2 = 32 + 42 = 9 + 16 = 25

so RS = 5, since RS > 0.
Therefore, the perimeter is P Q + QR + RS + ST + T P = 3 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 6 = 24.
Answer: (A)

8. Since P Q = QR, then ∠QP R = ∠QRP .

Since ∠P QR + ∠QP R + ∠QRP = 180◦ , then 40◦ + 2(∠QRP ) = 180◦ , so 2(∠QRP ) = 140◦ or
∠QRP = 70◦ .
Since ∠P RQ and ∠SRT are opposite angles, then ∠SRT = ∠P RQ = 70◦ .
Since RS = RT , then ∠RST = ∠RT S = x◦ .
Since ∠SRT + ∠RST + ∠RT S = 180◦ , then 70◦ + 2x◦ = 180◦ or 2x = 110 or x = 55.
Answer: (C)

9. Solution 1
Since a and b are both odd, then ab is odd.
Therefore, the largest even integer less than ab is ab − 1.
Since every other positive integer less than or equal to ab − 1 is even, then the number of even
ab − 1
positive integers less than or equal to ab − 1 (thus, less than ab) is .
2
Solution 2
Since a = 7 and b = 13, then ab = 91.
The even positive integers less than ab = 91 are 2, 4, 6, . . . , 90.
There are 90 ÷ 2 = 45 such integers.
Using a = 7 and b = 13, the five possible answers are
ab − 1 ab 91 a+b
= 45 = ab − 1 = 90 =5 (a − 1)(b − 1) = 72
2 2 2 4
ab − 1
Therefore, the answer must be .
2
Answer: (A)

10. For her 200 daytime minutes, Vivian is charged 200 × $0.10 = $20.
Since Vivian used 300 evening minutes and has 200 free evening minutes, then she is charged
for 300 − 200 = 100 of these minutes, and so is charged 100 × $0.05 = $5.
Her total bill is thus $20 + $20 + $5 = $45.
Answer: (C)

11. Lex has 265 cents in total.

Since a quarter is worth 25 cents, the total value in cents of the quarters that Lex has is a
multiple of 25, and so must end in 00, 25, 50 or 75.
Since the remaining part of the 265 cents is made up of dimes only, the remaining part is a
multiple of 10, so ends in a 0.
Thus, the value of the quarters must end with a 5, so ends with 25 or 75.
Since Lex has more quarters than dimes, we start by trying to determine the largest possible
number of quarters that he could have.
2008 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

The largest possible value of his quarters is thus 225 cents, which would be 225 ÷ 25 = 9
quarters, leaving 265 − 225 = 40 cents in dimes, or 4 dimes.
Thus, Lex has 9 + 4 = 13 coins in total.
(The next possible largest value of his quarters is 175 cents, which would come from 7 quarters
and so 90 cents in dimes or 9 dimes. This does not satisfy the condition that the number of
quarters is larger than the number of dimes.)
Answer: (B)

12. Solution 1
Since ∠OM P and ∠GM H are opposite angles, then ∠OM P = ∠GM H.
The x-axis and the y-axis are perpendicular, so ∠P OM = 90◦ , so ∠P OM = ∠GHM .
Since M is the midpoint of OH, then OM = HM .
Therefore, 4P OM and 4GHM are congruent by Angle-Side-Angle.
Thus, GH = OP = 4.
Since GH is perpendicular to the x-axis, then the x-coordinate of G is 12, so G has coordinates
(12, 4).

Solution 2
Since GH is perpendicular to the x-axis, then the x-coordinate of G is 12, so G has coordinates
(12, g), for some value of g.
Since OH = 12 and M is the midpoint of OH, then OM = 21 (12) = 6, so M has coordinates
(6, 0).
To get from P to M , we move 6 units right and 4 units up.
To get from M to G, we also move 6 units right. Since P , M and G lie on a line, then we must
also move 4 units up to get from M to G.
Therefore, the coordinates of G are (12, 4).
Answer: (E)

13. In the given layout, the white face and the face containing the “U” are joined so that the “U”
opens towards the edge joining these faces. Therefore, (A) cannot be correct as the “U” does
not open towards the white face across the common edge.
The given layout shows that the white face and the grey face cannot be joined along along an
edge when folded. Therefore, (C) cannot be correct.
The given layout also shows that the face containing the “U” and the face containing the “V”
cannot be joined along along an edge when folded. Therefore, (D) cannot be correct.
In the given layout, the grey face and the face containing the “U” are joined so that the “U”
opens away from the edge joining these faces. Therefore, (E) cannot be correct as the “U” does
not open away from the grey face across the common edge.
Having eliminated the other possibilities, the correct answer must be (B). (We can check by
visualizing the folding process that this cube can indeed be made.)
Answer: (B)

14. The third term is odd (t = 5), so the fourth term is 3(5) + 1 = 16, which is even.
Thus, the fifth term is 12 (16) = 8, which is even.
Thus, the sixth term is 12 (8) = 4, which is even.
Thus, the seventh term is 12 (4) = 2, which is even.
Thus, the eighth term is 21 (2) = 1, which is odd.
Thus, the ninth term is 3(1) + 1 = 4, which is even.
Thus, the tenth term is 12 (4) = 2.
Answer: (A)
2008 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

15. First, we find the prime factors of 555.

Since 555 ends with a 5, it is divisible by 5, with 555 = 5 × 111.
Since the sum of the digits of 111 is 3, then 111 is divisible by 3, with 111 = 3 × 37.
Therefore, 555 = 3 × 5 × 37, and each of 3, 5 and 37 is a prime number.
The possible ways to write 555 as the product of two integers are 1 × 555, 3 × 185, 5 × 111,
and 15 × 37. (In each of these products, two or more of the prime factors have been combined
to give a composite divisor.)
The only pair where both members are two-digit positive integers is 37 and 15, so x + y is
37 + 15 = 52.
Answer: (A)

16. Solution 1
Since RP S is a straight line, then ∠SP Q = 180◦ − ∠RP Q = 180◦ − 3y ◦ .
Using the angles in 4P QS, we have ∠P QS + ∠QSP + ∠SP Q = 180◦ .
Thus, x◦ + 2y ◦ + (180◦ − 3y ◦ ) = 180◦ or x − y + 180 = 180 or x = y.
(We could have instead looked at ∠RP Q as being an external angle to 4SP Q.)
Since x = y, then ∠RQS = 2y ◦ .
Since RP = P Q, then ∠P RQ = ∠P QR = x◦ = y ◦ .

S
2y
P
3y
y
y y
R Q

Therefore, the angles of 4RQS are y ◦ , 2y ◦ and 2y ◦ .

Thus, y ◦ + 2y ◦ + 2y ◦ = 180◦ or 5y = 180 or y = 36.
Therefore, ∠RP Q = 3y ◦ = 3(36)◦ = 108◦ .

Solution 2
Since RP = P Q, then ∠P RQ = ∠P QR = x◦ .
Looking at the sum of the angles in 4RP Q and 4RSQ, we have x◦ + 3y ◦ + x◦ = 180◦
(or 2x + 3y = 180) and x◦ + 2y ◦ + 2x◦ = 180 (or 3x + 2y = 180).
Adding these two equations gives 5x + 5y = 360 or x + y = 51 (360) = 72.
Thus, 2x + 2y = 2(72) = 144, so 2x + 3y = 180, gives y = 180 − (2x + 2y) = 180 − 144 = 36.
Therfore, ∠RP Q = 3y ◦ = 3(36)◦ = 108◦ .
Answer: (B)
p
17. The maximum possible value of is when p is as large as possible (that is, 10) and q is as small
q
p 10 5
as possible (that is, 12). Thus, the maximum possible value of is = .
q 12 6
p
The minimum possible value of is when p is as small as possible (that is, 3) and q is as large
q
p 3 1
as possible (that is, 21). Thus, the maximum possible value of is = .
q 21 7
5 1 35 6 29
The difference between these two values is − = − = .
6 7 42 42 42
Answer: (A)
2008 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

18. Suppose that there are x $1 bills.

Thus, there are (x + 11) $2 bills and (x − 18) $3 bills.
Since the total value of the money is $100, then

1(x) + 2(x + 11) + 3(x − 18) = 100

x + 2x + 22 + 3x − 54 = 100
6x − 32 = 100
6x = 132
x = 22

Therefore, there are 22 $1 bills.

Answer: (C)

19. Solution 1
Since 32 of the apples are rotten, 34 of the pears are rotten, and the number of rotten apples and
pears are equal, then we could try 6 rotten pieces of each type of fruit. (We choose 6 as it is a
multiple of the numerator of each fraction.)
If there are 6 rotten apples, then the total number of apples is 23 (6) = 9.
If there are 6 rotten pears, then the total number of pears is 34 (6) = 8.
Therefore, there are 9 + 8 = 17 pieces of fruit in total, of which 6 + 6 = 12 are rotten.
12
Thus, 17 of the fruit are rotten.

Solution 2
Suppose there are a apples and p pears in total.
Since the number of rotten apples and rotten pears are equal, then 23 a = 34 p, so p = 43 ( 23 a) = 89 a.
Therefore, the total number of pieces of fruit is a + p = a + 89 a = 17 9
a.
Also, the total number of rotten fruit is 2( 23 a) = 43 a, so the fraction of the total amount of fruit
4
a
3
that is rotten is 17 = 34 · 17
9 12
= 17 .
9
a
Answer: (D)

20. Since ∠QRP = 120◦ and QRS is a straight line, then ∠P RS = 180◦ − 120◦ = 60◦ .
Since ∠RP S = 90◦ , then 4SRP is a 30◦ -60◦ -90◦ triangle.
Therefore, RS = 2P R = 2(12) = 24.
Drop a perpendicular from P to T on RS.

12
120 60
Q 8 R T S

Since ∠P RT = 60√◦ and ∠P T √R = 90◦ , then 4P RT is also a 30◦ -60◦ -90◦ triangle.
Therefore, P T = 23 P R = 6 3.
Consider 4QP S. We √ may consider QS
√ as its base with height P T .
Thus, its area is 21 (6 3)(8 + 24) = 96 3.
Answer: (E)
2008 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

21. Since the radius of the inner circular pane is 20 cm, then its area is π202 = 400π cm2 .
Therefore, the area of each of the outer panes is also 400π cm2 , so the total area of the circular
window is 9(400) = 3600π cm2 .
If the radius of the larger circle is R, then πR2 = 3600π, so R2 = 3600 or R = 60, since R > 0.
Since each of the outer lines can be extended to form a radius by joining its inner end to the
centre using a radius of the inner circle, then the radius of the larger circle is x + 20 = 60, so
x = 40 = 40.0, to the nearest tenth.
(It was not actually necessary to calculate the area of the circles. Since the large circle is √
formed
from 9 pieces of equal area, its area is 9 times that of the inner circle. Thus, its radius is 9 = 3
times that of the inner circle.)
Answer: (A)

22. There are 52 terms in the sum: the number 1, the number 11, and the 50 numbers starting
with a 1, ending with a 1 and with 1 to 50 zeroes in between. The longest of these terms thus
has 52 digits (50 zeroes and 2 ones).
When the units digits of all 52 terms are added up, their sum is 52, so the units digit of N is
2, and a 5 carried to the tens digit.
In the tens digit, there is only 1 non-zero digit: the 1 in the number 11. Therefore, using the
carry, the tens digit of N is 1 + 5 = 6.
In each of positions 3 to 52 from the right-hand end, there is only one non-zero digit, which is
a 1.
Therefore, the digit in each of these positions in N is also a 1. (There is no carrying to worry
about.)
Therefore, N = 11 · · · 1162, where N has 52 − 2 = 50 digits equal to 1.
This tells us that the sum of the digits of N is 50(1) + 6 + 2 = 58.
Answer: (D)

23. The number 43 equals 64.

To express 64 as ab where a and b are integers, we can use 641 , 82 , 43 , 26 , (−2)6 , and (−8)2 .
We make a table to evaluate x and y:
y−1 x+y y x
64 1 65 −64
8 2 9 −7
4 3 5 −2
2 6 3 3
−2 6 −1 7
−8 2 −7 9
Therefore, there are 6 possible values for x.
Answer: (E)

24. Suppose the cube rolls first over edge AB.

Consider the cube as being made up of two half-cubes (each of dimensions 1 × 1 × 12 ) glued
together at square P QM N . (Note that P QM N lies on a vertical plane.)
Since dot D is in the centre of the top face, then D lies on square P QM N .
2008 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

P D Q

B
M
N
A

Since the cube always rolls in a direction perpendicular to AB, then the dot will always roll in
the plane of square P QM N .

P D Q

N M

So we can convert the original three-dimensional problem to a two-dimensional problem of this

square slice rolling.
Square M N P Q has side length 1 and DQ = 12 , since D was in the centre of √the top face.
By the Pythagorean Theorem, M D2 = DQ2 + QM 2 = 14 + 1 = 45 , so M D = 25 since M D > 0.
In the first segment of the roll, we start with N M on the table and roll, keeping M stationary,
until Q lands on the table.

P
N

M Q

√
This is a rotation of 90◦ around M . Since D is at a constant distance of √ 2
5
from M , then
◦ 1 ◦ 5
D rotates
√
along
√
one-quarter (since 90 is 4 of 360 ) of a circle of radius 2 , for a distance of
1 5 5
4
(2π 2 ) = 4 π.
In the next segment of the roll, Q stays stationary and the square rolls until P touches the
table.

M N

Q D P
2008 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

Again, the roll is one of 90◦ . Note that QD = 12 . Thus, again D moves through one-quarter of
a circle this time of radius 21 , for a distance of 14 (2π 12 ) = 14 π.
Through the next segment of the roll, P stays stationary and the square rolls until N touches
the table. This is similar to the second segment, so D rolls through a distance of 41 π.
Through the next segment of the roll, N stays stationary and the square rolls until M touches
the table. This will be the end of the process as the square will end up in its√ initial position.
This segment is similar to the first segment so D rolls through a distance √
of 45 π. √
5 1 1 5
Therefore, the total distance through which the dot travels is 4
π + 4
π + 4
π + 4
π
√ !
1+ 5
or π.
2
Answer: (E)

25. There are 7! = 7(6)(5)(4)(3)(2)(1) possible arrangements of the 7 numbers {1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13, 14}.
To determine the average value of
(a − b)2 + (b − c)2 + (c − d)2 + (d − e)2 + (e − f )2 + (f − g)2 (∗)
we determine the sum of the values of this expression over all possible arrangements, and then
divide by the number of arrangements.
Let x and y be two of these seven numbers.
In how many of these arrangements are x and y adjacent?
Treat x and y as a single unit (x y) with 5 other numbers to be placed on either side of, but
not between, x y.
This gives 6 “numbers” (x y and 5 others) to arrange, which can be done in 6(5)(4)(3)(2)(1)
or 6! ways.
But y could be followed by x, so there are 2(6!) arrangements with x and y adjacent, since
there are the same number of arrangements with x followed by y as there are with y followed
by x.
Therefore, when we add up the values of (*) over all possible arrangements, the term (x − y)2
(which is equal to (y − x)2 ) will occur 2(6!) times.
This is true for any pair x and y.
Therefore, the average value is 2(6!) times the sum of (x − y)2 over all choices of x and y with
x < y, divided by 7!.
The sum of all possible values of (x − y)2 is
12 + 22 + 102 + 112 + 122 + 132
+ 12 + 92 + 102 + 112 + 122
+ 82 + 92 + 102 + 112
+ 12 + 22 + 32
+ 12 + 22
+ 12 = 1372
(Here, we have paired 1 with each of the 6 larger numbers, then 2 with each of the 5 larger
numbers, and so on. We only need to pair each number with all of the larger numbers because
we have accounted for the reversed pairs in our method above.)
2(6!)(1372) 2(1372)
Therefore, the average value is = = 392.
7! 7
Answer: (D)
Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of the Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

2007 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Tuesday, February 20, 2007

Solutions

2006
c Waterloo Mathematics Foundation
2007 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2

1. Calculating, 8 + 2(32 ) = 8 + 2(9) = 8 + 18 = 26.

Answer: (A)
7 + 21 28 1
2. Calculating, = = .
14 + 42 56 2
Answer: (C)

3. If 3x − 2x + x = 3 − 2 + 1, then 2x = 2 or x = 1.
Answer: (B)

4. In 3 hours, Leona earns $24.75, so she makes $24.75 ÷ 3 = $8.25 per hour.
Therefore, in a 5 hour shift, Leona earns 5 × $8.25 = $41.25.
Answer: (E)

5. The value of 41 of 100 is 14 × 100 = 25.

We evaluate each of the five given possibilities:
(A): 20% of 200 is 0.2(200) = 40
(B): 10% of 250 is 0.1(250) = 25
(C): 15% of 100 is 15
(D): 25% of 50 is 0.25(50) = 12.5
(E): 5% of 300 is 0.05(300) = 15
Therefore, the correct answer is (B).
(Note that we did not have to evaluate (C), (D) and (E) after seeing that (B) was correct.)
Answer: (B)

6. Evaluating each of the five given possibilities with a = 2 and b = 5,

a 2 b 5
(A) = (B) = (C) a − b = 2 − 5 = −3 (D) b − a = 5 − 2 = 3 (E) 12 a = 12 (2) = 1
b 5 a 2
The largest of these five is 3, or (D).
Answer: (D)
6 + 9 + 18 33
7. The mean of 6, 9 and 18 is = = 11.
3 3
Since the mean of 12 and y is thus 11, then the sum of 12 and y is 2(11) = 22, so y = 10.
Answer: (C)

8. In 4ABC, ∠ABC = ∠BAC, so AC = BC.

In 4BCD, ∠CBD = ∠CDB, so CD = BC.
Since the perimeter of 4CBD is 19 and BD = 7, then 7 + BC + CD = 19 or 2(BC) = 12 or
BC = 6.
Since the perimeter of 4ABC is 20, BC = 6, and AC = BC, then AB + 6 + 6 = 20 or AB = 8.
Answer: (D)

9. Solution 1
Since the area of rectangle ABCD is 40 and AB = 8, then BC = 5.
Therefore, M BCN is a trapezoid with height 5 and parallel bases of lengths 4 and 2, so has
area 12 (5)(4 + 2) = 15.

Solution 2
Since the area of rectangle ABCD is 40 and AB = 8, then BC = 5.
Draw a line from N to AB parallel to BC (and so perpendicular to AB) meeting AB at P .
2007 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

A 4 M P B

D N 2 C

This line divides M BCN into a rectangle P BCN of width 2 and height 5, and a triangle M P N
with base M P of length 2 and height P N of height 5.
The area of M BCN is sum of the areas of these two parts, or 2(5) + 21 (2)(5) = 10 + 5 = 15.
Answer: (A)

10. Solution 1
To get from one term to the next, we double and add 4.
Since the first term is x, the second term is 2x + 4.
Since the second term is 2x + 4, the third term is 2(2x + 4) + 4 = 4x + 12.
Since the third term equals 52, then 4x + 12 = 52 so 4x = 40 or x = 10.

Solution 2
To get from one term to the next, we double and add 4.
Therefore, to get from one term to the previous term, we subtract 4 and divide by 2.
Since the third term is 52, then subtracting 4 gives 48 and dividing by 2 gives 24, which is the
second term.
Since the second term is 24, then subtracting 4 gives 20 and dividing by 2 gives 10, which is
the first term.
Thus, x = 10.
Answer: (D)

11. Suppose that Ivan ran a distance of x km on Monday.

Then on Tuesday, he ran 2x km, on Wednesday, he ran x km, on Thursday, he ran 12 x km, and
on Friday he ran x km.
The shortest of any of his runs was on Thursday, so 21 x = 5 or x = 10.
Therefore, his runs were 10 km, 20 km, 10 km, 5 km, and 10 km, for a total of 55 km.
Answer: (A)

12. When (0, 0) is reflected in the line x = 1, the image is (2, 0).

(2, 4)

y=2
x
(0, 0) (2, 0)
x=1

When (2, 0) is reflected in the line y = 2, the image is (2, 4).

Answer: (E)
2007 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

13. Solution 1
Since the ratio AN : AC equals the ratio AP : P B (each is 1 : 2) and ∠A is common in 4AP N
and 4ABC, then 4AP N is similar to 4ABC.
Since the ratio of side lengths between these two triangles is 1 : 2, then the ratio of areas is
1 : 22 = 1 : 4.
Thus, the area of 4ABC is 4 × 2 = 8 cm2 .

Solution 2
Since the ratio AN : AC equals the ratio AP : P B (each is 1 : 2) and ∠A is common in 4AP N
and 4ABC, then 4AP N is similar to 4ABC.
Therefore, ∠AN P = ∠ACB = 90◦ .
Similarly, 4P M B is similar to 4ACB, and ∠P M B = ∠ACB = 90◦ .
Therefore, AN = N C = P M = 21 AC and N P = CM = M B = 21 CB.
Thus, 4P M B is congruent to 4AN P , so has area 2 cm2 .
Rectangle N P M C has the same width and height as 4AN P , so has double the area of 4AP N
or 4 cm2 .
Thus, the area of 4ACB is 2 + 4 + 2 = 8 cm2 .

Solution 3
Join C to P .
Since CP is the diagonal of the rectangle, then 4CP N and 4P CM are congruent, so have
equal areas.
Since AN = N C and 4P N A and 4P N C have equal height (P N ), then the areas of 4P N A
and 4P N C are equal.
Similarly, the areas of 4P M C and 4P M B are equal.
In summary, the areas of the four small triangles are equal.
Since the area of 4AP N is 2 cm2 , then the total area of 4ABC is 8 cm2 .
Answer: (A)
3 5 6 5 11
14. Using a common denonimator, + = + = .
x − 3 2x − 6 2x − 6 2x − 6 2x − 6
11 11
Therefore, = , so 2x − 6 = 2.
2x − 6 2 Answer: (A)
15. Since 4ABC and 4P QR are equilateral, then ∠ABC = ∠ACB = ∠RP Q = 60◦ .
Therefore, ∠Y BP = 180◦ − 65◦ − 60◦ = 55◦ and ∠Y P B = 180◦ − 75◦ − 60◦ = 45◦ .
In 4BY P , we have ∠BY P = 180◦ − ∠Y BP − ∠Y P B = 180◦ − 55◦ − 45◦ = 80◦ .
Since ∠XY C = ∠Y BP , then ∠XY C = 80◦ .
In 4CXY , we have ∠CXY = 180◦ − 60◦ − 80◦ = 40◦ .
Answer: (C)
16. Since 60% of the 10 000 students are in Arts, 6000 students are in Arts, and so 4000 students
are in Science.
Since 40% of the Science students are male, then 0.4(4000) = 1600 of the Science students are
male.
Since half of the total of 10 000 students are male, then 5000−1600 = 3400 of the male students
are in Arts.
Since there are 6000 students in Arts, then 6000 − 3400 = 2600 of the Arts students are female,
2600
or × 100% ≈ 43.33% of the Arts students are female.
6000 Answer: (E)
2007 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

17. First, we note that no matter how many Heroes are present, all four would always reply “Hero”
when asked “Are you a Hero or a Villain?”. (This is because Heroes will tell the truth and
answer “Hero” and Villains will lie and answer “Hero”.)
When each is asked “Is the person on your right a Hero or a Villain?”, all four reply “Villain”,
so any Hero that is at the table must have a Villain on his right (or he would have answered
“Hero”) and any Villain at the table must have a Hero on his right (or he would have had a
Villain on his right and answered “Hero”).
In other words, Heroes and Villains must alternate around the table, so there are 2 Heroes and
2 Villains.
(It is worth checking that when 2 Heroes and 2 Villains sit in alternate seats, the answers are
indeed as claimed.)
Answer: (C)

18. Solution 1
Suppose there are x balls in total in the bag.
Then there are 13 x red balls and 27 x blue balls.
This tells us that the number of green balls is x − 13 x − 27 x = 21 21
x− 7
21
x − 6
21
x = 8
21
x.
2
But we know that the
number8 of green balls is 2 × 7 x − 8.
8
Thus, 21 x = 2 × 72 x − 8 or 21 x = 1221
x − 8 or 214
x = 8 or x = 42.
8 8
Since x = 42, the number of green balls is 21 x = 21 (42) = 16.

Solution 2
Suppose that there were 21 balls in the bag. (We choose 21 since there are fractions with
denominator 3 and fractions with denominator 7 in the problem.)
Since 13 of the balls are red, then 7 balls are red.
Since 27 of the balls are blue, then 6 balls are red.
Thus, there are 21 − 7 − 6 = 8 green balls in the bag. However, this is only 4 less than twice
the number of blue balls, so there cannot be 21 balls in the bag.
To get from “4 less” to “8 less”, we try doubling the number of balls in the bag.
If there are 42 balls in the bag, then 14 are red and 12 are blue, so 16 are green, which is 8 less
than twice the number of blue balls.
Therefore, the number of green balls is 16.
Answer: (B)

19. We draw a horizontal line through B (meeting the y-axis at P ) and a vertical line through C
(meeting the x-axis at Q). Suppose the point of intersection of these two lines is R.

B R
P
C
A
x
O D Q

We know that P has coordinates (0, 3) (since B has y-coordinate 3) and Q has coordinates
(5, 0) (since C has x-coordinate 5), so R has coordinates (5, 3).
Using the given coordinates, OA = 1, AP = 2, P B = 1, BR = 4, RC = 1, CQ = 2, QD = 1,
2007 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

and DO = 4.
The area of ABCD equals the area of P RQO minus the areas of triangles AP B, BRC, CQD,
and DOA.
P RQO is a rectangle, so has area 3 × 5 = 15.
Triangles AP B and CQD have bases P B and QD of length 1 and heights AP and CQ of
length 2, so each has area 21 (1)(2) = 1.
Triangles BRC and DOA have bases BR and DO of length 4 and heights CR and AO of
length 1, so each has area 21 (4)(1) = 2.
Thus, the area of ABCD is 15 − 1 − 1 − 2 − 2 = 9.
(Alternatively, we could notice that ABCD is a parallelogram. Therefore, if we draw the
diagonal AC, the area is split into two equal pieces. Dropping a perpendicular from C to Q on
the x-axis produces a trapezoid ACQO from which only two triangles need to be removed to
determine half of the area of ABCD.)
Answer: (A)

34015
20. Since 3(n2007 ) < 34015 , then n2007 < = 34014 .
3
But 34014 = (32 )2007 = 92007 so we have n2007 < 92007 .
Therefore, n < 9 and so the largest integer n that works is n = 8.
Answer: (D)

21. Since T has played 5 matches so far, then T has played P , Q, R, S, and W (ie. each of the
other teams).
Since P has played only 1 match and has played T , then P has played no more matches.
Since S has played 4 matches and has not played P , then S must have played each of the
remaining 4 teams (namely, Q, R, T , and W ).
Since Q has played only 2 matches and has played T and S, then Q has played no more matches.
Since R has played 3 matches, has played T and S but has not played P or Q, then R must
have played W as well.
Therefore, W has played T , S and R, or 3 matches in total. (Since we have considered all
possible opponents for W , then W has played no more matches.)
Answer: (C)

22. Suppose the first integer in the list is n.

Then the remaining four integers are n + 3, n + 6, n + 9, and n + 12.
n + 12 n 12 12
Since the fifth number is a multiple of the first, then = + =1+ is an integer.
n n n n
12 12
Since 1 + is an integer, then is an integer, or n is a positive divisor of 12.
n n
The positive divisors of 12 are 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 12, so there are 6 possible values of n and so 6
different lists.
(We can check that each of 6 values of n produces a different list, each of which has the required
property.)
Answer: (D)

23. Since the same region (AEHD) is unshaded inside each rectangle, then the two shaded regions
have equal area, since the rectangles have equal area.
Thus, the total shaded area is twice the area of AEHCB.
Draw a horizontal line through E, meeting AB at X and HC at Y .
2007 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7
G

A D
F
H

X E
Y
B C
√ √
We know ∠BAE = 30◦ and AE = 12, so EX = 21 AE = 6 and AX = 3EX = 6 3, by the
ratios in a 30◦ -60◦ -90◦ triangle. √ √
Thus, the area of 4EXA is 21 (6)(6 3) = 18 3.
√ √
Since AB = 12 and AX = 6 3, then XB = 12√ − 6 3. √
Therefore,√rectangle BXY C has height 12 − 6 3 and width 18, so has area 18(12 − 6 3) or
216 − 108 3.
Since XY = BC = 18 and EX = 6, then EY = 12.
Since ∠AEB = 60◦ and ∠AEH = 90◦ , then ∠HEY = 30◦ .
12 √
Since EY = 12 and ∠HEY = 30◦ , then HY = √ = 4 3.
√ √ 3
Thus, 4EY H has area 21 (12)(4 3) = 24 3.
√ √ √ √
So the total area of AEHCB is 18 3 + (216 − √108 3) + 24 3√= 216 − 66 3.
Therefore, the total shaded area is 2(216 − 66 3) = 432 − 132 3 ≈ 203.369.
Answer: (C)

24. To form such a collection of integers, our strategy is to include some integers larger than 1
whose product is 2007 and then add enough 1s to the collection to make the sum 2007.
In order to make n as small as possible, we would like to include as few 1s as possible, and so
make the sum of the initial integers (whose product is 2007) as large as possible.
Since we would like to consider integers whose product is 2007, we should find the divisors of
2007.
We see that 2007 = 3 × 669 = 3 × 3 × 223, and 223 is a prime number.
So the collections of positive integers larger than 1 whose product is 2007 are {3, 669}, {3, 3, 223},
and {9, 223}.
The collection with the largest sum is {3, 669} whose sum is 672. To get a sum of 2007, we must
add 2007 − 672 = 1335 copies of 1, which means that we are using 1335 + 2 = 1337 integers.
Therefore, the smallest value of n is 1337.
Answer: (B)

25. Since ∠W AX = 90◦ regardless of the position of square ABCD, then A always lies on the
semi-circle with diameter W X.
The centre of this semi-circle is the midpoint, M , of W X.
To get from P to M , we must go up 4 units and to the left 3 units (since W X = 2), so
P M 2 = 32 + 42 = 25 or P M = 5.
Since the semi-circle with diameter W X has diameter 2, it has radius 1, so AM = 1.
So we have AM = 1 and M P = 5.
2007 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8
A
W X
M

Therefore, the maximum possible length of AP is 5 + 1 = 6, when A, M , P lie on a straight

line.
Answer: (E)
Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of the Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

2006 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Wednesday, February 22, 2006

Solutions

2005
c Waterloo Mathematics Foundation
2006 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2

1. Calculating, 12 + 21 × 21 = 1 1 2 1
= 34 .


2
+ 4
= 4
+ 4
Answer: (E)
√ √
2. Calculating, ( 100 − 36)2 = (10 − 6)2 = 42 = 16.
Answer: (A)

3. We determine the value of this expression, by calculating each difference first, so

43 − 41 + 39 − 37 + 35 − 33 + 31 − 29 = 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 = 8
Answer: (A)

4. When a = −3 and b = 2, we have a(b − 3) = (−3)(2 − 3) = (−3)(−1) = 3.

Answer: (C)

5. To determine the number by which we multiply the third term to obtain the fourth term, we
0.02
can divide the second term by the first term. Doing this, we get = 20.
0.001
(We can check that this is also equal to the third term divided by the second term.)
Therefore, the fourth term is 20(0.4) = 8.
Answer: (B)

6. The base of 4ABC (that is, BC) has length 20.

Since the area of 4ABC is 240, then 240 = 21 bh = 12 (20)h = 10h, so h = 24.
Since the height of 4ABC (from base BC) is 24, then the y-coordinate of A is 24.
Answer: (D)

7. Solution 1
6 6
Rewriting 23 as 64 , we see that = and so comparing denominators, x + 1 = 4 or x = 3.
x+1 4
Solution 2
6 3
Since = , then cross-multiplying, we obtain 2(6) = 3(x + 1) or 12 = 3x + 3 or 3x = 9
x+1 2
or x = 3.

Solution 3
x+1 2 2
Inverting both sides of the equation, we get = or x + 1 = 6 × 3
= 4.
6 3
Thus, x = 3.
Answer: (C)

8. Solution 1
Since W XY Z is a rectangle, then ∠ZW X = ∠W XY = 90◦ .
Therefore, ∠AW X = 180◦ − ∠ZW X − ∠BW Z = 180◦ − 90◦ − 22◦ = 68◦ .
Also, ∠AXW = 180◦ − ∠W XY − ∠CXY = 180◦ − 90◦ − 65◦ = 25◦ .
So, looking at 4AW X, ∠BAC = ∠W AX = 180◦ −∠AW X −∠AXW = 180◦ −68◦ −25◦ = 87◦ .

Solution 2
Since W XY Z is a rectangle, then ∠W ZY = ∠XY Z = 90◦ , so 4W ZB and 4XY C are both
right-angled.
Thus, ∠W BZ = 90◦ −∠BW Z = 90◦ −22◦ = 68◦ and ∠XCY = 90◦ −∠CXY = 90◦ −65◦ = 25◦ .
Looking at 4ABC, ∠BAC = 180◦ − ∠ABC − ∠ACB = 180◦ − 68◦ − 25◦ = 87◦ .
2006 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

Solution 3
Draw a perpendicular from A to H on BC.

W P X

B C
Z H Y

Then W Z, AH and XY are all parallel since each is perpendicular to BC, so

∠BAH = ∠BW Z = 22◦ and ∠CAH = ∠CXY = ∠65◦ .
Therefore, ∠BAC = 22◦ + 65◦ = 87◦ .
Answer: (A)

9. Since the perimeter of the triangle is 36, then 7 + (x + 4) + (2x + 1) = 36 or 3x + 12 = 36 or

3x = 24 or x = 8.
Thus, the lengths of the three sides of the triangle are 7, 8 + 4 = 12 and 2(8) + 1 = 17, of which
the longest is 17.
Answer: (C)

10. From the given information, the total amount of marks obtained by the class is
20(80) + 8(90) + 2(100) = 2520.
2520
Therefore, the class average is = 84.
30
Answer: (B)

11. Solution 1
Since the side lengths of 4DEF are 50% larger than the side lengths of 4ABC, then these
new side lengths are 32 (6) = 9, 32 (8) = 12, and 23 (10) = 15.
We know that 4DEF is right-angled, and this right angle must occur between the sides of
length 9 and 12 (since it is opposite the longest side).
Therefore, the area of 4DEF is 12 (9)(12) = 54.

Solution 2
The area of 4ABC is 21 (6)(8) = 24.
3
Since the side lengths of 4ABC are each multiplied by 2
to get the side lengths in 4DEF ,

2
then the area of 4DEF is 32 times that of 4ABC.

2
Therefore, the area of 4DEF is 32 (24) = 94 (24) = 54.
Answer: (E)

12. Solution 1
Since Jim drives from 7:45 p.m. to 9:30 p.m., then Jim drives for 1 hour and 45 minutes
or 1 34 hours or 74 hours.
84 4
Since Jim drives 84 km in 74 hours at a constant speed, then this speed is 7 = 84× = 48 km/h.
4
7
2006 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

Solution 2
Since Jim drives from 7:45 p.m. to 9:30 p.m., then Jim drives for 1 hour and 45 minutes, which
is the same as 7 quarters of an hour.
Since he drives 84 km in 7 quarters of an hour, he drives 12 km in 1 quarter of an hour, or
48 km in one hour, so his speed is 48 km/h.
Answer: (E)

13. Since x + 1 = y − 8 and x = 2y, then 2y + 1 = y − 8 or y = −9.

Thus, x = 2(−9) = −18, and so x + y = (−9) + (−18) = −27.
Answer: (D)

14. We check the value of each of the five possibilities when x = −3:
(−3)2 − 3 = 6 (−3 − 3)2 = 36 (−3)2 = 9 (−3 + 3)2 = 0 (−3)2 + 3 = 12
So the smallest value is that of (x + 3)2 .
Answer: (D)

15. Solution 1
Since the units digit of the product 39P × Q3 comes from multiplying P × 3, and this units
digit is a 1, then P must be the digit 7.
32 951
Therefore, 397 × Q3 = 32 951 so Q3 = = 83, so Q = 8.
397
Thus, P + Q = 15.

Solution 2
Since the units digit of the product 39P × Q3 comes from multiplying P × 3, and this units
digit is a 1, then P must be the digit 7.
Therefore, the product becomes
397
× Q3
1191

32951
Therefore, the product Q × 7 must have a units digit of 6 (where the  is) in order to get the
tens digit of 5 in the product. Since Q × 7 has a units digit of 6, then Q = 8.
Thus, P + Q = 15.
Answer: (C)

16. Let c cents be the cost of downloading 1 song in 2005.

Then the cost of downloading 1 song in 2004 was c + 32 cents.
The total cost in 2005 was 360c and the total cost in 2004 was 200(c + 32).
Thus, 360c = 200(c + 32) or 160c = 6400 or c = 40 cents, and so the total cost in 2005 was
360(40) = 14400 cents, or $144.00.
Answer: (A)

17. Since w is a positive integer, then w 6= 0, so w3 = 9w implies w2 = 9 (we can divide by w since
it is non-zero).
Since w2 = 9, then w = 3 (because we know w > 0).
Thus, w5 = 35 = 243.
Answer: (B)
2006 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

18. Suppose the side lengths of the triangle are a, b, and c, with c the hypotenuse.
Then c2 = a2 + b2 by the Pythagorean Theorem.
We are told that a2 + b2 + c2 = 1800.
Since a2 + b2 = c2 , then c2 + c2 = 1800 or 2c2 = 1800 or c2 = 900 or c = 30 (since the side
lengths are positive).
So the hypotenuse has length 30.
Answer: (D)

19. Solution 1
Of the original 200 candies, since 90% (or 180 candies) are black, then 10% (or 20 candies) are
gold.
Since Yehudi eats only black candies, the number of gold candies does not change.
After Yehudi has eaten some of the black candies, the 20 gold candies then represent 20% of
the total number of candies, so there must be 100 candies in total remaining.
Thus, Yehudi ate 200 − 100 = 100 black candies.

Solution 2
Of the original 200 candies, 90% or 180 candies are black.
Suppose that Yehudi eats b black candies.
This will leave 200 − b candies in total, of which 180 − b are black.
180 − b 4
Since 80% of the remaining candies are black, then = or 5(180 − b) = 4(200 − b) or
200 − b 5
900 − 5b = 800 − 4b or b = 100.
Thus, Yehudi ate 100 black candies.
Answer: (D)

20. Solution 1
The y-intercept of the line y = − 34 x + 9 is y = 9, so Q has coordinates (0, 9).
To determine the x-intercept, we set y = 0, and so obtain 0 = − 43 x + 9 or 34 x = 9 or x = 12.
Thus, P has coordinates (12, 0).
Therefore, the area of 4P OQ is 12 (12)(9) = 54, since 4P OQ is right-angled at O.
Since we would like the area of 4T OP to be 31 that of 4P OQ, then the area of 4T OP should
be 18.
If T has coordinates (r, s), then 4T OP has base T O of length 12 and height s, so 12 (12)(s) = 18
or 6s = 18 or s = 3.
Since T lies on the line, then s = − 43 r + 9 or 3 = − 34 r + 9 or 43 r = 6 or r = 8.
Thus, r + s = 8 + 3 = 11.

Solution 2
The y-intercept of the line y = − 34 x + 9 is y = 9, so Q has coordinates (0, 9).
To determine the x-intercept, we set y = 0, and so obtain 0 = − 43 x + 9 or 34 x = 9 or x = 12.
Thus, P has coordinates (12, 0).
The areas of triangles are proportional to their heights if the bases are equal.
Since the area of 4P OQ is 3 times the area of 4T OP , then the height of 4T OP is 13 that of
4P OQ.
Thus, T is 13 along P Q from P towards Q.
Since P has
coordinates (12, 0) and Q has coordinates (0, 9), then T has coordinates
2
3
(12), 31 (9) = (8, 3).
Thus, r + s = 8 + 3 = 11.
Answer: (C)
2006 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

21. Solution 1
1 25 6 1 1
We know p + = =1+ = 1 + 19 = 1 + .
1 19 19 1
q+ 6 3+
r 6
Therefore, comparing the two fractions, p = 1, q = 3 and r = 6.

Solution 2
1 1
Since p, q and r are positive integers, then q + is at least 1, so is between 0 and 1.
r 1
q+
r
1 25
Since p + is equal to which is between 1 and 2, then p must be equal to 1.
1 19
q+
r
1 25 6 1 19
Therefore, = −1= or q + = .
1 19 19 r 6
q+
r
1 19
Since r is a positive integer, then is between 0 and 1, so since is between 3 and 4, then
r 6
q = 3.
(We are not asked to determine what the value of r, but we can check that r = 6.)
Answer: (C)

22. Suppose that n is a multiplicatively perfect positive integer.

If n can be written as n = a × b with a and b different positive integers, neither equal to 1,
then n cannot have any other proper divisors other than 1, since n = 1 × a × b, so any other
proper divisors would make this product too large.
So n can only have 2 proper divisors other than 1.
This tells us that n cannot have more than two distinct prime divisors (otherwise, it would
certainly have three proper divisors larger than one).
If n has 2 distinct prime divisors, p and q, then neither can occur in the prime factorization
of n more than once, otherwise p2 or q 2 would be another proper divisor of n. So if n has 2
distinct prime divisors, then n = pq (which indeed has only three proper divisors: 1, p and q).
The integers between 2 and 30 which are of the form n = pq are 6, 10, 14, 15, 21, 22, and 26,
or a total of 7 integers.
If n has only 1 prime factor, p, then n = p3 in order to have exactly 3 proper divisors (namely,
1, p and p2 ). Higher powers of p will have more than 3 proper divisors and lower powers of
p will have fewer than 3 proper divisors. (For example, p2 has 2 proper divisors and p5 has 5
proper divisors.)
The integers between 2 and 30 which are of the form n = p3 are 8 and 27, or 2 integers in total.
Therefore, there are 9 multiplicatively perfect numbers between 2 and 30.
Answer: (A)

23. First, we do some experimentation.

Since Celine moves small boxes faster and Quincy moves large boxes faster, then suppose Celine
moves all 16 small boxes (taking 32 minutes) and Quincy moves all 10 large boxes (taking 50
minutes). Thus, they would finish in 50 minutes.
We could transfer two large boxes from Quincy to Celine, who now moves 16 small and 2 large
boxes, taking 44 minutes. Quincy would then move 8 large boxes, taking 40 minutes. So they
would finish in 44 minutes. (So (E) is not the answer.)
If we transfer one small box from Celine to Quincy, then Quincy moves 8 large boxes and 1
small box, taking 43 minutes, and Celine moves 15 small and 2 large boxes, taking 42 minutes.
2006 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

So they would finish in 43 minutes. (So (D) is not the answer.)

Why is 43 minutes the smallest possible total time?

Suppose that it took them at most 42 minutes to finish the job. Then the total amount of
working time would be at most 84 minutes.
Suppose that Celine moves x small boxes and y large boxes, which would take 2x + 6y minutes.
Then Quincy moves 16 − x small boxes and 10 − y large boxes, which would take
3(16 − x) + 5(10 − y) = 98 − 3x − 5y minutes.
Since the total working time is at most 84 minutes, then (2x + 6y) + (98 − 3x − 5y) ≤ 84 or
14 ≤ x − y.
Since 0 ≤ x ≤ 16 and 0 ≤ y ≤ 10, then the possible pairs of x and y which satisfy 14 ≤ x − y
are (16, 0), (16, 1), (16, 2), (15, 0), (15, 1), (14, 0), which produce working times as follows:

Celine Celine Celine Quincy Quincy Quincy

x y Small Large Time Small Large Time
16 0 16 0 32 0 10 50
16 1 16 1 38 0 9 45
16 2 16 2 44 0 8 40
15 0 15 0 30 1 10 53
15 1 15 1 36 1 9 48
14 0 14 0 28 2 10 56

In each of these cases, while the total working time is no more than 84 minutes, it takes longer
than 43 minutes for the two of them to finish.
Therefore, it is impossible for them to finish in 42 minutes or less, so the earliest possible
finishing time is 9:43 a.m.
Answer: (C)

24. Let us consider some small values for n.

If n = 1, Anne wins by taking the first toothpick.
If n = 2, Anne must take 1 toothpick (since she cannot take 3 or 4), so Brenda takes 1 toothpick
and wins.
If n = 3 or n = 4, Anne can win by taking all of the toothpicks.
When n = 5, if Anne takes 3 toothpicks to start, then Brenda is left with 2 toothpicks, and so
cannot win, since Anne could not win when starting with 2 toothpicks. So Anne wins.
When n = 6, if Anne takes 4 toothpicks to start, then Anne will win in the same way as in the
n = 5 case. So Anne wins.
When n = 7, if Anne takes 1, 3 or 4 toothpicks, then 6, 4 or 3 toothpicks will be left for
Brenda. But choosing from 6, 4 or 3 toothpicks is a winning position for the first person
choosing (Brenda in this case). So n = 7 is a losing position for Anne, since Brenda can use
Anne’s winning strategy in each case.
In general, Brenda will have a winning strategy for n if n − 1, n − 3 and n − 4 all give Anne a
winning strategy (since if Anne starts with n toothpicks an chooses 1, 3 or 4, then Brenda will
start choosing from n − 1, n − 3 or n − 4 toothpicks).
Anne will have a winning strategy otherwise (since if Anne would lose starting with an initial
position of n − 1, n − 3 or n − 4, then Anne should win starting with an initial position of n
because she can leave Brenda with whichever of n − 1, n − 3 or n − 4 is a losing position for
the first person choosing).
We construct lists of the winning positions for each, adding a new n to Brenda’s list if n − 1,
n − 3 and n − 4 are all in Anne’s list, and to Anne’s list otherwise:
2006 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

A’s winning positions: 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25,
26, 27, 29, 31, 32, 33, 34
B’s winning positions: 2, 7, 9, 14, 16, 21, 23, 28, 30, 35
So of the given possibilities, Brenda has a winning strategy when n = 35.
Answer: (E)

25. In its initial position, suppose the semi-circle touches the bottom line at X, with point P
directly above X on the top line.
Consider when the semi-circle rocks to the right.

Q P Z

X Y

Suppose now the semi-circle touches the bottom line at Y (with O the point on the top of the
semi-circle directly above Y , and Z the point on the top line directly above Y ) and touches the
top line at Q. Note that XY = P Z.
Q is one of the desired points where the semi-circle touches the line above. Because the diagram
is symmetrical, the other point will be the mirror image of Q in line XP . Thus, the required
distance is 2 times the length of P Q.
Now P Q = QZ − P Z = QZ − XY .
Since the semi-circle is tangent to the bottom line, Y O is perpendicular to the bottom line,
and O lies on a diameter, then O is the centre of the circle, so OY = OQ = 8 cm, since both
are radii (or since the centre always lies on a line parallel to the bottom line and a distance of
the radius away).
Also, OZ = 4 cm, since the distance between the two lines is 12 cm
By the Pythagorean Theorem (since ∠QZO = 90◦ ), then
QZ 2 = QO2 − ZO2 = 82 − 42 = 64 − 16 = 48
√
so QZ = 4 3 cm. √
Also, since QZ : ZO = 3 : 1, then ∠QOZ = 60◦ .
Thus, the angle from QO to the horizontal is 30◦ , so the semi-circle has rocked through an
angle of 30◦ , ie. has rocked through 12 1
of a full revolution (if it was a full circle).
1
Thus, the distance of Y from X is 12 of the circumference of what would be the full circle of
radius 8, or XY = 12 1
(2π(8)) = 43 π cm. (We can think of a wheel turning through 30◦ and the
related horizontal distance through
√ which it travels.)
Thus, P Q = QZ − XY = 4 3 − 34 π cm.
√
Therefore, the required distance double this, or 8 3 − 83 π cm or about 5.4788 cm, which is
closest to 55 mm.
Answer: (A)
Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of the Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

2005 Cayley Contest

(Grade 10)

Wednesday, February 23, 2005

Solutions

2005
c Waterloo Mathematics Foundation
2005 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 2

1. Simplifying, a + 1 + a − 2 + a + 3 + a − 4 = a + a + a + a + 1 − 2 + 3 − 4 = 4a − 2.
Answer: (C)

2. Cancelling common factors in the numerators and denominators,

           
4 5 6 7 8 4 65 66 67 68 4
= =
5 6 7 8 9 65 66 67 68 9 9
Answer: (A)

3. The largest multiple of 17 less than 70 is 68. Therefore, 70 = 4(17) + 2, so the remainder is 2.
Answer: (D)

3 1
4. Since = , then cross-multiplying, we get 6x = x + 10 or 5x = 10 or x = 2.
x + 10 2x
Answer: (D)

5. Calculating, (52 − 42 )3 = (25 − 16)3 = 93 = 729.

Answer: (E)

6. 8 volunteers who each work 40 hours and each raise $18 per hour will raise 8 × 40 × 18 = $5760.
5760
If 12 volunteers each work 32 hours and raise a total of $5760, then they each raise
12 × 32
or $15 per hour.
Answer: (C)

7. Solution 1
Since the slope is − 23 , then for every 2 units we move to the right along the line, we must move
3 units down.

(0,b)

(8,0)
x
O

To get from (0, b) to (8, 0), we move 8 units right, or 2 units right four times.
Therefore, we must move 3 units down four times, or 12 units down in total.
Therefore, b = 12.

Solution 2
Since the slope of the line is − 32 , then b−0
0−8
= − 32 or − 8b = − 32 or b = 8 × 3
2
= 12.
Answer: (B)
2005 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 3

8. Jack ran a total of 24 km.

Since he ran the first 12 km at 12 km/h, then it took him 1 hour to run the first 12 km.
Since he ran the second 12 km at 6 km/h, then it took him 2 hours to run the second 12 km.
Therefore, his run took a total of 3 hours.
Thus, Jill ran 24 km in 3 hours, so her speed was 8 km/h.
Answer: (A)

9. Solution 1
Since M is the midpoint of BC and CM = 4, then BC = 8.

A B

D N C

Since N is the midpoint of CD and N C = 5, then CD = 10.

Since ABCD is a rectangle, its area is 10 × 8 = 80.
Also, the area of 4N CM is 21 (4)(5) = 10, so the shaded area of the rectangle is the area of the
whole rectangle minus the area of 4N CM , or 70.
70
Thus, the fraction of the rectangle that is shaded is = 0.875, so 87.5% of the area is shaded.
80
Solution 2
The calculation from Solution 1 can also be done more generally.
Suppose BC = 2x and CD = 2y.
Since M is the midpoint of BC, then CM = x.
Since N is the midpoint of CD, then N C = y.
Since ABCD is a rectangle, its area is (2x)(2y) = 4xy.
Also, the area of 4N CM is 21 (N C)(M C) = 21 xy, so the shaded area of the rectangle is the
area of the whole rectangle minus the area of 4N CM , or 4xy − 12 xy = 72 xy.
7
xy 7
Thus, the fraction of the rectangle that is shaded is 2 = = 0.875, so 87.5% of the area is
4xy 8
shaded.
Answer: (D)

10. Solution 1
Since P T and RQ are parallel, then 2x◦ = 128◦ , so x = 64, so ∠T P Q = 64◦ .

P T
xo 2x o

128o
Q R

Since P T and QR are parallel, then ∠T P Q and ∠P QR are supplementary.

Thus, ∠P QR + 64◦ = 180◦ , so ∠P QR = 116◦ .
2005 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 4

Solution 2
Since the two angles at R add to 180◦ , then ∠QRT + 128◦ = 180◦ , so ∠QRT = 52◦ .
Since P T and QR are parallel, then ∠P T R and ∠QRT are supplementary, so 2x◦ + 52◦ = 180◦
or 2x◦ = 128◦ or x = 64.
Therefore, three of the angles of quadrilateral P QRT are 64◦ , 128◦ and 52◦ .
Since the angles in a quadrilateral add to 360◦ , then ∠P QR = 360◦ − 64◦ − 128◦ − 52◦ = 116◦ .
Answer: (A)

11. Solution 1
Matt’s longest kick was 6 metres more than the average.
Thus, the other two kicks must be six metres less than the average when combined (that is,
when we add up the difference between each of these kicks and the average, we get 6).
Since the other two kicks were the same length, then they each must have been 3 metres less
than the average, or 34 metres each.

Solution 2
Since Matt’s three kicks averaged 37 metres, then the sum of the lengths of the three kicks
was 3 × 37 = 111 metres.
Let x be the length of each of the two kicks of unknown length.
Then 43 + 2x = 111 or x = 34.
Answer: (D)

12. We first determine where the lines y = −2x + 8 and y = 21 x − 2 cross the line x = −2.
For the line y = −2x + 8, when x = −2, y = −2(−2) + 8 = 12, so the point of intersection
is (−2, 12).
For the line y = 21 x − 2, when x = −2, y = 12 (−2) − 2 = −3, so the point of intersection
is (−2, −3).

A( 2, 12)

y = 12 x − 2

x
C(4, 0)
B( 2, 3)
y = −2x + 8
x = −2

Therefore, we can think of 4ABC as having base AB of length 12 − (−3) = 15 and height
being the distance from C to the line segment AB, or 4 − (−2) = 6.
Therefore, the area of 4ABC is 21 (15)(6) = 45.
Answer: (E)

13. If Andrew walks 1.4 metres per second, then he walks 60 × 1.4 = 84 metres per minute.
Since Andrew is walking for 30 minutes, then he walks a total of 30 × 84 = 2520 m.
2005 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 5

Now the total length of track is 400 m, so after walking 2400 m, Andrew is back at the Start
line.
Since the points A, B, C, and D are equally spaced, then consecutive points are 100 m apart.
Since the Start is half-way between A and B, then the Start is 50 m from B.

B Start A

C D

Therefore, after walking 2450 m, Andrew is at B.

After walking 70 m more to get to his total of 2520 m, Andrew will be 70 m beyond B and
30 m from C, so he will be closest to C.
Answer: (C)
√
14. To make 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + x an integer, we need 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + x = 10 + x to be a perfect
square.
So we can rephrase the question as “For how many positive integers x less than 100 is 10 + x
a perfect square?”.
Since x is between 1 and 99, then 10 + x is between 11 and 109.
There are 7 perfect squares in this interval: 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, 81, and 100, so there are 7 possible
values of x: 6, 15, 26, 39, 54, 71, and 90.
Answer: (B)

15. From the 2 in the centre, there are 6 possible 0s to which we can move.

0 0
0 2 0
0 0

From any 0, there are 2 possible 0s to which we can move.

0 0
0

From any 0, there are 3 possible 5s to which we can move.

5
5 0
5
2005 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 6

For each of the 6 choices of the first 0, we can choose either of the 2 choices for the second 0,
and from whichever second 0 is chosen we can choose any of the 3 possible 5s.
Therefore, there are 6 × 2 × 3 = 36 possible paths that can be followed.
Answer: (A)

16. A good first step is to write out more terms in the sequence to see if we see a pattern:

88, 24, 64, 40, 24, 16, 8, 8, 0, 8, 8, 0, 8, 8, 0, 8, . . .

So after some beginning terms, the sequence starts to repeat blocks of “8, 8, 0”. (We can see
that this will always happen: after “8, 0”, the next term is 8 − 0 = 8, so we get “8, 0, 8”; after
“0, 8”, the next term is 8 − 0 = 8, so we get “8, 0, 8, 8”; after “8, 8”, the next term is 8 − 8 = 0,
so we get “8, 0, 8, 8, 0”, so the pattern continues.)
So in the first 100 numbers we have the first 6 terms (88, 24, 64, 40, 24, 16), and then 31 blocks
of “8, 8, 0” (93 terms in total), and then the 100th term will be the beginning of a new block
“8, 8, 0” (ie. the number 8).
Therefore, the sum of the first 100 terms is

88 + 24 + 64 + 40 + 24 + 16 + 31(8 + 8 + 0) + 8 = 256 + 31(16) + 8 = 760

Answer: (B)

17. Using exponent laws, 1000100 = (103 )100 = 10300 = (10100 )3 = googol3 .
Answer: (E)

18. We label the five junctions as V , W , X, Y , and Z.

W Y
Z
X

A B C D

From the arrows which Harry can follow, we see that in order to get to B, he must get to X.
So we calculate the probability that he gets to X.
To get to X, Harry can go S to V to W to X, or S to V to Y to X, or S to V to X directly.
At V , the probability that Harry goes down any of the three paths (that is, towards W , X
or Y ) is 31 .
So the probability that Harry goes directly from V to X to 13 .
At W , the probability that Harry turns to X is 12 , so the probability that he goes from V to W
to X is 13 × 12 = 61 .
At Y , the probability that Harry turns to X is 31 , so the probability that he goes from V to Y
to X is 13 × 13 = 91 .
Therefore, the probability that Harry gets to X (and thus to B) is 31 + 16 + 19 = 6+3+2
18
= 11
18
.
Answer: (C)
2005 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 7

19. We extend AD to the point E where it intersects the perpendicular to BC from C.

B C

13 cm
20 cm 12 cm

A
5 cm D 16 cm E

By the Pythagorean Theorem in 4ADB, BD2 = BA2 −AD2 = 132 −52 = 144, so BD = 12 cm.
By the Pythagorean Theorem in 4DBC, BC 2 = DC 2 − BD2 = 202 − 122 = 256, so
BC = 16 cm.
Since BCED has three right angles (and in fact, a fourth right angle at E), then it is a rect-
angle, so DE = BC = 16 cm and CE = BD = 12 cm.
Therefore, if we look at 4AEC, we see that AE = 16 + 5 = 21 cm, so by the Pythagorean
Theorem, AC 2 = 212 + 122 = 585, so AC ≈ 24.2 cm, to the nearest tenth of a centimetre.
Answer: (A)

20. Let B be the total number of Beetles in the parking lot.

Then the number of Acuras is 21 B.
Also, the number of Camrys is 80% of 12 B + B, so the number of Camrys is 54 × 32 B = 65 B.
Therefore, since the total number of cars in the parking lot is 81, then B + 21 B + 56 B = 81
or 27
10
10
B = 81, or B = 27 × 81 = 30.
Therefore, the number of Beetles is 30.
Answer: (B)

21. We start by determining the combination of these bills totalling 453 Yacleys which uses the
fewest 17 Yacley bills.
To do this, we notice that since we can use as many 5 Yacley bills as we’d like, then any multiple
of 17 less than 453 which ends in a 5 or an 8 can be “topped up” to 453 Yacleys using 5 Yacley
bills.
The first few multiples of 17 are 17, 34, 51, 68.
So if we use four 17 Yacley bills, we have 68 Yacleys, leaving 453 − 68 = 385 Yacleys to get
to 453. For 385 Yacleys, we need 77 of the 5 Yacley bills.
So 4 of the 17 Yacley bills and 77 of the 5 Yacley bills works.
To get other combinations, we use the fact that 5 of the 17 Yacley bills are worth the same
as 17 of the 5 Yacley bills, so we can subtract 17 of the 5 Yacley bills and add 5 of the 17 Yacley
bills and keep the total the same.
Thus, 77 − 17 = 60 of the 5 Yacley bills and 4 + 5 = 9 of the 17 Yacley bills make 453 Yacleys.
(Check this!)
Also, 43 and 14 of the two types of bills, and 26 and 19 of the two types of bills, and 9 and 24
of the two types of bills.
Since we are down to 9 of the 5 Yacley bills, we can no longer use this exchanging process (since
we need at least 17 of the 5 Yacley bills to be able to do this).
Therefore, there are 5 combinations that work.

(An alternate approach would be to let x be the number of 17 Yacley bills and y the number
of 5 Yacley bills used.
2005 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 8

We then would like to consider the equation 17x + 5y = 453, and find the number of pairs (x, y)
which satisfy this equation and where both x and y are positive integers.
Geometrically, we are trying to find the number of points (x, y), with x and y both positive
integers, lying on the line 17x + 5y = 453.
In a similar way to above, we can find that (x, y) = (4, 77) is such a point.
Since the slope of the line is − 17
5
, then to get a another point with integer coordinates on the
line, we can move 5 units right and 17 units down.

17

5
x
O

We can repeat this process as above, and get 5 combinations that work.)
Answer: (C)

22. In order to determine the perimeter of the shaded region, we need to determine the total com-
bined length of arc AQB and segments AP , P R and RB.

Q
R

A P O

Since AOB is a quarter circle of radius 10, then arc AQB has length 14 (2π(10)) = 5π.
Since P QRO is a rectangle, then P R = QO and QO is a radius of the quarter circle,
so P R = QO = 10. So we now need to calculate AP + RB.
But AP + RB = (AO − P O) + (BO − RO) = AO + BO − (P O + RO). We know that
AO = BO = 10 since each is a radius of the quarter circle.
Also, P O + RO is half of the perimeter of the rectangle (which has total perimeter 26),
so P O + RO = 13.
Therefore, AP + RB = 10 + 10 − 13 = 7.
Thus, the perimeter of the shaded region is 5π + 10 + 7 = 17 + 5π.
Answer: (C)

23. We solve this problem by systematically keeping track of the distance from home of each of
Anna, Bill and Dexter. At 12:00 noon, each is 0 km from home.
At 12:15:
2005 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 9

Dexter is 0 km from home (since he hasn’t started running)

Anna is 14 × 4 = 1 km from home (since she has walked at 4 km/h for 14 of an hour)
Bill is 14 × 3 = 34 km from home (since he has walked at 3 km/h for 14 of an hour)

At 12:15, Dexter leaves and runs until he catches up to Anna.

How long does this take? Since Anna walks at 4 km/h and Dexter runs at 6 km/h in the
same direction, then Dexter gains 2 km on Anna every hour. Since Anna starts 1 km ahead of
Dexter, then it takes Dexter 12 hour to catch Anna, so he catches her at 12:45.
At 12:45:

Dexter is 3 km from home (since he has run at 6 km/h for 12 hour)

Anna is 34 × 4 = 3 km from home (since she has walked at 4 km/h for 34 of an hour)
Bill is 34 × 3 = 94 km from home (since he has walked at 3 km/h for 34 of an hour)

At 12:45, Dexter turns around instantaneously and runs back to Bill from Anna.
How long does this take? Since Bill walks at 3 km/h and Dexter runs at 6 km/h in the opposite
direction, then Dexter and Bill are getting closer at a rate of 9 km/h.
Since Dexter and Bill start 3 − 94 = 34 km apart, then it takes Dexter 91 × 34 = 12
1
hour (or
5 minutes) to meet Bill.
Therefore, Bill and Dexter meet at 12:50 p.m.
Answer: (E)

24. Solution 1
Let X and Y be the points where the folded portion of the triangle crosses AB, and Z be the
location of the original vertex C after folding.

D E

A X Y B

Z
12 cm

We are told that the area of 4XY Z is 16% that of the area of 4ABC.
Now 4ACB is similar to 4XZY , since ∠XZY is the folded over version of ∠ACB and since
∠XY Z = ∠EY B = ∠DEY = ∠CED = ∠CBA by parallel lines and folds.
Since 4XZY is similar to 4ACB and its area is 0.16 = (0.4)2 that of 4ACB, then the sides
of 4XZY are 0.4 times as long as the sides of 4ACB.
Draw the altitude of 4ACB from C down to P on AB (crossing DE at Q) and extend it
through to Z.
2005 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 10
C

D Q E
P
A X Y B

Z
12 cm

Now CP = CQ + QP = ZQ + QP = ZP + 2P Q.
Since the sides of 4XZY are 0.4 times as long as the sides of 4ACB, then ZP = 0.4CP .
Since CP = ZP + 2P Q, then P Q = 0.3CP , and so CQ = CP − P Q = 0.7CP .
Since CQ is 0.7 times the length of CP , then DE is 0.7 times the length of AB, again by
similar triangles, so DE = 0.7(12) = 8.4.

Solution 2
Let X and Y be the points where the folded portion of the triangle crosses AB, and Z be the
location of the original vertex C after folding.

D E

A X Y B

Z
12 cm

We are told that the area of 4XY Z is 16% that of the area of 4ABC.
Now 4ACB is similar to 4XZY , since ∠XZY is the folded over version of ∠ACB and since
∠XY Z = ∠EY B = ∠DEY = ∠CED = ∠CBA by parallel lines and folds.
Since 4XZY is similar to 4ACB and its area is 0.16 = (0.4)2 that of 4ACB, then the sides
of 4XZY are 0.4 times as long as the sides of 4ACB.
Draw perpendiculars to AB at X and Y , intersecting AC and BC and P and Q, respectively,
and DE at R and S, respectively.
By symmetry, P Q and RS are parallel to XY and the same length, so let P Q = RS = XY = s.
Since the sides of 4XZY are 0.4 times as long as the sides of 4ACB, then s = 0.4 × 12 = 4.8.
Since 4CDE is congruent to 4ZDE (since one is the folded over version of the other), then
by symmetry, P R = RX and QS = SY .
Let DR = x and ES = y.
2005 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 11
C

P Q

D R S E
x s y

A X Y B

Z
12 cm

Then AX = 2x, since 4P XA is similar to 4P RD and has sides twice as long (since
P X = 2P R. Similarly, BY = 2y.
Now looking at AB as a whole, we have AB = 2x + s + 2y = 12, so x + y = 21 (12 − s) = 3.6.
Looking at DE, we have DE = s + x + y = 4.8 + 3.6 = 8.4.
Answer: (B)

25. The first challenge in this problem is to find one set of numbers a, b, c that actually works.
Since this looks a bit similar to the Pythagorean Theorem, we can start with 32 + 42 = 52 and
try to manipulate this.
If we divide both sides by the least common multiple of 32 , 42 and 52 , which is (3×4×5)2 = 602 ,
32 42 52 1 1 1
we then obtain 2 + 2 = 2 or 2 + 2 = 2 .
60 60 60 20 15 12
This gives us two possible triples: (a, b, c) = (20, 15, 12) and (a, b, c) = (15, 20, 12) (so two
possible values for a so far).
1 1 1
How can we get more? We can multiply the equation 2 + 2 = 2 by reciprocals of perfect
20 15 12
squares.
1 1 1 1
Multiplying by 2 , we get 2 + 2 = 2 .
2 40 30 24
1 1 1 1
Multiplying by 2 , we get 2 + 2 = 2 .
3 60 45 36
1 1 1 1
Multiplying by 2 , we get 2 + 2 = 2 .
4 80 60 48
1 1 1 1
Multiplying by 2 , we get 2
+ 2 = 2.
5 100 75 60
1 1 1 1
Multiplying by 2 , we get 2
+ 2 = 2.
6 120 90 72
1 1 1 1
Multiplying by 2 , we get 2
+ 2
= 2.
7 140 105 84
At this point, the strategy will no longer work, since we are only looking for values of a ≤ 100.
So far, the possible values of a are (from looking at each denominator of the left side of each
the equations here): 20, 15, 40, 30, 60, 45, 80, 100, 75, 90. (Notice that 60 doesn’t appear twice
in the list!) The sum of these numbers is 555.

Can we find more starting equations by beginning with a different Pythagorean triple?
If we start with 52 + 122 = 132 and divide both sides by the least common multiple of 52 , 122
1 1 1
and 132 (ie. (5 × 12 × 13)2 = 7802 ), we get 2
+ 2 = 2 which gives us 65 as another
156 65 60
possible value of a.
Therefore, our running total for values of a is 555 + 65 = 620.
1 1 1
We can’t generate more possible values for a using 2
+ 2 = 2 since multiplying both sides
156 65 60
2005 Cayley Contest Solutions Page 12

by the reciprocal of any perfect square will make both of a and b at least 130, so bigger than 100.

Can we use 62 + 82 = 102 ? Here, the least common multiple of 62 , 82 and 102 is 1202 , and
1 1 1
dividing by 1202 gives us 2 + 2 = 2 , which we have already used.
20 15 12
Can we use any other Pythagorean triple? No, since any other Pythagorean triple is at least
as big as 7-24-25, and so the smallest possible denominator that we will get on the left side by
using this technique is (7 × 25)2 = 1752 , which would give an a larger than 100.
Also, any triple (a, b, c) that actually works does come from a Pythagorean triple, since we can
1 1 1
multiply both sides of 2 + 2 = 2 by (abc)2 to get (bc)2 + (ac)2 = (ab)2 .
a b c
So every possible triple (a, b, c) comes from a Pythagorean triple, and no Pythagorean triples
give any more allowable values of a, so we have found them all.
Therefore, the sum of all possible values of a ≤ 100 is 620.
Answer: (E)
 Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of The Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

2004 Solutions
Cayley Contest (Grade 10)

for
The CENTRE for EDUCATION in MATHEMATICS and
COMPUTING
Awards

© 2004 Waterloo Mathematics Foundation

2004 Cayley Solutions 2

2004 Cayley Contest Solutions

1. Calculating each term,
2 2 + 12 + 0 2 + ( –1) + ( – 2) = 4 + 1 + 0 + 1 + 4 = 10
2 2

Answer: (E)

1
2. 25% of 2004 is 4
of 2004, or 501.
1
50% of 4008 is 2
of 4008, or 2004.
1
50% of 1002 is of 1002, or 501.
2
100% of 1002 is 1002.
1
10% of 8016 is 10 of 8016, or 801.6.
1
20% of 3006 is 5
of 3006, or 601.2.
Answer: (B)

3. To get from A to B, we must go 2 units to the right and 3 units up. Since B is the midpoint of
AC, then to get from B to C, we must also go 2 units to the right and 3 units up. Therefore, C
has coordinates (5,7) .
Answer: (E)

4. Since x + 1 – 2 + 3 – 4 = 5 – 6 + 7 – 8 , then simplifying both sides we get x − 2 = −2 so x = 0 .

Answer: (C)

5. The first figure has outer perimeter 4. The second figure has outer perimeter 8. The third
figure has outer perimeter 12. So from one figure to the next, the outer perimeter increases
by 4. So the outer perimeter of the fifth figure is 8 more than that of the third figure, or 20.
(We could easily draw out the fifth figure, which would be made up of 9 small squares.)
Answer: (C)

6. Removing a common factor of 7,

7 x + 42 y = 7( x + 6 y ) = 7(17) = 119
Answer: (E)

7. Solution 1
32 + 32 + 32 = 3 × 32 = 31 × 32 = 33 . Thus, a = 3 .

Solution 2
32 + 32 + 32 = 9 + 9 + 9 = 27 , so 3a = 27 and so a = 3 , since 33 = 27 .
Answer: (B)

8. The circumference of a circle is equal to 2πr , where r is the radius of the circle.
Since the circumference of the outer circle is 24π , then its radius is 12. Thus, OB = 12 .
Since the circumference of the inner circle is 14π , then its radius is 7. Thus, OA = 7 .
Therefore, AB = OB − OA = 5 . Answer: (B)
2004 Cayley Solutions 3

9. By the Pythagorean Theorem, the length of the rope joining B to C is

16 2 + 30 2 = 256 + 900 = 1156 = 34 m.
We must also determine the length of rope joining A to C. To get from A to C we must go
over 16 m and up 12 m (the difference between the heights of the towers), so the rope has
length 16 2 + 12 2 = 256 + 144 = 400 = 20 m.
Therefore, the total length of rope used is 54 m.
Answer: (A)

10. When the cube is folded, H and I share an edge. At one end of this edge is the face labelled
G (so the faces G, H and I meet at a point), and at the other end of this edge is the face
labelled J.
Thus, J is opposite G.
Answer: (D)

11. Since each number after the second is the product of the previous two numbers, then the 18
in the fifth position is the product of the 3 and the number in the fourth position. Thus, the
number in the fourth position is 6.
So the sequence now reads, x, ____, 3, 6, 18.
Using the rule, 6 equals the product of 3 and the number in the second position. Thus, the
sequence reads x, 2, 3, 6, 18.
This tells us that 2 x = 3 or x = 32 .
Answer: (B)

12. The sum of the numbers in the 1st row is 2 x + 5 , so the sum of the numbers in any row,
column or diagonal is also 2 x + 5 .
Therefore, the entry in the 2nd row, 1st column must be 5, using the 1st column.
Thus, the entry in the 2nd row, 2nd column is 2 x + 3 , using the 2nd row.
Looking at the sum of the 2nd column,
3 + (2 x + 3) + x = 2 x + 5
3x + 6 = 2 x + 5
x = −1
so the sum of the numbers in any row is 2(−1) + 5 = 3.
Answer: (C)

13. Since the perimeter of the smaller square is 72 cm, its side length is 1
4
(72) = 18 cm.
Therefore, the area of the smaller square is (18 cm) = 324 cm2 .
2

Since the area inside the larger square is the combined area of the smaller square and the
shaded region, then the area of the larger square is 160 cm2 + 324 cm2 = 484 cm2 .
Thus, the side length of the larger square is 484 = 22 cm, and so the perimeter of the larger
square is 4 (22 cm) = 88 cm .
Answer: (B)
2004 Cayley Solutions 4

4 + 20 + x
14. The average of 4, 20 and x is equal to . The average of y and 16 is equal to
3
16 + y
.
2
Since these averages are equal,
4 + 20 + x 16 + y
=
3 2
2( 4 + 20 + x ) = 3(16 + y )
48 + 2 x = 48 + 3 y
2 x = 3y
x 3
=
y 2
Answer: (A)

15. In triangle ACD, x o + y o + 100o = 180o , so x + y = 80 (*). A

Since ∠ACB and ∠ACD are supplementary, then
y° y°
∠ACB = 180o − ∠ACD = 80o .
Thus, in triangle ACB, 2 x o + y o + 80o = 180o ,
so 2 x + y = 100 (**). 2x° 100° x°
Subtracting (*) from (**), we obtain x = 20 . B C D
Answer: (E)

16. When a player rolls two dice, there are 6 possibilities for the outcome on each die, so there
are 36 possibilities for the outcomes when two dice are rolled.
Which possibilities give a score of 3 or less? These are: 1 and 1, 1 and 2, 1 and 3, 2 and 1, 2
and 2, 2 and 3, 3 and 1, 3 and 2, 3 and 3. So 9 of the 36 possibilities give a score of 3 or less.
Thus, the probability is 369
= 41 .
Answer: (A)

17. Putting each of the two fractions over a common denominator of mn, we get
1 1 5
+ =
m n 24
n m 5
+ =
mn mn 24
m+n 5
=
mn 24
20 5
=
mn 24
24 × 20
mn =
5
mn = 96
Answer: (D)
2004 Cayley Solutions 5

18. This problem requires a fair amount of fiddling around. After some work, we can see that
the ant can walk along 9 edges without walking along any edge for a second time. (For
example, it could walk A to B to F to E to A to D to C to G to H to D. It is then stuck.)
In fact, 9 edges, or 108 cm, is the maximum.

Justifying this fact takes us into a really neat area of mathematics called “graph theory”.
(Graph theory was first developed by Euler when he was working on the Königsberg bridge
problem.)
What if the ant could actually walk along 10 edges?
If the ant had done this, it would have walked in and out of a vertex 20 times in total (once at
each end of each of the 10 edges). The cube has 8 vertices and each vertex has 3 edges
meeting at it, so since the ant has not walked along the same edge twice, then it can only
have been in and out of any given vertex at most 3 times.
But for 20 ins and outs with 8 vertices in total, there must be 4 vertices that have been used 3
times.
This is impossible, though, because other than the starting vertex and the ending vertex in the
path, the ant must go both in and out of a vertex, so each vertex other than the starting and
ending vertices must be used an even number of times. So we cannot have more than 2
vertices being used an odd number of times.
Therefore, the ant cannot walk along 10 edges, so 108 cm must indeed be the maximum.
Answer: (D)

2a
19. Here we use the rule for manipulating exponents b
= 2a− b .
2
1
Therefore, each of the 2003 fractions after the first fraction is equal to 2 −1 = .
2
1
This gives us 2004 copies of being added up, for a total of 1002.
2
Answer: (A)

20. Let a be the value of an arrow shot into ring A, let b be the value of an arrow shot into ring B,
and let c be the value of an arrow shot into ring C.
From the given information about the three archers, we know that
c + a = 15
c + b = 18
b + a = 13
We are interested in calculating 2b.
Adding up the second and third equations, we get a + 2b + c = 31 and so substituting the
information from the first equation, we get 2b + 15 = 31 or 2b = 16 .
(Notice that we could have found the values of a, b and c, but we did not need to do this.)
Answer: (C)
2004 Cayley Solutions 6

21. Suppose that Laura uses the last blue sheet on day number d.
Then the total number of blue sheets with which she started was d.
Since she uses 3 red sheets per day and has 15 red sheets left over, then she started with
3d + 15 red sheets.
Since the blue and red sheets were initially in the ratio 2 : 7, then
d 2
=
3d + 15 7
7 d = 6 d + 30
d = 30
Thus, she started with 30 blue sheets and 105 red sheets, or 135 sheets of construction paper
in total.
Answer: (C)

22. First, we determine the lengths of the sides of the F 20 E

rooms.
Suppose that AG = x . Then FG = x . D
x
So the room can be thought of as a rectangular room of
width FE = 20 and length AB + FG = 10 + x , with a
rectangular corner of dimensions AG = x by AB = 10 G x A
removed.
10
Equating the area of the entire room with this way of
visualizing it,
20(10 + x ) − 10 x = 280 B C
10 x + 200 = 280
x=8
Therefore, the lengths of the sides of the room are (starting from B and proceeding
clockwise) 10, 8, 8, 20, 18 and 12.

Let y now be the distance from C to D, the point where the new wall touches CE.
Now CBAD can be viewed as a trapezoid with base CD and parallel side AB (since the room
has square corners).
Also, the height of the trapezoid is BC = 12 . The area F 20 E
of this trapezoid is supposed to be 140, or half of the 18 – y
total area of the large room. D
Therefore, since the area of the trapezoid is 8
1
2
(BC)( AB + CD) , we have
y
2
1
(12)(10 + y ) = 140 G 8 A

6(10 + y ) = 140 10
10 + y = 70
3
B 12 C
y= 40
3
2004 Cayley Solutions 7

Also, the height of the trapezoid is BC = 12 . The area of this trapezoid is supposed to be
140, or half of the total area of the large room.
Therefore, since the area of the trapezoid is 12 ( BC )( AB + CD) , we have
40
Thus, the distance from C to D is 3
.
Answer: (E)

23. The ball is rolling towards Marcos at 4 m/s and he is running towards it at 8 m/s, so he gains
30
12 metres per second on the ball. Since he starts 30 m from the ball, it will take him 12 = 2.5
s to reach the ball.
The ball is rolling away from Michael at 4 m/s and he is running at 9 m/s, so he is gaining 5
m/s on the ball. Since he starts 15 m behind the ball, he would catch up to the ball in 3 s if it
continued to roll.
Thus, Marcos gets to the ball first. After 2.5 s, Michael has gained 5(2.5) = 12.5 m on the
ball, so is 2.5 m from the ball when Marcos touches it first.
Answer: (C)

24.First, we determine the lengths of the sides of the new W X Y Z

triangle, in terms of x.
We drop perpendiculars from X, Y and Z to points P, Q
and R, respectively, on the line AE. Since each of the
four triangles is isosceles, then
BP = PC = CQ = QD = DR = RE = 12 x . P Q
A x B 2 x 2 x C 12 x 12 x D 12 x 12 x E
1 1

Consider triangle ARZ, which is right-angled at R. Since

AZ = AE = 4 x , then by the Pythagorean Theorem,
AR 2 + RZ 2 = AZ 2

RZ 2 = ( 4 x ) −
2
( 72 x)2
RZ 2 = 15
4 x2
so the square of the height of each of the four isosceles triangles is 15
4
x 2.
Thus, AY 2 = AQ2 + QY 2 = ( 52 x)2 + 154 x 2 = 10 x 2 , so AY = 10 x , and
AX 2 = AP 2 + PX 2 = ( 32 x)2 + 154 x 2 = 6 x 2 , so AX = 6x.

Thus, the new triangle has side lengths 6x , 10x and 4x. Since
( 6x) + ( 10 x) = (4 x) , then this new triangle is right-angled, with hypotenuse 4x, and so
2 2 2

has area 12 ( 6 x )( 10 x ) = 12 60 x 2 = 15 x 2 .
2004
We would like the area to be less than 2004, so 15 x 2 < 2004 or x < ≈ 22.747 .
15
Therefore, the largest integer value of x that works is 22.
Answer: (E)
2004 Cayley Solutions 8

25. We start by rewriting each expression so that each has the same numerator:
7 x + 1 2 + ( 7 x − 1) 7x − 1
= =1+
2 2 2
7 x + 2 3 + ( 7 x − 1) 7x − 1
= =1+
3 3 3
M
7 x + 300 301 + ( 7 x − 1) 7x − 1
= =1+
301 301 301
For each of these expressions, the original fraction will be in lowest terms only when the
7x + 1
fraction in the new expression is in lowest terms, ie. is in lowest terms only when
2
7x − 1
is in lowest terms.
2
So the original problem is equivalent to determining the number of positive integers x with
x ≤ 60 such that each of
7x − 1 7x − 1 7x − 1
, , …,
2 3 301
is in lowest terms.
This is equivalent to determine the number of positive integers x with x ≤ 60 for which
7 x − 1 has no common factor with any of the integers from 2 to 301, inclusive.
For x from 1 to 43, 7 x − 1 will be actually equal to one of the integers from 2 to 301, so there
will be a common factor.
So we must examine the integers from 44 to 60.

If x is odd, then 7 x − 1 is even, and so has a common factor of 2, for example.

So we must examine the integers 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 54, 56, 58, and 60.
The values of 7 x − 1 for these integers are 307, 321, 335, 349, 363, 377, 391, 405, and 419,
respectively. We would like to determine how many of these have no common factors with
any of the integers from 2 to 301.

The integers 321, 363 and 405 are divisible by 3, so they can be removed. The integer 335 is
divisible by 5 and so can be removed. This leaves us with 307, 349, 377, 391 and 419.
307 is a prime number.
349 is a prime number.
377 is divisible by 13, so can be removed.
391 is divisible by 17, so can be removed.
419 is a prime number.
Each of these prime numbers is divisible only 1 and itself, so has no common factor with any
of the integers from 2 to 301.

Therefore, there are 3 integers x with x ≤ 60 for which the fractions are all in lowest terms.
Answer: (C)
 Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of The Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

2003 Solutions
Cayley Contest (Grade 10)

for
The CENTRE for EDUCATION in MATHEMATICS and
COMPUTING
Awards

© 2003 Waterloo Mathematics Foundation

2003 Cayley Solutions 2

2003 Cayley Contest Solutions

1. Evaluating,
3 − (−3) 6
= = 6. ANSWER: (D)
2 −1 1

2. 17 2 – 15 2 = 289 − 225 = 64 = 8 2 . ANSWER: (A)

3. Since 42 = 6 × 7 , the only possibility for the correct answer is that 42 is divisible by 7.
(We can check that each of the remaining possibilities is not true.)
ANSWER: (D)

4. Since 25% of the number is 5 times 5% of that number, then 25% of the number is
5(8) = 40 .
ANSWER: (A)

5. We could use a calculator to determine the value of the expression and then round to the
nearest integer. Alternatively, we can calculate the value of the expression by hand:
3
2
× 49 + 72 = 12
18
+ 72 = 12
18
+ 18
63
= 18
75
= 25
6
= 4 + 16
Therefore, the closest integer is 4.
ANSWER: (B)

6. Since ABC is a straight line, the sum of the 5 angles is

180o , and so
x o + 21o + 21o + 2 x o + 57o = 180o
21°
3 x + 99 = 180 21°

3 x = 81 2x°
x° 57°
x = 27 A B C
ANSWER: (A)

7. Solution 1
In the top right quarter, we have no unknowns, so we can calculate the sum of the three
numbers to be 13 + 17 + 45 = 75 . Therefore, the sum of the numbers (including the
unknowns) in each of the other 3 quarters is 75 as well, and so
(z + 28 + 8) + ( x + 19 + 50) + ( y + 3 + 63) = 3(75)
x + y + z + 36 + 69 + 66 = 225
x + y + z = 54

Solution 2
In the top right quarter, we have no unknowns, so we can calculate the sum of the three
numbers to be 13 + 17 + 45 = 75 .
In the top left quarter, we then have z + 28 + 8 = 75 and so z = 39.
2003 Cayley Solutions 3

Similarly, x = 6 and y = 9 .
Therefore, x + y + z = 6 + 9 + 39 = 54 . ANSWER: (C)

8. An equilateral triangle with a side length of 20 must have a perimeter of 60.

A square with a perimeter of 60 must have a side length of 15.
A square with a side length of 15 must have an area of 225.
ANSWER: (C)

9. Solution 1
Taking the reciprocal of both sides and then solving,
1 5
=
x + 15 3
x + 15 = 3
5
x= 2
5

Solution 2
Cross-multiplying,
1 5
1 = 3
x+5

(
5 x+ 1
5 )= 3
5x + 1 = 3
x= 2
5
ANSWER: (A)

10. Solution 1
When 58 of the players are girls then 38 of the players will be boys. Since the number of
boys playing is 6 (and does not change), then after the additional girls join, there must be
16 players in total for 38 of the players to be boys. Since there were 8 players initially,
then 8 additional girls must have joined the game.

Solution 2
Let the number of additional girls be g.
Then
2+g 5
=
8+g 8
16 + 8 g = 40 + 5 g
3g = 24
g=8
ANSWER: (D)
2003 Cayley Solutions 4

11. Since N is written out as a sum of powers of 10, then N can be written as 1 111 111 000 ,
and so the sum of the digits is 7.
ANSWER: (E)

12. Solution 1
To get from point B to point C, we go to the left 12 units and up 4. Therefore, for each
unit up, we have gone 3 to the left.
To get from B to A, we must go up 1, and since A is on BC, then we must have gone 3 to
the left from 9, ie. a = 9 − 3 = 6 .

Solution 2
Since the three points lie on the same line then
Slope of AB = Slope of BC
1− 0 0− 4
=
a − 9 9 − (−3)
1 −4
=
a − 9 12
12 = −4 a + 36
4 a = 24
a=6
ANSWER: (D)

13. Solution 1
Since AY = CX = 8, then we must have DY = BX = 2 , D 2Y A
and so DYBX is a parallelogram.
If we rotate the picture by 90o clockwise, then we can
see that DYBX is a parallelogram with a base of length 2 10
and a height of 10, ie. it has an area of bh = 2(10) = 20 .

C X2B

Solution 2
The area of the shaded region is equal to the area of the entire square minus the areas of
the two triangles. Each of the two triangles BAY and DCX is right-angled with one leg of
length 10 and the other of length 8.
Therefore,
Area of shaded region = Area of square − Area of triangles
= (10) − 2
2
[ 12 (8)(10)]
= 100 − 2[ 40]
= 20
ANSWER: (B)
2003 Cayley Solutions 5

14. Since the distance covered by Jim in 4 steps is the same as the distance covered by Carly
in 3 steps, then the distance covered by Jim in 24 steps is the same as the distance
covered by Carly in 18 steps.
Since each of Carly’s steps covers 0.5 m, she then covers 9 m in 18 steps, ie. Jim covers 9
m in 24 steps.
ANSWER: (B)

15. We label two more points on the diagram, as shown.

Then ∠DEC = x o , since it is equal to its opposite angle.
Since line L1 is parallel to line L2 , then ∠DBC = 70o , since DB is a transversal, and
∠BCA = x o since EC is a transversal.
Since ∠DBC = 70o , then ∠ABC = 110o , since these D E x°
angles are supplementary. L1
70° x°
Since ∆ABC is isosceles, then ∠BAC = ∠BCA = x o , and
so looking at the sum of the angles in ∆ABC , we get L2 B 70°
x°
x o + 110o + x o = 180o
110° C
x°

2 x = 70 A
x = 35
ANSWER: (A)

16. Using exponent laws to write all of the factors as product of powers of 2 and 3,

) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) (
 2 2 2003  32002
(4 2003 )(
32002
=
  2 4006 32002 )(
2 4006 32002 )
= 2002 2002 2003 = 4005 2002 = 2 4006 − 4005 = 21 = 2
(62002 )(
2 2003
) ((2 ⋅ 3) )(
2002
2 ) ( )( )( ) (
2003
2 3 2 2 )(
3 )
ANSWER: (B)

17. ( )
Since the largest circle has a radius of 4, its area is π 4 2 = 16π .
We must calculate the area of each of the shaded regions.
( )
The innermost shaded region is a circle of radius 1, and so it has area π 12 = π .
The outermost shaded region is the region inside a circle of radius 3 and outside a circle
of radius 2. Therefore its area is the difference between the areas of these two circles, or
( ) ( )
π 32 − π 2 2 = 5π .
Therefore, the total area of the shaded regions is π + 5π = 6π , and the required ratio is
6π : 16π = 6 : 16 = 3 : 8 .
ANSWER: (E)

18. Since 496 is less than 2 m , we might think to look for a power of 2 bigger than, but close
to 496. 2 9 = 512 works and in fact 496 = 512 − 16 = 2 9 − 2 4 and so m + n = 9 + 4 = 13.
(This can also be done using an algebraic approach.)
ANSWER: (A)
2003 Cayley Solutions 6

19. Suppose that the four digit number has digits abcd, ie. the product abcd = 810 .
We must determine how to write 810 as the product of 4 different digits, none of which
can be 0. So we must start by factoring 810, as 810 = 81 × 10 = 34 × 2 × 5 .
So one of the digits must have a factor of 5. But the only non-zero digit having a factor
of 5 is 5 itself, so 5 is a digit of the number.
Now we need to find 3 different digits whose product is 34 × 2 .
The only digits with a factor of 3 are 3, 6, and 9, and since we need 4 factors of 3, we
must use each of these digits (the 9 contributes 2 factors of 3; the others contribute 1
each). In fact, 3 × 6 × 9 = 34 × 2 = 162 .
Therefore, the digits of the number are 3, 5, 6, and 9, and so the sum of the digits is 23.
ANSWER: (C)

400
20. The cost to modify the car’s engine ($400) is the equivalent of the cost of = 500
0.80
litres of gas. So the car would have to be driven a distance that would save 500 L of gas
in order to make up the cost of the modifications.
Originally, the car consumes 8.4 L of gas per 100 km, and after the modifications the car
consumes 6.3 L of gas per 100 km, a savings of 2.1 L per 100 km.
500
Thus, in order to save 500 L of gas, the car would have to be driven × 100 = 23809.52 km.
2.1
ANSWER: (D)

21. Let’s say that time equals 0 seconds when Troye and
D
Daniella first meet. Then at time 24 seconds, they will
meet again.
In 24 seconds, how far does Troye get around the track? t=0
Since it takes her 56 seconds to complete one lap, then
she has made it 2456
= 37 of the way around the track.
T t = 24s
4
Since Daniella is running in the opposite direction, then she will go 7
of the way around
the track in 24 seconds, and so one complete lap will take her 7
4
(24) = 42 seconds.
ANSWER: (E)

22. Let M be the midpoint of EF and N be the midpoint of HG. By symmetry, N is also the
midpoint of BC. Also, the line through A and M will also pass through N, and will be
perpendicular to both EF and BC.
Since the side length of the square is 12, then A
EM = HN = 6 and EH = 12 .
Since we are told that BC = 30 , then BN = 15 and so E 6 F
M
BH = 9 . 12
Since EFGH is a square, then EF is parallel to HG, and so
∠AEM = ∠EBH , ie. ∆AME is similar to ∆EHB . B 9 H 6N G C
AM 12
Therefore, = or AM = 8 .
6 9
2003 Cayley Solutions 7

Thus, the area of ∆AEF is 1

2
(12)(8) = 48 cm2 .
ANSWER: (D)

23. We label the pyramid with vertices A, B, C, and D (the square base) and T the “top”
vertex. Let M be the midpoint of side AB on the base, and O the centre of the square
base.
Since the pyramid has a square base and each of the four triangular faces is identical, then
the “top” vertex of the pyramid lies directly above the centre of the base, by symmetry,
and so each of the four triangular faces is isosceles.
Join T to O, T to M, and M to O. T
Then TO is perpendicular to the square base by the
symmetry of the pyramid, and so is perpendicular to OM.
Therefore, triangle TOM is right-angled at O.
Let H be the height of the pyramid, ie. TO = H . D C
Let s be the side length of the base of the pyramid. Then
O
MO = 12 s , since O is the centre of the square and M is
the midpoint of AB. A M B
Let h be the length of MT. Since M is the midpoint of AB and ∆TAB is isosceles, then
TM is perpendicular to AB.
( ) 2
So by Pythagoras, H 2 = h 2 − 12 s = h 2 − 41 s2 .
T

But the base is square, so its area is s2 = 1440 , and the area of each
of the triangular faces is 12 sh = 840 , so h H
2 2
 1680  1680
h2 =   = = 1960 .
 s  1440
Therefore, H 2 = 1960 − 360 = 1600 , and so H = 40 . 1
M s O
2

ANSWER: (B)

24. Since we are looking at choosing four different numbers from the set {0, 1, 2, ..., 9} , then
there is only one way to write them in increasing order. So we only need to look at the
number of ways of choosing four numbers so that their sum is a multiple of 3 (that is, we
do not need to worry about looking at the order of the choices).
If we take four numbers and add them up, then the fact that the sum is divisible by 3 (or
not) is not affected when we subtract a multiple of 3 from any of the four numbers, since
the difference between multiples of 3 is a multiple of 3.
Next, we can use the fact that every number can be written as a multiple of 3, or as one
more or one less than a multiple of 3, ie. every integer can be written in the form 3n ,
3n + 1 or 3n − 1.
So combining these two facts, we can transform the set {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9} into to the
collection {0, 1, − 1, 0, 1, − 1, 0, 1, − 1, 0} , for example by subtracting 6 from 5 to get –1. (A
“set” cannot technically have more than one copy of the same element, whereas a
“collection” can!)
2003 Cayley Solutions 8

So now we want to choose 4 numbers from the collection {0, 1, − 1, 0, 1, − 1, 0, 1, − 1, 0}

whose sum is a multiple of 3 (including possibly 0).
How can we do this?
If we choose 4 zeros, then the sum is 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 = 0 , which is a multiple of 3.
If we choose 3 zeros, then the remaining number chosen is a 1 or a –1, so the sum is not a
multiple of 3.
If we choose 2 zeros, then we can choose two 1’s, two –1’s, or 1 and –1. Only the third
choice gives a multiple of 3.
If we choose 1 zero, then to get a multiple of 3, we must choose three 1’s or three –1’s.
(You might want to check that no other combination works!)
If we choose 0 zeros, then to get a multiple of 3, we must choose two 1’s and two –1’s
(otherwise we choose three of one kind and one of the other, which will not give a
multiple of 3).
So now we must count the number of choices for each case:
Case 1: 0, 0, 0, 0
Since there are only four zeros, there is only 1 way to choose them. (Recall that
this corresponds to choosing 0, 3, 6 and 9, whose sum is indeed divisible by 3.)
Case 2: 0, 0, 1, –1
We must choose two zeros from four zeros, and one each of 1’s and –1’s from
collections of three.
If we have 4 objects A, B, C, D then the number of ways of choosing 2 objects is
6 (AB, AC, AD, BC, BD, CD), and if we have 3 objects, then the number of ways
of choosing 1 object is 3. (This just means that there are 6 ways to choose 2 zeros
from 4 possibilities.)
So the total number of choices here is 6 × 3 × 3 = 54 , since for each choice of two
0’s, we have 3 choices for the 1, and 3 choices for the –1.
Case 3: 0, 1, 1, 1
We must choose one 0 from four zeros, and three 1’s from 3. There are 4 ways to
choose the zero and 1 way to choose the three 1’s. Thus there are a total of 4
ways of making this selection.
Case 4: 0, –1, –1, –1
Similarly to Case 3, there are 4 possibilities.
Case 5: 1, 1, –1, –1
We must choose two 1’s from three, and two –1’s from three. There are 3 ways
to make each of these choices, or 3 × 3 = 9 ways in total.

Therefore, there are 1 + 54 + 4 + 4 + 9 = 72 ways in total of choosing the numbers.

ANSWER: (E)

25. Suppose that the angle θ is an acute laceable angle with 2k points in the lacing. We need
to determine what values of θ are possible.
First, we can note that the diagram must be symmetrical, since
AX1 = X1 X 2 = X 2 k − 1 X 2 k = X 2 k A
and so the two triangles ∆AX1 X 2 and ∆AX 2 k X 2 k − 1 are isosceles with equal base angles
and equal legs, and thus congruent, so AX 2 = AX 2 k − 1 .
2003 Cayley Solutions 9

Continuing this, we can show that each pair of B

corresponding points on the rays AB and AC are the same
distance from A. X2
X2k
In particular, AX k = AX k +1 . Thus ∆AX k X k +1 is isosceles θ

( )
and so ∠AX k X k +1 = ∠AX k +1 X k = 12 180o − θ . A
X1 X2k – 1 C
Next, we will develop a second expression for one of these two angles involving θ .
To do this, we need the fact that if we know two angles of a triangle, then we can
calculate the “external angle” of the triangle, ie. in the diagram, ∠PRS = x + y , since
( )
∠PRS = 180o − ∠PRQ = 180o − 180o − x − y = x + y .
Since ∆AX1 X 2 is isosceles, then ∠X1 AX 2 = ∠AX 2 X1 = θ and so by the external angle,
∠X 2 X1C = 2θ .
Since ∆X1 X 2 X 3 is isosceles, then ∠X 2 X1 X 3 = ∠X 2 X 3 X1 = 2θ , and so by the external
angle in ∆AX 2 X 3 , ∠X 3 X 2C = 3θ .
Continuing in this way, ∠X 3 X 2 X 4 = ∠X 3 X 4 X 2 = 3θ , P
and so on, eventually reaching x
∠X k X k − 1 X k +1 = ∠X k X k +1 X k − 1 = kθ .
(Try this out in the diagram given in the problem.)
Therefore, comparing our two equations for angle
∠AX k +1 X k = ∠X k − 1 X k +1 X k , we obtain y
Q R S
1
2 ( o
)
180 − θ = kθ

180o = 2 kθ + θ
180o
θ=
2k + 1
Since θ is an integer, 2 k + 1 must be a divisor (an odd divisor that is at least 3) of 180.
The divisors of 180 are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 30, 36, 45, 60, 90, and 180,
with odd divisors 1, 3, 5, 9, 15, and 45.
Therefore, ignoring the 1, there are 5 possibilities for θ to be a laceable acute angle,
namely 60o , 36o , 20o , 12o , and 4 o .
ANSWER: (C)
Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of The Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

2002 Solutions
Cayley Contest (Grade 10)
for
The CENTRE for EDUCATION in MATHEMATICS and
COMPUTING
Awards

© 2002 Waterloo Mathematics Foundation

2002 Cayley Solutions 2

1. Expanding and simplifying,

5 x + 2( 4 + x ) = 5 x + (8 + 2 x )
= 7x + 8
ANSWER: (C)

2. Evaluating,
( )
(2 + 3)2 − 2 2 + 32 = 5 2 − ( 4 + 9)
= 25 − 13
= 12
ANSWER: (A)

3. If x = −3 ,
x 2 − 4( x − 5 ) = ( −3) − 4( −3 − 5 )
2

= 9 − 4( −8 )
= 41
ANSWER: (D)

4. Since n = 5
6 (240) , then 2
5n = ( )(240) = 13 (240) = 80 .
2 5
5 6 ANSWER: (B)

5. Using exponent laws,

2 −2 × 2 −1 × 2 0 × 21 × 2 2 = 2 −2 −1+ 0 +1+ 2 = 2 0 = 1.
Alternatively,
2 −2 × 2 −1 × 2 0 × 21 × 2 2 = 14 × 12 × 1 × 2 × 4 = 1.
ANSWER: (B)

6. In ∆ABC , A
∠ACB + 40o + 60o = 180o 40°
o
∠ACB = 80
60° 80°
Since BC is parallel to DE, ∠AED = ∠ACB = 80o . B C
So
x°
x o = 180o − ∠AED = 100o 80°
x = 100 D E F
ANSWER: (D)

7. Since the line has slope 12 , then for every 2 units we move to the right, the line rises by 1
unit. Therefore, ( −2 + 2, 4 + 1) = ( 0, 5 ) lies on the line. Thus the y-intercept is 5.
ANSWER: (A)
2002 Cayley Solutions 3

8. Since Megan’s scoring average was 18 points per game after 3 games, she must have scored
3 × 18 = 54 points over her first three games. Similarly, she must have scored 4 × 17 = 68
points over her first 4 games. So in the fourth game, she scored 68 − 54 = 14 points.
ANSWER: (E)

9. Since squares ABCD and DEFG have equal side lengths, A y° G

then DC = DE , ie. ∆CDE is isosceles. Therefore,
40° D
∠DEC = ∠DCE = 70o and so
∠CDE = 180o − 70o − 70o = 40o B F
70°
and
C E
y o = 360o − ∠ADC − ∠CDE − ∠GDE 70°

y o = 360o − 90o − 40o − 90o

y o = 140o
y = 140
ANSWER: (E)

10. Let the original number be x. Then

x−5 x−4
=
4 5
5( x − 5 ) = 4( x − 4 )
5 x − 25 = 4 x − 16
x=9
ANSWER: (C)

11. Point B is the y-intercept of y = 2 x − 8 , and so has y

coordinates ( 0, −8 ) from the form of the line. Point A is
y = 2x – 8
the x-intercept of y = 2 x − 8 , so we set y = 0 and obtain
0 = 2x − 8
2x = 8 O A(4, 0) x
x=4
and so A has coordinates ( 4, 0 ) . This tells us that
Area of ∆AOB = 12 (OA)(OB) = 12 ( 4 )( 8 ) = 16 . B(0, –8)

ANSWER: (B)

12. After the price is increased by 40%, the new price is 140% of $10.00, or $14.00.
Then after this price is reduced by 30%, the final price is 70% of $14.00, which is
0.7($14.00 ) = $9.80 . ANSWER: (A)
2002 Cayley Solutions 4

13. By Pythagoras, C
200 – x
BC 2 = 120 2 + 160 2 = 40 000
so BC = 200 m . 120 m F
Let FB = x . Then CF = 200 − x . From the given x
information,
AC + CF = AB + BF A 160 m B
120 + 200 − x = 160 + x
160 = 2 x
x = 80
Thus, the distance from F to B is 80 m. ANSWER: (D)

14. Solution 1
We factor out a common factor of a from the first two terms and a common factor of b from
the last two terms, and so
ac + ad + bc + bd = 68
a( c + d ) + b( c + d ) = 68
a( 4 ) + b( 4 ) = 68
4 (a + b ) = 68
a + b = 17
using the fact that c + d = 4 .
Then a + b + c + d = ( a + b ) + ( c + d ) = 17 + 4 = 21 .

Solution 2
We let c = d = 2 , since c + d = 4 , and then substitute these values to find that
ac + ad + bc + bd = 68
2 a + 2 a + 2b + 2b = 68
a + b = 17
Thus ( a + b) + (c + d ) = 17 + 4 = 21.
ANSWER: (D)

15. From A, we can travel to D, E or B.

If we travel A → D , we must then go D → E → F , following the arrows.
If we travel A → E , we must then go E → F .
If we travel A → B , we can then travel from B to E, C or F.
From E or C, we must travel directly to F.
Thus, there are 5 different paths from A to F.
ANSWER: (B)

16. Let the four consecutive positive integers be n , n + 1, n + 2 , n + 3 .

2002 Cayley Solutions 5

So we need to solve the equation n( n + 1)( n + 2 )( n + 3) = 358 800 .

Now n( n + 1)( n + 2 )( n + 3) is approximately equal to n 4 , so n 4 is close to 358 800 , and so n
is close to 4 358 800 ≈ 24.5 .
So we try 24( 25 )( 26 )( 27 ) = 421 200 which is too big, and so we try
23( 24 )( 25 )( 26 ) = 358 800 , which is the value we want.
So the sum is 23 + 24 + 25 + 26 = 98 .
ANSWER: (B)

17. A “double-single” number is of the form aab, where a and b are different digits. There are 9
possibilities for a (since a cannot be 0). For each of these possibilities, there are 9
possibilities for b (since b can be any digit from 0 to 9, provided that it doesn’t equal a). So
there are 9 × 9 = 81 possibilities in total.
ANSWER: (A)

18. Solution 1 A
Since ∆ADF and ∆ABC share ∠DAF and
AD AF 1
= =
AB AC 2 D F
then ∆ADF is similar to ∆ABC . So the ratio of their areas is the E
square of the ratio of their side lengths, that is
Area of ∆ADF = ( 12 )2 × Area of ∆ABC . B G C
Also from the similar triangles, ∠ADF = ∠ABC , so DF is parallel to BC. Therefore, since
AG is perpendicular to BC, then AG is also perpendicular to DE, so AE is an altitude in
∆ADF . Since ∆ADF is isosceles, DE = EF .
Therefore,
Area of ∆ADF = 12 × Area of ∆ADF
= 18 × Area of ∆ABC

Solution 2 A
Join G to D and G to F. This implies that we have four identical
isosceles triangles: ∆ADF , ∆GDF , ∆BDG , and ∆CFG . Each
of these identical triangles has an equal area. D F
E
Thus,
(
Area of ∆AEF = 12 41 × Area of ∆ABC )
= 18 × Area of ∆ABC B G C
ANSWER: (E)

19. Let x = 777 777 777 777 777 and y = 222 222 222 222 223 .
2002 Cayley Solutions 6

So the required quantity is x 2 − y 2 = ( x + y)( x − y) .

Now x + y = 1 000 000 000 000 000 and x − y = 555 555 555 555 554 .
Thus, x 2 − y 2 = 555 555 555 555 554 000 000 000 000 000 , ie. the sum of the digits is
14 × 5 + 4 = 74 .
ANSWER: (C)

20. Let the final depth of the water be h.

The total initial volume of water is
π ( 4 m ) (10 m ) = 160π m 3 .
2

When the depths of water are equal,

h
π ( 4 m ) h + π ( 6 m ) h = 160π m 3
2 2

(52π m )h = 160π m
2 3
4 6
160
h= m
52
40
h= m
13
ANSWER: (E)

21. Let r be the radius of the circle. A

Since ∠AOB = 90o , then this sector is one quarter of the 4
whole circle, so the circumference of the circle is 2π
4 × 2π = 8π .
O
So 2πr = 8π , or r = 4 .
Thus the area of sector AOB is 14 πr 2 = 14 π (16 ) = 4π . B

ANSWER: (A)

22. When we add up a number of consecutive integers, the sum of these integers will be equal to
the number of integers being added times the average of the integers being added.
Let N be the number of consecutive integers being added, and let A be the average of the
consecutive integers being added. Thus, NA = 75 .
Before we determine the possibilities for N, we make the observation that N must be less than
12, since the sum of the first 12 positive integers is 78, and thus the sum of any 12 or more
consecutive positive integers is at least 78.

Case 1: N is odd.
2002 Cayley Solutions 7

In this case, A (the average) is an integer (there is a “middle number” among the integers
being added). Therefore, since NA = 75 , N must be an odd positive factor of 75 which is
bigger than 1 and less than 12, ie. N is one of 3 or 5. So there are two possibilities when N is
odd, namely 24 + 25 + 26 = 75 and 13 + 14 + 15 + 16 + 17 = 75 .

Case 2: N is even.
In this case A will be half-way between two integers.
2l + 1
Set N = 2 k and A = , where k and l are integers.
2
Then
 2l + 1
2k  = 75
 2 
k( 2l + 1) = 75
Thus k is a factor of 75, and so N = 2 k is 2 times a factor of 75, ie. N could be 2, 6 or 10. So
the possibilities here are 37 + 38 = 75 , 10 + 11 + 12 + 13 + 14 + 15 = 75 , and
3 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 8 + 9 + 10 + 11 + 12 = 75 .

So there are 5 ways in total.

ANSWER: (E)

23. By Pythagoras in ∆AFB , A 50 D

AF 2 + 9 2 = 412
40 30
AF = 40 52
41 F
By Pythagoras in ∆AFD ,
9 12
FD 2 + 40 2 = 50 2
FD = 30 B E C
Since AD is parallel to BC, ∠FAD = ∠FEB . Therefore, ∆AFD is similar to ∆EFB , so
AF EF 40 EF
= or = or EF = 12 .
FD FB 30 9
Since AE is perpendicular to BD and DC is perpendicular to BD, then AE is parallel to DC, so
AECD is a parallelogram. Thus, DC = AE = 52 .
Now consider quadrilateral FECD. E 12 F
This quadrilateral is a trapezoid, so
Area of FECD = 12 ( EF + CD )( FD ) 30
= 1
2 (12 + 52)( 30)
= 960 C 52 D
ANSWER: (C)
2002 Cayley Solutions 8

24. We examine a vertical cross-section of the cylinder and the spheres that passes through the
vertical axis of the cylinder and the centres of the spheres. (There is such a cross-section
since the spheres will be pulled into this position by gravity.)
Let the centres of the spheres be O1 and O2 , as shown.
Join the centres of the spheres to each other and to the respective points of tangency of the
the spheres to the walls of the cylinder.
Then O1O2 = 6 + 9 = 15 ( O1O2 passes through the point of tangency of the two spheres),
O1P = 6 and O2Q = 9 , using the radii of the spheres.
Next, draw ∆O1RO2 so that RO1 is perpendicular to O1P and ∠O1RO2 = 90o .
Then looking at the width of the cylinder, since PO1 = 6
and O2Q = 9 , we have
PO1 + RO2 + O2Q = 27 6 6
P 6 O2
RO2 = 12 9
O1 Q
R 12 9
27
By Pythagoras in ∆O1RO2 , we see that O1R = 9 .
Then the depth of the water will be
Radius of lower sphere + RO1 + Radius of higher sphere = 9 + 9 + 6 = 24 .
So
Volume of water = (Volume of cylinder to height of 24 ) − (Volume of spheres)

=π ( 272 )2 (24 ) − 43 π (6)3 − 43 π (9)3

= 4374π − 288π − 972π
= 3114π
Therefore, the volume of water required is 3114π cubic units.
ANSWER: (D)

25. Subtracting the first equation from the second,

k 2 x − kx − 6 = 0

(k 2
)
−k x=6

[ k( k − 1)]x = 6
Since we want both k and x to be integers, then k ( k − 1) is a factor of 6, ie. is equal to one of
±1, ±2, ±3, ±6 . Now k ( k − 1) is the product of two consecutive integers, so on this basis we
can eliminate six of these eight possibilities to obtain
k( k − 1) = 2 or k( k − 1) = 6
which yields
k2 − k − 2 = 0 or k2 − k − 6 = 0
and so k = 2, −1, 3, −2 .
2002 Cayley Solutions 9

We now make a table of values of k, x and y to check when y is also an integer. (We note
that from the first equation, y = 15 ( kx + 7 ).)

k x y
2 3 13
5
4
−1 3 5
3 1 2
−2 1 1

So there are two values of k for which the lines intersect at a lattice point.
ANSWER: (B)
Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of The Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

2001 Solutions
Cayley Contest (Grade 10)
for
The CENTRE for EDUCATION in MATHEMATICS and
COMPUTING
Awards

© 2001 Waterloo Mathematics Foundation

2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 2

Part A

56 – 3 4
1. The value of is
63
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 6 (D) 12 (E) 31

Solution
By evaluating the numerator and denominator we have,
56 – 3 4 30 – 12 18
! ! ! 2.
63 9 9
ANSWER: (B)

1 1
2. When of 15 is multiplied by of 10, the answer is
4 3
25 85 99 25
(A) 5 (B) (C) (D) (E)
2 12 8 7

Solution
Evaluating gives,

? 1
4 A?
15 3 10
1
A
5 1 5
! 15 10
1
4 3 2 1

! 25
2 ANSWER: (B)

1
3. If x ! , which of the following has the largest value?
4

1 1
(A) x (B) x 2 (C) x (D) (E) x
2 x

Solution
If we calculate the value of the given expressions, we get

 
2 1 1 1
1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) 1 (E)
4 4 2 4 4
4
1 1 1
! ! ! 1v 4 !
16 8 2
!4
ANSWER: (D)

4. In a school, 30 boys and 20 girls entered the Cayley competition. Certificates were awarded to 10%
of the boys and 20% of the girls. Of the students who participated, the percentage that received
2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 3

certificates was

(A) 14 (B) 15 (C) 16 (D) 30 (E) 50

Solution
If 30 boys entered the Cayley competition and 10% of them received certificates, this implies that
0.1 30 or 3 boys received certificates. Of the 20 girls who entered the competition 0.2 20 or 4
girls received certificates. This implies that 7 students in total out of 50 received certificates.
Thus 14% of the students in total received certificates. ANSWER: (A)

5. In the diagram, KL is parallel to MN , AB ! BC , and K A L

’ KAC ! 50r . The value of x is 50r xr

(A) 40 (B) 65 (C) 25

(D) 100 (E) 80 M N
C B

Solution
Since KL is parallel to MN , ’ ACB and ’ KAC are alternate angles. Thus, ’ ACB ! 50r .
We are given that ( BCA is isosceles, so ’ BCA ! ’ BAC ! 50r . We know that since angles KAC ,
BAC and LAB have a sum of 180r,
50r  50r  xr ! 180r
x ! 80.
ANSWER: (E)

6. Dean scored a total of 252 points in 28 basketball games. Ruth played 10 fewer games than Dean.
Her scoring average was 0.5 points per game higher than Dean’s scoring average. How many points,
in total, did Ruth score?

(A) 153 (B) 171 (C) 180 (D) 266 (E) 144

Solution
252
If Dean scored 252 points in 28 games this implies that he averages or 9 points per game.
28
Ruth must then have averaged 9.5 points in each of the 18 games she played. In total she scored
9.5 v 18 or 171 points. ANSWER: (B)
2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 4

7. In the diagram, square ABCD has side length 2, with M the A B

midpoint of BC and N the midpoint of CD. The area of the
shaded region BMND is
4 2
(A) 1 (B) 2 2 (C) M
3
3 3
(D) (E) 4 – 2
2 2

D N C

Solution
The area of ( MNC is
1
2
1 1 ! .
1
2
Since ( BDC is half the square, it will have an area of 2.
Since the shaded region has an area equal to that of ( BDC minus the area of ( MNC , its area will
1 3
be 2 – ! . ANSWER: (D)
2 2

8. The line L crosses the x-axis at  – 8, 0 . The area of the y

shaded region is 16. What is the slope of the line L?
1 1 L
(A) (B) 4 (C) –
2 2
(D) 2 (E) – 2
(– 8, 0)
x

Solution y
If the area of the shaded region is 16 and its base has a
length of 8, its height must then be 4. L
Thus we have the changes noted in the diagram.
(0, 4)
4–0 1 1
Thus the slope is ! or because the line
0 –  – 8 2 2 (– 8, 0)
x
slopes down from right to left and the line has a rise of 4
and a run of 8.
1
Area ! – 8 4 ! 16
2
ANSWER: (A)

?  A !1018, the value of x is

2
9. If 103 10 x

(A) 2 (B) 12 (C) 6 (D) 1 (E) 3

2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 5

Solution
If we simplify using laws of exponents, we will have,
103 x
2
! 1018

10 6  2 x ! 1018.
In order that the left and right side be equal, it is necessary that exponents be equal.
Thus, 6  2 x ! 18
2 x ! 12
x ! 6.
ANSWER: (C)

10. The sum of five consecutive integers is 75. The sum of the largest and smallest of these five
integers is

(A) 15 (B) 25 (C) 26 (D) 30 (E) 32

Solution
There are a variety of ways of approaching this problem. The easiest is to represent the integers as
x – 2, x – 1, x, x  1, and x  2.
Thus,  x – 2   x – 1  x   x  1   x  2 ! 75
5 x ! 75
x ! 15.
The five consecutive integers are 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17.
The required sum is 13  17 ! 30 . ANSWER: (D)

Part B

11. When a positive integer N is divided by 60, the remainder is 49. When N is divided by 15, the
remainder is

(A) 0 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5 (E) 8

Solution
This problem can be done in a number of ways. The easiest way is to consider that if N is divided by
60 to achieve a remainder of 49, it must be a number of the form, 60 k  49 , k ! 0, 1, 2, ....
This implies that the smallest number to meet the requirements is 49 itself. If we divide 49 by 15 we
get a remainder of 4. Or, if k ! 1 in our formula then the next number to satisfy the requirements is
109 which when divided by 15 gives 4 as the remainder. ANSWER: (C)

12. The 6 members of an executive committee want to call a meeting. Each of them phones 6 different
2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 6

people, who in turn each calls 6 other people. If no one is called more than once, how many people
will know about the meeting?

(A) 18 (B) 36 (C) 216 (D) 252 (E) 258

Solution
If 6 people each call 6 other people in the first round of calls, there will be 36 people making 6 calls
each for an additional 216 calls. Altogether, there will be the original 6, followed by 36 who in turn
phone another 216.
In total, there are 6  36  216 ! 258. ANSWER: (E)

13. The sequences 3, 20, 37, 54, 71, … and 16, 27, 38, 49, 60, 71, … each have 71 as a common term.
The next term that these sequences have in common is

(A) 115 (B) 187 (C) 258 (D) 445 (E) 1006

Solution
The first sequence increases by a constant value of 17 and the second by a constant value of 11.
After 71, the next common term will be 71 plus the Lowest Common Multiple of 11 and 17. Since
the L.C.M. of 11 and 17 is 187 the next term will be 71  187 ! 258 . ANSWER: (C)

14. In the rectangle shown, the value of a – b is y

(a, 13)
(A) – 3 (B) –1 (C) 0
(D) 3 (E) 1 (15, b)

(5, 5)

(9, 2)
x

Solution
To go from the point 5, 5 to the point 9, 2 we must move over 4 and down 3.
Since we are dealing with a rectangle, the same must be true for  a, 13 and 15, b .
Thus, a  4 ! 15 and 13 – 3 ! b . From this, a ! 11 and b ! 10. So a – b ! 11 – 10 ! 1.
ANSWER: (E)

2 1
15. A small island has of its surface covered by forest and of the remainder of its surface by sand
5 4
dunes. The island also has 90 hectares covered by farm land. If the island is made up of only forest,
sand dunes and farm land, what is the total area of the island, to the nearest hectare?

(A) 163 (B) 120 (C) 200 (D) 138 (E) 257
2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 7

Solution
If 2 of an island is covered by forest then 3
of the island is made up of sand dunes and farm land.
5 5
1 3 3 2 3 11
Since v ! is made up of sand dunes this implies that  ! of the island is made up of
4 5 20 5 20 20
9
forest and sand dunes. Thus of the island, or 90 hectares, is made up of farm land.
20
20 10
Thus, the island must be 91
! 90 or 200 hectares in total. ANSWER: (C)

x –1 5 x4
16. How many integer values of x satisfy ?
3 7 5
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 3 (E) 4

Solution
If we multiply all three fractions by 35 7 we have,
 x –1 5 x4
3 5 7 3 5 7 3 5  7
3 7 5
35x –1 75 21 x  4
In order to satisfy this inequality then,
35 x – 1 75 and 21 x  4 " 75
35 x – 35 75 and 21x  84 " 75
35 x 110 21x " – 9
1 9
x 37 x"–
21
The only integers to satisfy both conditions are then in the set _0, 1, 2, 3a . ANSWER: (E)

17. ABCDEFGH is a cube having a side length of 2. P is the A B

midpoint of EF, as shown. The area of ( APB is
D C
(A) 8 (B) 3 (C) 6
(D) 2 (E) 32 H
G

E P F
2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 8

Solution
By symmetry, the lengths of AP and BP will be equal, and P
AP ! AD2  DE 2  EP 2 ! 2 2  2 2  12 ! 3.
If M is the midpoint of AB, then PM is perpendicular to 3 3
AB. By Pythagoras, MP ! 32 – 12 ! 8 .
So the area of ( APB is

Area ! 2 8 ! 8 .
1
2
A 1 M 1 B

ANSWER: (A)

18. How many five-digit positive integers, divisible by 9, can be written using only the digits 3 and 6?

(A) 5 (B) 2 (C) 12 (D) 10 (E) 8

Solution
If a five-digit number is composed of only 3’s and 6’s, there are just two cases to consider because
these are the only ways that the digital sum can be a multiple of 9.

Case 1 one 6, four 3’s

In this case, there are five numbers: 63 333, 36 333, 33 633, 33 363 and 33 336.

Case 2 one 3, four 6’s

In this case there are five numbers: 36 666, 63 666 , 66 366, 66 636 and 66 663.

In total there are 10 possible numbers. ANSWER: (D)

19. Three different numbers are chosen such that when each of the numbers is added to the average of
the remaining two, the numbers 65, 69 and 76 result. The average of the three original numbers is

(A) 34 (B) 35 (C) 36 (D) 37 (E) 38

Solution
Let the three numbers be a, b and c.
We construct the first equation to be,
bc
a ! 65.
2
Or, 2 a  b  c ! 130 .
Similarly we construct the two other equations to be,
a  2b  c ! 138
and a  b  2c ! 152.
If we add the three equations we obtain,
2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 9

4 a  4b  4c ! 420 .
4 a  b  c 420
The average is ! .
12 12
abc
Or, ! 35. ANSWER: (B)
3

20. Square ABCD with side length 2 is inscribed in a circle, as

shown. Using each side of the square as a diameter, semi- A B
circular arcs are drawn. The area of the shaded region
outside the circle and inside the semi-circles is

(A) T (B) 4 (C) 2 T – 2

(D) T  1 (E) 2 T – 4 D C

Solution
The side length of the square is 2 and thus the diameter of the circle has length 2 2 which is also the
length of the diagonal AC (or BD). The area of the circle is thus T  2 2 ! 2 T . Since the side
length of the square is 2, it will have an area of 4. From this, we calculate the area of the circle outside
the square to be 2 T – 4 . To calculate the shaded area, we first calculate the area of each semi-circle.
Each of the semi circles has a radius of 1 meaning that each semi-circle will have an area of
2
1
? A
T1 2 ! T . In total, the four semi-circles have an area of 2T . Thus the shaded area has an area
1
2
of 2 T – 2 T – 4 ! 4 . ANSWER: (B)

Part C

21. Point P is on the line y ! 5 x  3. The coordinates of point Q are 3, – 2 . If M is the midpoint of
PQ, then M must lie on the line
5 7 1 7 5 1
(A) y ! x – (B) y ! 5 x  1 (C) y ! – x – (D) y ! x  (E) y ! 5 x – 7
2 2 5 5 2 2
2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 10

We start by drawing a diagram and labelling the intercepts.

y
Solution 1
Since the point P is on the line y ! 5 x  3, select P0, 3 as
a point on this line.
3  0 – 2  3¸
The midpoint of PQ is M ¨ ! M¨ , ¸ .
3 1 P(0, 3)
,
ª 2 2 º ª 2 2º
The required line must contain M and be midway between
the given point and y ! 5 x  3. The only possible line
– , 0
3
5
M ,
3 1
2 2

,
x
3 1
meeting this requirement is the line containing M
2 2
and which has a slope of 5. The required line will this have
as its equation Q(3, – 2)
1
y– !5 x–
2  3
2
or, y ! 5x – 7 .

y = 5x + 3

Solution 2
Let a general point on the line y ! 5 x  3 be represented by  a, 5a  3 . Also, let a point on the
required line be M  x, y . Since M  x, y is the midpoint of PQ then
a3 5a  3   – 2
(1) x ! and (2) y !
2 2
5a  1
y!
2
2y – 1
Solving (1) for a, we have a ! 2 x – 3 and solving (2) for a, we have ! a.
5
2y – 1
Equating gives, 2 x – 3 !
5
10 x – 15 ! 2 y – 1
or, y ! 5x – 7 . ANSWER: (E)

22. What is the shortest distance between two circles, the first having centre A5, 3 and radius 12, and
the other with centre B2, – 1 and radius 6?

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 11

Solution
We start by drawing the two circles where the larger circle y
has centre A5, 3 and the smaller circle has centre
B2, – 1 . A line is drawn from A, through B to meet the
circumference of the smaller circle at C and the
circumference of the larger circle at D. The length CD is
the desired length. The length from A to D is given to be A(5, 3)
12 and the length from B to C is 6. We calculate the length
x
of AB to be, ?3 –  –1 A2  5 – 2 2 ! 16  9 ! 5 . To B(2, –1)
C
find CD, we calculate as follows,
CD ! AD –  AB  BC D

! 12 – 5  6
! 1.
ANSWER: (A)

23. A sealed bottle, which contains water, has been constructed by attaching a cylinder of radius 1 cm to
a cylinder of radius 3 cm, as shown in Figure A. When the bottle is right side up, the height of the
water inside is 20 cm, as shown in the cross-section of the bottle in Figure B. When the bottle is
upside down, the height of the liquid is 28 cm, as shown in Figure C. What is the total height, in
cm, of the bottle?

height of
liquid

20 cm 28 cm

Figure A Figure B Figure C

(A) 29 (B) 30 (C) 31 (D) 32 (E) 48

Solution
We’ll start by representing the height of the large cylinder as h1 and the height of the small cylinder
as h2 . For simplicity, we’ll let x ! h1  h2 .
If the bottom cylinder is completely filled and the top cylinder is only partially filled the top cylinder
will have a cylindrical space that is not filled. This cylindrical space will have a height equal to x – 20
and a volume equal to, T1 2  x – 20 .
Similarly, if we turn the cylinder upside down there will be a cylindrical space unfilled that will have a
2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 12

height equal to x – 28 and a volume equal to, T3 2  x – 28 .

Since these two unoccupied spaces must be equal, we then have,
T1 2  x – 20 ! T3 2  x – 28
x – 20 ! 9 x – 252
8 x ! 232
x ! 29.
Therefore, the total height is 29. ANSWER: (A)

24. A palindrome is a positive integer whose digits are the same when read forwards or backwards. For
example, 2882 is a four-digit palindrome and 49194 is a five-digit palindrome. There are pairs of
four-digit palindromes whose sum is a five-digit palindrome. One such pair is 2882 and 9339. How
many such pairs are there?

(A) 28 (B) 32 (C) 36 (D) 40 (E) 44

Solution
Our first observation is that since we are adding two four-digit palindromes to form a five-digit
palindrome then the following must be true,
abba
c d d c.
1e f e1
(i.e. the first digit of the 5-digit palindrome is 1.)
From this, we can see that a  c ! 11 since a  c has a units digit of 1 and 10 a  c 20 .
We first note that there are four possibilities for a and c. We list the possibilities:

a 2 3 4 5
c 9 8 7 6

Note that there are only four possibilities here.

(If we extended this table, we would get an additional four possibilities which would be duplicates
of these four, with a and c reversed.)
Let us consider one case, say a ! 2 and c ! 9.
2bb2
9dd9
1e f e 1
From this, we can only get palindromes in two ways. To see this we note that e is either 1 or 2
depending on whether we get a carry from the previous column (we see this looking at the
thousands digit of 1 e f e 1). If e ! 1, then b  d has no carry and so looking at the tens digit
e ! 1, we see that b  d ! 0 to get this digit.
2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 13

If e ! 2, we do get a carry from b  d , so looking again at the tens digit e ! 2, we see that
b  d ! 11.

Possibility 1 b!d!0
Since there are only four possibilities for a and c and just one way of selecting b and d so that
b  d ! 0 for each possibility, there are just four possibilities.

Possibility 2 b  d ! 11
For each of the four possible ways of choosing a and c, there are eight ways of choosing b and d
so that b  d ! 11 thus giving 32 possibilities.
This gives a total of 4  32 ! 36 possibilities.
ANSWER: (C)

25. The circle with centre A has radius 3 and is tangent to y

both the positive x-axis and positive y-axis, as shown.
Also, the circle with centre B has radius 1 and is tangent
to both the positive x-axis and the circle with centre A.
The line L is tangent to both circles. The y-intercept of L
line L is

(A) 3  6 3 (B) 10  3 2 (C) 8 3 A

(D)10  2 3 (E) 9  3 3 B
x

Solution
We start by drawing a line from point C that will pass y
through A and B. From A and B, we drop D(0, d)
perpendiculars to the points of tangency on the x-axis
and label these points as E and F as shown. We also
drop a perpendicular from A to the y-axis which makes
AH ! AE ! 3.

H 3 A

3 B
1
x
O(0, 0) 3 E F C(c, 0)
2001 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 14

Extracting (CAE from the diagram and labelling with A

the given information we would have the following 4
3 B
noted in the diagram. 1 x
E F C

If we represent the distance from C to B as x and recognize that (CBF is similar to (CAE,
x x4
!
1 3
x ! 2.
In (CBF, FC 2 ! 2 2 – 12 ! 3
FC ! 3 ,  FC " 0 .
This implies that ’BCF ! 30r and ’OCD ! 60r . Therefore EF ! 2 3 , from similar triangles
again.

This now gives us the diagram shown. D(0, d)


Thus, d ! 3 3  3 3
! 3 3  9. 30r

60r
O(0, 0) 33 3 C(c, 0)
ANSWER: (E)

✜✜✜✜✜
 Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of The Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

2000 Solutions
Cayley Contest (Grade 10)

for
The CENTRE for EDUCATION in MATHEMATICS and
COMPUTING
Awards

© 2000 Waterloo Mathematics Foundation

2000 Cayley Solutions 2

Part A:

1. The value of 2(5 – 2) – 52 is

(A) –19 (B) – 4 (C) 1 (D) –11 (E) –17

Solution
When evaluating this expression, we use ‘order of operations’ in the standard way. Doing so, we
find,
2(5 – 2) – 52
= 2(3) – 25
= 6 – 25
= –19.
ANSWER: (A)

2. If the following sequence of five arrows repeats itself continuously, what arrow would be in the 48th
position?

, , , ,

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Solution
Since this sequence repeats itself, once it has completed nine cycles it will be the same as starting at
the beginning. Thus the 48th arrow will be the same as the third one.
ANSWER: (C)

3. In the given diagram, the numbers shown are the lengths of 2

the sides. What is the perimeter of the figure?
3
(A) 13 (B) 18 (C) 22
(D) 21 (E) 19
2

6
2000 Cayley Solutions 3

Solution 2
The easiest way to determine the length of the missing side
is by drawing in a line to form two rectangles. Since 3 3
opposite sides in a rectangle are equal we can label the 4 2
sides as shown. The required perimeter is thus
2 + 3 + 2 + 6 + 2 + 4 + 3 = 22 . 2 2

6
ANSWER: (C)

4. A farmer has 7 cows, 8 sheep and 6 goats. How many more goats should be bought so that half of
her animals will be goats?

(A) 18 (B) 15 (C) 21 (D) 9 (E) 6

Solution 1
If the cows and sheep were themselves goats we would have 15 goats. This means that she would
need nine extra goats.

Solution 2
Let the number of goats added be x.
6+ x 1
Therefore, = .
21 + x 2
Cross multiplying gives, 2(6 + x ) = 21 + x
12 + 2 x = 21 + x
x = 9.
As in solution 1, she would add 9 goats. ANSWER: (D)

5. The first four triangular numbers 1, 3, 6, and 10 are

illustrated in the diagram. What is the tenth triangular
number?
1 3 6 10
(A) 55 (B) 45 (C) 66
(D) 78 (E) 50

Solution
From our diagram, it can be seen that the fifth triangular number is found by adding a row with five
5×6
dots. This number is thus, 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 = = 15 . The sixth triangular number is
2
6×7
1+ 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 = = 21 . If we follow this to its conclusion, the nth triangular number is
2
2000 Cayley Solutions 4

(n)(n + 1) (10)(11)
1+ 2 + 3 +K + n = . The tenth triangular number will be = 55 .
2 2
ANSWER: (A)

6. The sum of the digits of an even ten digit integer is 89. The last digit is

(A) 0 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 6 (E) 8

Solution
89 is a large number to be the sum of the digits of a ten digit number. In fact, the largest possible
digital sum is 10 × 9 or 90. Since 89 is only 1 less than 90, the number in question must be
composed of nine 9’s and one 8. In order that the number be divisible by 2, the last digit must be 8.
ANSWER: (E)

7. If AD is a straight line segment and E is a point on AD, C

determine the measure of ∠CED. B
(10 x – 2)°
20° (3x + 6)°
(A) 20° (B) 12° (C) 42° A D
E
(D) 30° (E) 45°

Solution
Since there are 180° in a straight line, we can form the equation,
20° + (10 x – 2)° + (3 x + 6)° = 180°
20 + 10 x – 2 + 3 x + 6 = 180 (in degrees)
13 x + 24 = 180
13 x = 156
x = 12.
Therefore ∠CED = (3(12) + 6)° = 42° . ANSWER: (C)

1 3
8. On a 240 kilometre trip, Corey’s father drove of the distance. His mother drove of the total
2 8
distance and Corey drove the remaining distance. How many kilometres did Corey drive?

(A) 80 (B) 40 (C) 210 (D) 30 (E) 55

Solution
1 3
If Corey’s father and mother drove and the total distance, respectively, altogether they drove
2 8
1 3 7 1
+ or th the total distance. Thus Corey must have driven × 240 or 30 kilometres.
2 8 8 8
ANSWER: (D)
2000 Cayley Solutions 5

9. Evaluate ( – 50) + ( – 48) + ( – 46) + ... + 54 + 56 .

(A) 156 (B) 10 (C) 56 (D) 110 (E) 162

Solution
If we add some terms to this series, we would have the following:
( – 50) + ( – 48) + ( – 46) + K + 48 + 50 + 52 + 54 + 56 .
Each of the negative integers has its opposite included in the sum and each pair of these sums is 0.
This implies that, ( – 50) + ( – 48) + ( – 46) + ... + 46 + 48 + 50 is 0. The overall sum is now just
52 + 54 + 56 or 162. ANSWER: (E)

10. The ages of three contestants in the Cayley Contest are 15 years, 9 months; 16 years, 1 month; and 15
years, 8 months. Their average (mean) age is

(A) 15 years, 8 months (B) 15 years, 9 months (C) 15 years, 10 months

(D) 15 years, 11 months (E) 16 years

Solution 1
Consider one of the ages, say the youngest, as a base age. The other two contestants are one month
0 +1+ 5
and five months older respectively. Since = 2 , this implies that the average age is two
3
months greater than the youngest. This gives an average age of 15 years, 10 months.

Solution 2
This second solution involves a little more calculation but still gives the same correct answer. Since
there are twelve months in a year, the age of the first contestant, in months, is 15 × 12 + 9 or 189
months. Similarly, the ages of the other two students would be 193 and 188 months. The average
189 + 193 + 188
age would thus be or 190 months. The average age is then 15 years, 10 months
3
because 190 = 12 × 15 + 10 . ANSWER: (C)

Part B: Each correct answer is worth 6.

11. A store had a sale on T-shirts. For every two T-shirts purchased at the regular price, a third T-shirt
was bought for $1.00. Twelve T-shirts were bought for $120.00. What was the regular price for
one T-shirt?

(A) $10.00 (B) $13.50 (C) $14.00 (D) $14.50 (E) $15.00
2000 Cayley Solutions 6

Solution
We will start this question by representing the regular price of one T-shirt as x dollars. If a person
bought a ‘lot’ of three T-shirts, they would thus pay (2 x + 1) dollars. Since the cost of twelve
T-shirts is $120.00, this implies that a single ‘lot’ would cost $30. This allows us to write the
equation, 2 x + 1 = 30 or x = 14.50 . The regular price of a T-shirt is $14.50.
ANSWER: (D)

12. Natural numbers are equally spaced around a circle in order from 1 to n. If the number 5 is directly
opposite the number 14, then n is

(A) 14 (B) 15 (C) 16 (D) 18 (E) 20

Solution
If 5 is opposite 14 then each of the eight numbers between and including 6 and 13 are each opposite a
natural number. These eight numbers would be matched giving a total of 2 × 8 or 16 numbers. If we
add 5 and 14 the total is 18.
ANSWER: (D)

13. The average of 19 consecutive integers is 99. The largest of these integers is

(A) 118 (B) 108 (C) 109 (D) 117 (E) 107

Solution
If the average of the 19 consecutive numbers is 99 the middle number is 99 which is the tenth
number. If the tenth number is 99, the nineteenth number will be 108.
ANSWER: (B)

14. A positive integer is to be placed in each box. The product of any four adjacent integers is always
120. What is the value of x?

2 4 x 3

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

Solution
Since the product of any four integers is 120, a1a2 a3a4 = a2 a3a4 a5 = 120 where an represents the
number in the nth box. Therefore, a1 = a5 and similarly a2 = a6 , a3 = a7 , a4 = a8 or more generally,
an = an +4 . Thus the boxes can be filled as follows:
2000 Cayley Solutions 7

x 4 2 3 x 4 2 3 x 4 2 3 x 4

Therefore, ( 4)(2)(3)( x ) = 120

120
x= = 5. ANSWER: (E)
24

15. Eight squares with the same centre have parallel sides and are
one unit apart. The two largest squares are shown. If the
largest square has a perimeter of 96, what is the perimeter of
the smallest square?
1
1
(A) 40 (B) 68 (C) 32
(D) 64 (E) 89

Solution
96
Since the largest square has perimeter 96, it has a side length of or 24. From the diagram, the side
4
length of the next square is 24 – 2 or 22. Continuing thus, the side lengths of the eight squares form
the sequence: 24, 22, 20, 18, 16, 14, 12, 10. The side length of the eighth square will be 10 giving a
perimeter of 4 × 10 = 40 .

ANSWER: (A)

16. In the diagram, ABCD is a rectangle with AD = 13, DE = 5 A D

and EA = 12 . The area of ABCD is

(A) 39 (B) 60 (C) 52

(D) 30 (E) 25
B E C

Solution
Since 132 = 12 2 + 52 we use the converse of Pythagorus’ A F D
Theorem to conclude that ∠ AED = 90° . B A
The area of ∆ AED is then (5)(12) = 30 . Through E, we
1
2 B A
draw a line parallel to CD and BA. Since the area of
∆ FDE equals the area of ∆CDE we label each of these B E C
areas A. Similarly, the area of ∆ AFE equals the area of
∆ BAE and so each of these areas can be labelled B. Since
A + B = 30 , the area of the rectangle is 2( A + B) or
2(30) = 60 .
ANSWER: (B)
2000 Cayley Solutions 8

17. In the regular hexagon ABCDEF , two of the diagonals, FC A B

and BD, intersect at G. The ratio of the area of quadrilateral
FEDG to ∆ BCG is G
F C

(A) 3 3:1 (B) 4 :1 (C) 6 :1

(D) 2 3 :1 (E) 5:1 E D

Solution 1
Join E to B and D to A as shown. Also join E to A and A B
draw a line parallel to AE through the point of intersection
of BE and AD. Quadrilateral FEDG is now made up of G
F C
five triangles each of which has the same area as ∆ BCG .
The required ratio is 5:1.
E D

Solution 2
For convenience, assume that each side of the hexagon has B
a length of 2 units. Each angle in the hexagon equals
120o so ∠ BCG = (120°) = 60° . Now label ∆ BCG as
1
2
2
3
shown. Using the standard ratios for a 30° – 60° – 90°
triangle we have BG = 3 and GC = 1. 60°
G 1 C

The area of ∆ BCG = (1) 3 =

1 3
. Dividing the
2 2 F 1 2 G
quadrilateral FGDE as illustrated, it will have an area of

( ) 1
2 3 + (1) 3 =
2
( ) 5 3
2
.
3 3

5 3 3 E D
The required ratio is : or 5:1, as in solution 1.
2 2
ANSWER: (E)

18. If a, b and c are distinct positive integers such that abc = 16, then the largest possible value of
a b – b c + c a is

(A) 253 (B) 63 (C) 249 (D) 263 (E) 259

Solution
2000 Cayley Solutions 9

If a, b and c are distinct then the correct factorization is 16 = 1 × 2 × 8 . Since a, b and c must be some
permutation of 1, 2 and 8 there are exactly six possibilities which give the values –247, – 61, 65, 249,
263, and 63. Of these, 81 − 12 + 28 or 263 is the largest.
ANSWER: (D)

19. A metal rod with ends A and B is welded at its B

middle, C, to a cylindrical drum of diameter 12.
The rod touches the ground at A making a 30° C
angle. The drum starts to roll along AD in the
direction of D. How far along AD must the D 30° A
drum roll for B to touch the ground?

(A) π (B) 2π (C) 3π (D) 4π (E) 5π

Solution
The drum rolls so that point C moves to C ′ .
C′ C

30° 30°
D M A

Since a line drawn from the centre of the circle makes angles of 90° with tangents drawn to a circle,
∠COM = 360° – 90° – 90° – 30° = 150° . By symmetry, ∠ C ′OM = 150° and thus
∠ C ′OC = 360° – 150° – 150° = 60° . Since ∠ C ′OC = 60° , this implies
that point C will have to travel 1 th the circumference of the circle or 1 122 π = 2π
6 ( ) .
61
ANSWER: (B)

20. Twenty pairs of integers are formed using each of the integers 1, 2, 3, ..., 40 once. The positive
difference between the integers in each pair is 1 or 3. (For example, 5 can be paired with 2, 4, 6 or 8.)
If the resulting differences are added together, the greatest possible sum is

(A) 50 (B) 54 (C) 56 (D) 58 (E) 60

2000 Cayley Solutions 10

Solution
Since we have twenty pairings, it is possible to have nineteen differences of 3 and one difference of 1.
The maximum sum of these differences is thus, 3(19) + 1 = 58 . The pairings can be achieved in the
following way: { (1, 4) , (2, 5) , (3, 6) , (7, 10) , (8, 11) , (9, 12) , (13, 16) , (14, 17) , (15, 18) , (19, 22) ,
(20, 23) , (21, 24) , (25, 28) , (26, 29) , (27, 30), (31, 34) , (32, 35) , (33, 36) , (37, 40) , (38, 39) }. Note
that there is just one pair, (38, 39) , that differs by one.
ANSWER: (D)

Part C: Each correct answer is worth 8.

21. A wooden rectangular prism has dimensions 4 by 5 by 6. This solid is painted green and then cut
into 1 by 1 by 1 cubes. The ratio of the number of cubes with exactly two green faces to the number
of cubes with three green faces is

(A) 9 : 2 (B) 9 : 4 (C) 6 :1 (D) 3:1 (E) 5: 2

Solution
The cubes with two green faces are the cubes along the edges, not counting the corner cubes. In each
dimension, we lost two cubes to the corners so we then have four edges with 4 cubes, four with 3
cubes and four with 2 cubes. The total number of cubes with paint on two edges is then
4( 4) + 4(3) + 4(2) = 36 . The number of cubes that have paint on three sides are the corner cubes of
which there are eight. The required ratio is then 36:8 or 9:2.
ANSWER: (A)

22. An ant walks inside a 18 cm by 150 cm rectangle. The ant’s path follows straight lines which always
make angles of 45° to the sides of the rectangle. The ant starts from a point X on one of the shorter
sides. The first time the ant reaches the opposite side, it arrives at the midpoint. What is the distance,
in centimetres, from X to the nearest corner of the rectangle?
(A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) 8 (E) 9

Solution
If we took a movie of the ant’s path and then played it backwards, the ant would now start at the point
E and would then end up at point X. Since the ant now ‘starts’ at a point nine cm from the corner, the
‘first’ part of his journey is from E to B. This amounts to nine cm along the length of the rectangle
since ∆ BAE is an isosceles right-angled triangle. This process continues as illustrated, until the ant
reaches point C. By the time the ant has reached C, it has travelled 9 + 18 + 3 × 36 or 135 cm along
the length of the rectangle. To travel from C to X, the ant must travel 15 cm along the length of the
rectangle which puts the ant 3 cm from the closest vertex.
2000 Cayley Solutions 11

9 cm 36 cm

9 cm
18 cm 18 cm 18 cm 18 cm X 3 cm
E
15 cm

9 cm 18 cm 18 cm 18 cm 36 cm 36 cm C 15 cm
135 cm

ANSWER: (A)

23. The left most digit of an integer of length 2000 digits is 3. In this integer, any two consecutive
digits must be divisible by 17 or 23. The 2000th digit may be either ‘a’ or ‘b’. What is the
value of a + b ?

(A) 3 (B) 7 (C) 4 (D) 10 (E) 17

Solution
We start by noting that the two-digit multiples of 17 are 17, 34, 51, 68, and 85. Similarly we note
that the two-digit multiples of 23 are 23, 46, 69, and 92. The first digit is 3 and since the only
two-digit number in the two lists starting with 3 is 34, the second digit is 4. Similarly the third
digit must be 6. The fourth digit, however, can be either 8 or 9. Let’s consider this in two cases.

Case 1
If the fourth digit is 8, the number would be 3468517 and would stop here since there isn’t a
number in the two lists starting with 7.

Case 2
If the fourth digit is 9, the number would be 34692 34692 34 ... and the five digits ‘34692’ would
continue repeating indefinitely as long as we choose 9 to follow 6.

If we consider a 2000 digit number, its first 1995 digits must contain 399 groups of ‘34692’. The
last groups of five digits could be either 34692 or 34685 which means that the 2000th digit may be
either 2 or 5 so that a + b = 2 + 5 = 7.
ANSWER: (B)
2000 Cayley Solutions 12

24. In the diagram shown, ∠ ABC = 90° , CB ED , AB = DF , E

F
AD = 24, AE = 25 and O is the centre of the circle.
Determine the perimeter of CBDF. C

D A
(A) 39 (B) 40 (C) 42 OB
(D) 43 (E) 44

Solution
We start by showing that ∆ ABC =˜ ∆ DFE .
Since ED CB this implies that ∠ DEF = ∠ BCA because of corresponding angles. Also,
∠ DFA = 90° because it is an angle in a semicircle which also means that ∠ DFE is 90°. Thus the
two triangles are equiangular. Since AB = DF , ∆ ABC =˜ ∆ DFE (ASA). Therefore, EF = CB and
DF = BA . Using Pythagorus in ∆ADE , DE 2 = 252 − 24 2 ⇒ DE = 7 = CA.
Thus CE = 25 − 7 = 18.
The required perimeter is, CB + BD + DF + FC = EF + ( BD + DF ) + FC = ( EF + FC ) + ( BD + DF )
= ( EF + FC ) + ( BD + BA) , since DF = BA
= CE + AD
= 18 + 24 = 42 .
ANSWER: (C)

25. For the system of equations x 2 + x 2 y 2 + x 2 y 4 = 525 and x + xy + xy 2 = 35, the sum of the real y
values that satisfy the equations is

3 55 5
(A) 20 (B) 2 (C) (D) (E)
2 2 2

Consider the system of equations x 2 + x 2 y 2 + x 2 y 4 = 525 (1)

2
and x + xy + xy = 35 (2)
The expression on the left side of equation (1) can be rewritten as,
( ) − x 2 y2
2
x 2 + x 2 y 2 + x 2 y 4 = x + xy 2

= ( x + xy 2 − xy)( x + xy 2 + xy)

Thus, ( x + xy2 − xy)( x + xy2 + xy) = 525

Substituting from (2) gives, ( x + xy2 − xy)(35) = 525
or, x + xy 2 − xy = 15 (3)
10
Now subtracting (3) from (2), 2 xy = 20 , x =
y
Substituting for x in (3) gives,
2000 Cayley Solutions 13

10
+ 10 y − 10 = 15
y

10 y 2 − 25 y + 10 = 0
2 y2 − 5y + 2 = 0
(2 y − 1)( y − 2) = 0
1
y= or y = 2
2
The sum of the real y values satisfying the system is 5 .
2
ANSWER: (E)
 Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of The Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

1999 Solutions
Cayley Contest (Grade 10)
for the

Awards

© 1999 Waterloo Mathematics Foundation

 1999 Cayley Solutions 2

Part A

1. The value of 32 + 72 – 52 is

(A) 75 (B) 83 (C) 33 (D) 25 (E) 10

Solution
32 + 72 – 52 = 9 + 49 – 25 = 33 ANSWER: (C)

2. If 8 is added to the square of 5 the result is divisible by

(A) 5 (B) 2 (C) 8 (D) 23 (E) 11

Solution
8 + 52 = 33
Of the given numbers, 11 is the only possible divisor of 33. ANSWER: (E)

3. Today is Wednesday. What day of the week will it be 100 days from now?

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Thursday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

Solution
Since there are 7 days in a week it will be Wednesday in 98 days.
In 100 days it will be Friday. ANSWER: (D)

4. The rectangle PQRS is divided into six equal squares and shaded as shown. What fraction of
PQRS is shaded?
P S

Q R
1 7 5 6 5
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
2 12 11 11 12

Solution
5
There are 5 half-squares shaded out of a total possible of 12 half-squares, hence of the area is
12
shaded. ANSWER: (E)

5. If x = 4 and y = 3 x and z = 2 y , then the value of y + z is

(A) 12 (B) 20 (C) 40 (D) 24 (E) 36

 1999 Cayley Solutions 3

Solution
If x = 4 this makes y = 12 and z = 24.
Thus y + z = 36. ANSWER: (E)

6. In the diagram, the value of a is

40°
(A) 50 (B) 65 (C) 70 110°
(D) 105 (E) 110 a°
2a°

Solution
Since 3a° + 150° = 360°
3a° = 210°
Therefore a = 70. ANSWER: (C)

7. In the diagram, AB and AC have equal lengths. What is the y

value of k?
(A) – 3 (B) – 4 (C) – 5 A(1, 5) B(9, 5)
(D) – 7 (E) – 8

C(1, k )

Solution
Since AB = AC = 8 , 5 – k = 8
k = – 3. ANSWER: (A)

8. In the diagram, AD < BC . What is the perimeter of

ABCD? A 7 D

(A) 23 (B) 26 (C) 27 5

4
(D) 28 (E) 30

B C
 1999 Cayley Solutions 4

Solution
From D we draw a line perpendicular to BC that meets A 7 D
BC at N. Since ADNB is a rectangle and AD BC ,
DN = 4. We use Pythagoras to find NC = 3. We now 5
4 4
know that BC = BN + NC = 7 + 3 = 10.
The required perimeter is 7 + 5 + 10 + 4 = 26 .
B N C
ANSWER: (B)

9. Three CD’s are bought at an average cost of $15 each. If a fourth CD is purchased, the average cost
becomes $16. What is the cost of the fourth CD?

(A) $16 (B) $17 (C) $18 (D) $19 (E) $20

Solution
If four C.D.’s have an average cost of $16 this implies that $64 was spent in purchasing the four of
them. Using the same reasoning, $45 was spent buying the first three. Thus, the fourth C.D. must
have cost $64 – $45 = $19 . ANSWER: (D)

4 cm
10. An 8 cm cube has a 4 cm square hole cut through its centre,

cm
as shown. What is the remaining volume, in cm 3 ?

4
(A) 64 (B) 128 (C) 256
(D) 384 (E) 448 8 cm

8 cm
8 cm

Solution
Remaining volume = 8 × 8 × 8 – 8 × 4 × 4 (in cm 3 )
= 8(64 – 16)
= 8 × 48
= 384 ANSWER: (D)

Part B

11. The time on a digital clock is 5:55. How many minutes will pass before the clock next shows a time
with all digits identical?

(A) 71 (B) 72 (C) 255 (D) 316 (E) 436

Solution
The digits on the clock will next be identical at 11:11. This represents a time difference of 316
minutes. (Notice that times like 6:66, 7:77 etc. are not possible.) ANSWER: (D)
 1999 Cayley Solutions 5

12. The numbers 49, 29, 9, 40, 22, 15, 53, 33, 13, 47 are grouped in pairs so that the sum of each pair is
the same. Which number is paired with 15?

(A) 33 (B) 40 (C) 47 (D) 49 (E) 53

Solution
If we arrange the numbers in ascending order we would have: 9, 13, 15, 22, 29, 33, 40, 47, 49, 53. If
the sum of each pair is equal they would be paired as: 9 ↔ 53 , 13 ↔ 49 , 15 ↔ 47 , 22 ↔ 40 ,
29 ↔ 33 . ANSWER: (C)
13. (2
)(
3
)(
23
The units digit in the product 5 + 1 5 + 1 5 + 1 is )
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 5 (E) 6

Solution
Since 52 , 53 and 523 all end in 5, then 52 + 1 , 53 + 1 and 523 + 1 all end in 6. When we multiply
these three numbers together their product must also end in a 6.
ANSWER: (E)

14. In an election for class president, 61 votes are cast by students who are voting to choose one of four
candidates. Each student must vote for only one candidate. The candidate with the highest number of
votes is the winner. The smallest number of votes the winner can receive is

(A) 15 (B) 16 (C) 21 (D) 30 (E) 31

Solution
After 60 votes are cast, theoretically it is possible for each candidate to have 15 votes.
The final vote, the 61st, would mean that the winning candidate would need just 16 votes to have the
minimum number possible. ANSWER: (B)

15. A chocolate drink is 6% pure chocolate, by volume. If 10 litres of pure milk are added to 50 litres of
this drink, the percent of chocolate in the new drink is

(A) 5 (B) 16 (C) 10 (D) 3 (E) 26

Solution
If 6% of the 50 litres is pure chocolate, this means that there will be three litres of pure chocolate in
the final mixture. If the final mixture contains sixty litres of which three litres are pure chocolate this
represents 3 or 5% of the total. ANSWER: (A)
60
 1999 Cayley Solutions 6

16. Three circles, each with a radius of 10 cm, are drawn

tangent to each other so that their centres are all in a straight
line. These circles are inscribed in a rectangle which is
inscribed in another circle. The area of the largest circle is

(A) 1000π (B) 1700π (C) 900π

(D) 1600π (E) 1300π

Solution
By symmetry, the centre of the large circle is the centre of
the smaller middle circle. If the constructions are made as
shown and with the appropriate representation of the
r
lengths we find, r 2 = 30 2 + 10 2 = 1000 . 10
30
Thus, A = πr 2 = π(1000) = 1000 π .

ANSWER: (A)

17. Let N be the smallest positive integer whose digits have a product of 2000. The sum of the digits of
N is

(A) 21 (B) 23 (C) 25 (D) 27 (E) 29

Solution
Since 2000 = 2 4 ⋅ 53 , the smallest possible positive integer satisfying the required conditions is
25 558 which gives the sum 2 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 8 = 25 . A natural answer might be 23 since 44 555
satisfies the given conditions. However, since 25 558 < 44 555 and the question requires the smallest
number then the answer must be 25 and not 23. ANSWER: (C)

18. A cylindrical pail containing water drains into a cylindrical

tub 40 cm across and 50 cm deep, while resting at an angle
of 45° to the horizontal, as shown. How deep is the water
in the tub when its level reaches the pail?
45°
(A) 10 cm (B) 20 cm (C) 30 cm
(D) 35 cm (E) 40 cm
 1999 Cayley Solutions 7

Solution
We label the points A, B and C as shown in the diagram.
From symmetry, we note that ∆ BAC is an isosceles right-
45° D C
angled triangle. 45°
B
From A we draw a line perpendicular to BC meeting the
line at point D. This construction allows us to conclude 45° A
that ∆ ABD is also a right-angled isosceles triangle and
specifically that BD = DA . Since BD = DA and
BD = DC = 20 , we find DA = 20.
This makes the depth of the water 50 – 20 or 30.
ANSWER: (C)

19. A number is Beprisque if it is the only natural number between a prime number and a perfect square
(e.g. 10 is Beprisque but 12 is not). The number of two-digit Beprisque numbers (including 10) is

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

Solution
We start with the observation that it is necessary to consider only the odd perfect squares and the
integers adjacent to them. It is not necessary to consider the even perfect squares because if we add 2
or subtract 2 from an even number the result is even and it is required by the conditions set out in the
question that this number be prime. Considering then the odd perfect squares we have: {9, 10 , 11} ,
{23, 24 , 25, 26, 27} , {47, 48 , 49, 50, 51} , {79, 80 , 81, 82 , 83} .
The Beprisque numbers are those that are circled. ANSWER: (E)

20. The area of the given quadrilateral is

1
3 1 + 10
(A) (B) 5 (C)
2 2 1
(D) 2 (E) 3 5

5
 1999 Cayley Solutions 8

Solution
Label the quadrilateral as shown. We join A to C and using A 1 B
Pythagoras in ∆ ABC we calculate BC to be 2 . Since
∆ ACD is isosceles, we can draw a line perpendicular to M 1
AC which passes through M, the mid-point of AC. Since 5
2 2
AC = 2 , AM = . Since AM = , DA = 5 and C
2 2
∆ ADM is right-angled, we can once again use Pythagoras 5
to find that DM =
3
. The line segment DM is also the D
2

height of ∆ DAC . The area of ∆ ADC is

1 3 
2  2
( ) 2 =
3
2

and because the area of ∆ ABC =

1
2
(1)(1) = 12 , the total area
1 3
of the quadrilateral is + = 2 square units.
2 2
ANSWER: (D)

Part C

21. A number is formed using the digits 1, 2, ..., 9. Any digit can be used more than once, but adjacent
digits cannot be the same. Once a pair of adjacent digits has occurred, that pair, in that order, cannot
be used again. How many digits are in the largest such number?

(A) 72 (B) 73 (C) 144 (D) 145 (E) 91

Solution
Since there are 9(8) = 72 ordered pairs of consecutive digits, and since the final digit has no
successor, we can construct a 73 digit number by adding a 9. The question is, of course, can we
actually construct this number? The answer is ‘yes’ and the largest such number is,
98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 76 75 74 73 72 71 65 64 63 62 61
54 53 52 51 43 42 41 32 31 21 9.
If we count the numbers in the string we can see that there are actually 73 numbers contained within
it. ANSWER: (B)

22. A main gas line runs through P and Q. From some point T M 105 m P
on PQ, a supply line runs to a house at point M. A second
supply line from T runs to a house at point N. What is the
minimum total length of pipe required for the two supply 130 m

lines?

(A) 200 (B) 202 (C) 198 Q

N 55 m
(D) 210 (E) 214
 1999 Cayley Solutions 9

Solution
We start by choosing point R so that RPQN is a rectangle. M 50 R 55 P
Thus, MR = 105 – 55
= 50.
Using Pythagoras, RN = 130 2 – 50 2 = 120 . 130 120

N 55 Q

Let S be the image of N reflected in PQ. M P

Join M to T, T to S and T to N.
Since ∆ TNQ ≡ ∆ TSQ , it follows that TN = TS .
T
The length of the supply line is MT + TN = MT + TS .

N Q S

Clearly the length MT + TS is a minimum when M, T and S M 105 P 55 W

are collinear. In that case, MT + TS = MS .
Create ∆ MSW as shown.
By Pythagoras, MS = 160 2 + 120 2 120
T
= 200.

Q S
ANSWER: (A)

23. How many integers can be expressed as a sum of three distinct numbers chosen from the set
{4, 7, 10, 13, ..., 46} ?
(A) 45 (B) 37 (C) 36 (D) 43 (E) 42

Solution
Since each number is of the form 1 + 3n , n = 1, 2, 3,..., 15 , the sum of the three numbers will be of the
form 3 + 3k + 3l + 3m where k, l and m are chosen from {1, 2, 3, ..., 15} . So the question is equivalent
to the easier question of, ‘How many distinct integers can be formed by adding three numbers from,
{1, 2, 3, ..., 15} ?’
The smallest is 1 + 2 + 3 = 6 and the largest is 13 + 14 + 15 = 42 .
It is clearly possible to get every sum between 6 and 42 by:
(a) increasing the sum by one replacing a number with one that is 1 larger or,
(b) decreasing the sum by one by decreasing one of the addends by 1.
Thus all the integers from 6 to 42 inclusive can be formed.
 1999 Cayley Solutions 10

This is the same as asking, ‘How many integers are there between 1 and 37 inclusive?’ The answer,
of course, is 37. ANSWER: (B)

( )
x 2 + 4 x – 60
24. The sum of all values of x that satisfy the equation x 2 – 5 x + 5 = 1 is

(A) – 4 (B) 3 (C) 1 (D) 5 (E) 6

Solution
We consider the solution in three cases.

Case 1 It is possible for the base to be 1.

Therefore, x 2 – 5 x + 5 = 1
x 2 – 5x + 4 = 0
( x – 1)( x – 4) = 0
Therefore x = 1 or x = 4 .
Both these values are acceptable for x.

Case 2 It is possible that the exponent be 0.

Therefore, x 2 + 4 x – 60 = 0
( x + 10)( x – 6) = 0
x = –10 or x = 6
Note: It is easy to verify that neither x = –10 nor x = 6 is a zero of x 2 – 5 x + 5 ,
x 2 – 5 x + 5 = 0 , so that the indeterminate form 0° does not occur.

Case 3 It is possible that the base is –1 and the exponent is even.

Therefore, x 2 – 5 x + 5 = –1 but x 2 + 4 x – 60 must also be even.
x 2 – 5 x + 5 = –1
x 2 – 5x + 6 = 0
( x – 2)( x – 3) = 0
x = 2 or x = 3
If x = 2, then x 2 – 4 x – 60 is even, so x = 2 is a solution.
If x = 3, then x 2 – 4 x – 60 is odd, so x = 3 is not a solution.
Therefore the sum of the solutions is 1 + 4 – 10 + 6 + 2 = 3 . ANSWER: (B)

25. If a = 3 p , b = 3q , c = 3r , and d = 3s and if p, q, r, and s are positive integers, determine the smallest
value of p + q + r + s such that a 2 + b3 + c 5 = d 7 .

(A) 17 (B) 31 (C) 106 (D) 247 (E) 353

Solution
If we rewrite the given expression by substituting we arrive at the new expression
1999 Cayley Solutions 11

32 p + 33q + 35r = 37s . (This is derived by replacing a with 3 p , b with 3q and so on.)
( )
On the left side we remove the lowest power of 3 (whatever it is), 32 p 1 + 33q – 2 p + 35r – 2 p = 37s .
3q – 2 p 5r – 2 p
Both factors on the left side must be multiples of 3 but 1 + 3 +3 cannot be a multiple of 3
3q – 2 p 5r – 2 p
unless 3 and 3 are both exactly 1. This means that 2 p = 3q = 5r or that the exponents are
themselves multiples of 30, say 30m.
We now have, 330 m + 330 m + 330 m = 37s
or, ( )
(3) 3030 m = 37s
330 m +1 = 37s .
We are now looking for the smallest integers, m and s, such that 30 m + 1 = 7s .
If we try m = 1, 2, 3, 4, ... we find that m = 3 and s = 13. Thus 2 p = 90 , p = 45; 3q = 90 , q = 30,
5r = 90 , r = 18 and 7s = 91, s = 13.
From this, p + q + r + s = 45 + 30 + 18 + 13 = 106. ANSWER: (C)
 35
Canadian
thth
Mathematics
Competition
Anniversary An activity of The Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
1963 – 1998 University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

1998 Solutions
Cayley Contest(Grade 10)
for the

Awards

© 1998 Waterloo Mathematics Foundation

1998 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 2

PART A:
1. The value of (0.3)2 + 0.1 is
(A) 0.7 (B) 1 (C) 0.1 (D) 0.19 (E) 0.109

Solution
(0.3)2 + 0.1 = 0.09 + 0.1
= 0.19
ANSWER: (D)

2. The pie chart shows a percentage breakdown of 1000 votes

in a student election. How many votes did Sue receive?
(A) 550 (B) 350 (C) 330 Sue Jim
20%
(D) 450 (E) 935
Jane
45%

Solution
Sue received 100 - (20 + 45) = 35 percent of the total number of votes. Since there was a total of
1000 votes, Sue received 0.35(1000) = 350 votes. ANSWER: (B)

a 9 ¥ a15
3. The expression is equal to
a3
(A) a 45 (B) a8 (C) a18 (D) a14 (E) a 21

Solution
a 9 ¥ a15 a 24
= 3
a3 a
= a 21
ANSWER: (E)

4. The product of two positive integers p and q is 100. What is the largest possible value of p + q ?
(A) 52 (B) 101 (C) 20 (D) 29 (E) 25

Solution
The pairs of positive integers whose product is 100 are: 1 and 100, 2 and 50, 4 and 25,
5 and 20, 10 and 10. The pair with the largest sum is 1 and 100. The sum is 101.
ANSWER: (B)
1998 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 3

5. In the diagram, ABCD is a rectangle with DC = 12 . If the A B

area of triangle BDC is 30, what is the perimeter of
rectangle ABCD?
(A) 34 (B) 44 (C) 30
(D) 29 (E) 60
D C

Solution
Since the area of DBDC is 30, we know
1
(12)( BC) = 30
2
6( BC ) = 30
BC = 5
Thus, the perimeter of rectangle ABCD is 2(12) + 2(5) = 34 . ANSWER: (A)

6. If x = 2 is a solution of the equation qx – 3 = 11, the value of q is

(A) 4 (B) 7 (C) 14 (D) – 7 (E) – 4

Solution
If x = 2 is a solution of qx - 3 = 11, then
q(2) - 3 = 11
2 q = 14
q=7
ANSWER: (B)

7. In the diagram, AB is parallel to CD. What is the value of A B

x∞
y? x∞
(A) 75 (B) 40 (C) 35
(D) 55 (E) 50 70 ˚ y∞
C D

Solution
Since AB is paralled to CD, then –BMN + –MND = 180. A M B
Thus, 2 x + 70 = 180 x∞
x∞
2 x = 110
x = 55 N 70 ˚ y∞
Using DMNP, y = 180 – (70 + 55) C D
P
= 55

ANSWER: (D)
1998 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 4

8. The vertices of a triangle have coordinates (1, 1) , (7, 1) and (5, 3) . What is the area of this triangle?
(A) 12 (B) 8 (C) 6 (D) 7 (E) 9

Solution
Draw the triangle on the coordinate axes. This triangle has y
1
a base of 6 and a height of 2. Its area is (6)(2) = 6 .
2 (5, 3)

(1, 1) (7, 1)
x

ANSWER: (C)

9. The number in an unshaded square is obtained by adding

5 6 x 7
the numbers connected to it from the row above. (The ‘11’
is one such number.) The value of x must be 11
(A) 4 (B) 6 (C) 9
(D) 15 (E) 10 60

Solution
The three entries in row two, from left to right, are 11, 6 + x, and x + 7. The two entries in row three,
from left to right, are 11 + (6 + x ) = 17 + x and (6 + x ) + ( x + 7) = 2 x + 13. The single entry in row
four is (17 + x ) + (2 x + 13) = 3 x + 30.
Thus, 3 x + 30 = 60
3 x = 30
x = 10
ANSWER: (E)

10. The sum of the digits of a five-digit positive integer is 2. (A five-digit integer cannot start with zero.)
The number of such integers is
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

Solution
If the sum of the digits of a five-digit positive integer is 2, then the only possible integers are
20 000, 11 000, 10 100, 10 010, and 10 001. There are 5 such integers. ANSWER: (E)

PART B:

11. If x + y + z = 25, x + y = 19 and y + z = 18, then y equals

(A) 13 (B) 17 (C) 12 (D) 6 (E) – 6
1998 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 5

Solution
We are given that x + y + z = 25 (1)
x + y = 19 (2)
y + z = 18 (3)
Add equations (2) and (3) to get x + 2 y + z = 37 ( 4). Subtract equation (1) from equation (4) to get
y = 12 . ANSWER: (C)

12. A regular pentagon with centre C is shown. The value of x

is
(A) 144 (B) 150 (C) 120 x˚
(D) 108 (E) 72 C

Solution
Join C to each of the remaining vertices, as shown. Since
the pentagon is regular, each of the small angles at C has
measure 360o ∏ 5 = 72o. x˚
Thus, the value of x is 2(72) = 144 . C

ANSWER: (A)

13. If the surface area of a cube is 54, what is its volume?

81 3
(A) 36 (B) 9 (C) (D) 27 (E) 162 6
8

Solution
Let each edge of the cube have length x. Then each face of the cube has area x 2 . Since a cube has
six faces, the surface area of the cube is 6 x 2 .
We know 6 x 2 = 54
x2 = 9
x=3
Since each edge of the cube has length 3, the volume of the cube is 33 = 27 . ANSWER: (D)

14. The number of solutions ( x, y) of the equation 3 x + y = 100 , where x and y are positive integers, is
(A) 33 (B) 35 (C) 100 (D) 101 (E) 97
1998 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 6

Solution
100 - y
Rewrite the given equation as x = . Since x must be a positive integer, 100 - y must be
3
divisible by 3. Since y must also be a positive integer, the only possible values of y are 1, 4, 7, 10, 13,
... , 94, and 97. Thus, there are 33 possible values for y, and 33 solutions ( x, y) that meet the given
conditions. ANSWER: (A)

15. If y – 5 = 5 and 2 x = 8 , then x + y equals

(A) 13 (B) 28 (C) 33 (D) 35 (E) 38

Solution
Since y – 5 = 5, then

( y–5 )2 = 52
y – 5 = 25
y = 30
Also, since 2 x = 8, then
2 x = 23
x=3
Thus, x + y = 33. ANSWER: (C)

16. Rectangle ABCD has length 9 and width 5. Diagonal AC A B

is divided into 5 equal parts at W, X, Y, and Z. Determine W
the area of the shaded region. X Y
36
(A) 36 (B) (C) 18 Z
5
D C
4 106 2 106
(D) (E)
5 5

Solution
(9)(5) =
1 45
Triangle ABC has area . Triangles ABW, WBX, XBY, YBZ, and ZBC have equal bases
2 2
1 Ê 45 ˆ 9
and altitudes, so the area of each of these small triangles is = . Similarly, triangles ADW,
5Ë 2¯ 2
9
WDX, XDY, YDZ, and ZDC each have area .
2

Thus, the shaded region has area 4ÊË ˆ¯ = 18 .

9
ANSWER: (C)
2

( )( )( )
17. If N = 7 p+ 4 5q 23 is a perfect cube, where p and q are positive integers, the smallest possible
value of p + q is
1998 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 7

(A) 5 (B) 2 (C) 8 (D) 6 (E) 12

Solution
In order for N to be a perfect cube, each prime factor of N must have an exponent that is divisible by
3. Since p and q must be positive integers, the smallest value of p is 2 and the smallest value of q is 3.
Thus, the smallest value of p + q is 5 . ANSWER: (A)

18. Q is the point of intersection of the diagonals of one face of

a cube whose edges have length 2 units. The length of QR
is
(A) 2 (B) 8 (C) 5 Q
(D) 12 (E) 6

Solution
Label point S as shown. Since each face of the cube is a P
square with sides of length 2, use the Pythagorean Theorem
to find the length of diagonal PS.
PS 2 = 2 2 + 2 2 2
Q
=8
PS = 2 2
2

R S
Then QS has length 2 , as Q is the midpoint of diagonal PS.
Because we are working with a cube, –QSR = 90o and DQRS is a right - angled triangle. Use
the Pythagorean Theorem in DQRS to get
QR2 = 2 2 + ( 2 )2
=6
QR = 6
ANSWER: (E)

19. Mr. Anderson has more than 25 students in his class. He has more than 2 but fewer than 10 boys
and more than 14 but fewer than 23 girls in his class. How many different class sizes would satisfy
these conditions?
(A) 5 (B) 6 (C) 7 (D) 3 (E) 4

Solution
1998 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 8

Let b represent the number of boys and g represent the number of girls in Mr. Anderson's class. We
know that b + g > 25. We also know 2 < b < 10 and 14 < g < 23.
The following pairs (b,g) satisfy all three conditions: (4,22), (5,21), (5,22), (6,20), (6,21), (6,22), (7,19),
(7,20), (7,21), (7,22), (8,18), (8,19), (8,20), (8,21), (8,22), (9,17), (9,18), (9,19), (9,20), (9,21), (9,22).
All of the different pairs (b,g) lead to the following different class sizes: 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31.
Thus, only 6 different class sizes are possible. ANSWER: (B)

20. Each side of square ABCD is 8. A circle is drawn through A B

A and D so that it is tangent to BC . What is the radius of
this circle?
(A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 6
(D) 4 2 (E) 5.25

D C

Solution
Let r represent length of the radius and let O represent the A B
centre of the circle. Draw diameter MN that bisects chord r
4
AD perpendicularly at P. Join OA. O
M N
DOAP is a right-angled triangle with –APO = 90o . The P r
length of AP is 4, since it is half of a side of square ABCD.
The length of OA is r, and the length of PO is
D C
PN - ON = 8 - r .
Using the Pythagorean Theorem we get
r 2 = 4 2 + (8 - r )2
r 2 = 16 + 64 - 16r + r 2
16r = 80
r=5
Thus, the radius of the circle is 5. ANSWER: (B)

PART C:
21. When Betty substitutes x = 1 into the expression ax 3 – 2 x + c its value is – 5. When she substitutes
x = 4 the expression has value 52. One value of x that makes the expression equal to zero is
(A) 2 (B) 5 (C) 3 (D) 7 (E) 4
2 2

Solution
When x = 1, we are told that a(1)3 - 2(1) + c = -5, or a + c = -3 (1) . Similarly, when x = 4,
a( 4)3 - 2( 4) + c = 52 , or 64 a + c = 60 (2) . Subtracting equation (1) from equation (2) gives
63a = 63 , or a = 1. Substituting a = 1 into equation (1) gives c = -4 . The original expression
1998 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 9

ax 3 - 2 x + c becomes x 3 - 2 x - 4 . By trial and error, using divisors of 4, when x = 2 we get

23 - 2(2) - 4 = 0 . ANSWER: (A)

22. A wheel of radius 8 rolls along the diameter of a semicircle of

radius 25 until it bumps into this semicircle. What is the
length of the portion of the diameter that cannot be touched
by the wheel?
(A) 8 (B) 12 (C) 15
(D) 17 (E) 20

Solution
Draw DOBC , where O is the centre of the large circle, B is
the centre of the wheel, and C is the point of tangency of
the wheel and the diameter of the semicircle. Since BC is a D
B
radius of the wheel, –OBC = 90o and DOBC is right-
angled at C.
O C A
Extend OB to meet the semicircle at D. Then BD = BC = 8, since they are both radii of the wheel,
and OB = 25 – 8 = 17 .

Use the Pythagorean Theorem in DOBC to find OC.

OC 2 = 172 - 82
OC 2 = 225
OC = 15
Then AC = 25 - 15 = 10. The length of the portion of the diameter that cannot be touched by the
wheel is a length equivalent to 2AC or 20. ANSWER: (E)

23. There are four unequal, positive integers a, b, c, and N such that N = 5a + 3b + 5c . It is also true that
N = 4 a + 5b + 4c and N is between 131 and 150. What is the value of a + b + c ?
(A) 13 (B) 17 (C) 22 (D) 33 (E) 36

Solution
We are told that N = 5a + 3b + 5c (1) and N = 4 a + 5b + 4c (2). Multiply equation (1) by 4 to get
4 N = 20 a + 12b + 20c (3). Similarly, multiply equation (2) by 5 to get 5 N = 20 a + 25b + 20c (4).
Subtract equation (3) from equation (4) to get N = 13b .

Since N and b are both positive integers with 131 < N < 150 , N must be a multiple of 13. The only
possible value for N is 143, when b = 11.
Substitute N = 143 and b = 11 into equation (1) to get
1998 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 10

143 = 5a + 3(11) + 5c
110 = 5a + 5c
22 = a + c
Thus, the value of a+b+c is 22+11=33. ANSWER: (D)

24. Three rugs have a combined area of 200 m 2 . By overlapping the rugs to cover a floor area of
140 m 2 , the area which is covered by exactly two layers of rug is 24 m 2 . What area of floor is
covered by three layers of rug?
(A) 12 m 2 (B) 18 m 2 (C) 24 m 2 (D) 36 m 2 (E) 42 m 2

Solution
Draw the rugs in the following manner, where a + b + c
represents the amount of floor covered by exactly two rugs
and k represents the amount of floor covered by exactly a
three rugs. We are told that a + b + c = 24 (1). b k
c

Since the total amount of floor covered when the rugs do not overlap is 200 m 2 and the total covered
when they do overlap is 140 m 2 , then 60 m 2 of rug is wasted on double or triple layers. Thus,
a + b + c + 2 k = 60 (2). Subtract equation (1) from equation (2) to get 2 k = 36 and solve for k = 18.
Thus, the area of floor covered by exactly three layers of rug is 18 m 2 . ANSWER: (B)

25. One way to pack a 100 by 100 square with 10 000 circles, each of diameter 1, is to put them in 100
rows with 100 circles in each row. If the circles are repacked so that the centres of any three tangent
circles form an equilateral triangle, what is the maximum number of additional circles that can be
packed?

(A) 647 (B) 1442 (C) 1343 (D) 1443 (E) 1344

Solution
Remove one circle from every second row and shift to form the given configuration. Label the
diagram as shown. Since each circle has diameter 1, DPQR and DPXY are equilateral triangles with
sides of length 1.
1998 CAYLEY SOLUTIONS 11

In DPQR , altitude PS bisects side QR. Use the Pythagorean

Theorem to find PS. X

()
2
PS 2 = (1)2 – 1
2 U
3 P
= Y Z
4
3
PS = S
2 Q R
3
Also, XZ = T
2
1 3 1 1 3 Ê 3 1ˆ
Since all radii have length , then PU = - and TU = + +Á - ˜ = 3 . This tells us
2 2 2 2 2 Ë 2 2¯

that two rows of circles require a height of 3 before a third row begins.
100
Since = 57.7 , we can pack 57 double rows, each containing 100+99=199 circles.
3
Can we pack one final row of 100 circles? Yes. The square has sides of length 100 and our
configuration of 57 double rows requires a height of 57 3 before the next row begins. Since
100 - 57 3 > 1, and since the circles each have diameter 1, there is room for one final row of 100
circles.

The number of circles used in this new packing is 57(199)+100=11 443

Thus, the maximum number of extra circles that can be packed into the square is
11 443 – 10 000 = 1443. ANSWER: (D)
 Canadian
Mathematics
Competition
An activity of The Centre for Education
in Mathematics and Computing,
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

1997 Solutions
Cayley Contest(Grade 10)
for the

Awards

© 1997 Waterloo Mathematics Foundation

1997 Cayley Solutions 2

PART A:

1. Solution
1
2 10 + 3 100
11
= 2.1 + 3.11
= 5.21 AnSWER: (D)

2. Solution
(1)10 + ( –1)8 + ( –1)7 + (1)5 = 1 + 1 – 1 + 1
=2
ANSWER: (C)

3. Solution
Since the final result contains a factor of 10, it must have at least one zero at the end. The
only listed possibility is 30. ANSWER: (E)

4. Solution
If the first day is a Monday, then every seventh day is also a Monday, and Monday falls on
the following numbered days: 1, 8, 15, 22, 29, 36, 43.
In 45 consecutive days, the maximum number of Mondays is seven. ANSWER: (C)

5. Solution
The value of –BAC , in degrees, is 180 – 50 – 55 = 75 . D
Since D, A, and E lie on a straight line, A
xr
80 + 75 + x = 180 80

x = 25 E

50r 55
B C
ANSWER: (A)

6. Solution
The first ten balloons are popped in the following order: C, F, I, L, D, H, A, G, B, and K.
The two remaining balloons are E and J. ANSWER: (D)

7. Solution
In rectangle ABCD, side AB has length 4 – ( –3) = 7 . Since the area of the rectangle is 70,
the length of side AD must be 70 = 10 .
7
Thus, the value of k is 1 + 10 = 11. ANSWER: (D)
1997 Cayley Solutions 3

8. Solution
Rearranging and combining the inequalities yields p < q < t < r < s . The greatest of these
numbers is s. ANSWER: (B)

9. Solution
Since the sum of the seven integers is 77, their average is 77
7 = 11 . Because there is an odd
number of consecutive integers, 11 is the middle integer and the smallest is 8. ANSWER: (C)

10. Solution
q
The greatest possible value of p is 34 = 81 .
Thus, the greatest possible value of p + r is 34 + 21 = 83 .
q s
ANSWER: (E)

PART B:

11. Solution
Since x, y, z, and w are integers, then y must divide evenly into both 6 and 25. The only
possible value of y is 1. Thus, x = 6 and w = 25. The value of xw is (6)(25) = 150 .ANSWER: (A)

12. Solution
Let the depth of each cut be d.
Then,
80(15) – 5d – 15d – 10 d = 990
1200 – 30 d = 990
30 d = 210
d=7
The depth of each cut is 7. ANSWER: (B)

13. Solution
Using Pythagoras in D ABC gives BC to be 6. Since BC = 3 DC , DC = 2 .
AD2 = 2 2 + 82
= 68
Using Pythagoras again in D ADC , AD = 68 ANSWER: (E)

14. Solution
The first twelve numbers in the list begin with either the digit 1 or 2. The next six begin
with the digit 3. In order, these six numbers are 3124, 3142, 3214, 3241, 3412, 3421.
We see that the number 3142 is in the fourteenth position. ANSWER: (B)
1997 Cayley Solutions 4

15. Solution
Since each factor of 10 produces a zero at the end of the integer we want to know how
many 10’s occur in the product.
The product of 20 50 and 50 20 can be rewritten as follows:
(2050 )(5020 ) = (22 ™ 5) (52 ™ 2)
50 20

= 2100 ™ 550 ™ 540 ™ 2 20

= 2120 ™ 590
= 2 30 (2 90 ™ 590 )
= 2 30 ™ 10 90
From this, we see that there are 90 zeros at the end of the resulting integer. ANSWER: (C)

16. Solution
In the diagram, extend TP to meet RS at A. Since AT^ RS , T
–SPA = 180r – 90r – 26r
N
then = 64r
Label points M and N . Since –TPN and –MPA are
vertically opposite angles, they are equal, so – MPA = x . x
Since P x 26r
–SPA = 2 x, 2 x = 64r
x = 32r R A M S
Thus, the value of x is 32r.
ANSWER: (A)

17. Solution
Since all of the shorter edges are equal in length, the
diagram can be subdivided into 33 small squares, as shown.
33 = 16 and the length of
Each of these squares has area 528
each side is 16 = 4 .
By counting, we find 36 sides and a perimeter of 144.

ANSWER: (E)
1997 Cayley Solutions 5

18. Solution
4+ 2
=4+ 1
7
()
7
2

=4+ 1
30 3+ 1
Rewrite 7
as 2

By comparison, x = 4, y = 3 and z = 2 .
Thus, x + y + z = 9 . ANSWER: (B)

19. Solution
By multiplying the given equations together we obtain
( x 2 yz 3 )( xy2 ) = (74 )(75 )
x 3 y 3 z 3 = 79
Taking the cube root of each side gives xyz = 7 .
3
ANSWER: (C)

20. Solution
Join A1 , A3 and A7 to O, the centre of the circle, as shown. A9 A8
A7
Since the points A1 , A2 , A3 ,K, A15 are evenly spaced, they A10
A6
360r
generate equal angles at O, each of measure 15 = 24r . A11
A5
Thus, – A1OA3 = 48r and – A3OA7 = 96r . A12 O
Since OA1 = OA3 (radii), D A1OA3 is isosceles, and A4
(180r – 48r) A13
– A1 A3O = A3
2 A14
= 66r. A2
A15 A1
Similarly, D A3OA7 is isosceles, and
(180r – 96r)
–OA3 A7 =
2
= 42r.
– A1 A3 A7 = – A1 A3O + –OA3 A7
= 66r + 42r
Thus, = 108r. ANSWER: (D)

PART C:
21. Solution

Simplify the expression

( a
c
+ +1
a
b ) = 11 as follows:
( b
a
+
b
c
+ 1)
1997 Cayley Solutions 6

Ê ab + ac + bc ˆ
Ë bc ¯
= 11
Ê bc + ab + ac ˆ
Ë ac ¯
ac = 11
bc
a = 11 (since c { 0)
b
a = 11b
By substitution, the condition a + 2b + c £ 40 becomes 13b + c £ 40 .
Since b and c are positive integers, then b can only take on the values 1, 2, or 3. The values
of a correspond directly to the values of b, since a = 11b .
If b = 3, there is one corresponding value of c. When b = 2, there are 14 possible values of
c. Finally if b = 1, there are 27 possible values of c.
Therefore, the number of different ordered triples satisfying the given conditions is
1 + 14 + 27 = 42 .
ANSWER: (D)

22. Solution
Drop a perpendicular from A to BC , and label as shown. A
6
Since D ABC is equilateral, BN = NC = CD . Let BN = x F
and BF = y . E
y M
Then 6 + y = 2 x . (1)
Also, – FAM = 30r , and D AMF is a 30r – 60r – 90r
triangle with sides in the ratio 1 : 3 : 2 . B x N x C x D
Thus, AM = 4 3 and FM = 2 3 .
Use similar triangles DBF and AMF to find
DB AM
=
BF MF
3x 4 3
=
y 2 3
3x = 2 y (2)
Solving equations (1) and (2) yields x = 12 and y = 18 .
Find AN = 12 3 ; the area of D ABC is thus 144 3 .
Use similar triangles EAF and AMF to find FE = 6 3 ; the area of D AFE is 18 3 .
The area of quadrilateral FBCE is 126 3 . ANSWER: (C)

23. Solution
First count the number of integers between 3 and 89 that can be written as the sum of
exactly two elements. Since each element in the set is the sum of the two previous
1997 Cayley Solutions 7

elements, 55 can be added to each of the seven smallest elements to form seven unique
integers smaller than 89.
In the same way, 34 can be added to each of the seven smaller elements, 21 can be added to
each of the six smaller elements, and so on.
The number of integers between 3 and 89 that can be written as the sum of two elements of
the set is 7 + 7 + 6 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 2 = 34 . Since there are 85 integers between 3 and 89, then
85 – 34 = 51 integers cannot be written as the sum of exactly two elements in the set.
ANSWER: (A)

24. Solution
Since exactly five interior angles are obtuse, then exactly five exterior angles are acute and
the remaining angles must be obtuse. Since we want the maximum number of obtuse
angles, assume that the five acute exterior angles have a sum less than 90r. Since obtuse
angles are greater than 90r, we can only have three of them.
Thus, the given polygon can have at most 3 + 5 = 8 sides. ANSWER: (B)

25. Solution
Join A to R and C to T. Label the diagram as shown. Let
xr
the area of D ABC be k. 80
Since triangles CRS and CRA have equal heights and
bases that are in the ratio 3b : 4b = 3 : 4 , then
area of DCRS = (area of D CRA )
3 50r 125r
4
However, since triangles CRA and ABR also have equal
heights and bases that are in the ratio a : a = 1 : 1, then
DCRS = 3 (area of DABC )
8

= 3k
area of 8
q
Similarly, area of DTBR = (area of D ABR )
p+q
qk
=
2( p + q )
1
and area of DATS = 4
(area of D ATC )
pk
=
4( p + q )
Since (area of D RST ) = 2(area of D TBR ), then
3k qk pk 2 qk
k– – – =
8 2( p + q ) 4( p + q ) 2( p + q )
1997 Cayley Solutions 8

3 q p 2q
1– – – =
8 2( p + q ) 4( p + q ) 2( p + q )
(since k { 0 )
p 7
Simplify this expression to get = . ANSWER: (E)
q 3